Aspen B-JAC 11.1
User Guide for Windows®
Version Number: 11.1 September 2001 Copyright (c) 2001 by Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. AspenTech®, Aspen Engineering Suite, Aspen Plus®, Aspen Properties, Aspen B-JAC, B-JAC®, Aspen Hetran, Aerotran®, Aspen Aerotran, Aspen Teams, Teams®, the aspen leaf logo and Plantelligence are trademarks or registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Cambridge, MA. All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. This manual is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This documentation contains AspenTech proprietary and confidential information and may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of AspenTech or as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for the proper use of the software and the application of the results obtained. Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the sole warranty for the software may be found in the applicable license agreement between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THIS DOCUMENTATION, ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Corporate Aspen Technology, Inc. Ten Canal Park Cambridge, MA 02141-2201 USA Phone: (617) 949-1000 Fax: (617) 949-1030 Website:http://www.aspentech.com
Division Design, Simulation and Optimization Systems Aspen Technology, Inc. Ten Canal Park Cambridge, MA 02141-2201 USA Phone: (617) 949-1000 Fax: (617) 949-1030
Contents 1
Introduction......................................................................................................1-1 Related Documentation ....................................................................................................1-1 Technical Support ............................................................................................................1-2 Online Technical Support Center.........................................................................1-2 Contacting Customer Support ..............................................................................1-2
2
The User Interface ...........................................................................................2-1 Aspen B-JAC Programs ...................................................................................................2-1 Aspen Plus Integration .....................................................................................................2-2 Aspen Pinch Integration ...................................................................................................2-2 Aspen Zyqad Integration..................................................................................................2-3 Installation Notes..............................................................................................................2-3 Version Control Utility (BJACVC.exe) ...............................................................2-3 User Customized Database Files..........................................................................2-4 Accessing Aspen B-JAC Program Files...........................................................................2-5 Data Maintenance.............................................................................................................2-5 Units of Measure ..................................................................................................2-5 Heat Exchanger Standards ...................................................................................2-5 Chemical Databank (B-JAC Props & Priprops)...................................................2-5 Materials Databank (B-JAC Databank & Primetals) ...........................................2-6 Materials Defaults (Defmats) ...............................................................................2-6 Costing (Newcost Database) ................................................................................2-6 Frequently Used Materials and Chemical Components.......................................2-6 Program Settings ..................................................................................................2-7 General Program Operation .............................................................................................2-8 Operating Procedure.............................................................................................2-8 The Aspen B-JAC Program Window...............................................................................2-9 Title Bar................................................................................................................2-9 Screen Control Buttons ........................................................................................2-9 Menu Bar............................................................................................................2-10 File Menu ...........................................................................................................2-10 Edit Menu...........................................................................................................2-10 Run Menu...........................................................................................................2-11 Tools Menu ........................................................................................................2-11 View Menu.........................................................................................................2-11 Window Menu....................................................................................................2-12 Help Menu..........................................................................................................2-12
Aspen B-JAC 111 User Guide
Contents • iii
Toolbar ...............................................................................................................2-13 Toolbar Buttons..................................................................................................2-13 Toolbar ...............................................................................................................2-14 Next ....................................................................................................................2-14 Units Box ...........................................................................................................2-15 Zoom In/Zoom Out ............................................................................................2-15 Navigator Tree, Forms and Sheets .....................................................................2-15 Prompt Area .......................................................................................................2-15 Status Bar ...........................................................................................................2-16 Program Input.................................................................................................................2-16 Key Functions ....................................................................................................2-16 Input Fields.........................................................................................................2-17 Units of Measure – Field Specific......................................................................2-18 Databank Reference ...........................................................................................2-19 Range Checks.....................................................................................................2-20 Change Codes.....................................................................................................2-20 The Database Concept........................................................................................2-20 Program Output ..............................................................................................................2-21 Display Output ...................................................................................................2-21 Printed Output ....................................................................................................2-21 Drawings ............................................................................................................2-21 Help Facility...................................................................................................................2-22 General Help ......................................................................................................2-22 Field Specific General Help Topic.....................................................................2-22 Field Specific "What's This?" Help....................................................................2-22 Importing/Exporting Design Data Information to Other OLE Compliant Applications .......................................................................................................2-22 Filenames & Filetypes....................................................................................................2-23 Filenames ...........................................................................................................2-23 Filetypes .............................................................................................................2-23 3
Aspen Hetran ...................................................................................................3-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................3-1 Thermal Scope......................................................................................................3-2 Mechanical Scope ................................................................................................3-3 Input .................................................................................................................................3-7 Problem Definition...............................................................................................3-7 Description ...........................................................................................................3-7 Application Options .............................................................................................3-8 Process Data .......................................................................................................3-10 Physical Property Data ...................................................................................................3-13 Property Options ................................................................................................3-13 Hot Side Composition ........................................................................................3-17 Hot Side Properties.............................................................................................3-20
iv • Contents
Aspen B-JAC 111
Cold Side Composition ......................................................................................3-23 Component Properties Cold Side .......................................................................3-24 Cold Side Properties...........................................................................................3-25 Exchanger Geometry......................................................................................................3-28 Exchanger Type..................................................................................................3-28 Tubes ..................................................................................................................3-36 Bundle ................................................................................................................3-42 Layout Limits .....................................................................................................3-49 Clearances ..........................................................................................................3-49 Baffles ................................................................................................................3-50 Rating/Simulation Data ......................................................................................3-55 Nozzles ...............................................................................................................3-59 Design Data ....................................................................................................................3-62 Design Constraints .............................................................................................3-62 Materials.............................................................................................................3-67 Specifications .....................................................................................................3-69 Program Options ............................................................................................................3-72 Thermal Analysis ...............................................................................................3-72 Correlations ........................................................................................................3-75 Change Codes.....................................................................................................3-77 Results ............................................................................................................................3-81 Design Summary................................................................................................3-81 Thermal Summary..........................................................................................................3-86 Performance .......................................................................................................3-86 Coefficients & MTD ..........................................................................................3-87 Pressure Drop .....................................................................................................3-88 TEMA Sheet.......................................................................................................3-92 Mechanical Summary.....................................................................................................3-93 Exchanger Dimensions.......................................................................................3-93 Vibration & Resonance Analysis .......................................................................3-95 Setting Plan & Tubesheet Layout.......................................................................3-98 Calculation Details .......................................................................................................3-100 Interval Analysis – Shell Side & Tube Side.....................................................3-100 VLE – Hot Side ................................................................................................3-102 VLE – Cold Side ..............................................................................................3-102 Maximum Rating..............................................................................................3-103 Property Temperature Limits ...........................................................................3-103 Hetran-Design Methods ...............................................................................................3-104 Optimization Logic ..........................................................................................3-104 No Phase Change .............................................................................................3-109 Simple Condensation .......................................................................................3-109 Complex Condensation ....................................................................................3-111 Simple Vaporization.........................................................................................3-113 Complex Vaporization .....................................................................................3-115 Falling Film Evaporators..................................................................................3-116
Aspen B-JAC 111 User Guide
Contents • v
4
Aspen Aerotran................................................................................................4-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................4-1 Thermal Scope......................................................................................................4-2 Mechanical Scope ................................................................................................4-2 Input .................................................................................................................................4-5 Problem Definition...............................................................................................4-5 Description ...........................................................................................................4-5 Application Options .............................................................................................4-6 Process Data .........................................................................................................4-8 Physical Property Data ...................................................................................................4-12 Property Options ................................................................................................4-12 Tube Side Composition......................................................................................4-16 Tube Side Properties ..........................................................................................4-19 Outside Tubes Composition...............................................................................4-21 Outside Tubes Properties ...................................................................................4-22 Exchanger Geometry..........................................................................................4-24 Rating/Simulation Data ......................................................................................4-28 Headers & Nozzles.............................................................................................4-30 Construction Options .........................................................................................4-32 Design Data ....................................................................................................................4-34 Design Constraints .............................................................................................4-34 Materials - Vessel Components......................................................................................4-38 Specifications .................................................................................................................4-39 Program Options ............................................................................................................4-42 Thermal Analysis ...............................................................................................4-42 Change Codes.....................................................................................................4-46 Results ............................................................................................................................4-49 Recap of Designs................................................................................................4-53 Warnings & Messages........................................................................................4-53 Thermal Summary..........................................................................................................4-54 Performance .......................................................................................................4-54 Coefficients & MTD ..........................................................................................4-55 Pressure Drop .....................................................................................................4-56 API Sheet............................................................................................................4-58 Mechanical Summary.....................................................................................................4-59 Exchanger Dimensions.......................................................................................4-59 Setting Plan & Tubesheet Layout.......................................................................4-60 Calculation Details .........................................................................................................4-62 Interval Analysis – Tube Side ............................................................................4-62 Aerotran Design Methods ..............................................................................................4-65 Optimization Logic ............................................................................................4-65 No Phase Change ...............................................................................................4-67 Simple Condensation .........................................................................................4-68 Complex Condensation ......................................................................................4-68 Simple Vaporization...........................................................................................4-70
vi • Contents
Aspen B-JAC 111
5
Aspen Teams ...................................................................................................5-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................5-1 Organization of Input Information .......................................................................5-2 Teams Run Options..............................................................................................5-3 Navigator Contents...............................................................................................5-3 Teams Scope ........................................................................................................5-6 Output...................................................................................................................5-7 Drawings ..............................................................................................................5-8 Input .................................................................................................................................5-9 Problem Definition...............................................................................................5-9 Description ...........................................................................................................5-9 Application Options ...........................................................................................5-10 Design Specifications.........................................................................................5-11 Exchanger Geometry..........................................................................................5-12 Front Head..........................................................................................................5-13 Shell....................................................................................................................5-17 Rear Head...........................................................................................................5-19 Shell Cover.........................................................................................................5-22 Flanges ...............................................................................................................5-23 Tubesheet ...........................................................................................................5-29 Expansion Joints.................................................................................................5-35 Expansion Joint Geometry .................................................................................5-37 Tubes/Baffles .....................................................................................................5-38 Fin Tube Data.....................................................................................................5-40 Tubesheet Layout ...............................................................................................5-44 Nozzles General .................................................................................................5-48 Nozzle Details ....................................................................................................5-50 Horizontal Supports ...........................................................................................5-52 Vertical Supports................................................................................................5-54 Lift Lugs.............................................................................................................5-56 Materials.........................................................................................................................5-57 Main Materials ...................................................................................................5-57 Nozzle Materials ................................................................................................5-58 Program Options ............................................................................................................5-59 Wind/Seismic/External Loads............................................................................5-59 Change Codes.....................................................................................................5-59 Change Codes - Cylinders & Covers .................................................................5-62 Change Codes - Nozzles ....................................................................................5-63 Change Codes – Body Flanges...........................................................................5-64 Change Codes - Floating Head Flange...............................................................5-65 Change Codes - Tubesheets & Expansion Joint ................................................5-66 Change Codes - Supports ...................................................................................5-67 Change Codes - Dimensions ..............................................................................5-67
Aspen B-JAC 111 User Guide
Contents • vii
Results ............................................................................................................................5-68 Input Summary...................................................................................................5-68 Design Summary................................................................................................5-69 Design Specifications/Materials.........................................................................5-70 Overall Dimensions/Fitting Locations ...............................................................5-72 MDMT/MAWP/Test Pressure ...........................................................................5-73 Vessel Dimensions .............................................................................................5-74 Cylinders & Covers............................................................................................5-75 Nozzles/Nozzle Flanges .....................................................................................5-76 Flanges ...............................................................................................................5-77 Tubesheets/Tube Details ....................................................................................5-77 Supports / Lift Lugs / Wind & Seismic Loads ...................................................5-78 Price................................................................................................................................5-79 Cost Estimate .....................................................................................................5-79 Bill of Materials .................................................................................................5-79 Labor Details ......................................................................................................5-79 Drawings ........................................................................................................................5-80 Setting Plan Drawing .........................................................................................5-80 Tubesheet Layout : Tube Layout Drawing ........................................................5-81 All Drawings: Fabrication Drawings .................................................................5-82 Code Calculations ..............................................................................................5-82 6
Props.................................................................................................................6-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................6-1 Props Scope ......................................................................................................................6-2 Physical Properties ...............................................................................................6-2 Input .................................................................................................................................6-4 Application Options .............................................................................................6-4 Property Options ..................................................................................................6-5 Composition .....................................................................................................................6-9 Composition .........................................................................................................6-9 Results ............................................................................................................................6-15 Warnings & Messages........................................................................................6-15 VLE ....................................................................................................................6-18 Props Logic ........................................................................................................6-19 References ..........................................................................................................6-22 Databank Symbols..........................................................................................................6-23
7
Priprops ............................................................................................................7-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................7-1 Accessing the Priprops databank......................................................................................7-1 Accessing an existing component in the databank...............................................7-1 Adding a new component to Priprops ..................................................................7-2 Adding a new component using an existing component as a template:...............7-2 Property Reference...........................................................................................................7-2
viii • Contents
Aspen B-JAC 111
Property Estimation..........................................................................................................7-3 Property Curves....................................................................................................7-3 Property estimation based on NBP.......................................................................7-3 8
Qchex................................................................................................................8-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................8-1 Mechanical Scope ................................................................................................8-2 Input .................................................................................................................................8-4 Problem Definition...............................................................................................8-4 Description ...........................................................................................................8-4 Exchanger Geometry............................................................................................8-5 Shell type..............................................................................................................8-6 Tube to tubesheet joint .........................................................................................8-9 Exchanger Data ..................................................................................................8-10 Design Data ........................................................................................................8-18 Qchex - Program Operation ...............................................................................8-19 Qchex - Results ..............................................................................................................8-20 Input Summary...................................................................................................8-20 Warnings & Messages........................................................................................8-20 Design Summary................................................................................................8-21 Cost Summary....................................................................................................8-21 Qchex Logic ...................................................................................................................8-21 Qchex References...............................................................................................8-26
9
Ensea ................................................................................................................9-1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................9-1 Mechanical Scope ................................................................................................9-2 Input .................................................................................................................................9-4 Problem Definition...............................................................................................9-4 Application Options .............................................................................................9-4 Exchanger Geometry........................................................................................................9-7 Exchanger.............................................................................................................9-7 Tubes & Baffles .................................................................................................9-10 Tube Layout .......................................................................................................9-13 Tube Row Details...............................................................................................9-18 Program Operation .............................................................................................9-18 Results ................................................................................................................9-19 Input Data...........................................................................................................9-19 Warnings & Messages........................................................................................9-19 Summary & Details........................................................................................................9-20 Summary ............................................................................................................9-20 Tube Row Details...............................................................................................9-20 U-bend Details....................................................................................................9-21 Tubesheet Layout ...............................................................................................9-22 Ensea - Logic......................................................................................................9-23 Ensea References................................................................................................9-24
Aspen B-JAC 111 User Guide
Contents • ix
10
Metals..............................................................................................................10-1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................10-1 Metals Scope ......................................................................................................10-2 Input ...................................................................................................................10-3 Program Operation .............................................................................................10-4 Results ............................................................................................................................10-5 Warnings & Messages........................................................................................10-5 References ......................................................................................................................10-8 Metals Directory - ASTM - Generic ..................................................................10-9 Metals Directory - ASTM - Pipe......................................................................10-10 Low Alloy Pipe and Weld Cap ........................................................................10-10 Metals Directory - ASTM - Plate.....................................................................10-13 Metals Directory - ASTM - Bolting.................................................................10-17 Metals Directory - ASTM - Forging ................................................................10-19 Metals Directory - ASTM - Coupling ..............................................................10-20 Metals Directory - ASTM - Gasket..................................................................10-22 Metals Directory - ASTM - Tube.....................................................................10-24 Metals Directory - AFNOR - Genenic .............................................................10-27 Metals Directory - AFNOR - Pipe ...................................................................10-28 Metals Directory - AFNOR - Plate ..................................................................10-29 Metals Directory - AFNOR - Bolting ..............................................................10-31 Metals - Directory - AFNOR - Forging ...........................................................10-31 Metals Directory - AFNOR - Gasket ...............................................................10-33 Metals Directory - AFNOR - Tube ..................................................................10-34 Metals Directory - DIN - Generic ....................................................................10-35 Metals Directory - DIN - Pipe..........................................................................10-36 Metals Directory - DIN - Plate.........................................................................10-38 Metals Directory - DIN - Bolting.....................................................................10-40 Metals Directory - DIN - Forging ....................................................................10-41 Metals - Directory - DIN - Gasket ...................................................................10-43 Metals Directory - DIN - Tube.........................................................................10-44
11
Primetals.........................................................................................................11-1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................11-1 Example Input to Primetals ............................................................................................11-5
12
Newcost Database .........................................................................................12-1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................12-1 Labor & Cost Standards .....................................................................................12-2
13
B-JAC Example Run ......................................................................................13-1 Aspen B-JAC Example ..................................................................................................13-1
x • Contents
Aspen B-JAC 111
14
Exporting Results from B-JAC to Excel.......................................................14-1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................14-1 Export features -- B-JAC Templates..................................................................14-1 Creating your own customized Template...........................................................14-2 Copying Data from a B-JAC application to Excel.............................................14-3 Example of Pasting Aspen B-JAC results into Excel. .......................................14-4 Launching B-JAC programs from Excel............................................................14-5
15
Using the ASPEN B-JAC ActiveX Automation Server ................................15-1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................15-1 About the Automation Server ............................................................................15-2 Using the Automation Server.............................................................................15-2 Viewing the ASPEN B-JAC Objects .................................................................15-4 Overview of the ASPEN B-JAC Objects...........................................................15-5 Programming with ASPEN B-JAC Objects.....................................................15-11 Reference Information..................................................................................................15-21
Aspen B-JAC 111 User Guide
Contents • xi
xii • Contents
Aspen B-JAC 111
1
Introduction The purpose of this User Guide is to provide a quick overview of the Aspen B-JAC programs, supported operating systems, equipment requirements, program installation instructions, and a summary of the basic program operation. The Aspen B-JAC programs have been designed around the same basic user interface. Once a user is familiar with the operation of one program, that knowledge can easily be transferred to another Aspen B-JAC program. This User Guide outlines the concepts of program input, program operation, and program output used throughout all the Aspen B-JAC programs. For detailed instructions or information on specific programs, you should refer to the appropriate section in this manual. Much of information in the User Guide is also available through the Help facility in the Aspen B-JAC software.
Related Documentation In addition to this document, a number of other documents are provided to help users learn and use Aspen B-JAC products. All manuals are available in PDF format.
Installation Manuals Aspen Engineering Suite 11.1 Installation Manual
Aspen Plus Aspen Plus Getting Started Guides Aspen Plus User Guide Aspen Plus Reference Manuals Aspen Physical Property System Reference Manuals
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
1-1
Aspen Pinch Aspen Pinch User Guide
Technical Support Online Technical Support Center AspenTech customers with a valid license and software maintenance agreement can register to access the Online Technical Support Center at: http://support.aspentech.com This web support site allows you to: • • • • • • •
Access current product documentation Search for tech tips, solutions and frequently asked questions (FAQs) Search for and download application examples Search for and download service packs and product updates Submit and track technical issues Search for and review known limitations Send suggestions
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support e-Bulletins. These e-Bulletins are used to proactively alert users to important technical support information such as: • • • •
Technical advisories Product updates Service Pack announcements Product release announcements
Contacting Customer Support Customer support is also available by phone, fax, and email for customers with a current support contract for this product. For the most up-to-date phone listings, please see the Online Technical Support Center at: http://support.aspentech.com
1-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Hours Support Centers
Operating Hours
North America South America Europe Asia and Pacific Region
8:00 – 20:00 Eastern Time 9:00 – 17:00 Local time 8:30 – 18:00 Central European time 9:00 – 17:30 Local time
Phone Support Centers
Phone Numbers
North America
1-888-996-7100 1-281-584-4357 (52) (5) 536-2809
toll-free from U.S., Canada, Mexico North America Support Center Mexico Support Center
South America
(54) (11) 4361-7220 (55) (11) 5012-0321 (0800) 333-0125 (000) (814) 550-4084 8001-2410
Argentina Support Center Brazil Support Center Toll-free to U.S. from Argentina Toll-free to U.S. from Brazil Toll-free to U.S. from Venezuela
Europe
(32) (2) 701-95-55 European Support Center Country specific toll-free numbers: Belgium (0800) 40-687 Denmark 8088-3652 Finland (0) (800) 1-19127 France (0805) 11-0054 Ireland (1) (800) 930-024 Netherlands (0800) 023-2511 Norway (800) 13817 Spain (900) 951846 Sweden (0200) 895-284 Switzerland (0800) 111-470 UK (0800) 376-7903
Asia and Pacific Region
(65) 395-39-00 (81) (3) 3262-1743
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Singapore Tokyo
1-3
Fax Support Centers
Fax Numbers
North America
1-617-949-1724 (Cambridge, MA) 1-281-584-1807 (Houston, TX: both Engineering and Manufacturing Suite) 1-281-584-5442 (Houston, TX: eSupply Chain Suite) 1-281-584-4329 (Houston, TX: Advanced Control Suite) 1-301-424-4647 (Rockville, MD) 1-908-516-9550 (New Providence, NJ) 1-425-492-2388 (Seattle, WA)
South America
(54) (11) 4361-7220 (Argentina) (55) (11) 5012-4442 (Brazil)
Europe
(32) (2) 701-94-45
Asia and Pacific Region
(65) 395-39-50 (Singapore) (81) (3) 3262-1744 (Tokyo)
E-mail Support Centers
E-mail
North America
[email protected] (Engineering Suite)
[email protected] (Aspen ICARUS products)
[email protected] (Aspen MIMI products)
[email protected] (Aspen PIMS products)
[email protected] (Aspen Retail products)
[email protected](Advanced Control products)
[email protected] (Manufacturing Suite)
[email protected] (Mexico)
South America
[email protected] (Argentina)
[email protected] (Brazil)
Europe
[email protected] (Engineering Suite)
[email protected] (All other suites)
[email protected] (CIMVIEW products)
Asia and Pacific Region
[email protected] (Singapore: Engineering Suite)
[email protected] (Singapore: All other suites)
[email protected] (Tokyo: Engineering Suite)
[email protected] (Tokyo: All other suites)
❖
1-4
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2
The User Interface
Aspen B-JAC Programs The Aspen B-JAC software includes a number of programs for the thermal design, mechanical design, cost estimation, and drawings for heat exchangers and pressure vessels. The major design programs are: Aspen Hetran
Thermal Design of Shell & Tube Heat Exchangers
Aspen Teams
Mechanical Design, Cost Estimation, and Design Drawings of Shell &Tube Heat Exchangers and Pressure Vessels
Aspen Aerotran
Thermal Design of Air Cooled Heat Exchangers, Flue Gas Heat Recuperators, and Fired Heater Convection Sections
In addition to the major design programs, there are a number of programs which support the design programs. These are: Props
Chemical Physical Properties Databank
Priprops
Program to Build a Private Databank for Props
Metals
Metal Properties Databank
Primetals
Program to Build a Private Databank for Metals
Ensea
Tubesheet Layout Program
Qchex
Budget Cost Estimation Program
Draw
Graphics Interface Program for Drawings
Newcost
Program for Maintaining Labor & Material Databases
Defmats
Program for Establishing Default Materials
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-1
Aspen Plus Integration The Aspen B-JAC Hetran and Aerotran programs are completely integrated with the Aspen Plus process simulation software. Users with licenses for both the Aspen B-JAC thermal analysis software and the Aspen Plus simulation software can utilize the Aspen B-JAC thermal models for shell and tube heat exchangers and air-cooled heat exchangers within the Aspen Plus flowsheet. The models can be accessed from Aspen Plus by selecting the blocks Hetran or Aerotran for the heat transfer unit operations. Stream and property curve data for these blocks can be supplied to the Aspen B-JAC programs by Aspen Plus or from within the Aspen B-JAC input file which is referenced in the Aspen Plus input for the block. All exchanger geometry data must be specified through the Aspen B-JAC input file. During simulation the Aspen Plus simulator will repetitively call the Aspen B-JAC analysis programs to predict the outlet conditions of the heat transfer equipment. The results of the analysis are returned to Aspen Plus which then feeds them to subsequent blocks. A subset of the exchanger performance can be viewed from within the Aspen Plus environment or all detailed results of the block can be viewed through the Aspen B-JAC user interface.
Aspen Pinch Integration The Aspen B-JAC Hetran program is completely integrated with the Aspen Pinch process synthesis software. Users with licenses for both the Aspen B-JAC thermal analysis software and the Aspen Pinch software can utilize the Aspen B-JAC thermal models for shell and tube heat exchangers within the Aspen Pinch flowsheet. The models can be accessed from Aspen Plus by selecting the block Hetran for the heat transfer unit operations. Stream and property curve data for these blocks can be supplied to the Aspen B-JAC programs by Aspen Pinch or from within the Aspen B-JAC input file which is referenced in the Aspen Pinch input for the block. All exchanger geometry data must be specified through the Aspen B-JAC input file. During simulation the Aspen Pinch simulator will repetitively call the Aspen B-JAC analysis programs to predict the outlet conditions of the heat transfer equipment. The results of the analysis are returned to Aspen Pinch which then feeds them to subsequent blocks. A subset of the exchanger performance can be viewed from within the Aspen Pinch environment or all detailed results of the block can be viewed through the Aspen B-JAC user interface.
2-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Aspen Zyqad Integration The Aspen B-JAC Hetran program is completely integrated with the Aspen Aspen Zyqad. Aspen Zyqad is an engineering database tool used to capture process knowledge about the design, construction, or operation of a process plant. The database contains a number of data models to store information about the process streams, the process configuration, and the individual pieces of process equipment. The user can retrieve the information & generate any number of specialized reports & equipment specification sheets from the data in the database.
Installation Notes Version Control Utility (BJACVC.exe) The Version Control Utility, BJACVC.exe located in the B-JAC 11.*\XEQ folder, will allow you to switch between B-JAC program versions. To execute the BJACVC.exe utility, locate the file using Explorer and double click on it with the mouse cursor.
Selecting a B-JAC program version: Select which version you wish to run and the utility will update the MS Windows registry to allow you to run the selected B-JAC program version. The BJACVC.exe will automatically execute when you open a B-JAC program version that is not registered properly.
Copying customized files: Select the source version where your existing customized database files are located. Next select the target new version where you wish to copy the database files to. Next select what files you wish to transfer and then select Copy to copy the customized files to the new version.
Copying program settings: To copy the program settings from an existing B-JAC version to a new version, first select the source version. Next select the target new program version. Now select Apply and the program settings will be copied to the new targeted version.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-3
User Customized Database Files There are a number of database files that you can change to customize the operation of the Aspen B-JAC programs as well as alter the program answers. These customized database files will be located in a default program folder or in a user specified directory. If you elect to use the default folder location, those database files must be copied from the previous B-JAC program default folder to the new B-JAC 11.*\Dat\PDA folder. You can use the Version Control Utility, BJACVC.exe located in the B-JAC 11.*\XEQ folder to transfer these database files. Reference the BJACVC utility instructions above to copy your customized files from an existing version to a new B-JAC version. As an alternate method, you can specify your own directory location for these customized files and the B-JAC program will access the database from your specified folder location. To specify your user customized database folder location, select Tools / Program Settings / Files and provide the folder location for the database files. A list of the database files that can be customized is as follows: D_FXPRIV.PDA
Private properties chemical databank properties
D_IDPRIV.PDA
Private properties chemical databank index
D_VAPRIV.PDA
Private properties chemical databank properties
G_COMPNA.PDA
Company name and address for drawings
G_PROFIL.PDA
Default headings, input, operation options
N_MTLDEF.PDA
Default materials for generic materials (ASME)
N_MTLDIN.PDA
Default materials for generic materials (DIN)
N_MTLCDP.PDA
Default materials for generic materials (AFNOR)
N_PARTNO.PDA
Part number assignment for bill of materials
N_PRIVI.PDA
Private properties materials databank index
N_PRIVP.PDA
Private properties materials databank properties
N_STDLAB.PDA
Fabrication standards, procedures, costs, etc.
N_STDMTL.PDA
Fabrication standards as function of materials
N_STDOPR.PDA
Fabrication operation efficiencies
N_STDWLD.PDA
Fabrication welding standards
N_STDPRC.PDA
Private materials prices
If the update is installed into the directory for the previous version, the install program will not copy over the previous version’s database files.
2-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Accessing Aspen B-JAC Program Files Most users will want their input and output files stored on a directory separate from the Aspen B-JAC programs. The input and output files are read from or written to the current directory on your PC. This allows you to organize your input and output files however you wish. We recommend that you run from a directory other than the directory in which the Aspen B-JAC programs are installed.
Data Maintenance Units of Measure You can access the Units of Measure by selecting Tools in the Menu Bar and then selecting the Data Maintenance section. You can set the default units of measure to US, SI, or Metric and also set up your own customized set of units. In the Units Maintenance section you can customize the conversion factors used and the number of decimal point shown in the results.
Heat Exchanger Standards This function allows you to create a database with your standard exchangers sizes that can reference from the B-JAC design programs.
Chemical Databank (B-JAC Props & Priprops) This item provides access to the Aspen B-JAC Props, chemical databank, and Priprops, the user private property databases. The Priprops program allows you to build your own private property databank that can be accessed form the Hetran, Aerotran, and Props programs. Reference the Priprops section of this manual for additional information.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-5
Materials Databank (B-JAC Databank & Primetals) This item provides access to the Aspen B-JAC Metals, material databank, and Primetals, the private property metals databases. The Primetals program allows you to build your own private property databank that can be accessed from the Hetran, Aerotran, and Teams programs. Reference the Primetals section of this manual for additional information.
Materials Defaults (Defmats) This item provides access to the B-JAC Defmats, material defaults database for metals in the databanks. The Defmats program allows you to change the specified material specifications to be used when the generic material references are specified.
Costing (Newcost Database) This item provides access to the Newcost fabrication standards and material pricing databases. Labor, fabrication standards, and material pricing may be customized your applications. For more information, see the Newcost Database section of this manual.
Frequently Used Materials and Chemical Components You can set a list of frequently used materials and/or chemical components for the databank search engines. This will allow to search for a material or component from your personalized list of items you use often.
2-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Program Settings File Save Options: Set the auto-save file functions. You can set the program to save your file information every few minutes or at the time the program is executed. Company Logo: By providing the reference to a Bitmap file, you can add your company logo to the program results and drawings. Default Units of Measure: You can set the default units of measure to US, SI, or Metric. Note that the units may be changed at any time in the Aspen B-JAC program window. Headings/Drawing Title: You can set up the default headings and title block information that will appear on the printed output and drawings. Nozzle size specification on drawings: You can set the units set basis for the nozzle sizes shown on the drawings. For example, US unit size nozzles can be shown even though the drawings are in SI or metric units. Folder for customized database files: You can specify a folder location for your customized database files. The B-JAC programs will then reference your customized database files in the specified folder in lieu of the standard database files in the program PDA folder. Excel templates: Specify the Excel template file you wish to use for each program as a default. When the File / Export / Excel feature is selected, the specified default template will then be used. Heat exchanger standards: Set which exchanger standards database file is to be referenced. Advanced: You can turn on variable attributes so they will be shown in the Aspen B-JAC program prompt area. Set drag-drop format to move data to Excel. Set the maximum disk space for temporary files.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-7
General Program Operation Operating Procedure Most of the Aspen B-JAC programs follow the same general operating procedures. These are: 1. Enter the Aspen B-JAC program environment by clicking on the Aspen B-JAC icon or select the Aspen B-JAC program from the Task Bar. 2. Select the appropriate Aspen B-JAC program by clicking on the New File icon or choosing New under the File Menu. Check the box next to the desired program. 3. Enter the required data by accessing folders from the Navigation Tree and filling out the required input forms with data. 4. Click on the Run icon in the Tool Bar or select the “Run Program” option under the Run command in the Menu Bar. 5. Review the Results section by accessing the results folders in the Navigation Tree. 6. If you want hardcopy results, choose Print from the File menu, check the boxes next to the desired output, and click on “Print.” 7. If appropriate, make changes to the input data. 8. If making changes, then re-run the program. 9. Repeat steps 5 through 9 until you have the desired solution. 10. Update the file with current geometry by selecting the Run command from the Menu Bar and then Update. 11. To transfer design information to other programs, select the Run command from the Menu Bar and then Transfer. 12. Leave the program by selecting Exit from the File menu. The program will ask if you wish to save changes. Click the appropriate button. 13. Save the input data at any time by clicking on Save under the File menu.
2-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The Aspen B-JAC Program Window
Title Bar The bar at the top of the window displays the current program and file name.
Screen Control Buttons The Minimize, Maximize and Restore keys change the size of the program window, and return the window to its original settings. The Close key closes the active program or file.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-9
Menu Bar The program has a number of additional features that can be accessed through a menu bar at the top of each screen. Using the left mouse button, click on a menu name to see the pull down options available. Click on a desired option or press the “Alt” key and the underscored character shown (some options can be accessed by a given “Ctrl” key + letter combination).
File Menu Name
Description
New (Ctrl+N)
Opens new file for desired Aspen B-JAC program
Open (Ctrl+O)
Opens existing Aspen B-JAC program file
Close
Closes a chosen Aspen B-JAC program window
Add Application
Opens a chosen Aspen B-JAC program window
Remove Application
Removes a chosen Aspen B-JAC program window
Save (Ctrl+S)
Saves current file under chosen filename
Save As
Saves current file as a different filename
Export To
Export results to Excel, a DXF file, a RTF file, or a DOC file
Print Setup
Allows for change to printing options
Print (Ctrl+P)
Prints desired results sections from Aspen B-JAC program
Description
Displays the contents of the Description field in the input file
Exit
Exits Aspen B-JAC program and return user to Windows
Edit Menu
2-10
Name
Description
Undo
Undoes the last edit operation.
Cut (Ctrl+X)
Deletes the highlighted text.
Copy (Ctrl+C)
Saves a copy of the highlighted text.
Paste (Ctrl+V)
Paste inserts text from a copy to directed location
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Run Menu Name
Description
Run “Program”
Runs a chosen Aspen B-JAC program
Stop
Stops the run of a chosen Aspen B-JAC program
Transfer
Transfers design information into another BJAC program
Update
Updates file with final design information
Name
Description
Data Maintenance
Provides access to units of measure, chemical database reference, material database, and Costing database.
Program Settings
Default units setting and headings for drawings
Security
Access to Aspen B-JAC security program.
Language
Sets language to English, French, German, Spanish, Italian (Chinese and Japanese to be offered in a later version).
Plot
Plots results functions.
Add Curve
Allows the addition of another curve to an existing plotted curve
Name
Description
Tool Bar
Shows or hides the Tool Bar
Status Bar
Shows or hides the Status Bar
Zoom In
Enlarges sections of the Aspen B-JAC drawings
Zoom Out
Returns drawings to normal size
Refresh
Refreshes screen
Variable List
Displays variable list for form.
Tools Menu
View Menu
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-11
Window Menu Name
Description
Cascade
Arranges program windows one behind the other
Tile Horizontal
Arranges program windows one on top another
Tile Vertical
Arranges program windows one besides the other
Arrange Icons
Automatically arranges icons
Create
Creates a window for a Aspen B-JAC program
Help Menu
2-12
Name
Description
Contents
Open Aspen B-JAC help table of Contents
Search for Help
Displays a list of topics for detailed help
About B-JAC
Provides information on the current Aspen B-JAC release
What’s This Help
Allows the user to place “?” on desired item to receive information about the item
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Toolbar
Toolbar Buttons Name
Description
New
Creates a new Aspen B-JAC program file
Open
Opens an existing Aspen B-JAC program file
Save
Saves the current file data
Hetran
Opens the Hetran program window
Teams
Opens the Teams program window
Aerotran
Opens the Aerotran program window
Props
Opens the Props program window
Ensea
Opens the Ensea tube layout window
Qchex
Opens the Qchex budget costing window
Teamsc
Opens the Teams Component design window
Metals
Opens the Metals property database window
Run
Runs the chosen Aspen B-JAC Program
Zoom In
Enlarges sections of the Aspen B-JAC drawings
Zoom Our
Returns sections of drawings to normal size
Plot
Plot results functions
What’s This?
Allows user to place “?” on desired item to receive information about the item
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-13
Toolbar
Name
Description
Navigator
Allows quick access to forms in the Menu Tree
One Level Up
Takes the user up one level in the Menu Tree
Hide Folder List
Hides Navigator Menu Tree
Units Box
Allow you to change globally the units of measure
Go Back
Takes the user to the most recently viewed form
Go Forward
Takes the user to the next form in the Menu Tree
Previous Form
Takes the user to the previous form in the Menu Tree
Next Form
Takes the user to the next form in the Menu Tree
Next
Takes the user to the next required input or result sheet
Next By selecting the Next button, the program will guide you sequentially through the required input forms to complete the input file. Note that the subsequent steps are dependant upon your previous selections in the program. With the Next button, the program will minimize the input information required and use program defaults.
2-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Units Box All of the Aspen B-JAC programs run in traditional U.S. units, SI units, and traditional metric units. The programs allow you to dynamically change the system of measure used in the input or results sections. It is therefore possible to view and/or print the same solution in two different systems for easy comparison or checking. Field specific units of measure control is also available. A specific set of units may be specified for each input data field by selecting from the units drop down menu next to the input field. The field specific units will override the global units set in the Units Box. Please note that the solution of a design problem may be dependent upon the system of measure used in the input. This is due to differing standards in incrementing dimensions. This is especially true for the mechanical design programs.
Zoom In/Zoom Out The user can Zoom In or Zoom Out on selected sections of the Aspen B-JAC drawings by selecting an area and drawing a frame around it. The frame corner is selected by pressing the left mouse button down and dragging to the opposite corner where the left button is released. By clicking on the Zoom In option, the framed section will be resized to the full window size.
Navigator Tree, Forms and Sheets Each Aspen B-JAC program has a Navigator Tree on the left-hand side of the screen. The tree is organized by forms according to program input and results. The user can quickly access a desired form by moving the mouse to the appropriate spot in the tree and clicking once. To scroll through the list, use the up and down arrow keys to the right of the tree. Each form is then subdivided into sheets, in which the user enters data in various input fields or review results. The tabs at the top of the screen show the names of the different sheets. To access a sheet, click on the appropriate tab.
Prompt Area This section provides information to help you make choices or perform tasks. It contains a description about the current input field.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-15
Status Bar This bar displays information about the current program status and input field status. If value entered for an input field is outside the normal range, a warning will be display in the Status Bar with the recommend value limits.
Program Input Key Functions
2-16
Name
Description
F1
Activates the Help system
Arrow Keys
Moves the location of the cursor within an input field and scrolls through the options in a given list
Delete Key
Deletes the character at the current cursor position and shifts the remainder of the input
Home Key
Returns the cursor to the beginning of the input field
End Key
Moves the cursor to the end of the input field
Forward Tab Key
Scrolls the user through the input fields of a form
Backward Tab Key
Move cursor back to previous field
Control + Delete Keys
Erases the characters from the cursor position to the end of the input field
Page Up/Page Down Keys
Scrolls the user through the forms of the Menu Tree
Backspace Key
Deletes the character to the left of the current cursor position in an input field
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Input Fields Sheets are made up of input fields and their descriptions. For each field, the user (1) enters data, (2) chooses from a given list of options, or (3) checks the cell if appropriate. The cursor can be moved from one input field to another by using the Tab key, Enter key, arrow keys, or the mouse. You can navigate through a input form by using the Tab key or Enter key which will take you to the next required input field or you can select the items with the mouse. To navigate through an input field grid, such as for physical properties, or nozzle connections, you can use the Enter key which will move the cursor down to the next field in a column, or you can use the arrow keys to direct the cursor, or you can use the mouse to select the input field. The input fields consist of the following types: • •
• •
User defined. You enter the value such as a temperature or operating pressure. User defined with suggested values. You can input a value or select from a list of typical values for the input which are available in a drop down selection menu. You can access by the drop down menu by clicking on the input field with the mouse and then select the down arrow displayed. You can select an item in the drop down menu by using the up and down arrow keys or by selecting with the mouse. Available program selections. You select from a drop down menu list or options list displayed on the input form. You can select an item in the drop down menu by using the up and down arrow keys or by selecting with the mouse. Many of the input fields have graphical support. As you select from the available menu options, a sketch of the selection will appear next to the input field.
There are two types of data that can be entered: alphanumeric and numeric. Alphanumeric fields accept any printable character. Numeric fields accept only the digits zero through nine plus certain special characters such as: + - . You can enter letters of the alphabet in either upper case or lower case. The letters are retained in the case entered for headings, remarks, and fluid names. Whole numbers can be entered without a decimal point. Numbers over one thousand should not have punctuation to separate the thousands or millions. Decimal numbers less than 1 may be entered with or without the leading zero. Scientific notation (E format) can be used. n Examples of Valid Entries
Examples of Invalid Entries
125
15/16
289100
289,100
-14.7 0.9375
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-17
If an input field is identified as optional input (white background), you may leave the field blank and the program will use a default value. For physical properties where you want the program to retrieve the value from the physical properties databank (see Search a Databank), you should leave the input field blank. In many cases, you can get additional descriptive information on an item by pressing F1, the Help key. Required input fields will be identified by a green background color for the input field. Optional input fields will have a white background. Any inputted value that exceeds a normal range limit will be highlighted with a red background. Note that the program will still accept and use a value outside the normal range. If a folder or tab is not complete, a red X will be shown on the respective folder in the Navigation Tree and on the Tab label.
Units of Measure – Field Specific All of the Aspen B-JAC programs run in traditional U.S. units, SI units, and traditional metric units. The global setting for units is set in the Units Box located in the Tools Bar. The programs allow you to dynamically change the system of measure used in the input or results sections. It is therefore possible to view and/or print the same solution in two different systems for easy comparison or checking. Field specific units of measure control is also available. A specific set of units may be specified for each input data field by selecting from the units drop down menu next to the input field. The field specific units will override the global units set in the Units Box. Note that you can input the value in one set of units and then select an alternate unit from the drop down units menu, and the inputted value will be converted. Please note that the solution of a design problem may be dependent upon the system of measure used in the input. This is due to differing standards in incrementing dimensions. This is especially true for the mechanical design programs.
2-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Databank Reference You can search for an item in the Chemical Component or Material of Construction Databanks. Click on the Search button located on databank reference form to open the search utility. To find an item in the list, type in the first few letters of the material name. Or, scroll through the material list using the up and down arrows to the right of the field. You can also specify a search preference, database, material class and material type. Click on the desired material. In the Component list, click on the desired component and press Set to match it with the selected reference. You can also erase a reference from the component list by clicking on the component and pressing Clear.
The components in the databank have a component name which is up to 32 characters long, a chemical formula or material specification. You use these for the databank reference. We recommend that you do not use the chemical formula, because the formula may not be a unique reference. You should use the appropriate reference exactly as it appears in the databank directory.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-19
Range Checks After data is entered in an input field, the program will check the specified data against a high and low value range. If a value falls outside this range, the input field will turn red and a warning message will be displayed at the bottom left hand of the screen. This does not mean the program will not accept this data. It merely suggests that you should check the data for accuracy. If the data is correct, continue with data input.
Change Codes Several of the programs have a form for change codes. You can use this form to insert four letter codes and numeric values to specify input data which is not included in the regular input screens. Refer to the Change Code section in the individual Program Guide. First type the change code, then an equals sign (“=”), then the numeric value. For example: SENT=2. It also possible to provide a Super Change Code by defining the change codes to be applied to a design in a separate ASCII file and referencing the file as follows in the Change Code input field: File="Filename"
The Database Concept We suggest that you use the same input file for all Aspen B-JAC programs for a specific heat exchanger design problem. Save the input data in a convenient filename that can be accessed by all the Aspen B-JAC programs. Using the Transfer function under the Run menu, you can add data to the input for use with other programs. For example, you can use Hetran to thermally design a shell and tube heat exchanger, and then request that the chosen design be transferred to another program such as Hetran into Aerotran, Hetran into Teams, or Teams into Ensea. In this way the appropriate design data is directly available to other programs. This concept also makes it easy for you to compare design solutions in different types of heat exchangers. You can run Hetran to design a shell and tube heat exchanger and then, with very little additional input data, run Aerotran to design an air-cooled heat exchanger.
2-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Program Output The primary forms of output from the Aspen B-JAC programs are display output, printed output, and drawings. Details on the output can be found in the Results section of the individual Aspen B-JAC program’s user guide.
Display Output You can evaluate the results of the program’s execution to determine if any changes in the solution are required. Scroll through the forms in the Results section of the Menu Tree to take a look at the program output. Each form may have multiple sheets of results, which can be accessed by clicking on the different tabs at the top of the screen.
Printed Output To print a file, choose Print under the File menu. When the print screen comes up, review the printing options, make any desired changes, and click OK.
Drawings Many of the Aspen B-JAC programs’ output include drawings. Drawings generated by the TEAMS program may be exported to CAD programs.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
2-21
Help Facility The Aspen B-JAC software includes extensive help facilities, which have been designed to minimize the need for printed documentation. You may access the help facility in the following ways:
General Help This level includes information that applies to all of the Aspen B-JAC programs. You can access the general help index by selecting the Help button from the Menu Bar at any time in the program. You may select the Help Contents to select from the list of topics or you may select to Search for Help On a specific topic.
Field Specific General Help Topic By selecting an input field with the mouse and then pressing the F1 key, the general help will open at the appropriate index location for that subject.
Field Specific "What's This?" Help You can obtain input field specific help by selecting the What's This ? in the Tool Bar and dragging the ? to the input field that you need information.
Importing/Exporting Design Data Information to Other OLE Compliant Applications The Aspen B-JAC input/results file may be exported to other OLE compliant systems for use with other programs via various automation utilities that are available. An example automation file has been provided in the example sub-directory, "XMP", located with the Aspen B-JAC program files.
2-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Filenames & Filetypes Although the Aspen B-JAC software works on several different computers and operating systems, there is a high degree of similarity in the use of filenames and filetypes for input and output files. The filename and filetype form the name under which the file is stored on the storage medium (usually disk).
Filenames The filename must be formed using up to 255 characters in length and may be made up of: letters: A-Z a-z, numbers: 0-9, and special characters: - _ & $.
Filetypes The filetype (also sometimes called the filename extension) is automatically established by the Aspen B-JAC software as follows: Filetype
Description
BJT
Aspen B-JAC Input/Output File (Release 10.0 and newer)
BFD
Aspen B-JAC Drawing File
BJI
Aspen B-JAC Input File (previous versions)
BJO
Aspen B-JAC Output File (previous versions)
BJA
Aspen B-JAC Archive File (Input/Output data previous versions)
Whenever an Aspen B-JAC program requests a filename, it is expecting the name without the filetype. The program will append the filetype.
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
❖
❖
❖
2-23
2-24
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3
Aspen Hetran
Introduction Aspen Hetran is a program for the thermal design, rating, and simulation of shell and tube heat exchangers. It encompasses the great majority of industrial shell and tube heat exchanger applications, including most combinations of no phase change, condensation, and vaporization. In the design mode, Aspen Hetran searches for the optimum heat exchanger to satisfy the specified heat duty within the limits of the allowable pressure drops, velocities, shell diameters, tube lengths, and other user specified restrictions. In the design mode, the program produces a detailed optimization path, which shows the alternatives considered by the program as it searches for a satisfactory design. These "intermediate designs" indicate the constraints that are controlling the design and point out what parameters you could modify to reduce the size of the exchanger. The rating mode is used to check the performance of an exchanger with fully specified geometry under any desired operating conditions. The program will check to see if there is sufficient surface area for the process conditions specified and notify the user if the unit is under surfaced. For the simulation mode, you will specify the heat exchanger geometry and the inlet process conditions and the program will predict the outlet conditions for both streams. The Aspen Hetran program has an extensive set of input default values built-in. This allows you to specify a minimum amount of input data to evaluate a design. For complex condensation and/or vaporization, where the program requires vapor-liquid equilibrium data and properties at many temperature points, you can enter the data directly into the input file, or you can have Aspen Hetran generate the curve. The program includes a basic mechanical design to determine the shell and head cylinder thickness and a reasonable estimate of the tubesheet thickness. However, a detailed mechanical design goes beyond the scope of the Aspen Hetran program. That is the job of the Aspen Teams program, which can be easily interfaced with the Aspen Hetran program.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-1
Aspen Hetran incorporates all applicable provisions of the standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (TEMA) and can be used to design all TEMA exchanger types. The program also includes many of the ANSI, DIN, and ISO standards that apply to heat exchangers. A cost estimate is provided for each design to give you feedback on the cost impact of design changes. The cost estimate routine is the same as the one in the Qchex program and uses the same material cost database. Aspen Hetran is an interactive program, which means you can evaluate design changes as you run the program. The program will guide you through the input, calculation, display of results, design changes, and selection of printed output.
Thermal Scope No Phase Change Liquid or gas, Newtonian fluids only
Condensation Shell or tube side Horizontal or vertical Single or multicomponent condensables With or without noncondensables With or without liquid entering Isothermal, linear, or nonlinear Desuperheating of vapor Subcooling below the bubble point Straight through or knockback reflux
3-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Vaporization Shell or tube side Horizontal or vertical Single or multi-component With or without gases entering Isothermal, linear, or nonlinear Liquid preheating Superheating above dew point Pool boiling (shell side, horizontal only) Forced circulation Natural circulation (thermosiphon) Falling film evaporation
Mechanical Scope Front Head Types TEMA Types: A, B, C, N, D
Shell Types TEMA Types: E, F, G, H, J, K, X
Rear Head Types TEMA Types: L, M, N, P, S, T, U, W
Special Types Vapor & distributor belts, double tubesheets, hemispherical heads
Arrangements Any number of shells in series or parallel
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-3
Exchanger Positions Horizontal or vertical
Construction Materials Most common materials are built-in
Shell Diameter No limit; in design mode the program will optimize A minimum and maximum can be specified by the user Any increment can be specified by the user
Baffle Types Segmental baffles - single, double, triple No tubes in window including intermediate supports Grid baffles - rod, strip
Baffle Spacing No limit; in design mode the program will optimize A minimum and maximum can be specified by the user The program checks for baffle & nozzle conflicts
Baffle Cut 15 to 45% of shell diameter (single segmental) If not specified the program will choose
Impingement Protection External or internal In nozzle dome or distributor belt Program checks for requirement
3-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube Diameter No limit
Tube Length No limit; in design mode the program will optimize A minimum and maximum can be specified by the user Any increment can be specified by the user
Tube Passes 1 to 16; in design mode the program will optimize A minimum and maximum can be specified by the user The increment can be even or odd passes
Pass Layout Types Quadrant, mixed, ribbon In design mode the program will optimize to the pass type with the most tubes
Tube Pitch No limit; the program will default to a standard minimum
Tube Patterns Triangular, rotated triangular, square, rotated square
Number of Tubes Maximum of 400 tube rows In design mode the program precisely determines the tube count In rating mode the program checks the number of tubes specified
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-5
Tube Wall Thickness No limit; average or minimum wall The program will check against design pressure
Tube Types Plain Integral circumferentially externally finned tubes Commercial standards are built-in or the Fin configuration can be specified Twisted tape tube inserts
Nozzle Sizes The program determines or the user can specify
Clearances The program defaults to TEMA values for tube hole, baffle, and pass partition clearances The user can specify the clearances
3-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Input Problem Definition The Problem Definition Section is subdivided into three headings: Description, Application Options, and Process Data.
Description Headings Headings are optional. You can specify from 1 to 5 lines of up to 75 characters per line. These entries will appear at the top of the TEMA specification sheet. You can have this input preformatted, by specifying your preferences for headings from the Program Settings in the Tools menu.
Fluid names This descriptive data is optional, but we highly recommend always entering meaningful fluid descriptions, because these fluid names will appear with other input items to help you readily identify to which fluid the data applies. These names also appear in the output, especially the TEMA specification sheet. Each name can be up to 19 characters long and can contain multiple words.
Remarks The remarks are specifically for the bottom of the output of the TEMA specification sheet. They are optional and each line can be up to 75 characters long.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-7
Application Options Hot side application Liquid, no phase change: Application covers a liquid phase fluid that does not change phase in the exchanger. Gas, no phase change: Application covers a gas phase fluid that does not change phase in the exchanger. Narrow range condensation: Application covers the cases where the condensing side film coefficient does not change significantly over the temperature range. Therefore, the calculations can be based on an assumed linear condensation profile. This class is recommended for cases of isothermal condensation and cases of multiple condensables without noncondensables where the condensing range is less than 6°C (10°F). Multi-component condensation: Application covers the other cases of condensation where the condensing side film coefficient changes significantly over the condensing range. Therefore, the condensing range must be divided into several zones where the properties and conditions must be calculated for each zone. This class is recommended for all cases where noncondensables are present or where there are multiple condensables with a condensing range of more than 6°C (10°F). Saturated steam: Application covers the case where the hot side is pure steam, condensing isothermally. Falling film liquid cooler: Application covers the case where the fluid is flowing downward and being cooled.
Condensation curve You can input a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve or have the program calculate the curve using ideal gas laws or several other non-ideal methods.
Condenser type Most condensers have the vapor and condensate flow in the same direction. However, for some special applications where you want to minimize the amount of subcooling you can select a knockback reflux condenser type. The condensate formed flows back towards the vapor inlet. With this type of condenser, you should consider using the differential condensation option if the program calculates the condensation curve.
3-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Cold side application Liquid, no phase change: Application covers a liquid phase fluid that does not change phase in the exchanger. Gas, no phase change: Application covers a gas phase fluid that does not change phase in the exchanger. Narrow range vaporization: Application covers the cases where the vaporizing side film coefficient does not change significantly over the temperature range. Therefore, the calculations can be based on an assumed linear vaporization profile. This class is recommended for cases of single components and cases of multiple components where the vaporizing range is less than 6°C (10°F). Multi-component vaporization: Application covers the other cases of vaporization where the vaporizing side film coefficient changes significantly over the vaporizing range. Therefore, the vaporizing range must be divided into several zones where the properties and conditions must be calculated for each zone. This class is recommended for cases where there are multiple components with a vaporizing range of more than 6°C (10°F).
Vaporization curve You can input a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve or have the program calculate the curve using ideal gas laws or several other non-ideal methods.
Vaporizer type Pool boiling: Pool boiling is restricted to the shell side and must be horizontal. It can be in a kettle or a conventional shell with a full bundle or a partial bundle where tubes are removed for disengagement space. Thermosiphon: The thermosiphon can vaporize on the shell side (horizontal) or the tube side (vertical or horizontal). The hydraulics of the thermosiphon design are critical for proper operation. You can specify the relationship of the heat exchanger to the column and the associated piping in the input (see Thermosiphon Piping) or the program will select the piping arrangement and dimensions. Forced circulation: Forced circulation can be on either shell or tube side. Here the fluid is pumped through and an allowable pressure drop is required input. This can be for a once through vaporizer. Falling film: Falling film evaporation can be done only on the tube side in a vertical position where the liquid enters the top head and flows in a continuous film down the length of the tube. Part of the liquid is vaporized as it flows down the tube. Normally the vapor formed also flows down the tube due to the difference in pressure between the top head and the bottom head. This type of vaporizer helps minimize bubble point elevation and minimizes pressure drop.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-9
Location of hot fluid This required input identifies on which side to put the hot fluid. You can change this during execution of the Aspen Hetran program, so it is easy to compare the two possibilities. As a general guideline, allocate fluids with these preferences: shell side: more viscous fluid, cleaner fluid, lower flow rate tube side: more corrosive fluid, higher pressure fluid, higher temperature fluid, dirtier fluid, more hazardous fluid, more expensive fluid.
Program mode Design Mode: In design mode, you specify the performance requirements, and the program searches for a satisfactory heat exchanger configuration. Rating Mode: In rating mode, you specify the performance requirements and the heat exchanger configuration, and the program checks to see if that heat exchanger is adequate. Simulation Mode: In simulation mode, you specify the heat exchanger configuration and the inlet process conditions, and the program predicts the outlet conditions of the two streams. Select from standard file: You can specify a exchanger size standards file, a file which contains a list of standard heat exchanger sizes available to the user. The Hetran program will select an exchanger size from the list that satisfies the performance requirements. The standard files can be generated in the Tools / Data Maintenance / Heat Exchanger Standards section.
Process Data Fluid quantity, total Input the total flow rates for the hot and cold sides. For no phase change, the flow rates can be left blank and the program will calculate the required flow rates to meet the specified heat load or the heat load on the opposite side. All temperatures must be specified if the flow rates are omitted. For phase change applications, the total flow rate should be at least approximated. The program will still calculate the total required flow rate to balance the heat loads.
3-10
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Vapor quantity For change in phase applications, input vapor flow rates entering or leaving the exchanger for the applicable hot and/or cold sides. The program requires at least two of the three following flow rates at the inlet and outlet: vapor flow, liquid flow, or total flow. It can then calculate the missing value.
Liquid quantity For change in phase applications, input the liquid flow rates entering and/or leaving the exchanger for applicable hot and/or cold sides. The program requires at least two of the three following flow rates at the inlet and outlet: vapor flow, liquid flow, total flow. It can then calculate the missing value.
Temperature (in/out) Enter the inlet and outlet temperatures for the hot and cold side applications. For no phase change applications, the program can calculate the outlet temperature based on the specified heat load or the heat load on the opposite side. The flow rate and the inlet temperature must be specified. For narrow condensation and vaporization applications, an outlet temperature and associated vapor and liquid flows is required. This represents the second point on the VLE curve, which we assume to be a straight line. With this information, the program can determine the correct vapor/liquid ratio at various temperatures and correct the outlet temperature or total flow rates to balance heat loads.
Dew point / Bubble point For narrow range condensation and narrow range vaporization, enter the dew point and bubble point temperatures for the applicable hot and/or cold side. For condensers, the dew point is required but the bubble point may be omitted if vapor is still present at the outlet temperature. For vaporizers, the bubble point is required but the dew point may be omitted if liquid is still present at the outlet temperature.
Operating pressure (absolute) Specify the pressure in absolute pressure (not gauge pressure). Depending on the application, the program may permit either inlet or outlet pressure to be specified. In most cases, it should be the inlet pressure. For a thermosiphon reboiler, the operating pressure should reflect the pressure at the surface of the liquid in the column.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-11
In the case of condensers and vaporizers where you expect the pressure drop to significantly change the condensation or vaporization curves, you should use a pressure drop adjusted vapor-liquid equilibrium data. If you had Hetran calculate the curve, you can indicate to adjust the curve for pressure drop.
Heat exchanged You should specify a value for this input field when you want to design to a specific heat duty. If the heat exchanged is specified, the program will compare the hot and cold side calculated heat loads with the specified heat load. If they do not agree within 2%, the program will correct the flow rate, or outlet temperature. If the heat exchanged is not specified, the program will compare the hot and cold side calculated heat loads. If they do not agree within 2%, the program will correct the flow rate, or outlet temperature. To set what the program will balance, click on the Heat Exchange Balance Options tab and select to have the program change flow rate, outlet temperature, or to allow an unbalanced heat load.
Allowable pressure drop Where applicable, the allowable pressure drop is required input. You can specify any value up to the operating pressure, although the allowable pressure drop should usually be less than 40% of the operating pressure.
Fouling resistance The fouling resistance will default to zero if you leave it unspecified. You can specify any reasonable value. The program provides a suggestion list of typical values.
Heat Load Balance Options This input allows you to specify whether you want the total flow rate or the outlet temperature to be adjusted to balance the heat load against the specified heat load or the heat load calculated from the opposite side. The program will calculate the required adjustment. There is also an option to not balance the heat loads, in which case the program will design the exchanger with the specified flows and temperatures but with the highest of the specified or calculated heat loads.
3-12
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Physical Property Data This section includes: Property Options, Hot Side Composition, Hot Side Properties, Cold Side Composition, Cold Side Properties
Property Options Databanks: Hot Side and Cold Side Properties from B-JAC Databank / User Specified properties / Interface properties from Aspen Plus: By selecting this option, you can reference the B-JAC Property Databank, specify your own properties in the Hot Side and Cold property sections, or have properties directly passed into the B-JAC file directly from Aspen Plus simulation program. The B-JAC Property Databank consists of over 1500 compounds and mixtures used in the chemical process, petroleum, and other industries. You can reference the database by entering the components for the Hot Side and/or Cold Side streams in the Composition sections. Use the Search button to locate the components in the database. If you specify properties in the Hot Side and/or Cold Side property sections, do not reference any compounds in the Hot Side and/or Cold Side Composition sections unless you plan to use both the B-JAC Databank properties and specified properties. Any properties specified in the property sections will override properties coming from a property databank. If properties have been passed into the B-JAC file from the Interface to a Aspen Plus simulation run, these properties will be shown in the Hot Side and/or Cold Side Property sections. If you have passed in properties from Aspen Plus, do not specify a reference to an *.APPDF file below since properties have already been provided by the Aspen Plus interface in the specified property sections. Aspen Properties Databank: Aspen B-JAC provides access to the Aspen Properties physical property databank of compounds and mixtures. To access the databank, first create an Aspen input file with stream information and physical property models. Run Aspen Plus and create the property file, xxxx.APPDF. Specify the name of the property file here in the Hetran input file. Specify the composition of the stream in the Hetran Property Composition section. When the B-JAC program is executed, the Aspen Properties program will be accessed and properties will be passed back into the B-JAC design file. Default: Aspen B-JAC Databank / Specified Properties
Flash Option If you are referencing the Aspen Properties databank, and providing the XXXX.APPDF file, specify the flash option you want Aspen Properties program to use with the VLE generation. Reference the Aspen Properties documentation for further detailed information on this subject. Default: Vapor-Liquid
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-13
The Aspen Plus run file If you are referencing the Aspen Properties databank, provide the XXXX.APPDF file. If the file is not located in the same directory as your B-JAC input file, use the browse button to set the correct path to the *.APPDF file.
Condensation Curve Calculation Method The calculation method determines which correlations the program will use to determine the vapor-liquid equilibrium. The choice of method is dependent on the degree of non-ideality of the vapor and liquid phases and the amount of data available. The methods can be divided into three general groups: Ideal - correlations for ideal mixtures. The ideal method uses ideal gas laws for the vapor phase and ideal solution laws for the liquid phase. You should use this method when you do not have information on the degree of nonideality. This method allows for up to 50 components. Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL - correlations for non-ideal mixtures which require interaction parameters. These methods are limited to ten components. The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. The Uniquac method also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter and the NRTL method requires an additional Alpha parameter. The Wilson method is particularly suitable for strongly non-ideal binary mixtures, e.g., solutions of alcohols with hydrocarbons. The Uniquac method is applicable for both vapor-liquid equilibrium and liquid-liquid equilibrium (immiscibles). It can be used for solutions containing small or large molecules, including polymers. In addition, Uniquac's interaction parameters are less temperature dependent than those for Van Laar and Wilson. Soave-Redlich-Kwong, Peng-Robinson, and Chao-Seader - correlations for non-ideal mixtures which do not require interaction parameters. The Soave-Redlich-Kwong and PengRobinson methods can be used on a number of systems containing hydrocarbons, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, and other weakly polar components. They can also be applied with success to systems which form an azeotrope, and which involve associating substances such as water and alcohols. They can predict vapor phase properties at any given pressure. The Chao-Seader method uses Redlich-Kwong equations for vapor phase nonideality and an empirical correlation for liquid phase non-ideality. It is used with success in the petroleum industry. It is recommended for use at pressures less than 68 bar (1000 psia) and temperatures greater than -18°C (0°F). The program uses the original Chao-Seader correlation with the Grayson-Streed modification. There is no strict demarcation between these two methods since they are closely related. These methods allow for up to 50 components.
3-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Condensation Curve Calculation Type For a condensing stream, you should determine if your case is closer to integral or differential condensation. Integral condensation assumes that the vapor and liquid condensate are kept close enough together to maintain equilibrium, and that the condensate formed at the beginning of the condensing range is carried through with the vapor to the outlet. Vertical tube side condensation is the best case of integral condensation. Other cases which closely approach integral condensation are: horizontal tube side condensation, vertical shell side condensation, and horizontal shell side crossflow condensation (X-shell). In differential condensation the liquid condensate is removed from the vapor, thus changing the equilibrium and lowering the dew point of the remaining vapor. The clearest case of differential condensation is seen in the knockback reflux condenser, where the liquid condensate runs back toward the inlet while the vapor continues toward the outlet. Shell side condensation in a horizontal E or J shell is somewhere between true integral condensation and differential condensation. If you want to be conservative, treat these cases as differential condensation. However, the industry has traditionally designed them as integral condensation. More condensate will be present at any given temperature with integral condensation versus differential condensation. In the heat exchanger design, this results in a higher mean temperature difference for integral condensation compared to differential condensation.
Effect of pressure drop on condensation The program will default to calculating the condensing curve in isobaric conditions (constant operating pressure). If you are having the B-JAC Property program generate the VLE curve, you may specify non-isobaric conditions and the program will allocate the specified pressure drop based on temperature increments along the condensing curve. The vapor/liquid equilibrium at various temperature points will be calculated using an adjusted operating pressure.
Estimated pressure drop for hot side Provide the estimated hot side pressure drop through the exchanger. The program will use this pressure drop to adjust the VLE curve, if you are using the B-JAC Property program to generate the VLE curve. If actual pressure varies more than 20 percent from this estimated pressure drop, adjust this value to the actual and rerun Hetran. The VLE calculation program will not permit the condensate to re-flash. If calculations indicate that this is happening, the program will suggest using a lower estimated pressure drop.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-15
Vaporization Curve Calculation Method The calculation method determines which correlations the program will use to determine the vapor-liquid equilibrium. The choice of method is dependent on the degree of nonideality of the vapor and liquid phases and the amount of data available. The methods can be divided into three general groups: Ideal - correlations for ideal mixtures. The ideal method uses ideal gas laws for the vapor phase and ideal solution laws for the liquid phase. You should use this method when you do not have information on the degree of non-ideality. This method allows for up to 50 components. Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL - correlations for non-ideal mixtures which require interaction parameters. These methods are limited to ten components. The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. The Uniquac method also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter and the NRTL method requires an additional Alpha parameter. The Wilson method is particularly suitable for strongly non-ideal binary mixtures, e.g., solutions of alcohols with hydrocarbons. The Uniquac method is applicable for both vapor-liquid equilibrium and liquid-liquid equilibrium (immiscibles). It can be used for solutions containing small or large molecules, including polymers. In addition, Uniquac's interaction parameters are less temperature dependent than those for Van Laar and Wilson. Soave-Redlich-Kwong, Peng-Robinson, and Chao-Seader - correlations for non-ideal mixtures that do not require interaction parameters. The Soave-Redlich-Kwong and PengRobinson methods can be used on a number of systems containing hydrocarbons, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, and other weakly polar components. They can also be applied with success to systems which form an azeotrope, and which involve associating substances such as water and alcohols. They can predict vapor phase properties at any given pressure. The Chao-Seader method uses Redlich-Kwong equations for vapor phase nonideality and an empirical correlation for liquid phase non-ideality. It is used with success in the petroleum industry. It is recommended for use at pressures less than 68 bar (1000 psia) and temperatures greater than -18°C (0°F). The program uses the original Chao-Seader correlation with the Grayson-Streed modification. There is no strict demarcation between these two methods since they are closely related. These methods allow for up to 50 components.
Effect of pressure drop on vaporization The program will default to calculating the vaporization curve in isobaric conditions (constant operating pressure). If you are having the B-JAC Property program generate the VLE curve, you may specify non-isobaric conditions and the program will allocate the specified pressure drop based on temperature increments along the vaporization curve. The vapor/liquid equilibrium at various temperature points will be calculated using an adjusted operating pressure.
3-16
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Estimated pressure drop for cold side Provide the estimated cold side pressure drop through the exchanger. The program will use this pressure drop to adjust the VLE curve. If actual pressure varies more than 20% from this estimated pressure drop, adjust this value to the actual and rerun Hetran.
Hot Side Composition If the stream physical properties are being accessed from the Aspen B-JAC databank or the program is calculating a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve (B-JAC Props or Aspen Properties); the stream composition must be defined in this table.
Hot side composition specification Enter weight flow rate or %, mole flow rate or %, volume flow rate or %. The composition specification determines on what basis the mixture physical properties calculations should be made.
Components The components field identifies the components in the stream. Properties for components can be accessed from the databanks by specifying the B-JAC Compound name. A "Search" facility has been provided to allow you to easily scan and select compounds from the databank. When the program is calculating a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve, you also have the option of specifying individual component physical properties by using the "Source" entry. If this is used, the component field will be used to identify the component in the results.
Vapor in, Liquid in, Vapor out, Liquid out These fields identify the composition of the stream in each phase and is dependant on the Composition Specification described above. You must specify the inlet compositions if referencing the databank for physical properties. If outlet compositions are not specified, the program will assume the same composition as the inlet. The data for each column is normalized to calculate the individual components fraction.
Component Type Component type field is available for all complex condensing applications. This field allows you to specify noncondensables and immiscible components. If you are not sure of the component type, the program will attempt to determine if it is a noncondensable but in general it is better to identify the type if known. If a component does not condense any liquid over the temperature range in the exchanger, it is best to identify it as a noncondensable.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-17
Source The Source field is currently only available for components when the program is calculating vapor/liquid equilibrium curves. The Source of the component may be "Databank" or "User". "Databank" indicates that all component properties will be retrieved from one of the B-JAC databanks. "User" indicates that this component's physical properties are to be specified by the user.
Component Properties Hot Side Used only for calculating condensing curves within Aspen Hetran. Allows the user to override databank properties or input properties not in the databank. The physical properties required for various applications on the hot side are listed below: Reference temperature Viscosity vapor Thermal conductivity vapor Vapor pressure Viscosity liquid Thermal conductivity liquid Molecular volume Critical pressure
Density vapor Specific heat vapor Latent heat Density liquid Specific heat liquid Surface tension liquid Molecular weight Critical temperature
Interaction Parameters The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. This data is not available from the databank and must be provided by the user. An example for the NRTL parameters is shown below. NRTL Method --Example with 3 components (Reference Dechema) NRTL “A” Interactive Parameters –Hetran inputted parameters 1 1 --
2
3
A21 A31
2 A12 --
A32
3 A13 A23 --
3-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
NRTL “Alpha” Parameters –Hetran inputted parameters 1
2
3
1 --------
Alpha21
Alpha31
2 Alpha12
--------
Alpha32
3 Alpha13
Alpha23
--------
NRTL – Conversion from Aspen Properties parameters to Hetran parameters: Aspen Properties NRTL Parameters – The parameters AIJ, AJI, DJI, DIJ, EIJ, EJI, FIJ, FJI, TLOWER, & TUPPER in Aspen Properties, which are not shown below, are not required for the Hetran NRTL method. Aspen Properties NRTL Interactive Parameters Component I
Component 1 Component 1
Component 2
Component J
Component 2 Component 3
Component 3
BIJ
BIJ12
BIJ13
BIJ23
BJI
BJI12
BJI13
BJI23
CIJ
CIJ12
CIJ13
CIJ23
“A” Interactive Parameters – Conversion from Aspen Properties to Hetran 1
2
3
1 --
A21=BJI12*1.98721
A31=BJI13*1.98721
2 A12=BIJ12*1.98721
--
A32-BJI23*1.98721
3 A13=BIJ13*1.98721
A23=BIJ23*1.98721
--
“Alpha” Parameters – Conversion from Aspen Properties to Hetran 1
2
3
1 --
Alpha21=CIJ12
Alpha31=CIJ13
2 Alpha12= CIJ12
--
Alpha32=CIJ23
3 Alpha13=CIJ13
Alpha23=CIJ23
--
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-19
NRTL – Alpha parameters The NRTL method requires binary interaction parameters for each pair of components and an additional Alpha parameter. This data is not available from the databank. Reference the section on Interactive Parameters for an example.
Uniquac – Surface & Volume parameters The Uniquac method requires binary interaction parameters for each pair of components and also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter. This data is not available from the databank.
Hot Side Properties The physical properties required for the hot side fluids. Any inputted properties will override information coming from the B-JAC Property Database or Aspen Properties programs.
Temperature If you are entering a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve, you must specify multiple temperature points on the curve encompassing the expected inlet and outlet temperatures of the exchanger. The dew and bubble points of the stream are recommended. Condensation curves must have the dew point and vaporization curves must have the bubble point. The first point on the curve does not have to agree with the inlet temperature although it is recommended. For simulation runs, it is best to specify the curve down to the inlet temperature of the opposite side. You can specify as few as one temperature or as many as 13 temperatures. The temperatures entered for no phase change fluids should at least include both the inlet and outlet temperatures. The inlet temperature of the opposite side fluid should also be included as a 3rd temperature point for viscous fluids. Multiple temperature points, including the inlet and outlet, should be entered when a change of phase is present.
Heat Load For each temperature point you must specify a parameter defining the heat load. For heat load you may specify cumulative heat load, incremental heat load, or enthalpies.
3-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Vapor/Liquid Composition For each temperature point you must also specify a parameter defining the vapor/liquid composition. For the composition, you may specify vapor flowrate, liquid flowrate, vapor mass fraction, or liquid mass fraction. The program will calculate the other parameters based on the entry and the total flow specified under process data. Vapor and liquid mass fractions are recommended because they are independent of flow rates. For complex condensers, the composition should be the total vapor stream including noncondensables.
Liquid and Vapor Properties The necessary physical properties are dependent on the type of application. If you are referencing the databank for a fluid, you do not need to enter any data on the corresponding physical properties input screens. However, it is also possible to specify any property, even if you are referencing the databank. Any specified property will then override the value from the databank. The properties should be self-explanatory. A few clarifications follow.
Specific Heat Provide the specific heat for the component at the referenced temperature.
Thermal Conductivity Provide the thermal conductivity for the component at the referenced temperature.
Viscosity The viscosity requested is the dynamic (absolute) viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s (note that centipoise and mPa*s are equal). To convert kinematic viscosity in centistokes to dynamic viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s, multiply centistokes by the specific gravity. The Aspen Hetran program uses a special logarithmic formula to interpolate or extrapolate the viscosity to the calculated tube wall temperature. However when a liquid is relatively viscous, say greater than 5 mPa*s (5 cp), and especially when it is being cooled, the accuracy of the viscosity at the tube wall can be very important to calculating an accurate film coefficient. In these cases, you should specify the viscosity at a third point, which extends the viscosity points to encompass the tube wall temperature. This third temperature point may extend to as low (if being cooled) or as high (if being heated) as the inlet temperature on the other side.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-21
Density Be sure to specify density and not specific gravity. Convert specific gravity to density by using the appropriate formula: density, lb/ft3 = 62.4 * specific gravity density, kg/m3 = 1000 * specific gravity The density can also be derived from the API gravity, using this formula: density, lb/ft3 = 8829.6 / ( API + 131.5 )
Surface Tension Surface tension is needed for vaporizing fluids. If you do not have surface tension information available, the program will estimate a value.
Latent Heat Provide latent heat for change of phase applications.
Molecular Weight Provide the molecular weight of the vapor for change of phase applications.
Diffusivity The diffusivity of the vapor is used in the determination of the condensing coefficient for the mass transfer method. Therefore, provide this property if data is available. If these are not know, the program will estimate.
Noncondensables Noncondensables are those vapor components in a condensing stream, which do not condense in any significant proportions at the expected tube wall temperature. Examples: hydrogen, CO2, Air, CO, etc. The following properties need to be provided for the noncondensables or referenced from the database: Specific Heat, Thermal Conductivity, Viscosity, Density, Molecular Weight, and Molecular Volume of the noncondensable. The noncondensable flow rate is required if it has not been defined in the databank composition input.
3-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Cold Side Composition If the stream physical properties are being accessed from the Aspen B-JAC databank or the program is calculating a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve (B-JAC Props or Aspen Properties); the stream composition must be defined in this table.
Composition specification Enter weight flow rate or % , mole flow rate or % , volume flow rate or %. The composition specification determines on what basis the mixture physical properties calculations should be made.
Components The components field identifies the components in the stream. Properties for components can be accessed from the databanks by specifying the Aspen B-JAC Compound name. A "Search" facility has been provided to allow you to easily scan and select compounds from the databank. When the program is calculating a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve, you also have the option of specifying individual component physical properties by using the "Source" entry. If this is used, the component field will be used to identify the component in the results.
Vapor In, Liquid In, Vapor Out, Liquid Out These fields identify the composition of the stream in each phase and is dependant on the Composition Specification described above. You must specify the inlet compositions if referencing the databank for physical properties. If outlet compositions are not specified, the program will assume the same composition as the inlet. The data for each column is normalized to calculate the individual component fraction.
Component Type Specify the component type, inert, for each component. If you are not sure of the component type, the program will select for you but in general it is better to identify the type if known.
Source The Source field is currently only available for components when the program is calculating vapor/liquid equilibrium curves. The Source of the component may be "Databank" or "User." "Databank" indicates that all component properties will be retrieved from one of the B-JAC databanks. "User" indicates that this component's physical properties are to be specified by the user.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-23
Component Properties Cold Side Used only for calculating vaporization curves within Aspen Hetran. Allows the user to override databank properties or input properties not in the databank. The required physical properties required for the various applications on the cold side are listed below: Reference temperature Viscosity vapor Thermal conductivity vapor Vapor pressure Viscosity liquid Thermal conductivity liquid Molecular volume Critical pressure
Density vapor Specific heat vapor Latent heat Density liquid Specific heat liquid Surface tension liquid Molecular weight Critical temperature
Interaction Parameters The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. This data is not available from the databank.
NRTL – Alpha parameters The NRTL method requires binary interaction parameters for each pair of components and an additional Alpha parameter. This data is not available from the databank.
Uniquac – Surface & Volume parameters The Uniquac method requires binary interaction parameters for each pair of components and also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter. This data is not available from the databank.
3-24
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Cold Side Properties The physical properties required for the hot side fluids. Any properties inputted will override information from B-JAC Props or Aspen Properties programs.
Temperature If you are entering a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve, you must specify multiple temperature points on the curve encompassing the expected inlet and outlet temperatures of the exchanger. The dew and bubble points of the stream are recommended. Condensation curves must have the dew point and vaporization curves must have the bubble point. The first point on the curve does not have to agree with the inlet temperature although it is recommended. For simulation runs, it is best to specify the curve up to the inlet temperature of the opposite side. You can specify as few as one temperature or as many as 13 temperatures. The temperatures entered for no phase change fluids should at least include both the inlet and outlet temperatures. The inlet temperature of the opposite side fluid should also be included as a 3rd temperature point for viscous fluids. Multiple temperature points, including the inlet and outlet, should be entered when a change of phase is present.
Heat Load For each temperature point you must specify a parameter defining the heat load. For heat load you may specify cumulative heat load, incremental heat load, or enthalpies.
Vapor/Liquid Composition For each temperature point you must also specify a parameter defining the vapor/liquid composition. For the composition, you may specify vapor flowrate, liquid flowrate, vapor mass fraction, or liquid mass fraction. The program will calculate the other parameters based on the entry and the total flow specified under process data. Vapor and liquid mass fractions are recommended because they are independent of flow rates.
Liquid and Vapor Properties The necessary physical properties are dependent on the type of application. If you are referencing the databank for a fluid, you do not need to enter any data on the corresponding physical properties input screens. However, it is also possible to specify any property, even if you are referencing the databank. Any specified property will then override the value from the databank. The properties should be self-explanatory. A few clarifications follow.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-25
Specific Heat Provide the specific heat for the component at the referenced temperature.
Thermal Conductivity Provide the thermal conductivity for the component at the referenced temperature.
Viscosity The viscosity requested is the dynamic (absolute) viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s (note that centipoise and mPa*s are equal). To convert kinematic viscosity in centistokes to dynamic viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s, multiply centistokes by the specific gravity. The Aspen Hetran program uses a special logarithmic formula to interpolate or extrapolate the viscosity to the calculated tube wall temperature. However when a liquid is relatively viscous, say greater than 5 mPa*s (5 cp), and especially when it is being cooled, the accuracy of the viscosity at the tube wall can be very important to calculating an accurate film coefficient. In these cases, you should specify the viscosity at a third point, which extends the viscosity points to encompass the tube wall temperature. This third temperature point may extend to as low (if being cooled) or as high (if being heated) as the inlet temperature on the other side.
Density Be sure to specify density and not specific gravity. Convert specific gravity to density by using the appropriate formula: density, lb/ft3 = 62.4 * specific gravity density, kg/m3 = 1000 * specific gravity The density can also be derived from the API gravity, using this formula: density, lb/ft3 = 8829.6 / ( API + 131.5 )
Surface Tension Surface tension is needed for vaporizing fluids. If you do not have surface tension information available, the program will estimate a value.
Molecular Weight Provide the molecular weight of the vapor for change of phase applications.
3-26
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Diffusivity If diffusivity values are not provided the program will estimate them. This property is important for the accurate prediction of condensing film coefficients using the mass transfer model.
Critical Pressure The critical pressure is the pressure above which a liquid cannot be vaporized no matter how high the temperature. For mixtures, the critical pressure should be the sum of the critical pressures of each component weighted by their mole fractions. This input is required to calculate the nucleate boiling coefficient. If you do not enter a value for the critical pressure, the program will estimate a value.
Vaporization curve adjustment for pressure For certain applications (thermosiphons reboilers, pool boilers, etc.), it is advisable to adjust the vaporization curve for pressure changes during the analysis of the exchanger. This input specifies the type of adjustment to be made.
Reference Pressure For vaporization applications, a second reference pressure with the corresponding bubble and/or dew point(s) is recommended. By inputting this data, the program can determine the change in bubble point temperature with the change in pressure. This will be used to correct the vaporization curve for pressure changes.
Bubble point at reference pressure For vaporization applications, a bubble point at reference pressure may be optionally specified. The bubble point at reference pressure and bubble point at operating pressure are used to determine the change in bubble point temperature with change in pressure. This will be used to correct the vaporization curve for pressure changes.
Dew point at reference pressure For vaporization applications, a dew point at reference pressure may be optionally specified. The dew point at reference pressure and dew point at operating pressure are used to determine the change in dew point temperature with change in pressure. This will be used to correct the vaporization curve for pressure changes.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-27
Exchanger Geometry The Geometry Section is subdivided into six sections: Exchanger Type, Tubes, Bundle, Baffles, Rating/Simulation Data, Nozzles
Exchanger Type Front head type
The front head type should be selected based upon the service needs for the exchanger. A full access cover provided in the A, C, and N type heads may be needed if the tube side of the exchanger must be cleaned frequently. The B type is generally the most economical type head. Default: B Type
3-28
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Shell type
E type: Generally provides the best heat transfer but also the highest shell side pressure drop. Used for temperature cross applications where pure counter current flow is needed. F type: This two pass shell can enhance shell side heat transfer and also maintain counter current flow if needed for temperature cross applications. G type: Will enhance the shell side film coefficient for a given exchanger size. H type: A good choice for low shell side operating pressure applications. Pressure drop can be minimized. Used for shell side thermosiphons. J type: Used often for shell side condensers. With two inlet vapor nozzles on top and the single condensate nozzle on bottom, vibration problems can be avoided. K type: Used for kettle type shell side reboilers. X type: Good for low shell side pressure applications. Units is provided with support plates which provides pure cross flow through the bundle. Multiple inlet and outlet nozzles or flow distributors are recommended to assure full distribution of the flow along the bundle. V type shell: This type is not currently part of the TEMA standards. It is used for very low shell side pressure drops. It is especially well suited for vacuum condensers. The vapor belt is an enlarged shell over part of the bundle length. Default: E type (except K type shell side pool boilers)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-29
Rear head type
The rear head type affects the thermal design, because it determines the outer tube limits and therefore the number of tubes and the required number of tube passes. Default: U type for kettle shells, M type for all others
Exchanger position Specify that the exchanger is to be installed in the horizontal or vertical position. Default: vertical for tube side thermosiphon; horizontal for all others
3-30
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Front cover type
Flat
E llip so idal
T orisp herical
`
Co ne
E lbo w
K lo pper
H em i
K o rbbo gen
This item will only appear when you have specified a B type front head. A flat bolted cover is assumed for the other front head types. This is included for the accuracy of the cost estimate and a more complete heat exchanger specification. Default: ellipsoidal
Cover welded to a cylinder The cover welded to a cylinder option determines if there is a cylinder between the front head flange (or tubesheet in the case of a hemispherical cover) and the attached cover. This is included for the accuracy of the cost estimate and a more complete heat exchanger specification. Default: yes, except when the cover is hemispherical
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-31
Rear cover type
Flat Bolted
Hemi
Dished
Flat Welded
Torispherical
Ellipsoidal
Cone
Klopper
Elbow
Korbbogen
The flat bolted cover is for L, N, P and W type rear heads. The flat welded and form covers (except for the dished cover) are available on the M type rear heads. The dished and ellipsoidal is available on the S and T rear heads. This is included for accuracy of the cost estimate and a more complete heat exchanger specification. Default: flat bolted for L, N, P, or W; ellipsoidal for M type; dished for S or T type
Cover welded to a cylinder The cover welded to a cylinder option only applies to M type rear heads. For other cases it is ignored. It determines if there is a cylinder between the rear head flange (or tubesheet in the case of a hemispherical cover) and the attached cover. This is included for the accuracy of the cost estimate and a more complete heat exchanger specification. Default: yes, except when the cover is hemispherical
3-32
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Shell cover type
Flat Bolted
Hemi
Flat Welded
Klopper
Ellipsoidal
Torispherical
Korbbogen
A shell cover type should be specified for a U-tube, S, or T type rear head exchangers. Shell cover may be welded directly to shell cylinder or bolted to the shell cylinder with a pair of mating body flanges. Default: Ellipsoidal for U-tube, S, T type rear heads
Tubesheet type
The tubesheet type has a very significant effect on both the thermal design and the cost. Double tubesheets are used when it is extremely important to avoid any leakage between the shell and tube side fluids. Double tubesheets are most often used with fixed tubesheet exchangers, although they can also be used with U-tubes and outside packed floating heads. Double tubesheets shorten the length of the tube which is in contact with the shell side fluid and therefore reduce the effective surface area. They also affect the location of the shell side nozzles and the possible baffle spacings. The gap type double tubesheet has a space, usually about 150 mm (6 in.), between the inner (shell side) and outer (tube side) tubesheets. The integral type double tubesheet is made by machining out a honeycomb pattern inside a single thick piece of plate so that any leaking
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-33
fluid can flow down through the inside of the tubesheet to a drain. This type is rare, since it requires special fabrication tools and experience. Default: normal single tubesheet(s)
Tube to tubesheet joint
The tube to tubesheet joint does not affect the thermal design, but it does have a small effect on the mechanical design and sometimes a significant effect on the cost. The most common type of tube to tubesheet joint is expanded only with 2 grooves. Although TEMA Class C allows expanded joints without grooves, most fabricators will groove the tube holes whenever the tubes are not welded to the tubesheet. For more rigorous service, the tube to tubesheet joint should be welded. The most common welded joints are expanded and seal welded with 2 grooves and expanded and strength welded with 2 grooves. Default: expanded only with 2 grooves for normal service; expanded and strength welded with 2 grooves for lethal service
3-34
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Include expansion joint The specification of an expansion joint will not affect the thermal design calculations, but it will have a significant effect on the cost. This item only applies to fixed tubesheet heat exchangers; it is ignored for all other types. The calculations required to determine the need for an expansion joint are quite complex and are beyond the scope of the Hetran program. These calculations are part of the Teams program. However the Hetran program will estimate the differential expansion between the tubes and the shell and make a simple determination on the need for an expansion joint if you use the program default. Default: program will choose based on estimated differential expansion
Flange type – hot side The body flange type refers to the type of flanges that are attached to the shell cylinder for the shell side and the head cylinder(s) for the tube side. This item can have a significant effect on the cost. The shell side body flange type (applicable to removable bundle designs only) also can have an effect on the thermal design, since the choice will determine how close the shell side nozzles can be to the tubesheet and therefore where the first and last baffles can be located. The program will default to a ring type body flange if cylinder is carbon steel. If the cylinder is alloy, the default will be a lap-joint type flange.
Ring
Ring with Overlay
Lap Joint
Hub
Default: Ring if attached to a carbon steel cylinder and not TEMA R Hub if attached to a carbon steel cylinder and TEMA R Lap joint if attached to an alloy cylinder
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-35
Flange type – cold side The body flange type refers to the type of flanges that are attached to the shell cylinder for the shell side and the head cylinder(s) for the tube side. This item can have a significant effect on the cost. The shell side body flange type (applicable to removable bundle designs only) also can have an effect on the thermal design, since the choice will determine how close the shell side nozzles can be to the tubesheet and therefore where the first and last baffles can be located. The program will default to a ring type body flange if cylinder is carbon steel. If the cylinder is alloy, the default will be a lap-joint type flange.
Ring
Ring with Overlay
Lap Joint
Hub
Default: Ring if attached to a carbon steel cylinder and not TEMA R Hub if attached to a carbon steel cylinder and TEMA R Lap joint if attached to an alloy cylinder
Tubes Tube type The program covers plain tubes and external integral circumferentially finned tubes. Externally finned tubes become advantageous when the shell side film coefficient is much less than the tube side film coefficient. However there are some applications where finned tubes are not recommended. They are not usually recommended for cases where there is high fouling on the shell side, or very viscous flow, or for condensation where there is a high liquid surface tension. The dimensional standards for Wolverine's High Performance finned tubes, are built into the program. These standard finned tubes are available in tube diameters of 12.7, 15.9, 19.1, and 25.4 mm or 0.5, 0.625, 0.75, and 1.0 inch. Reference the appendix for available sizes. Default: plain tubes
3-36
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube outside diameter You can specify any size for the tube outside diameter, however the correlations have been developed based on tube sizes from 10 to 50 mm (0.375 to 2.0 inch). The most common sizes in the U.S. are 0.625, 0.75, and 1.0 inch. In many other countries, the most common sizes are 16, 20, and 25 mm. If you do not know what tube diameter to use, start with a 20 mm diameter, if you work with ISO standards, or a 0.75 inch diameter if you work with American standards. This size is readily available in nearly all tube materials. The primary exception is for graphite which is made in 32, 37, and 50 mm or 1.25, 1.5, and 2 inch outside diameters. For integral low fin tubes, the tube outside diameter is the outside diameter of the fin. Default: 19.05 mm or 0.75 inch
Tube wall thickness You should choose the tube wall thickness based on considerations of corrosion, pressure, and company standards. If you work with ANSI standards, the thicknesses follow the BWG standards. These are listed for your reference in the Appendix of this manual and in the Help facility. The program defaults are a function of material per TEMA recommendations and a function of pressure. The Aspen Hetran program will check the specified tube wall thickness for internal pressure and issue a warning if it is inadequate. The selections to the right of the input field are provided for easy selection using the mouse. The values are not limited to those listed. Default:
0.065 in. or 1.6 mm for carbon steel; 0.028 in. or 0.7 mm for titanium; 0.180 in. or 5 mm for graphite; 0.049 in. or 1.2 mm for other materials
Tube wall roughness The relative roughness of the inside tube surface will affect the calculated tube side pressure drops. The program defaults a relatively smooth tube surface (5.91 x 10-5 inch). A commercial grade pipe has a relative roughness of 1.97 x 10-3 inch. Default:
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Smooth tube, 5.91 x 10-5 inch ( .0015 mm)
3-37
Tube wall specification In many countries, the tube wall thickness is specified as either average or minimum. Average means the average wall thickness will be at least the specified thickness; typically the thickness may vary up to 12%. With minimum wall, all parts of the tube must be at least the specified thickness. In the U.S., most heat exchanger tubes are specified as average wall thickness. In other countries, for example Germany, the standard requires minimum wall. This item has a small effect on tube side pressure drop and a moderate effect on heat exchanger cost. Default: average
Tube pitch The tube pitch is the center to center distance between two adjacent tubes. Generally the tube pitch should be approximately 1.25 times the tube O.D. It some cases, it may be desirable to increase the tube pitch in order to better satisfy the shell side allowable pressure drop. It is not recommended to increase the tube pitch beyond 1.5 times the tube O.D. Minimum tube pitches are suggested by TEMA as a function of tube O.D., tube pattern, and TEMA class. The program will default to the TEMA minimum tube pitch, if you are designing to TEMA standards. The DIN standards also cover tube pitch. The DIN tube pitches are a function of tube O.D., tube pattern, and tube to tubesheet joint. The program will default to the DIN standard if you are designing to DIN standards. Default: TEMA minimum or DIN standard
Tube material For available tube materials, reference the material section. Default: Carbon steel
3-38
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube Pattern The tube pattern is the layout of the tubes in relation to the direction of the shell side crossflow, which is normal to the baffle cut edge. The one exception to this is pool boiling in a kettle type reboiler where the tube supports are sometimes baffles with a vertical cut. Use triangular when you want to maximize the shell side film coefficient and maximize the number of tubes, and shell side cleaning is not a major concern. If you must be able to mechanically clean the shell side of the bundle, then choose square or rotated square. Rotated square will give the higher film coefficient and higher pressure drop, but it will usually have fewer tubes than a square layout. Rotated triangular is rarely the optimum, because it has a comparatively poor conversion of pressure drop to heat transfer. Square is recommended for pool boilers to provide escape lanes for the vapor generated. Default: triangular - fixed tubesheet exchangers, square - pool boilers
Fin density If you specify fin tubes as the tube type, then you must specify the desired fin density (i.e., the number of fins per inch or per meter depending on the system of measure). Since the possible fin densities are very dependent on the tube material, you should be sure that the desired fin density is commercially available. The dimensional standards for finned tubes made by Wolverine, and High Performance Tube are built into the program. If you choose one of these, the program will automatically supply the corresponding fin height, fin thickness, and ratio of tube outside to inside surface area. If you do not choose one of the standard fin densities, then you must also supply the other fin data, which follows in the input.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-39
The standard fin densities for various materials are: Carbon Steel
19
Stainless Steel
16, 28
Copper
19, 26
Copper-Nickel 90/10
16, 19, 26
Copper-Nickel 70/30
19, 26
Nickel Carbon Alloy 201
19
Nickel Alloy 400 (Monel)
28
Nickel Alloy 600 (Inconel)
28
Nickel Alloy 800
28
Hastelloy
30
Titanium
30
Admiralty
19, 26
Aluminum-Brass Alloy 687
19
Fin height The fin height is the height above the root diameter of the tube.
Fin thickness The fin thickness is the average fin thickness.
Surface area per unit length The outside tube surface area per unit length of tube. Average outside surface area / Unit length: Tube O.D.
0.750 in
0.406-0.500 ft2/ft
Tube O.D.
19.05 mm
0.124-0.152 m2/m
Standard fin dimensions: Fin Density
16-30 fins/in
630-1181 fins/m
Fin Height
0.0625-0.032 in
1.59-0.81 mm
Fin Thickness 0.011-0.012 in
3-40
0.28-0.31 mm
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Outside/Inside surface area ratio The ratio of the tube outside to inside surface area is the developed surface area outside divided by the surface area inside per unit length.
Twisted Tape Insert Ratio of Length to Width for 180 Degree Twist Provide the ratio of the length of tape required to make a 180 degree twist to the width of the tape. The smaller the ratio, the tighter the twist.
Twisted Tape Insert Width Specify the width of twisted tape insert.
Tapered tube ends for knockback condensers Select to have tapered tube ends at inlet tubesheet. Tapered tube ends promote better condensate drainage from the tubes and reduce the potential for flooding.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-41
Bundle Shell entrance construction
Normally, it is advantageous to use a full tube layout, i.e., to place as many tubes as possible within the outer tube limits. This maximizes the surface area within a given shell diameter and minimizes bypassing. However when this results in excessive velocities entering the shell, then it is recommended that some tubes near the inlet nozzle be removed or a dome or distributor belt be installed. If you choose the option to remove tubes within the nozzle projection, the program will eliminate any tubes, which would extend beyond the lowest part of the nozzle cylinder. In many cases, using this option will have no effect since nozzles, which are relatively small in comparison to the shell diameter (say smaller than 1/4 the shell diameter) will not extend to the first row of tubes anyway. A nozzle dome with a full layout reduces the velocity entering the shell, but does not effect the velocity entering the bundle. A distributor belt with a full layout is the most effective way to reduce entrance velocities, but it is usually the most expensive. When you remove tubes so that the shell entrance area equals the inlet nozzle area, the tube layout is the same as when installing an impingement plate on the bundle, although the presence of the impingement plate is determined by another input item described next. This is usually a very effective way of decreasing entrance velocities. Default: normal with full layout if no impingement plate; nozzle dome with full layout if impingement plate in nozzle dome; remove tubes so that shell entrance area equals inlet nozzle area if impingement plate on bundle
3-42
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Shell exit construction
Normally, it is advantageous to use a full tube layout, i.e., to place as many tubes as possible within the outer tube limits. This maximizes the surface area within a given shell diameter and minimizes bypassing. However when this results in excessive velocities exiting the bundle or shell, then it is recommended that some tubes near the outlet nozzle be removed or a dome or distributor belt be installed. If you choose the option to remove tubes within the nozzle projection, the program will eliminate any tubes, which would extend beyond the lowest part of the nozzle cylinder. In many cases, using this option will have no effect since nozzles, which are relatively small in comparison to the shell diameter (say smaller than 1/4 the shell diameter) will not extend to the first row of tubes anyway. A nozzle dome with a full layout reduces the velocity exiting the shell, but does not effect the velocity exiting the bundle. A distributor belt with a full layout is the most effective way to reduce exit velocities, but it is usually the most expensive. When you remove tubes so that the shell entrance area equals the inlet nozzle area, it is usually a very effective way of decreasing exit velocities. Default: same as shell entrance construction if inlet and outlet nozzles are at the same orientation; otherwise, normal with full layout
Provide disengagement space in shell (pool boilers only) If specified, the shell diameter will be increased to provide disengagement space for the vapor generated. If a kettle shell is specified, the program will always provide the disengagement space.
Percent of shell diameter for disengagement (pool boilers only) You can specify the percentage of disengagement space needed.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-43
Impingement protection type
The purpose of impingement protection is to protect the tubes directly under the inlet nozzle by deflecting the bullet shaped flow of high velocity fluids or the force of entrained droplets. TEMA recommends that inlet impingement protection be installed under the following conditions: • • • • •
When the rho*V2 through the inlet nozzle exceeds 2232 kg/(m*s2) or 1500 lb/(ft*s2) for non-corrosive, non-abrasive, single phase fluids When the rho*V2 through the inlet nozzle exceeds 744 kg/(m*s2) or 500 lb/(ft*s2) for corrosive or abrasive liquids When there is a nominally saturated vapor When there is a corrosive gas When there is two phase flow at the inlet
If you choose a plate on the bundle the program will automatically remove tubes under the inlet nozzle so that the shell entrance area equals the cross-sectional area of the nozzle. This is approximately equal to removing any tubes within a distance of 1/4 the nozzle diameter under the center of the nozzle. For purposes of calculating the bundle entrance velocity, the program defaults to an impingement plate that is circular, unperforated, equal in diameter to the inside diameter of the nozzle, and approximately 3 mm or 1/8 in. thick. An alternative is to put a plate in a nozzle dome, which means suspending the impingement plate in an enlarged nozzle neck, which may be a dome or a cone. Both types have their advantages and disadvantages. If the plate is on the bundle, the flow is more widely distributed, and there is neither the expense for the enlarged nozzle neck nor the increased potential of fabrication problems when cutting a large hole in the shell (as can often happen with vapor inlet nozzles). However, since tubes are removed, it may require larger diameter shell, tubesheets, flanges, etc. Especially in cases where the tubesheets and/or shell are made of alloy and the inlet nozzle is not large, the impingement plate in the nozzle dome may be significantly less expensive. For some special applications, the plate may be perforated. The primary advantage being that the perforations will help reduce the velocity into the bundle. The main concern with perforated plates is that flow through the holes could cause localized erosion for certain tube materials. Default: circular plate on bundle if condensation or vaporization is occurring on the shell side; none otherwise
3-44
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Impingement plate diameter The program will use this input to determine the position and the dimension of the impingement plate This input is not required if you have already specified the shell inlet nozzle OD. The default is the shell inlet nozzle O.D.
Impingement plate length and width You can specify a rectangular impingement plate size. The default is the shell inlet nozzle O.D. for length and width (square plate).
Impingement plate thickness This input is required if you specify there is an impingement field. You can specify any thickness for the impingement plate. The default is 3 mm or 0.125 inch.
Impingement distance from shell ID You can specify the distance from the shell inside diameter to the impingement plate. The default is the top row of tubes.
Impingement clearance to tube edge You can specify the distance from the impingement plate to the first row of tubes.
Impingement plate perforation area % If you are using a perforated type impingement plate, you can specify the percent of area that the plate is perforated.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-45
Layout Options Pass layout
Quadrant
Mixed
Ribbon
There are several possible ways to layout tubes for four or more passes. The primary effect on the thermal design is due to the different number of tubes, which are possible for each type. Quadrant layout has the advantage of usually (but certainly not always) giving the highest tube count. It is the required layout for all U-tube designs of four or more passes. The tube side nozzles must be offset from the centerline when using quadrant layout. The program will automatically avoid quadrant layout for shells with longitudinal baffles and 6, 10, or 14 pass, in order to avoid having the longitudinal baffle bisect a pass. Mixed layout has the advantage of keeping the tube side nozzles on the centerline. It often gives a tube count close to quadrant and sometimes exceeds it. The program will automatically avoid mixed layout for shells with longitudinal baffles and 4, 8, 12, or 16 passes. Ribbon layout nearly always gives a layout with fewer tubes than quadrant or mixed layout. It is the layout the program always uses for an odd number of tube passes. It is also the layout preferred by the program for X-type shells. The primary advantage of ribbon layout is the more gradual change in operating temperature of adjacent tubes from top to bottom of the tubesheet. This can be especially important when there is a large change in temperature on the tube side, which might cause significant thermal stresses in mixed and especially quadrant layouts. Default: program will optimize
Design symmetrical tube layout Program will make the tube pattern as symmetrical as possible for the top to bottom.
Maximum % deviation in tubes per pass This input determines the acceptable deviation from the median number of tubes per pass. This value is used in the tubesheet layout subroutine to determine the maximum number of tubes.
3-46
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Ideally, it is desirable to have the same number of tubes in each pass when there is no change of phase on the tube side. However, for most layouts of more than two passes, this would require removing tubes which would otherwise fit within the outer tube limit. Since it is preferable to maximize the surface area within a given shell and minimize the possible shell side bypassing, a reasonable deviation in tubes per pass is usually acceptable. It is recommended that you avoid large deviations since this gives significantly different velocities in some passes and wastefully increases the pressure drop due to additional expansion and contraction losses. Since the Aspen Hetran program bases the tube side calculations on an average number of tubes per pass, such aberrations are not reflected in the thermal design. Default: 5 %
Number of tie rods The tie rods hold the spacers, which hold segmental baffles in place. This input has no meaning in the case of grid baffles (rod and strip baffles). TEMA has recommendations for a minimum number of tie rods, which is a function of the shell diameter. Additional tie rods are sometimes desirable to block bypassing along pass partition lanes or to better anchor double or triple segmental baffles. The Aspen Hetran program will first try to locate the tie rods so that they do not displace any tubes. If this is not possible, it will then displace tubes as necessary. The program will only locate tie rods around the periphery of the bundle, not in the middle of the bundle. Default: TEMA Standards
Number of sealing strip pairs Sealing strips are used to reduce bypassing of the shell side flow around the bundle between the shell ID and the outer most tubes. In fixed tubesheet (L, M, & N rear heads) and U-tube heat exchangers the clearance between shell ID and the outer tube limit is comparatively small. Therefore sealing strips are seldom used for these types. In inside floating head (S & T rear heads), outside packed floating head (P rear head), and floating tubesheet (W rear head) heat exchangers, the potential for bypassing is much greater. In these cases sealing strips should always be installed. The thermal design calculations in Aspen Hetran assume that sealing strips are always present in P, S, T, & W type heat exchangers. Default:
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
none for L, M, N, U, & W types 1 pair per 5 tube rows for S, T, & P types
3-47
Minimum u-bend diameter This is the minimum distance from tube center to tube center that a U-tube can be bent. The program defaults to a generally safe minimum of three times the tube O.D. The true minimum is a function of the material, the tube wall thickness, and the bending process. This has a significant effect on the thermal design, because it determines the number of tubes in a U-tube layout. You can also use this input to force the program to simulate a U-tube layout where the innermost U-tubes are installed at an angle other than the normal vertical plane (for 2 passes) or horizontal plane (for 4 or more passes). However, when doing this, the program will overpredict the number of tubes by one for each pass. Default: three times the tube outside diameter
Pass partition lane width The pass partition lane is the opening between passes as measured from the outermost edge of the tube of one pass to the outermost edge of a tube in the next pass. This necessary distance is a function of the thickness of the pass partition plate and, in the case of U-tubes, the minimum U-bend diameter. The program default equals the thickness of the pass partition plate plus 3 mm or 0.125 in. The thickness of the pass partition plate is determined according to the TEMA standards. Default: pass partition plate thickness + 3 mm or 0.125 in.
Location of center tube in 1st row You can select the tube position in the first row to be on the center line or off center. If set to program, the tube position will be set to maximize the number of tubes in the layout. Default: program will optimize
Outer tube limit diameter The outer tube limit (OTL) is the diameter of the circle beyond which no portion of a tube will be placed. This input only applies to rating mode. In design mode, the program ignores this entry. An alternative means of controlling the OTL, in both rating and design mode is to specify the "Shell ID to Baffle OD" and the "Baffle OD to outer tube limit" under Diametric Clearances in the Clearances/Options Screen. Default: program will calculate
3-48
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Layout Limits Open space between shell ID and outermost tube You can control where the program will place tubes by specifying limits at the top of the bundle, bottom of the bundle, and/or both sides of the bundle. The tubesheet layout is always symmetrical left to right, but it can be asymmetrical top to bottom. You can specify each limit as either a percentage of the shell inside diameter or as an absolute distance. Default: limited by outer tube limit
Distance from tube center You can control the distances between the center tube rows and the horizontal / vertical centerlines. Default: program optimized
Clearances Shell ID to baffle OD It is recommended that you choose the program defaults for diametrical clearances that are in accordance with the TEMA standards. If you want to override any of the default values, specify the desired diametrical clearance (two times the average gap). Default: TEMA Standards
Baffle OD to outer tube limit It is recommended that you choose the program defaults for diametrical clearances that are in accordance with the TEMA standards. If you want to override any of the default values, specify the desired diametrical clearance (two times the average gap). Default: TEMA Standards
Baffle tube hole to tube OD Note that the tolerance on the baffle hole to tube clearance is highly dependent on the drilling equipment used. Therefore be careful when specifying a baffle hole to tube clearance less than 0.8 mm or 0.03125 in. Default: TEMA standards
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-49
Baffles Baffle Type
Single Segmental
No Tubes in Window
Double Segmental
Rod
Triple Segmental
Full Support
Strip
Baffle types can be divided up into two general categories - segmental baffles and grid baffles. Segmental baffles are pieces of plate with holes for the tubes and a segment that has been cut away for a baffle window. Single, double, triple, and no tubes in window are examples of segmental baffles. Grid baffles are made from rods or strips of metal, which are assembled to provide a grid of openings through which the tubes can pass. The program covers two types of grid baffles: rod baffles and strip baffles. Both are used in cases where the allowable pressure drop is low and the tube support is important to avoid tube vibration. Segmental baffles are the most common type of baffle, with the single segmental baffle being the type used in a majority of shell and tube heat exchangers. The single segmental baffle gives the highest shell film coefficient but also the highest pressure drop. A double segmental baffle at the same baffle spacing will reduce the pressure drop dramatically (usually somewhere between 50% - 75%) but at the cost of a lower film coefficient. The baffles should have at least one row of overlap and therefore become practical for a 20 mm or 0.75 in. tube in shell diameters of 305 mm (12 in.) or greater for double segmental and 610 (24 in.) or greater for triple segmental baffles. (Note: the B-JAC triple segmental baffle is different than the TEMA triple segmental baffle.) Full Supports are used in K and X type shells where baffling is not necessary to direct the shell side flow. No Tubes In Window is a layout using a single segmental baffle with tubes removed in the baffle windows. This type is used to avoid tube vibration and may be further enhanced with intermediate supports to shorten the unsupported tube span. The standard abbreviation for no tubes in the window is NTIW. Rod Baffle design is based on the construction and correlations developed by Phillips Petroleum. Rod baffles are limited to a square tube pattern. The rods are usually about 6 mm (0.25 in.) in diameter. The rods are placed between every other tube row and welded to a
3-50
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
circular ring. There are four repeating sets where each baffle is rotated 90 degrees from the previous baffle. Strip Baffles are normally used with a triangular tube pattern. The strips are usually about 25 mm (1 in.) wide and 3 mm (0.125 in.) thick. The strips are placed between every tube row. Intersecting strips can be notched to fit together or stacked and tack welded. The strips are welded to a circular ring. Strip baffles are also sometimes referred to as nest baffles. Default: single segmental except X shells; full support for X shell
Baffle cut (% of diameter) The baffle cut applies to segmental baffles and specifies the size of the baffle window as a percent of the shell I.D. For single segmental baffles, the program allows a cut of 15% to 45%. Greater than 45% is not practical because it does not provide for enough overlap of the baffles. Less than 15% is not practical, because it results in a high pressure drop through the baffle window with relatively little gain in heat transfer (poor pressure drop to heat transfer conversion). Generally, where baffling the flow is necessary, the best baffle cut is around 25%. For double and triple segmental baffles, the baffle cut pertains to the most central baffle window. The program will automatically size the other windows for an equivalent flow area. Refer to the Appendix for a detailed explanation of baffle cuts. Default: single segmental: 45% for simple condensation and pool boiling; 25% for all others; double segmental: 28% (28/23); triple segmental: 14% (14/15/14)
Baffle cut orientation
Horizontal
Vertical
Rotated
The baffle orientation applies to the direction of the baffle cut in segmental baffles. It is very dependent on the shell side application for vertical heat exchangers; the orientation has little meaning or effect. It may affect the number of tubes in a multipass vertical heat exchanger. For horizontal heat exchangers it is far more important. For a single phase fluid in a horizontal shell, the preferable baffle orientation of single segmental baffles is horizontal, although vertical and rotated are usually also acceptable. The choice will not affect the performance, but it will affect the number of tubes in a multipass
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-51
heat exchanger. The horizontal cut has the advantage of limiting stratification of multicomponent mixtures, which might separate at low velocities. The rotated cut is rarely used. Its only advantage is for a removable bundle with multiple tube passes and rotated square layout. In this case the number of tubes can be increased by using a rotated cut, since the pass partition lane can be smaller and still maintain the cleaning paths all the way across the bundle. (From the tubesheet, the layout appears square instead of rotated square.) For horizontal shell side condensers, the orientation should always be vertical, so that the condensate can freely flow at the bottom of the heat exchanger. These baffles are frequently notched at the bottom to improve drainage. For shell side pool boiling, the cut (if using a segmental baffle) should be vertical. For shell side forced circulation vaporization, the cut should be horizontal in order to minimize the separation of liquid and vapor. For double and triple segmental baffles, the preferred baffle orientation is vertical. This provides better support for the tube bundle than a horizontal cut which would leave the topmost baffle unsupported by the shell. However this can be overcome by leaving a small strip connecting the topmost segment with the bottommost segment around the baffle window between the O.T.L. and the baffle O.D. Default:
vertical for double and triple segmental baffles; vertical for shell side condensers; vertical for F, G, H, and K type shells; horizontal for all other cases
3-52
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Number of Intermediate Supports Specify number of intermediate supports at the inlet, outlet and center spacing.
Intermediate supports are support plates or grids which are used to give additional support to the tubes in order to avoid tube vibration. Grid supports can be used between baffles, at the inlet or outlet, or at the U-bend and with any type of baffle. Support plates at other positions can only be used in conjunction with No Tubes In the Window (NTIW) baffles. Intermediate supports are assumed to have an insignificant effect on the thermal performance. Their presence will however be considered in the vibration analysis. Default: None
Type U-bend support
One or more supports can be placed at the U-bend to give additional support to the tubes in order to avoid tube vibration. Default: Full support at U-bend
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-53
Distance from nearest support/baffle to tangent of U-bend Provide the distance from the nearest support or baffle to the tangent point of the U-bends. Normally this clearance is a minimum of 3 inches.
Distance between partial supports at U-bend If two partial supports at U-bend have been specified, you can indicate the spacing between those supports. Default: 6 inch spacing
U-bend mean radius This mean radius will determine the unsupported tube span for the U-bends used in the tube vibration calculations. If not provided, the program will determine the mean radius based upon the actual tube layout. Default: Program calculated
Rod baffle dimensions You can provide the ring dimensions and support rod diameter for rod type baffles. If you leave blank, the program will select these based upon the shell diameter.
Total length of support rods per baffle Provide the total length of support rods per baffle so that the available flow area can be determined for heat transfer and pressure drop calculations. Default: Program calculated
3-54
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Rating/Simulation Data If you specified in the Application Options that a check rating or simulation of an existing exchanger is to be performed, the exchanger mechanical information shown below must be provided. Other geometry parameters such as shell type and tube size will be set at defaults unless specified in the geometry section of the input.
Shell outside diameter Provide the actual shell outside diameter. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a shell OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the shell OD or ID may be inputted. For kettles, the shell diameter is for the small cylinder near the front tubesheet, not the large cylinder.
Shell inside diameter Provide the actual shell inside diameter. If the shell OD has been specified, it is recommend to leave the ID blank. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a shell OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the shell OD or ID may be inputted. For kettles, the shell diameter is for the small cylinder near the front tubesheet, not the large cylinder.
Baffle spacing center to center Specify the center to center spacing of the baffles in the bundle.
Baffle inlet spacing Specify the inlet baffle spacing at the entrance to the bundle. For G, H, J, and X shell types, this is the spacing from the center of the nozzle to the next baffle. These types should have a full support under the nozzle. If left blank, the program will calculate the space based upon the center to center spacing and the outlet spacing. If the outlet spacing is not provided, the program will determine the remaining tube length not used by the center to center spacing and provide equal inlet and outlet spacings.
Baffle outlet spacing Specify the outlet baffle spacing at the exit of the bundle. For G, H, J, and X shell types, this is the spacing from the center of the nozzle to the next baffle. These types should have a full support under the nozzle. If the outlet spacing is not provided, the program will determine the remaining tube length not used by the center to center spacing and provide equal inlet and outlet spacings.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-55
Baffle number The number of baffles is optional input. If you do not know the number of baffles, inlet, or outlet spacing, you can approximate the number of baffles by dividing the tube length by the baffle spacing and subtracting 1. However, if you do not know the number of baffles, it is best to let the program calculate it, because it will also consider the tubesheet thickness and nozzle sizes. The number of baffles for G, H, and J type shells should include the baffle or full support under the nozzle.
Tube length Provide the tube length. The length should include the length of tubes in the tubesheets. For U-tube exchangers, provide the straight length to the U-bend tangent point.
Tube number Specify the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. This is the number of straight tubes or the number of straight lengths for a U-tube. If you specify the number, the program will check to make sure that number of tubes can fit into the shell. If you do not specify it, the program will calculate number of tubes using the tubesheet layout subroutine.
Tube passes Provide the number of tube passes in the exchanger.
Shells in series If you have multiple exchangers for a rating case, be sure to specify the appropriate number in parallel and/or series. Remember that the program requires that both shell side and tube side be connected in the same way (both in parallel or both in series). You can specify multiple exchangers in both parallel and series; for example you can have two parallel banks of three in series for a total of six heat exchangers.
Shells in parallel If you have multiple exchangers for a rating case, be sure to specify the appropriate number in parallel and/or series. Remember that the program requires that both shell side and tube side be connected in the same way (both in parallel or both in series). You can specify multiple exchangers in both parallel and series; for example you can have two parallel banks of three in series for a total of six heat exchangers.
3-56
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube Layout Option You can select to have the Hetran program generate a new tube layout every time the program runs or you can select to use an existing layout. For the second option, you must first run Hetran to establish a layout and then select the option to use the existing layout for all subsequent runs. Default: create a new layout
Kettle outside diameter Provide the actual kettle outside diameter. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a kettle OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the kettle OD or ID may be inputted.
Kettle inside diameter Provide the actual kettle inside diameter. If the kettle OD has been specified, it is recommend to leave the ID blank. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a kettle OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the kettle OD or ID may be inputted.
Vapor belt outside diameter Provide the actual vapor belt outside diameter. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a vapor belt OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the vapor belt OD or ID may be inputted.
Vapor belt inside diameter Provide the actual vapor belt inside diameter. If the vapor belt OD has been specified, it is recommend to leave the ID blank. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a vapor belt OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the vapor belt OD or ID may be inputted.
Vapor belt length The length of the vapor belt is approximately two thirds the length of the shell. The length specified will affect the entrance area pressure drop.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-57
Shell cylinder thickness Provide the actual shell cylinder thickness. If the shell OD has been provided, the program will use the cylinder thickness to calculate a shell ID and establish the OTL and tube count for the exchanger.
Front head cylinder thickness Provide the actual front head cylinder thickness.
Front tubesheet thickness Provide the actual front tubesheet thickness. The program will use the tubesheet thickness to determine the effective tube length for effective surface area calculations.
Rear tubesheet thickness Provide the actual rear tubesheet thickness. The program will use the tubesheet thickness to determine the effective tube length for effective surface area calculations.
Baffle thickness Provide the actual baffle thickness.
Tube Layout Once you have a specified an exchanger geometry and executed the Hetran in the Rating Mode, you can interactively make modifications to the tube layout. Tubes: Tubes can be removed from the layout by clicking on the tube to be removed (tube will be highlighted in red) and then selecting the red X in the menu. If you want to designate a tube as a plugged tube or as a dummy tube, click on the tube (tube will be highlighted in red) and then select the plugged tube icon or dummy tube icon from the menu. Tie Rods: To remove a tie rod, click on the tie rod (tie rod will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a tie rod, select the add a tie rod icon in the menu and then specify the location for the tie rod. Sealing Strips: To remove a sealing strip, click on the sealing strip (sealing strip will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a sealing strip, select the add a sealing strip icon in the menu and then specify the location for the sealing strip.
3-58
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Nozzles Nozzle OD Provide the nominal nozzle diameter size. If not provided the program will size the nozzle based upon nozzle mass velocity limits per TEMA and allowable pressure drop. Default: program will determine in accordance with TEMA Standards
Nozzle quantity Indicate the number of nozzles required. Default: TEMA shell type
Nozzle orientation The logical orientation of the nozzles follows the laws of nature, that is, fluids being cooled should enter the top and exit the bottom, and fluids being heated should enter the bottom and exit the top. Normally you should let the program determine the orientation. If you specify the orientation, make sure that it is compatible with the baffle cut and the number of baffles. For example, if your design has an odd number of single segmental baffles with a horizontal cut, it will necessitate that the inlet and outlet be at the same orientation. Default: program will determine
Dome OD Provide the nominal dome diameter for standard pipe schedule sizes and actual OD for larger formed head domes. Default: none
Nozzle flange rating The specification of the nozzle flange rating does not affect the thermal design calculations or the cost estimate. It is included in the input to make the specification of the heat exchanger more complete (e.g., on the TEMA specification sheet output). The pressure-temperature charts are built into the program. If you let the program determine the rating, it will choose based on the design pressure and design temperature. The values are not limited to those shown next to the input field, but you should be sure to choose a rating, which is consistent with the desired standard (ANSI, ISO, or DIN). Default:
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
program will determine based on design pressure and temperature
3-59
Nozzle flange facing type The Aspen Hetran program will set the nozzle flange facing as flat face as a default. Other optional flange faces, flat face, raised face, or tongue/groove, can be specified.
Flow direction for first tube pass For a single pass shell/single pass tube or a two pass shell/two pass tube exchanger arrangement, you can set the tube and shell side flows to be in counter current or co-current flow directions. For multi passes on the tube side, setting the flow direction for the first pass will locate the inlet shell nozzle accordingly.
Location of nozzle at U-bend The program default location for the nozzle near the U-bends is between the U-bend support and the first baffle. By locating the nozzle at this location, you can avoid the passing of the fluid across the U-bends that could result in vibration. Generally the U-bend surface area is not considered as effective heat transfer area as the rest of the tube bundle due to the nonuniformity of the tube spacing. If you want the U-bend surface area to be included, you can set the percentage effective in the Thermal Analysis section.
Height above top tubesheet of liquid level in column (vertical thermosiphons only) These input items are important for the calculation of the hydraulics of the thermosiphon reboiler, in that they are used to determine the static head. The reference point is the top face of the top tubesheet. The level of the return connection to the column is at the centerline of the connection. + -
if above tubesheet if below tubesheet
Default: even with top tubesheet
Height above top tubesheet of outlet piping back to column (vertical thermosiphons only) These input items are important for the calculation of the hydraulics of the thermosiphon reboiler, in that they are used to determine the static head. The reference point is the top face of the top tubesheet. The level of the return connection to the column is at the centerline of the connection. Defaults: Level of return connection is one shell diameter above top tubesheet
3-60
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Height above vessel centerline of liquid level in column (horizontal thermosiphons only) These input items are important for the calculation of the hydraulics of the thermosiphon reboiler, in that they are used to determine the static head. The reference point is the centerline of the vessel. The level of the return connection to the column is at the centerline of the connection. + -
if above vessel centerline if below vessel centerline
Default: even with vessel centerline
Height above vessel centerline of outlet piping back to column (horizontal thermosiphons only) These input items are important for the calculation of the hydraulics of the thermosiphon reboiler, in that they are used to determine the static head. The reference point is the centerline of the vessel. The level of the return connection to the column is at the centerline of the connection. Defaults: Level of return connection is one shell diameter above vessel centerline
Equivalent length of inlet piping (thermosiphons only) Equivalent length is a method of specifying a length of piping which accounts for the pressure drop of pipe as a ratio of length to diameter and the effect of valves, bends, tees, expansions, contractions, etc. Refer to a piping handbook for more details. If these items are not specified the program will calculate an equivalent length for the column to the inlet based on a pipe equal in diameter to the inlet nozzle and one 90 degree elbow. The default for the outlet to the column is based on a horizontal pipe equal in diameter to the outlet nozzle and without any bends. Defaults: program will calculate as described above
Equivalent length of outlet piping (thermosiphons only) Equivalent length is a method of specifying a length of piping which accounts for the pressure drop of pipe as a ratio of length to diameter and the effect of valves, bends, tees, expansions, contractions, etc. Refer to a piping handbook for more details. If these items are not specified the program will calculate an equivalent length for the column to the inlet based on a pipe equal in diameter to the inlet nozzle and one 90 degree elbow. The default for the outlet to the column is based on a horizontal pipe equal in diameter to the outlet nozzle and without any bends. Defaults: program will calculate as described above
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-61
Thermosiphon Piping Specs (thermosiphons only) In lieu of specifing the equivalent lengths of piping described above, you can specify the piping details (size, straight lengths, number of elbows) and the program will calculate the equivalent length of piping. Defaults: program will use equivalent length defaults if no piping specs are given
Design Data The Design Data Section is subdivided into three sections: Design Constraints, Materials, and Specifications.
Design Constraints Shell diameter increment This is the increment that the program will use when it increases the shell diameter of a shell made of plate, when in design mode. This parameter is ignored when the shell is made of pipe. Default: 2 in. or 50 mm
Shell diameter minimum This is the minimum shell diameter that the program will consider in design mode. For pipe shells, this refers to the outside diameter. The input specification for "Shell & Front Head Reference for Plate Shells" (described later in this section) will determine if this is for the outside or inside diameter of a shell made from plate. Acceptable values: lower limit of 2 in. or 50 mm; no upper limit Default: 6 in. or 150 mm
Shell diameter maximum This is the maximum shell diameter that the program will consider in design mode. For pipe shells, this refers to the outside diameter. The input specification for "Shell & Front Head Reference for Plate Shells" (described later in this section) will determine if this is for the outside or inside diameter of a shell made from plate. It must be greater than or equal to the minimum. Acceptable values: lower limit of 2 in. or 50 mm; no upper limit Default: 72 in or 2000 mm
3-62
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube length increment This is the increment, which the program uses when it increases or decreases the tube length in design mode. Default: 2 ft. or 500 mm
Tube length minimum This is the minimum tube length, which the program will consider in design mode. For Utubes this is the minimum straight length. Default: 4 ft. or 1000 mm
Tube length maximum This is the maximum tube length, which the program will consider in design mode. For Utubes this is the maximum straight length. It must be greater or equal to the minimum. Default: 20 ft. or 6000 mm
Tube passes increment odd 1,3,5,7,... even 1,2,4,6,... (default) all 1,2,3,4,... This applies to the selection of tube passes in design mode. The normal progression of tube passes is 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16. However there are times when an odd number of passes above 1 may be desirable. One possible case is when 4 passes results in enough surface, but the pressure drop is too high and 2 passes results in an acceptable pressure drop, but the surface is inadequate. Since pressure drop is increased by about 8 times when going from 2 to 4 passes, a 3 pass design may be the optimum compromise. Another case is when a 2 or 4 pass design is controlled by a low MTD correction factor (say 0.75), but the 1 pass design has too low a velocity or requires too much surface. Since a 3 pass heat exchanger can have 2 counter-current passes to only 1 co-current pass; the F factor can be significantly higher than other multipass designs. Default: even
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-63
Tube passes minimum This is the minimum number of tube passes, which the program will consider in design mode. Acceptable values: 1 to 16 Default: 1 for straight tubes; 2 for U-tubes
Tube passes maximum This is the maximum number of tube passes, which the program will consider in design mode. It must be greater than or equal to the minimum. The actual number of tube passes tried is also a function of the shell diameter. The program will not try the higher tube passes if they are inappropriate for the shell diameter. Acceptable values: 1 to 16 Default: 8 for single phase in tubes; 2 for two-phase in tubes
Baffle spacing minimum This is the minimum baffle spacing, which the program will consider in design mode. TEMA recommends that segmental baffles should not be placed closer than a distance equal to 20% of the shell I.D. or 50 mm (2 in), whichever is greater. Default: the greater of 20% of the shell I.D. or 50 mm (2 in)
Baffle spacing maximum This is the maximum baffle spacing, which the program will consider in design mode. TEMA recommends that segmental baffles should not be placed further apart than a distance equal to the shell I.D. or 1/2 the maximum unsupported span, whichever is less (except NTIW and grid baffles). Default: the greater of the shell I.D. or 610 mm (24 in)
Use shell ID or OD as reference This determines whether the references to shell diameter in input and output are to the outside or inside diameter. When you specify outside diameter, both the shell and front head cylinders will have the same outside diameter. Likewise the shell and front head cylinders will have equal inside diameters when you specify inside diameter. When the required thickness for the front head is significantly greater than the shell, it is usually preferable to specify that the inside diameters be equal, in order to avoid an increased gap between the shell I.D. and the O.T.L. Default: outside diameter
3-64
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Use pipe or plate for small shells This applies to shell diameters up to 24 in. or 610 mm. It determines if the shell incrementing should follow the standard pipe sizes or go in exact increments as specified with the input value for Shell Diameter Increment. Default: pipe
Minimum shells in series You can use this item to force the program to evaluate multiple shells in series. Default: 1
Minimum shells in parallel You can use this item to force the program to evaluate multiple shells in parallel. Default: 1
Allowable number of baffles This controls how the program will determine the number of baffles in design mode. This is of special importance for single segmental baffles in a horizontal heat exchanger. An even number of single segmental baffles means that the nozzles will be at opposite orientations (usually 0 and 180 degrees for horizontal cut baffles); an odd number means they will be at the same orientation. Nozzles at opposite orientations have the advantage of being self-venting on startup and selfdraining on shutdown. If nozzles are installed at the same orientation, it is important to have couplings opposite the nozzles to facilitate venting and draining. For multi-segmental baffles and grid baffles, the number of baffles does not dictate the nozzle orientation. To improve flow distribution at the inlet and outlet, double and triple segmental baffles should have an odd number of baffles. The first and last multi-segmental baffle should be the one with the centermost segment. Default: Even number for horizontal exchangers with single segmental baffle; odd number for multi-segmental baffles; any number for all other cases
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-65
Allow baffles under nozzles This controls whether baffles are allowed to be placed under the nozzle in design mode. Normally baffles should not be placed under nozzles, because it will lead to poor flow distribution in the inlet or outlet zone, thus decreasing the efficiency of the heat transfer surface there. However when there is a very large inlet or outlet nozzle, which would force the tube span to exceed the maximum unsupported span, or when tube vibration is probable, it may be necessary to place a baffle or support under the nozzle. This is reasonable when using multi-segmental baffles or grid baffles. Default: No for single segmental baffles; yes for other baffles, if no other solution
Use proportional baffle cut Normally in design mode, the program chooses the baffle cut based on the baffle type and the shell side application. However, with single segmental baffles, it is sometimes desirable to maintain a reasonable balance between crossflow velocity and window velocity. By choosing to make the baffle cut proportional to the baffle spacing, the program will increase the baffle cut as the baffle spacing is increased. The logic behind this is based on maximizing pressure drop to heat transfer conversion. If pressure drop is controlling, it may be counter-productive to take an inordinate amount of pressure drop through a small baffle window where the heat transfer is less effective than in crossflow. This input item only applies to single segmental baffles. Default: not proportional
Allowable pressure drop Where applicable, the allowable pressure drop is required input. You can specify any value up to the operating pressure, although the allowable pressure drop should usually be less than 40 percent of the operating pressure. The typical values are displayed so you can select a value by clicking on it with the mouse. Default: None
Minimum fluid velocity This is the lowest velocity the program will accept in design mode. The program may not find a design, which satisfies this minimum, but it will issue a warning if the design it chooses does not satisfy the minimum. The program tries to maximize the velocities within the allowable pressure drops and the maximum allowable velocities. Therefore, this constraint does not enter into the design mode logic. On the shell side, this refers to the crossflow velocity. For two phase flow it is the vapor velocity at the point where there is the most vapor. Note that since there is usually significant bypassing in baffled exchangers, the crossflow velocities, which can be attained, are usually below the velocities you would expect on the tube side. Default: none
3-66
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Maximum fluid velocity This is the highest velocity the program will accept in design mode. The optimization logic is controlled by this item. On the shell side, this refers to the crossflow velocity. For two phase flow it is the vapor velocity at the point where there is the most vapor. The default value calculated by the program for maximum allowable velocity is equal to the appropriate constant shown below divided by the square root of the density (kg/mÛ in SI units or lb/ftÛ in US units). Vmax = k / (Density)0.5 k in SI units k in US units Shell Side Fluid
60.9
50.0
Tube Side Fluid
93.8
77.0
Default: none
Minimum % excess surface area required The program will optimize the design with the minimum percent excess surface area specified. Default: none
Materials Cylinder – hot side Select a generic material, a general material class, for the hot side components (includes all items except tubesheets, tubes, and baffles) from the list provided. If you wish to specify a material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Cylinder – cold side Select a generic material, a general material class, for cold side components (includes all items except tubesheets, tubes, and baffles) from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-67
Tubesheet Select a generic material, a general material class, for the tubesheet from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Double tubesheet (inner) Select a generic material, a general material class, for the inner tubesheet(s) from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Baffles Select a generic material, a general material class, for the baffles from the list provided. The baffles are generally of the same material type as the shell cylinder. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Tubes Select a generic material, a general material class, for the tubes from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Thermal conductivity of tube material If you specify a material designator for the tube material, the program will retrieve the thermal conductivity of the tube from its built-in databank. However, if you have a tube material, which is not in the databank, then you can specify the thermal conductivity of the tube at this point.
Tubesheet cladding – hot side Select tubesheet cladding material for the hot side if cladding is required.
Tubesheet cladding – cold side Select tubesheet cladding material for the cold side if cladding is required.
3-68
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Gasket – hot side Select a generic material, a general material class, for the gaskets from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button.
Gasket – hot side Select a generic material, a general material class, for the gaskets from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button.
Gasket Defaults The program asks for gasket materials on both sides, although in the case of a fixed tubesheet type heat exchanger there will be gaskets on only one side. You can specify either the generic material designators or the four digit material designators listed in the METALS databank or the Help facility. If you do not specify a value the program will use compressed fiber as the material for the mechanical design and cost estimate. The heat exchanger specification sheet will not show a gasket material if left unspecified.
Specifications Design Code Select one of the following design codes: ASME (American), CODAP (French), or ADMerkblatter (German). The design code has a subtle, but sometimes significant effect on the thermal design. This is because the design code determines the required thicknesses for the shell and heads (therefore affecting the number of tubes), the thickness of the tubesheet (therefore affecting the effective heat transfer area), and the dimensions of the flanges and nozzle reinforcement (therefore affecting the possible nozzle and baffle placements). Due to the fact that the mechanical design calculations themselves are very complex, the Aspen Hetran program only includes some of the basic mechanical design calculations. The full calculations are the function of the Aspen B-JAC TEAMS program. This input is used to tell the program which basic mechanical design calculations to follow and also to make the heat exchanger specification more complete. The program defaults to the design code specified in the program settings. Default: as defined in the program settings
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-69
Service class If you select low temperature (design temperature less than -50°F) or lethal service (exchanger contains a lethal substance), the program will select the corresponding Code requirements for that class such as full radiography for butt welds and PWHT for carbon steel construction. Default: normal service class
TEMA class If you want the heat exchanger to be built in accordance with the TEMA standards, choose the appropriate TEMA class - B, C, or R. If TEMA is not a design requirement, then specify Cody only, and only the design code will be used in determining the mechanical design. Default: TEMA B
Material standard You can select ASTM, AFNOR, or DIN. Your choice of material standard determines the selection of materials you will see in the input for materials of construction. Default: as defined in the Program Settings under Tools
Dimensional standard Dimensional standards to ANSI (American), ISO (International), or DIN (German). The dimensional standards apply to such things as pipe cylinder dimensions, nozzle flange ratings, and bolt sizes. DIN also encompasses other construction standards such as standard tube pitches. The selection for dimensional standards is primarily included to make the heat exchanger specification complete, although it does have some subtle effects on the thermal design through the basic mechanical design. Default: as defined in the Program Settings under Tools
Design pressure This is the pressure, which is used in the mechanical design calculations. It influences the shell, head, and tubesheet required thicknesses and therefore affects the thermal design. If you do not specify a value, the program will default to the operating pressure plus 10% rounded up to a logical increment. This is in gauge pressure so it is one atmosphere less than the equivalent absolute pressure. Default: operating pressure + 10%
3-70
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Design temperature This is the temperature, which is used in the mechanical design calculations. It influences the shell, head, and tubesheet required thicknesses and therefore affects the thermal design. If you do not specify a value, the program will default to the highest operating temperature plus 33ºC (60ºF) rounded down to a logical increment. Default: highest operating temperature + approx. 33ºC (60ºF)
Vacuum design pressure If the heat exchanger is going to operate under a full or partial vacuum, you should specify a vacuum service design pressure. The basic mechanical design calculations do not consider external pressure therefore this item will have no effect on the thermal design from Aspen Hetran. Default: not calculated for vacuum service
Test pressure This is the pressure at which the heat exchanger will be tested by the manufacturer. This has no effect on the thermal design, but is included to make the heat exchanger specification more complete. Default: "Code"
Corrosion allowance The corrosion allowance is included in the thickness calculations for cylinders and tubesheets and therefore has a subtle effect on thermal design. Default: 0.125 in. or 3.2 mm for carbon steel, 0 for other materials
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-71
Program Options The Program Options Section is subdivided into two sections: • •
Thermal Analysis Change Codes
Thermal Analysis Heat transfer coefficient Normally, the film coefficients are two of the primary values you want the program to calculate. However, there may be cases where you want to force the program to use a specific coefficient, perhaps to simulate a situation that the Aspen Hetran program does not explicitly cover. You can specify neither, either, or both. Default: Program will calculate
Heat transfer coefficient multiplier You can specify a factor that becomes a multiplier on the film coefficient, which is calculated by the program. You may want to use a multiplier greater than 1 if you have a construction enhancement that is not covered by the program, for example tube inserts or internally finned tubes. You can use a multiplier of less than 1 to establish a safety factor on a film coefficient. This would make sense if you were unsure of the composition or properties of a fluid stream. Default: 1.0
Pressure drop multiplier Similar to the multipliers on the film coefficients, you can also specify a factor that becomes a multiplier on the bundle portion of the pressure drop, which is calculated by the program. It does not affect the pressure drop through the inlet or outlet nozzles or heads. These multipliers can be used independently or in conjunction with the multipliers on film coefficients. Default: 1.0
3-72
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Percent of u-bend area used for heat transfer Since the shell side fluid does not usually flow over the U-bends in the same way as it flows over the straight portion, the effectiveness of the area in the U-bends is limited. The Aspen Hetran program assumes that there is a full support at the end of the straight length, which will limit flow over the U-bends, except in the case of kettle-type reboilers. Default: 100% effective for kettle-type reboiler; 0% effective for all other cases
Maximum rating for thermosiphons You may specify to have the program vary flows to balance pressure for thermosiphon applications. Hetran must be set to the Rating Mode in the Application Option section before you can select to balance hydraulics & surface area or to balance hydraulics only.
Mean temperature difference Usually you rely on the program to determine the MTD, however you can override the program calculated corrected (or weighted) MTD by specifying a value for this item. Default: Program will calculate
Minimum allowable temperature approach You can limit the minimum approach temperature. Program will increase the number of shells in series and/or limit the exchanger to a one pass-one pass countercurrent geometry to meet the minimum approach temperature. Default: 3 to 5 degrees F depending on application
Minimum allowable MTD correction factor Most of the correction factor curves become very steep below 0.7, so for this reason the Aspen Hetran program defaults to 0.7 as the minimum F factor before going to multiple shells in series in design mode. The only exception is the X-type shell, where the program allows the F factor to go as low as 0.5 in design mode. In rating mode, the default is 0.5. With this input item, you can specify a lower or higher limit. Default:
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
0.7 for shell types E, F, G, H, J in design mode 0.5 for shell type X in design mode 0.5 in rating mode
3-73
Maximum allowable heat flux For vaporizing applications, it is often important to limit the heat flux (heat exchanged per unit area) in order to avoid the generation of too much vapor too quickly so as to blanket the tube surface, resulting in a rapid decline in the film coefficient. The Aspen Hetran program has built in limits on the heat flux, but you can also establish your own limit by specifying a value for this item. Default: Program will calculate
Flow direction for first tube pass For a single pass shell/single pass tube or a two pass shell/two pass tube exchanger arrangement, you can set the tube and shell side flows to be in counter current or co-current flow directions. For multi passes on the tube side, setting the flow direction for the first pass will locate the inlet shell nozzle accordingly.
Maximum number of design mode iterations The Aspen Hetran program, in the Design Mode, will reiterate through the specified design parameters to converge on the lowest cost solution. You may set the maximum number of iterations for the optimization.
Simulation mode area convergence tolerance Specify the convergence tolerance for the simulation mode of the program. Note that a very low convergence tolerance may result in a longer calculation time.
Number of calculation intervals The Aspen Hetran program does an interval analysis by dividing the heat exchanger into sections. Indicate how many interval sections are to be considered.
Type of interval calculation The Aspen Hetran program does an interval analysis by dividing the heat exchanger into sections. Indicate if you want the program to use equal heat load or equal temperature increments for the sectional analysis of the exchanger.
3-74
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Fouling calculation options You can adjust how the Hetran program allocates the excess fouling (extra fouling that is available due to excess surface area) for the Maximum Rating case reported in the Thermal Resistance Analysis report located in the Thermal Summary results section. You can specify to apply a different fouling ratio, Hot side to cold side, from the specified fouling factors or you call apply all the excess fouling to the Hot or Cold sides. Note that if you select to apply all excess fouling to the Hot or Cold Sides, any Hot / Cold ratio specified will be ignored.
Correlations Calculate desuperheating zone with dry gas coefficient The program will default to determining the tube wall temperature at the hot side inlet. If the wall temperature is below the dew point the program will assume the tube wall is "wet" with condensation and will use a condensing coefficient for heat transfer. If the tube wall temperature is above the dew point, it will determine at what hot side gas temperature the tube wall temperature falls below the dew point. This hot side gas temperature would represent the low temperature for the desuperheating zone. If this option is turned "on", the program will assume a desuperheating zone exists from the specified inlet temperature down to the dew point. Default: Program will determine
Condensation correlation Researchers have developed several different methods of predicting the film coefficient for a condensing vapor. Each has its strengths and weaknesses. If the composition of the vapor is well known, the mass transfer method is the most accurate. The mass transfer film model is based on a Colburn-Hougen correlation for condensable(s) with noncondensable(s) and a Colburn-Drew correlation for multiple condensables. The modified proration method is an equilibrium method based on a modification of the SilverBell correlation. Default: Mass transfer film method
Shell side two phase heat transfer condensing correlation The three major two phase condensing correlations to determine shell side film coefficients referenced in the industry are the Taborek, McNaught, and Chen methods. Default: Taborek method
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-75
Liquid subcooling heat transfer method Select the calculation method to determine the liquid subcooling coefficient for a condensing application. For most applications, the larger of the free or forced convection should be considered. Default: larger of free or forced convection coefficient
Tube side two phase heat transfer condensing correlation The two major two phase condensing correlations to determine tube side film coefficients referenced in the industry are the Taborek and the Chen methods. Default: Taborek method
Suppress nucleate boiling coefficient Indicate here to suppress the nucleate boiling coefficient in the determination of the overall film coefficient.
Minimum temperature difference for nucleate boiling You may specify a minimum temperature difference requirement for nucleate boiling to be considered.
Shell side two phase heat transfer vaporization correlation The major two phase vaporization correlations to determine shell side film coefficients referenced in the industry are the Steiner-Taborek, Polley, and the Dengler-Addoms methods. Default: Steiner-Taborek method
Tube side two phase heat transfer vaporization correlation The major two-phase vaporization correlations to determine tube side film coefficients referenced in the industry are the Steiner-Taborek, Collier-Polley, Chen, Dengler-Addoms, and the Guerrieri-Talty methods. Default: Steiner-Taborek method
Shell side pressure drop calculation methods You can select which shell side stream analysis method for pressure drop you wish to be applied, ESDU, VDI Heat Atlas, or the B-JAC method. Default: B-JAC method
3-76
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Shell side two phase pressure drop correlation You can select which shell side two phase pressure drop correlation will be applied, LochartMartinelli, or Grant-Chisholm methods. Default: Lochart-Martinelli
Tube side two phase pressure drop correlation You can select which tube side two phase pressure drop correlation will be applied, LochartMartinelli, Friedel, Chisholm, McKetta, or Nayyar. If not specified the program will select the one most appropriate for the application. Default: Lochart-Martinelli
Velocity Heads for Pressure Drop You can enter the velocity heads to be applied for the flow to enter and exit the tube and for each of the nozzles. The program default is ½ of a velocity head for each entrance and each exit of the tubes and ½ velocity head for each of the nozzles.
Change Codes Change Codes Variables The last screen of the long form input allows you to specify change codes with the associated values. The format for change code entries is: CODE=value Change codes are processed after all other input and override any previously set value. For instance, if you specify the tube outside diameter as 20 mm in the regular input screens, then enter the change code TODX=25, the 25 will override the 20. If you enter the same change code more than once, the last value will prevail. One of the best uses of the change code screen is to provide a visual path of the various changes made during execution of Aspen Hetran. For this purpose, we recommend that changes for a particular alternative design be placed on a separate line. Another good use of the change code screen is to "chain" to another file containing only change codes. This is especially convenient if you have a line of standard designs, which you want to use after you have found a similar solution in design mode. This can be done by using the FILE= change code, followed by the name of the file containing the other change codes with the file type (example: ABC-1.BJI). The other file must also have a .BJI filetype.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-77
You can create this change code file with a standard edit program. For example, the entry FILE=S-610-2 would point to a file named S-610-2.BJI, which might contain the following data: MODE=2,SODX=610,TLNG=5000,TNUM=458,TPAS=2,BSPA=690,TODX=20,TPAT=1
The following pages review the change codes that are available in the Aspen Hetran program.
Design Mode Change Codes MODE = program mode: 1 = design, 2 = rating SDMN = shell diameter, minimum SDMX = shell diameter, maximum TLMN = tube length, minimum TLMX = tube length, maximum TPMN = tube passes, minimum TPMX = tube passes, maximum BSMN = baffle spacing, minimum BSMX = baffle spacing, maximum PAMN = shells in parallel, minimum SEMN = shells in series, minimum EXMN = excess surface, minimum POSI = exchanger position: 1 = horizontal, 2 = vertical
Rating Mode Change Codes MODE = program mode: 1 = design, 2 = rating SODX = shell outside diameter SIDX = shell inside diameter BSPA = baffle spacing center-center BSIN = baffle spacing at inlet BSOU = baffle spacing at outlet BNUM = number of baffles TLNG = tube length
3-78
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
TNUM = number of tubes TPAS = tube passes PNUM = number of shells in parallel SNUM = number of shells in series KODX = kettle outside diameter KIDX = kettle inside diameter VODX = vapor belt outside diameter VIDX = vapor belt inside diameter VLNG = vapor belt length
Shell & Head Types Change Codes FTYP = front head type: 1=A 2=B 3=C 4=N 5=D STYP = shell type: 1=E 2=F 3=G 4=H 5=J 6=K 7=X 8 =V RTYP = rear head type: 1=L 2=M 3=N 4=P 5=S 6=T 7=U 8=W
Baffle Change Codes BTYP = baffle type: 1 = single 2 = double 3 = triple 4 = full 5 = NTIW 6 = rod 7 = strip BORI = baffle orientation: 1 = H
2=V
3=R
BCUT = baffle cut
Tube Change Codes TODX = tube outside diameter TWTK = tube wall thickness TTYP = tube type: 1 = plain, 2 = finned FDEN = fin density (fins/in or fins/m) FHGT = fin height FTKS = fin thickness AOAI = ratio of outside area to inside area
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-79
Tubesheet Layout Change Codes TPAT = tube pattern: 30 = triangular 60 = rotated triangular 90 = square 45 = rotated square TPIT = tube pitch PTYP = pass type: 1 = quadrant 2 = mixed 3 = ribbon IIMP = impingement plate: 1 = none 2 = on bundle 3 = in nozzle dome
Miscellaneous Change Codes TSTK = tubesheet thickness STRH = Strouhal number used for vibration analysis FILE = filename for additional file containing change codes
3-80
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Results The Results section is divided into these basic sections: • • • •
Design Summary Thermal Summary Mechanical Summary Calculation Details
Design Summary The Design Summary Section is subdivided into four sections: • • • •
Input Summary Optimization Path Recap of Designs Warnings & Messages
Input Summary This section provides you with a summary of the information specified in the input file. It is recommended that you request the input data as part of your printed output so that it is easy to reconstruct the input, which led to the design.
Optimization Path This part of the output is the window into the logic of the program. It shows some of the heat exchangers the program has evaluated in trying to find one, which satisfies your design conditions. These intermediate designs can also point out the constraints that are controlling the design and point out what parameters you could change to further optimize the design. To help you see which constraints are controlling the design, the conditions that do not satisfy your specifications are noted with an asterisk (*) next to the value. The asterisk will appear next to the required tube length if the exchanger is undersurfaced, or next to a pressure drop if it exceeds the maximum allowable. In design mode, the Hetran program will search for a heat exchanger configuration that will satisfy the desired process conditions. It will automatically change a number of the geometric parameters as it searches. However Hetran will not automatically evaluate all possible configurations, and therefore it may not necessarily find the true optimum by itself. It is up to the user to determine what possible changes to the construction could lead to a better design and then present these changes to the program.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-81
Hetran searches to find a design which satisfies the following: 1. enough surface area to do the desired heat transfer 2. pressure drops within the allowable 3. physical size within acceptable limits 4. velocities within an acceptable range 5. mechanically sound and practical to construct
In addition to these criteria, Hetran also determines a budget cost estimate for each design and in most cases performs a vibration analysis. However cost and vibration do not affect the program's logic for optimization. There are over thirty mechanical parameters which directly or indirectly affect the thermal performance of a shell and tube heat exchanger. It is not practical for the program to evaluate all combinations of these parameters. In addition, the acceptable variations are often dependent upon process and cost considerations which are beyond the scope of the program (for example the cost and importance of cleaning). Therefore the program automatically varies only a number of parameters which are reasonably independent of other process, operating, maintenance, or fabrication considerations. The parameters which are automatically optimized are:
shell diameter
baffle spacing
pass layout type
tube length
number of baffles
exchangers in parallel
number of tubes
tube passes
exchangers in series
The design engineer should optimize the other parameters, based on good engineering judgment. Some of the important parameters to consider are:
3-82
shell type
tube outside diameter
impingement protection
rear head type
tube pitch
tube pattern
nozzle sizes
tube type
exchanger orientation
tubesheet type
baffle type
materials
baffle cut
fluid allocation
tube wall thickenss
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Optimization Path items Optimization of Shell Diameter: The highest priority variable in design mode is the shell diameter. The program attempts to find the smallest diameter shell which will satisfy surface area, pressure drop, and velocity requirements. The diameter is incremented based on the shell diameter increment and is limited by the minimum shell diameter, and the maximum shell diameter. Each of these can be specified in the input. This is the shell outside or inside diameter depending upon the input specification to use shell ID or shell OD as the reference. Optimization of Tube Length: Once the smallest shell diameter has been found, the program optimizes the tube length to the shortest standard length, within the allowable range, which will satisfy surface area, pressure drop, and velocity requirements. The length is incremented or decremented based on the tube length increment and is limited by the minimum tube length and maximum tube length. Each of these can be specified in the input. The actual tube length will be shown which is the length of the straight tubes or the straight length to the tangent for U-tubes. This includes the portion of the tube, which is in the tubesheet. This length will be compared to the required tube length calculated by the program to achieve the desired heat transfer duty. This length will also include the portion of the tube in the tubesheet, which is ineffective for heat transfer. Pressure Drop – Shell side and Tube side: These are the calculated pressure drops. For a single phase applications, it is based on the actual tube length. For a two phase application, if the exchanger is oversurfaced it is based on the actual tube length; if it is undersurfaced it is based on the required tube length. Optimization of Baffle Spacing: The program seeks the minimum reasonable center to center baffle spacing which gives a pressure drop and velocity within the maximums allowed. The program wants to maximize the shell side velocity thereby maximizing the shell side film coefficient and minimizing any velocity dependent fouling. The minimum baffle spacing is usually equal to 20% of the shell inside diameter or 50 mm (2 in.), whichever is larger. The maximum baffle spacing is usually equal to one half the maximum unsupported span, as suggested by TEMA, for segmental baffles, and one times the maximum unsupported span for grid baffles or no tubes in the window construction. You can override these default values by specifying the minimum and/or maximum baffle spacing in the input. Optimization of Number of Baffles: The program attempts to find the maximum number of baffles that will fit between the inlet and outlet nozzles. Since the exact locations of the inlet and outlet nozzles are very much dependent upon the mechanical design, the program attempts to locate the nozzles by estimating the thickness of the tubesheet, the thickness of any shell or backing ring flanges, the maximum reinforcement pad diameters, and the necessary clearances. This is the number of baffles and/or support plates. For G, H, and J shells it includes the full support under the nozzle. Optimization of Tube Passes: The program seeks the maximum reasonable number of tube passes that gives a pressure drop and velocity within the maximums allowed. The program wants to maximize the tube side velocity thereby maximizing the tube side film coefficient and minimizing any velocity dependent fouling. This is the number of tube passes in one shell.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-83
The maximum reasonable number of tube passes is usually a function of the shell diameter and the tube outside diameter, although it can also be a function of the tube side application (e.g., a tube side condenser is usually limited to one pass and should never be more than two passes) or a function of the rear head type (e.g., the W type head is limited to two passes). The tube passes for tubes with an outside diameter up to 25.4 mm (1.00 in) are limited by shell diameter as follows: Shell O.D., mm
Shell O.D., in Maximum tube passes
102-168
4-6
4
169-610
7-24
8
611-914
25-36
12
915-3000
37-120
16
The maximum number of tube passes are further restricted for tubes with an outside diameter larger than 25.4 mm (1.00 in). Optimization of Tube Count: The HETRAN program contains the same tube count subroutine which is in the ENSEA tubesheet layout program. Therefore it determines an exact number of tubes and their location for each design. The program will try different tube pass layout types (quadrant, mixed, and ribbon) when appropriate and choose the layout giving the highest number of tubes. This is the number of straight tubes or the number of straight lengths for a U-tube exchanger (twice the number of U-s). This is also the number of tube holes in one tubesheet. Optimization of Exchangers in Parallel: The program will automatically increase the number of exchangers in parallel when it reaches the maximum allowable shell diameter and minimum allowable tube length and still is unable to satisfy the allowable pressure drop. This is the number of exchangers in parallel. Note that both the shell side streams and tube side streams are considered to be flowing in parallel. Optimization of Exchangers in Series: The program will automatically increase the number of exchangers in series when it reaches the maximum allowable shell diameter and tube length and still is unable to find a design with enough heat transfer area. It will also go to exchangers in series when the correction factor on the MTD falls below 0.7 (or the minimum allowable correction factor specified in the input). This is the number of shells in series. Note that both the shell side stream and the tube side stream are considered to be flowing in series. Total Price: This is the estimated budget price for the total number of heat exchangers in series and parallel. It is the price determined using the QCHEX program subroutines
3-84
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Recap of Designs The recap of design cases summarizes the basic geometry and performance of all designs reviewed up to that point. This side by side comparison allows you to determine the effects of various design changes and to select the best exchanger for the application. As a default, the recap provides you with the same summary information that is shown in the Optimization Path. You can customize what information is shown in the Recap by selecting the Customize button. You can recall an earlier design case by selecting the design case you want from the Recap list and then select the Select Case button. The program will then regenerate the design results for the selected case.
Warnings & Messages Aspen Hetran provides an extensive system of warnings and messages to help the designer of heat exchanger design. Messages are divided into five types. There are several hundred messages built into the Aspen Hetran program. Those messages requiring further explanation are described here. Warning Messages: These are conditions, which may be problems, however the program will continue. Error Messages: Conditions which do not allow the program to continue. Limit Messages: Conditions which go beyond the scope of the program. Notes: Special conditions which you should be aware of. Suggestions: Recommendations on how to improve the design.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-85
Thermal Summary The Thermal Summary Section is subdivided into four sections: Performance, Coefficients & MTD, Pressure Drop, TEMA Sheet
Performance This section provides a concise summary of the thermal process requirements, basic heat transfer values, and heat exchanger configuration.
General Performance In the general performance section, flow rates, Gases (in/out) and Liquids (in/out), for the shell and tube sides are shown to summarize any phase change that occurred in the exchanger. The Temperature (in/out) for both side of the exchanger are given along with Dew point and bubble point temperatures for phase change applications. Film coefficients for the shell and tube sides are the weighted coefficients for any gas cooling/heating and phase change that occurred in the heat exchanger. Velocities for single phase applications are based on an average density. For condensers, the velocity is based on the inlet conditions. For vaporizers, it is based on the outlet conditions. Shell side velocities are the crossflow velocity at the diametric cross-section. Overall performance parameters are given, such as Heat exchanged, MTD with any applied correction factor and the effective total surface area. For single phase applications on both sides of the shell, a MTD correction factor will be applied in accordance with TEMA standards. For multi-component phase change applications, the MTD is weighted based upon a heat release curve. The effective surface area does not include the U-bend area for U-tubes unless it was specified to do so. The exchanger geometry provided in the summary includes: TEMA type, exchanger position, number of shells in parallel and in series, exchanger size, number of tubes and tube outside diameter, baffle type, baffle cut, baffle orientation, and number of tube passes.
3-86
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Thermal Resistance Analysis This portion gives information to help you evaluate the surface area requirements in the clean, specified fouled (as given in the input), and the maximum fouled conditions. The clean condition assumes that there is no fouling in the exchanger, in the new condition. The overall coefficient shown for this case has no fouling resistance included. Using this clean overall coefficient, the excess surface area is then calculated. The specified foul condition summarizes the performance of the exchanger with the overall coefficient based upon the specified fouling. The maximum fouled condition is derived by taking the specified fouling factors and increasing them (if the exchanger is oversurfaced) or decreasing them (if undersurfaced), proportionately to each other, until there is no over or under surface. The distribution of overall resistance allows you to quickly evaluate the controlling resistance(s). You should look in the "Clean" column to determine which film coefficient is controlling, then look in the "Spec. Foul" column to see the effect of the fouling resistances. The difference between the excess surface in the clean condition and the specified fouled condition is the amount of surface added for fouling. You should evaluate the applicability of the specified fouling resistances when they dictate a large part of the area, say more than 50%. Such fouling resistances often increase the diameter of the heat exchanger and decrease the velocities to the point where the level of fouling is self-fulfilling.
Coefficients & MTD This output section shows the various components of each film coefficient. Depending on the application, one or more of the following coefficients will be shown: desuperheating, condensing, vapor sensible, liquid sensible, boiling and liquid cooling coefficients. The Reynolds number is included so that you can readily evaluate if the flow is laminar (under 2000), transition (2000-10000), or turbulent (over 10000). The fin efficiency factor is used in correcting the tube side film thermal resistance and the tube side fouling factor resistance. The mean metal temperature of the shell is the average of the inlet and outlet temperatures on the shell side. The mean metal temperature of the tube wall is a function of the film coefficients on both sides as well as the temperatures on both sides. These two temperatures are intended for use in the mechanical design in order to determine the expansion joint requirements in a fixed tubesheet heat exchanger.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-87
The calculated corrected MTD (Mean Temperature Difference) for no phase change applications is the product of the LMTD (Log Mean Temperature Difference), the correction factor (F), and the longitudinal baffle efficiency factor (if using an F, G, or H shell). For phase change applications, the process is divided into a number of intervals and a MTD is determined for each interval. The overall MTD for the exchanger is then determined by weighting the interval MTD’s based on heat load. If you have specified a value for the Corrected Mean Temperature Difference in the input, it is this value which the program uses in the design instead of the calculated Corrected MTD. The flow direction is displayed when there is a single tube pass, in which case it is either counter-current or co-current. The heat flux is the heat transferred per unit of surface area. This is of importance for boiling applications where a high flux can lead to vapor blanketing. In this condition, the rapid boiling at the tube wall covers the tube surface with a film of vapor, which causes the film coefficient to collapse. The program calculates a maximum flux for nucleate boiling on a single tube and a maximum flux for bundle boiling (nucleate and flow boiling), which can be controlled by other limits (e.g., dryout). If you specify a maximum flux in the input, this overrides the program calculated maximum flux. To analyze this data, you should check to see if the maximum flux is controlling. If it is, consider reducing the temperature of the heating medium.
Pressure Drop Pressure drop distribution The pressure drop distribution is one of the most important parts of the output for analysis. You should observe if significant portions or the pressure drop are expended where there is little or no heat transfer (inlet nozzle, entering bundle, through baffle windows, exiting bundle, outlet nozzle). If too much pressure drop occurs in a nozzle, consider increasing the nozzle size. If too much is consumed entering or exiting the bundle, consider using a distributor belt. If too much pressure drop is taken through the baffle windows, consider a larger baffle cut. On the shell side, the program determines the dirty pressure drop by assuming that the fouling will close the clearance between the shell I.D. and the baffle OD and the clearance between the baffle and the tube OD. The bypassing around the outside of the bundle (between the shell I.D. and the outer tube limit) is still present in the dirty pressure drop. The program determines the dirty pressure drop in the tubes by estimating a thickness for the fouling, based on the specified tube side fouling resistance, which decreases the crosssectional area for flow.
3-88
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
User specified bundle multiplier The user specified bundle multiplier, which you can specify in the input, is included in the bundle portion of the calculated pressure drop, clean and dirty.
Velocity distribution The velocity distribution, between the inlet and outlet nozzle, is shown for reference. In other parts of the output, the velocity, which is shown for the shell side, is the diametric crossflow velocity. For the tube side it is the velocity through the tubes. For two phase applications, the velocities for crossflow, through baffle windows, and through tubes are the highest velocities based on the maximum vapor flow.
Shell Side Stream Analysis The shell side stream analysis displays the characteristics and potential problems of the shell side flow. The program determines the shell side film coefficient and pressure drop by using the stream analysis method. This method is based on the concepts originally developed by Townsend Tinker at the University of Delaware in the early 1950's. B-JAC has further developed and fine-tuned this method which attempts to predict how much of the fluid will flow through each of the possible flow paths. The stream analysis method considers many variables, including shell diameter, baffle spacing, baffle cut, baffle type, tube diameter, tube hole diameter, baffle diameter, tube rows, and outer tube limits. The flow fractions are shown for the various streams and the clearances, which the program has used. The clearances are either those based on the TEMA standards or specified in the input. The crossflow stream is the portion of the flow, which crosses the bundle and flows through the baffle window. This is sometimes referred to as the "B" stream. Since crossflow gives the highest film coefficient, we usually want to maximize the percentage of flow in crossflow, unless the design is solely controlled by shell side pressure drop. In turbulent flow, you should expect a crossflow percentage of 40 to 70%. In laminar flow, the crossflow often drops to 25 to 40%.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-89
Thermal Details - Shell Side Flow The tube-baffle hole clearance is the annular opening between the tube OD and the baffle. This is the location of the primary leakage stream and is sometimes referred to as the "A" stream. Leakage through this opening can significantly decrease the pressure drop and will also reduce the film coefficient. The opening between the shell I.D. and the baffle OD is shown as the shell-baffle clearance. This is a secondary leakage stream and is sometimes called the "E" stream. The last stream shown is through the opening between the shell I.D. and the outermost tubes as defined by the outer tube limits (OTL). This is called a bypass stream, because it largely bypasses the heat transfer surface. This is also known as the "C" stream. When this shellbundle OTL clearance is large as in the case of an inside floating head exchanger (TEMA rear head types S & T) the program automatically adds sealing strips to force the flow back into the bundle.
Rho*V2 Analysis The rho*V2 Analysis is shown on the lower half of this output and is based on the analysis suggested by TEMA at the five locations listed. Rho*V2 is the product of the density and the velocity squared. Experience has shown that these limits set by TEMA are good guidelines for avoiding excessive erosion, vibration, and stress fatigue of the tubes at the inlet and outlet. The program does not automatically change the design when the TEMA limits are exceeded, but instead gives you a warning message and suggests that you change the shell inlet or outlet construction in order to lower inlet or outlet velocities. If the rho*V2 is too high through the shell inlet nozzle, consider a larger nozzle, reducer piece, or dome. The shell entrance and exit velocities are based on the flow area between the tubes under the nozzle and the radial flow area into the shell between the tube bundle and the shell I.D. If the rho*V2 is excessive at shell entrance or exit, consider increasing the appropriate nozzle diameter, removing tubes under the nozzle, or using a nozzle dome. The bundle entrance and exit velocities are based on the flow area between the tubes in the first row(s) in the inlet and outlet compartments between the tubesheet and the first baffle, excluding area blocked by any impingement plate. When the rho*V2 entering or exiting the bundle are too high, consider increasing the inlet or outlet baffle spacing or removing tubes under the nozzle
3-90
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Thermosiphon Reboilers This output only appears for thermosiphon applications. This section shows the equivalent length of piping from the column to the heat exchanger inlet and the piping from the outlet back to the column. Equivalent length is a method of specifying a length of piping which accounts for the pressure drop of pipe as a ratio of length to diameter and the effect of valves, bends, tees, expansions, contractions, etc. Refer to a piping handbook for more details. The liquid level above the top tubesheet, shows the relationship between the liquid level in the column and the top face of the top tubesheet. A positive value indicates the level is above the tubesheet; a negative value indicates the level is below the tubesheet. Height of return connection above top tubesheet provides the elevation difference of the return connection to the column. It is from the top face of the top tubesheet to the centerline of the opening into the column.
Used and Specified These columns indicate the values actually used in the calculations and values specified in input. The bubble point in the column, which was specified in the input, is given. The bubble point in the exchanger is calculated based on the effect of the liquid head, which will elevate the bubble point. The sensible zone is the tube length required to heat the liquid back up to its boiling point due to the elevation of the boiling point caused by the pressure of the fluid head. If this is a significant part of the tube length, say more than 20%, you should consider putting a valve or orifice in the inlet line to take a pressure drop, which will reduce the flow rate and area, required. The vaporization zone is the tube length required for the specified or calculated amount of vaporization.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-91
TEMA Sheet HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATION SHEET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58
3-92
Company: Location: Service of Unit: Item No.: Date: Size 690-4000 Surf/unit(eff)
153.7
Fluid allocation Fluid name Fluid quantity, total Vapor (in/out) Liquid Noncondensable Temperature (in/out) Dew point/bubble point Density Viscosity Molecular weight, vapor Molecular weight, noncondensable Specific heat Thermal conductivity Latent heat Inlet pressure Velocity Pressure drop, allow./calc. Fouling resist. (min.) Heat exchanged 6215819 Transfer rate, service
Our Reference: Your Reference: Rev No.: Job No.: Type BEM hor Connected in 1 parallel 1 series m2; Shells/unit 1 Surf/shell(eff) 153.7 m2 PERFORMANCE OF ONE UNIT Shell Side Tube Side kg/s kg/s kg/s kg/s C C kg/m3 mPa*s
133.5 133.5
98.923 133.5
98.923
98.923
110
80
28
43
1747.87 3.637
1777.42 6.057
997.75 0.837
993.46 0.619
kJ/(kg*K) 1.58 1.524 4.191 4.187 W/(m*K) 0.37 0.353 0.604 0.624 kJ/kg bar 6 4 m/s 0.71 1.45 bar 0.7 / 0.569 0.5 / 0.14 m2*K/W 0.00035 0.00018 W ; MTD (corrected) 57.9 C 698 dirty 792 clean 1431 W/(m2*K) CONSTRUCTION OF ONE SHELL Sketch Shell Side Tube Side Design/test pressure bar 5.5 /code 5.2 /code Design temperature C 143 77 No. passes per shell 1 2 Corrosion allowance mm 0 0 Connections in mm 305 / 305 /150 size/rating out mm 305 / 305 /150 / / Tube no. 618 od 20 ;thk-avg 1.6 mm;length 4000 mm;pitch 25 mm Tube type plain Material Hast C Pattern 30 Shell Hast C id od 700 mm Shell cover Channel or bonnet SS304 Channel cover Tubesheet-stationary Hast C Tubesheet-floating Floating head cover Impingement protection none Baffles-cross SS304 Type sseg Cut (%d) 25 h;Spacing: c/c 578 mm Baffles-long Seal type Inlet 536 mm Supports-tube U-bend Type Bypass seal Tube-tubesheet joint groove/expand Expansion joint Type Rho*V2-inlet nozzle 1917 Bundle entrance 1970 Bundle exit 1937 Gaskets-shell side Tube side -floating head Code requirements ASME Code Sec VIII Div 1 TEMA class B Weight/shell 3219 Filled with water 4989 Bundle 2375 kg Remarks
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Mechanical Summary The Mechanical Summary Section is subdivided into three headings: • • •
Exchanger Dimensions Vibration & Resonance Analysis Setting Plan & Tubesheet Layout
Exchanger Dimensions The shell, front head, and nozzle, tube, and bundle dimensions are briefly described in this output. Some of these items are clarified below.
Cylinder diameters The shell and front head cylinder outside and inside diameters are provided. The thicknesses used to derive the cylinder inside or outside diameter are based on a basic mechanical design. However, due to assumptions made by the program or unknown data (e.g., exact material specifications) this may not match the thicknesses calculated in the detailed mechanical design. For kettle type exchangers, the shell cylinder diameter refers to the smaller cylinder at the tubesheet, and the kettle outside diameter is the larger cylinder containing the disengagement space.
Vapor belt length The vapor belt length is the total length of the vapor belt including the transition pieces that are attached to the shell.
Nozzles Nozzle Sizing: The program will automatically determine the diameter of a nozzle, if you do not specify it in the input. The default nozzle diameter is determined by the calculated maximum velocity which is a function of the density of the fluid and the allowable pressure drop. The maximum velocity is calculated as follows: max. velocity = k / (density)0.5 where: velocity is in m/s or ft/s k is a constant as shown below density is in kg/mÛ or lb/ftÛ
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-93
For all nozzles, except condensate drains, when the allowable pressure drop is greater than or equal to 0.12 bar (1.7 psi): for SI units:k = 47.2 for US units:k = 38.7 For all nozzles, except condensate drains and X-shell nozzles, when the allowable pressure drop is less than 0.12 bar (1.7 psi): for SI units:k = 296 * (allowable pressure drop in bar) + 12.2 for US units:k = 16.70 * (allowable pressure drop in psi) + 10.0 For condensate drains: for SI units:k = 30.49 for US units:k = 25.0 Nozzle sizes selected or specified in the input will then be checked for compliance with TEMA recommend mass velocity limits. If exceeded a warning will be issued. The program will increase the diameter of the nozzles larger than TEMA minimums to avoid excessive pressure drop in the nozzles, if greater than 15% of the allowable pressure drop.
Tube length and number of tubes These are for straight tubes. In the case of U-tubes they are the straight length and the number of tube holes in the tubesheet.
Area ratio Ao/Ai This is the ratio of the outside tube surface to the inside tube surface for finned tubes.
Pass partition lane This is the opening across a pass partition from tube edge to tube edge.
Deviation in tubes/pass This is the largest deviation from the median number of tubes per pass.
Baffle Cut This is the window expressed as a percent of the shell inside diameter. For double segmental baffles, it is printed with the percent of the innermost window / percent of one of the outer windows (e.g., 28/23). For triple segmental baffles, it is printed with the percent of the innermost window / percent of one intermediate window / percent of one outermost window (e.g., 15/17/15).
3-94
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Open Distance at Top This is the distance from the top of the inside of the shell to the top edge of the topmost tube row. Similarly, the Open Distance at Bottom is the distance from the bottom of the inside of the shell to bottom edge of the bottom-most tube row.
Clearances These are diametric clearances.
Vibration & Resonance Analysis Vibration Flow-induced tube vibration on the shell side of a heat exchanger can cause serious damage to a tube bundle, sometimes very quickly. It is very important to try to avoid potential vibration damage by making changes at the design stage to limit the probability of vibration occurring. Although vibration analysis is not yet an exact science, TEMA has included two methods, which are fully implemented in the Aspen Hetran program. The calculations are done at three or four points:
Vibration Analysis at Inlet This is the longest tube span at the inlet. For segmental baffles (except NTIW) this is from the inside face of the tubesheet to the second baffle. For grid baffles and NTIW this is from the inside face of the tubesheet to the first baffle.
Vibration Analysis at Bundle This is the longest tube span excluding the inlet and outlet zones. For segmental baffles (except NTIW) this is two times the baffle spacing. For grid baffles and NTIW this is the baffle spacing.
Vibration Analysis at Outlet This is the longest tube span at the outlet. For segmental baffles (except NTIW) this is from the next to last baffle to the inside face of the tubesheet. For grid baffles and NTIW this is from the last baffle to the inside face of the tubesheet.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-95
Vibration Analysis at Other Areas This is for other tube spans resulting from using intermediate supports with the NTIW construction.
Crossflow and Critical Velocities The most dependable predictor of vibration is the check on critical velocity. It is based on the comparison of the crossflow velocity to the critical velocity for fluid elastic whirling, which was developed by Connors. Basically it indicates the point at which the kinetic energy can not be dampened through the structure of the heat exchanger and the tube will move. The crossflow velocity is based on the average velocity of the fluid across a representative tube row in that region using the stream analysis method. The crossflow velocity for two phase mixtures is based on a homogeneous fluid density.
Acoustic and Natural Frequencies When the shell side fluid is a gas, TEMA also recommends checking the relationship between the natural frequency of the tubes and the acoustic frequency of the gas. If these two frequencies are close, the tubes may vibrate in resonance. The program indicates vibration when the acoustic frequency matches the natural frequency within + or - 20%.
Design Strategies The best design strategies to avoid tube vibration are primarily design changes, which reduce the shell side velocity, such as: using a multi-segmental baffle (double or triple) or a grid baffle (rod or strip); using a J-shell or X-shell; increasing the tube pitch. Also, you may want to consider using a no tubes in the window (NTIW) baffle arrangement.
Acoustic Resonance Analysis The acoustic resonance analysis is also based on the latest edition of TEMA and is done at the same points described previously for vibration analysis. Acoustic resonance is a problem of sound, but not usually tube vibration. Therefore its avoidance may not be as critical as tube vibration, but still should be avoided if practically possible. When a low density gas is flowing on the shell side of the heat exchanger at a relatively high velocity, there is the possibility that it will oscillate as a column somewhat like an organ pipe. This results in a noise, which can be very loud. Noise levels of more than 140 decibels have been reported, which would be very painful to the human ear.
3-96
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Problems Resulting from Acoustic Resonance If acoustic resonance occurs and its frequency approaches the tube natural frequency, vibration may also occur. Even if tube vibration does not occur, it is wise to avoid acoustic resonance for many reasons. First, the noise levels may not be allowable under company standards or government regulations (e.g., OSHA in the U.S.) or acceptable to insurance companies. Second, the noise may produce significant stresses in the shell and attached piping. Third, it may result in an increase in the shell side pressure drop, which is not considered in the Aspen Hetran program.
Determination The primary mechanisms, which cause acoustic resonance, are vortex shedding and turbulent buffeting. If either the vortex shedding frequency or the turbulent buffeting frequency match the acoustic frequency within + or - 20%, then the program will predict acoustic resonance. TEMA also describes two other conditions, which indicate acoustic resonance--a condition B and a condition C velocity which are compared to the crossflow velocity. Acoustic resonance is indicated when the crossflow velocity exceeds either the condition B velocity or the condition C velocity and the limit C is exceeded. These indicators seem to be less reliable than the frequency matching, and the program may not show the results in some cases.
Design Strategies The best design strategies to avoid acoustic resonance are the same for avoiding tube vibration, such as: using a multi-segmental baffle (double or triple) or a grid baffle (rod or strip); using a J-shell or X-shell; increasing the tube pitch. If such design changes are not practical, then deresonating baffles can be installed. These are designed to break the column of gas in order to minimize oscillation. These baffles are plates, which are positioned between the conventional segmental baffles, perpendicular to the segmental baffle and perpendicular to the baffle cut.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-97
Setting Plan & Tubesheet Layout Setting plan drawing The scaled outline drawing provides an accurate depiction of the exchangers under review. It shows the types of heads, types of flanges, nozzle positions and functions, and the actual position of the baffles with respect to the inlet and outlet shell side nozzles. This allows you to determine any potential conflicts between nozzles and baffles. The drawing can be zoomed in by dragging a frame around a drawing section and selecting “Zoom In” from the “View” command in menu bar.
3-98
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubesheet Layout The tubesheet layout drawing provides an accurate depiction of the tube arrangement selected by the program for the exchanger under review. It shows the shell side nozzles, tubes, tie rods, impingement plate, baffle cuts, pass lanes, tube pattern, tube pitch, and tubes per row. This drawing is particularly useful in understanding and resolving high velocity problems at the shell and/or bundle entrance and exit. You can zoom in by dragging a frame around a drawing section and selecting “Zoom In” from the “View” command in the menu bar. Once you have a specified an exchanger geometry and executed the Hetran in the Rating Mode, you can interactively make modifications to the tube layout. Reference the Tube Layout description in the Rating/Simulation Data program input section.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-99
Calculation Details The Calculation Details Section is subdivided into six sections: • • • • • •
Interval Analysis – Shell Side Interval Analysis – Tube Side VLE – Hot Side VLE – Cold Side Maximum Rating Property Temperature Limits
Interval Analysis – Shell Side & Tube Side The Interval analysis section provides you with table of values for liquid properties, vapor properties, performance, heat transfer coefficients and heat load over the shell & tube side temperature ranges.
Liquid Properties Summary of liquid properties over the temperature in the heat exchanger.
Vapor Properties Summary of liquid properties over the temperature in the heat exchanger.
Performance This section gives an incremental summary of the performance. Overall coefficient, surface area, temperature difference, and pressure drop are given for each heat load/temperature increment.
Heat Transfer Coefficient – Single Phase Flow regimes are mapped in this section with the corresponding overall calculated film coefficients. The overall film coefficients are base upon the following: • •
3-100
The liquid coefficient is the calculated heat transfer coefficient assuming the total flow is all liquid. The gas coefficient is the calculated heat transfer coefficient assuming the total flow is all vapor.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Heat Transfer Coefficient - Condensation Flow regimes are mapped in this section with the corresponding overall calculated film coefficients. The overall film coefficients are base upon the following: "Desuperheating Dry Wall" is for the part of the desuperheating load, which is removed, where no condensing is occurring. This only happens when the tube wall temperature is above the dew point temperature. In such a case, the film coefficient is based on a dry gas rate and the temperature difference is based on the inlet temperature. "Desuperheating Wet Wall" which shows the part of the desuperheating load which is removed coincident with condensation occurring at the tube wall. This case is more common. The film coefficient and temperature difference are the same as the first condensing zone. Liquid Cooling coefficient is for the cooling of any liquid entering and the condensate after it has formed and flows further through the heat exchanger. The program assumes that all liquid will be cooled down to the same outlet temperature as the vapor. The dry gas coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient when only gas is flowing with no condensation occurring. It is used as the lower limit for the condensing coefficient for pure component condensation and in the mass transfer and proration model for complex condensation applications. The pure condensing coefficients (shear and gravity) are the calculated condensing coefficients for the stream for that regime. The resulting pure condensing coefficient is a pure shear coefficient, pure gravity coefficient or a proration between the two, depending on the condensing regime. The condensing film coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient resulting from the combined effects of the pure condensing coefficient and the dry gas coefficient.
Heat Transfer Coefficient - Vaporization The two phase factor is the correction factor applied to the liquid coefficient to calculate the two phase heat transfer coefficient. The two phase coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient calculated based on the combined liquid and vapor flow. The nucleate coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient due to the nucleation of bubbles on the surface of the heat transfer surface. The vaporization film coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient for the specified side resulting from the vectorial addition of the two-phase and nucleate boiling coefficient. Observe the change in the film coefficient to see if it decreases severely at the end of the vaporizing range. This usually indicates that the tube wall is drying out and the film coefficient is approaching a dry gas rate. If a significant percentage of the area required is at this low coefficient, consider a higher circulation rate (less vaporized each time through) if it is a reboiler.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-101
VLE – Hot Side If the Aspen Hetran program generated the heat release curve, the following VLE information will be provided.
Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium The condensation curve will be provided as a function of equal heat load increments or temperature increments. Cumulative heat load and vapor/liquid flow rates as a function of temperature will be shown.
Condensation Details Component flow rates as function of temperature increments will be provided.
Vapor Properties Vapor properties will be provided as a function of temperature increments.
Liquid Properties Liquid properties will be provided as a function of temperature increments.
VLE – Cold Side If the Aspen Hetran program generated the heat release curve, the following VLE information will be provided:
Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium The vaporization curve will be provided as a function of equal heat load increments or temperature increments. Cumulative heat load and vapor/liquid flow rates as a function of temperature will be shown.
Vaporization Details Component flow rates as function of temperature increments will be provided.
Vapor Properties Vapor properties will be provided as a function of temperature increments.
3-102
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Liquid Properties Liquid properties will be provided as a function of temperature increments.
Maximum Rating In design mode, the program searches for a heat exchanger to satisfy the performance requirements you have specified in the input. In rating mode, the program checks the specified heat exchanger against these process requirements. In both cases it is often important to know what the actual outlet temperatures and heat exchanged will be when the exchanger is clean and when it reaches the specified fouling. Since the heat exchanger is usually oversurfaced or undersurfaced, the actual outlet temperatures will differ from those in the input. The Maximum Performance Rating output predicts these actual outlet temperatures and heat exchanged. To do this, the program uses the overall coefficient and effective surface area calculated in design or rating mode. It then varies the outlet temperatures, which will determine the heat duty and the mean temperature difference until the basic heat transfer equation is in exact balance:
Q =U * A CMTD Where there are multiple exchangers in series, the program will show each exchanger separately.
Property Temperature Limits Vapor and liquid property temperature limits will be listed.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-103
Hetran-Design Methods Optimization Logic In design mode, the Aspen Hetran program will search for a heat exchanger configuration, which will satisfy the desired process conditions. It will automatically change a number of the geometric parameters as it searches. However, Aspen Hetran will not automatically evaluate all possible configurations and it may not find the true optimum by itself. It is up to the user to determine what possible changes to the construction could lead to a better design and then present these changes to the program. Aspen Hetran searches to find a design, which satisfies the following: • • • • •
Enough surface area to do the desired heat transfer Pressure drops within the allowable Physical size within acceptable limits Velocities within an acceptable range Mechanically sound and practical to construct
In addition to these criteria, Aspen Hetran also determines a budget cost estimate for each design and in most cases performs a vibration analysis. However cost and vibration do not affect the program's logic for optimization. There are over thirty mechanical parameters which directly or indirectly affect the thermal performance of a shell and tube heat exchanger. It is not practical for the program to evaluate all combinations of these parameters. In addition, the acceptable variations are often dependent upon process and cost considerations, which are beyond the scope of the program (for example the cost and importance of cleaning). Therefore the program automatically varies only a number of parameters which are reasonably independent of other process, operating, maintenance, or fabrication considerations. The parameters which are automatically optimized are: • • • • • • • • •
3-104
Shell diameter Baffle spacing Pass layout type Tube length Number of baffles Exchangers in parallel Number of tubes Tube passes Exchangers in series
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The design engineer should optimize the other parameters, based on good engineering judgement. Some of the important parameters to consider are: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
Shell type Tube outside diameter Impingement protection Rear head type Tube pitch Nozzle sizes Tube pattern Tubesheet type Baffle type Tube type Materials Exchanger orientation Baffle cut Tube wall thickness Fluid allocation
Optimization of Shell Diameter The highest priority variable in design mode is the shell diameter. The program attempts to find the smallest diameter shell that will satisfy surface area, pressure drop, and velocity requirements. The diameter is incremented based on the shell diameter increment and is limited by the minimum shell diameter, and the maximum shell diameter. Each of these can be specified in the input.
Optimization of Tube Length Once the smallest shell diameter has been found, the program optimizes the tube length to the shortest standard length, within the allowable range, which will satisfy surface area, pressure drop, and velocity requirements. The length is incremented or decremented based on the tube length increment and is limited by the minimum tube length and maximum tube length. Each of these can be specified in the input.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-105
Optimization of Baffle Spacing The program seeks the minimum reasonable baffle spacing, which gives a pressure drop and velocity within the maximums allowed. The program wants to maximize the shell side velocity thereby maximizing the shell side film coefficient and minimizing any velocity dependent fouling. The minimum baffle spacing is usually equal to 20% of the shell inside diameter or 50 mm (2 in.), whichever is larger. The maximum baffle spacing is usually equal to one half the maximum unsupported span, as suggested by TEMA, for segmental baffles, and one times the maximum unsupported span for grid baffles or no tubes in the window construction. You can override these default values by specifying the minimum and/or maximum baffle spacing in the input.
Optimization of Number of Baffles The program attempts to find the maximum number of baffles, which will fit between the inlet and outlet nozzles. Since the exact locations of the inlet and outlet nozzles are very much dependent upon the mechanical design, the program attempts to locate the nozzles by estimating the thickness of the tubesheet, the thickness of any shell or backing ring flanges, the maximum reinforcement pad diameters, and the necessary clearances.
Optimization of Tube Passes The program seeks the maximum reasonable number of tube passes that gives a pressure drop and velocity within the maximums allowed. The program wants to maximize the tube side velocity thereby maximizing the tube side film coefficient and minimizing any velocity dependent fouling. The maximum reasonable number of tube passes is usually a function of the shell diameter and the tube outside diameter. It can also be a function of the tube side application (e.g., a tube side condenser is usually limited to one pass and should never be more than two passes) or a function of the rear head type (e.g., the W type head is limited to two passes). The tube passes for tubes with an outside diameter up to 25.4 mm (1.00 in) are limited by shell diameter as follows: Shell OD
Maximum
mm-in
Tube Passes
102-168
4-6
4
169-610
7-24
8
611-914
25-36
12
915-3000
37-120 16
The maximum number of tube passes is further restricted for tubes with an outside diameter larger than 25.4 mm (1.00 in).
3-106
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Optimization of Tube Count The Aspen Hetran program contains the same tube count subroutine, which is in the ENSEA tubesheet layout program. Therefore it determines an exact number of tubes and their location for each design. The program will try different tube pass layout types (quadrant, mixed, and ribbon) when appropriate and choose the layout giving the highest number of tubes.
Optimization of Exchangers in Series The program will automatically increase the number of exchangers in series when it reaches the maximum allowable shell diameter and tube length and still is unable to find a design with enough heat transfer area. It will also go to exchangers in series when the correction factor on the MTD falls below 0.7 (or the minimum allowable correction factor specified in the input).
Optimization of Exchangers in Parallel The program will automatically increase the number of exchangers in parallel when it reaches the maximum allowable shell diameter and minimum allowable tube length and still is unable to satisfy the allowable pressure drop.
Nozzle Sizing The program will automatically determine the diameter of a nozzle, if you do not specify it in the input. The default nozzle diameter is determined by the calculated maximum velocity, which is a function of the density of the fluid and the allowable pressure drop. The maximum velocity is calculated as follows: max. velocity = k / (density)0.5 where: velocity is in m/s or ft/s k is a constant as shown below density is in kg/m3 or lb/ft3 For all nozzles, except condensate drains, when the allowable pressure drop is greater than or equal to 0.12 bar (1.7 psi): for SI units:
k = 47.2
for US units k = 38.7
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-107
For all nozzles, except condensate drains and X-shell nozzles, when the allowable pressure drop is less than 0.12 bar (1.7 psi): for SI units: k = 296 * (allowable pressure drop in bar)+12.2 for US units: k = 16.70 * (allowable pressure drop in psi)+10.0 For condensate drains: for SI units:
k = 30.49
for US units: k = 25.0
Minimum Velocities Although the program requests minimum velocities as an input option, these values do not directly affect the logic of the program. The program does compare the calculated velocity with the specified or defaulted minimum velocity and it then issues a warning if the calculated is less than the minimum velocity. The minimum velocity is not used to change the logic, because in design mode, the program is already trying to maximize the velocity within the allowable pressure drop and the maximum allowable velocity.
Maximum Velocities It is important to establish maximum allowable velocities for both the shell and tube sides. On the shell side, a well-chosen maximum velocity will avoid vibration, excessive erosion, and stress fatigue of the tubes. For the tube side, avoiding excessive velocities will limit erosion of the tube and wear of the tube to tubesheet joint. On the shell side, the maximum velocity is for the crossflow stream. Where there is a change of phase, the maximum velocity applies to the vapor velocity. If you do not specify the maximum velocity in the input, the program will calculate one. This default value is independent of tube material. Some materials can withstand higher velocities than the maximum velocity chosen by the program. The default value calculated by the program for maximum allowable velocity is equal to the appropriate constant shown below divided by the square root of the density (kg/m3 in SI units or lb/ft3 in US units). Vmax = k / (Density)0.5
3-108
k in SI units
k in US units
Shell Side Fluid
60.9
50.0
Tube Side Fluid
93.8
77.0
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
No Phase Change No Phase Change - Film Coefficient The shell side film coefficient is based on a Sieder-Tate correlation using the velocity which is determined using a modified Tinker stream analysis method. The tube side film coefficient is based on a Dittus-Boelter correlation.
No Phase Change - MTD The program uses a corrected log mean temperature difference for all geometries.
No Phase Change - Pressure Drop The pressure drop is determined by using a Fanning-type equation. On the shell side a modified Tinker stream analysis method is used. Velocity heads are used to determine pressure losses through the nozzles and various types of baffle windows. The program uses end zone corrections for the pressure drop in the inlet spacing and outlet spacing on the shell side. It also considers the number of tube rows crossed and the shell and bundle inlet and outlet losses based on the actual tube layout.
Simple Condensation The program divides the condensing range up into ten equal zones based on temperature from the dew point to the bubble point or outlet temperature. For each zone it calculates a film coefficient (made up of a condensing coefficient, gas cooling coefficient, liquid cooling coefficient, and two phase coefficient), MTD, and two phase pressure drop, based on the vapor liquid equilibrium and physical properties for each zone. The user may also select the number of zones to be used in the analysis as well as the division of the zones by equal temperature or heat load increments.
Desuperheating- Film Coefficient The program determines at what temperature point the tube wall will be wet by using a dry gas coefficient on the hot side and the coolant coefficient on the cold side. If the program determines that any part of the desuperheating range will result in a dry wall, it will calculate a separate desuperheating zone using a dry gas coefficient. Once the tube is wet, any remaining superheat is removed coincident with the condensation in the first condensing zone and the first zone film coefficient is used.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-109
Condensing - Film Coefficient - Horizontal Inside Tube The program determines the dominant flow regime in each of the zones. The flow regimes are divided into annular, annular with stratification, wavy/stratified, intermediate wavy, high wavy/slug/plug, and bubble. For each flow regime there is a separate equation, which reflects the contribution of shear, controlled or gravity controlled flow. The shear controlled equations are derived from a single phase Dittus-Boelter equation with a two phase multiplier as a function of the Martinelli parameter. The gravity controlled equations are modified Nusselt and Dukler equations.
Condensing - Film Coefficient - Horizontal Outside Tube, Vertical Inside or Outside Tube The program determines if the flow is shear controlled or gravity controlled in each of the zones. If it is in transition, then the result is prorated. The shear controlled equations are derived from a single phase Dittus-Boelter equation with a two phase multiplier as a function of the Martinelli parameter. The gravity controlled equations are modified Nusselt and Dukler equations.
Liquid Cooling and Subcooling - Film Coefficient The cooling of the condensate (and any liquid entering) down to the outlet temperature and any subcooling below the bubble point are calculated using the greater of a forced convection or free convection equation for the full temperature range. In the case of a knockback reflux condenser the program does not consider any liquid cooling or subcooling.
MTD The program assumes that the MTD is linear over the condensing range. Subcooling is also assumed to be linear. The MTD calculation is based upon the interval's local temperature difference. For multipass exchangers, the local temperature difference of the multipass stream is weighted based upon the stream temperatures at each pass.
Pressure Drop The program uses a two phase Martinelli equation to calculate pressure drop.
3-110
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Complex Condensation The program divides the condensing range up into a number of equal zones based on temperature or heat load from the dew point to the bubble point or outlet temperature. For each zone it calculates a film coefficient (made up of a condensing coefficient, gas cooling coefficient, liquid cooling coefficient, and two phase coefficient), MTD, and two phase pressure drop, based on the vapor liquid equilibrium and physical properties for each zone. The user may also select the number of zones to be used in the analysis as well as the division of the zones by temperature or heat load.
Desuperheating - Film Coefficient The program determines at what temperature point the tube wall will be wet by using a dry gas coefficient on the hot side and the coolant coefficient on the cold side. If the program determines that any part of the desuperheating range will result in a dry wall, it will calculate a separate desuperheating zone using a dry gas coefficient. Once the tube is wet, any remaining superheat is removed coincident with the condensation in the first condensing zone and the first zone film coefficient is used.
Condensing - Film Coefficient A separate condensing coefficient is determined for each zone, based on the flow regime and whether it is shear or gravity controlled.
Gas Cooling - Film Coefficient The cooling of the vapor once condensation has begun (after any desuperheating) and the cooling of any noncondensables is based on a single phase coefficient for each zone. On the shell side it is a modified Sieder-Tate equation. On the tube side it is a modified DittusBoelter equation.
Liquid Cooling and Subcooling - Film Coefficient The cooling of the condensate and any liquid entering down to the outlet temperature and any subcooling below the bubble point is calculated using a two phase coefficient based on the Martinelli equation. It is calculated for each of the ten zones, based on the liquid carried over from previous zones.
Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient The overall heat transfer coefficient calculated for each zone is dependent on the condensing correlation chosen. The program defaults to the mass transfer method, which is a film model based on a Colburn-Hougen correlation for condensable(s) with noncondensable(s) and a Colburn-Drew correlation for multiple condensables. Our experience and research indicate that if the composition of the vapor is well known, the mass transfer method is the most accurate method. The program also allows you to choose the Silver-Bell proration method, which is an equilibrium model.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-111
Desuperheating - MTD The program determines at what temperature point the tube wall will be wet by using a dry gas coefficient on the hot side and the coolant coefficient on the cold side. If the program determines that any part of the desuperheating range will result in a dry wall, it will use the inlet temperature and the vapor temperature point, which yields the wet tube wall to determine the MTD for the desuperheating zone. Once the tube wall is wet, the rest of the desuperheating occurs using the dew point to calculate the MTD. The MTD calculation is based upon the interval's local temperature difference. For multipass exchangers, the local temperature difference of the multipass stream is weighted based upon the stream temperatures at each pass.
Condensing - MTD The program calculates an MTD for each of the zones using the starting and ending temperature for each zone. The MTD calculation is based upon the interval's local temperature difference. For multipass exchangers, the local temperature difference of the multipass stream is weighted based upon the stream temperatures at each pass.
Liquid Cooling - MTD The liquid cooling load is divided evenly among the zones. This avoids the common mistake of assuming that the vapor and liquid are kept in equilibrium and are at the same temperature. In fact much of the liquid cooling may actually occur early in the heat exchanger. An MTD for the liquid cooling is calculated for each zone and then weighted.
Desuperheating - Pressure Drop If the program determines that there is a dry wall zone, as described above, then the pressure drop for this zone is calculated using the stream analysis method if on the shell side or a modified Fanning equation if on the tube side.
Condensing - Pressure Drop The pressure drop for the vapor cooling, condensing, and condensate formed is determined using a two phase Martinelli equation.
3-112
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Simple Vaporization Liquid Preheating - Film Coefficient The film coefficient for the heating of the liquid from its inlet temperature to the bubble point is the greater of the forced convection coefficient and the free convection coefficient.
Pool Boiling - Film Coefficient The pool boiling coefficient is derived by the vectorial addition of the nucleate boiling coefficient and the flow boiling coefficient. The nucleate boiling coefficient is based on the Stephan-Abdelsalam equation corrected for pressure and molecular weight. If a boiling range exists and is specified in the input, the program also corrects for the depression of the coefficient resulting from the boiling of mixtures. The flow boiling coefficient is based on a no phase change liquid coefficient with a two phase multiplier. This coefficient is corrected for the effect of recirculation of the liquid around the tube bundle. The program automatically determines the recirculation rate based on the geometry of the shell and tube bundle. In a kettle, the program divides the boiling into a number of vertical zones, from the bottom of the bundle to the top of the bundle. The boiling temperature for each zone is calculated based on the effect of the static head of the liquid in the zones above. A separate boiling coefficient is calculated for each zone. The effect of liquid recirculation around the bundle in a kettle can be very significant and is used to modify the coefficient accordingly.
Forced Circulation - Film Coefficient The boiling coefficient for forced circulation is also determined by using a vectorial addition of the nucleate boiling coefficient and the flow boiling coefficient and corrected as described above for pool boiling. However there is no recirculation of liquid around the bundle.
Thermosiphon - Tube Side - Film Coefficient The vaporization side is divided into a liquid preheating zone and a number of vaporizing zones divided equally by temperature. The boiling coefficient is determined by using a vectorial addition of the nucleate boiling coefficient and the flow boiling coefficient and corrected as described above for pool boiling. The flow regime is determined using a modified Baker flow regime map.
Liquid Preheating - MTD The liquid preheat MTD is calculated as a linear LMTD.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-113
Pool Boiling - MTD The MTD for the boiling zones is determined as a linear LMTD using the calculated boiling temperatures of the bottom zone and top zone and the average temperature of the heating medium on the tube side.
Forced Circulation - MTD The MTD calculation is based upon the interval's local temperature difference. For multipass exchangers, the local temperature difference of the multipass stream is weighted based upon the stream temperatures at each pass.
Thermosiphon - MTD The MTD is calculated as an arithmetic MTD using the average temperature in each of the eleven zones and the corresponding temperature of the heating medium on the shell side.
Pool Boiling - Pressure Drop The pressure drop in pool boiling is the total of the liquid pressure drop, determined using a Fanning equation, times a two phase Martinelli multiplier, plus the vapor acceleration pressure drop and the static head pressure drop.
Forced Circulation - Pressure Drop The liquid pressure drop, determined using a Fanning equation, is multiplied by a two phase Martinelli multiplier. If the exchanger is in a vertical position, a vapor acceleration pressure drop and static head pressure drop are also added.
Thermosiphon - Pressure Drop The program considers the pressure changes due to the inlet and outlet piping. The pressure drop within the heat exchanger is calculated in the same way as described under forced circulation.
3-114
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Complex Vaporization The program divides the vaporization range up into a number of equal zones based on temperature or heat load from the bubble point to the outlet temperature. For each zone it calculates a film coefficient, MTD, and two phase pressure drop, based on the vapor liquid equilibrium and physical properties for each zone.
Liquid Preheating - Film Coefficient The film coefficient for the heating of the liquid from its inlet temperature to the bubble point is the greater of the forced convection coefficient and the free convection coefficient.
Forced Circulation - Film Coefficient The boiling coefficient for each zone is derived by the vectorial addition of the nucleate boiling coefficient and the flow boiling coefficient. The nucleate boiling coefficient is based on the Stephan-Abdelsalam equation corrected for pressure and molecular weight. If a boiling range exists and is specified in the input, the program also corrects for the depression of the coefficient resulting from the boiling of mixtures. The flow boiling coefficient is based on a no phase change liquid coefficient with a two phase multiplier.
Complex Vaporization - MTD The program calculates an MTD for each of the ten zones using the starting and ending temperature for each zone. The MTD calculation is based upon the interval's local temperature difference. For multipass exchangers, the local temperature difference of the multipass stream is weighted based upon the stream temperatures at each pass.
Complex Vaporization - Pressure Drop The liquid pressure drop, determined using a Fanning equation, is multiplied by a two phase Martinelli multiplier for each zone. If the exchanger is in a vertical position, a vapor acceleration pressure drop and static head pressure drop are also added.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
3-115
Falling Film Evaporators The program uses the design methods of Chun and Seban for determining the film coefficient and acceptable liquid loading of the tube. In design mode the program determines the cross-sectional area for tube side flow so that the liquid loading of the tube is below the point where the liquid would begin to move down the center of the tube (rather than remain as a film). The liquid loading is kept above the point where the film would no longer be continuous. In rating mode, the program warns if the liquid loading is above or below these respective points. The program assumes that the vapor also continues to move down the tube and is separated from the liquid in the bottom head or a receiver below the bottom tubesheet.
❖
3-116
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4
Aspen Aerotran
Introduction Aspen Aerotran is a program for the thermal design, rating, and simulation of heat exchangers in which a gas flows perpendicular to a rectangular bank of tubes. Specific exchanger types covered in Aspen Aerotran are air-cooled heat exchangers, hot-gas recuperators (also called flue gas economizers), and the convection section of fired heaters. It encompasses most industrial applications for this type of equipment, including tube side cases of no phase change, condensation, and vaporization. For air-cooled heat exchangers, the program can determine the required fans for forced or induced draft and includes a wide variety of wrapped, welded, and embedded fins. Aspen Aerotran is also well adapted for designing flue gas economizers, since it allows for soot blowers, segmented fins, and various header orientations. When designing the convection section of a fired heater, it can account for both convective and radiant heat transfer. In the design mode, the program optimizes on the exchanger size required to do a specified heat transfer job, searching for the minimum exchanger size that satisfies the heat duty, allowable pressure drops, and velocities. Aspen Aerotran optimizes on the number of tubes in the face row, number of rows deep, tube length, tube passes, number of bays, number of bundles in parallel or series within a given bay, and sizes the appropriate fan or fans for those bays. The design engineer can adjust gas side flow rate or outlet temperatures interactively, permitting operating cost to be optimized as well as equipment size. As the program runs it produces a detailed optimization path, which shows the alternatives considered by the program as it searches for a satisfactory design. These "intermediate designs" indicate the constraints which are controlling the design and point out what parameters you could modify to reduce the size of the exchanger. The rating mode is used to check the performance of an exchanger with fully specified geometry under any desired operating conditions. The program will check to see if there is sufficient surface area for the process conditions specified and notify the user if the unit is under surfaced.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-1
For the simulation mode, you will specify the heat exchanger geometry and the inlet process conditions and the program will predict the outlet conditions for both streams. The Aspen Aerotran program has an extensive set of input default values built-in. This allows you to specify a minimum amount of input data to evaluate a design. For complex condensation and/or vaporization, where the program requires vapor-liquid equilibrium data and properties at many temperature points, you can enter the data directly into the input file, or you can have the Aspen Aerotran generate the curve. The program includes a basic mechanical design to determine a budget cost estimate. Aspen Aerotran incorporates all applicable provisions of the API 661 standards. A detailed mechanical design is currently beyond the scope of the Aspen Aerotran program. Aspen Aerotran is an interactive program, which means you can evaluate design changes as you run the program. You can control the operation of the program by using a series of menus which guide you through the input, calculation, display of results, design changes, and selection of printed output.
Thermal Scope Air/Gas Side
Tube Side
No Phase Change
No Phase Change
No Phase Change
Simple Condensation
No Phase Change
Complex Condensation
No Phase Change
Simple Vaporization
No Phase Change
Complex Vaporization
Mechanical Scope Code ASME Section VIII Div. 1
Standards API 661
4-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Header Types Plug Studded Cover Flanged Confined Cover Flanged Full-Face Cover Bonnet U-Tube Pipe
Tube Size No Practical Limitation
Tube Patterns Inline Staggered
Fin Configuration Circular Segmented Plate
Fin Types Extruded L-Type Weld U-Type Weld I-Type Weld L-Type Tension L-Type Tension Overlapped Embedded Extruded Sleeve Metal Coated Plate
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-3
Tube Pass Arrangement Horizontal, Vertical, Mixed
Draft Types Forced, Induced, Natural
Plenums None, Transition, Panel
Bundle Arrangements Bundles in series are assumed to be stacked Bundles in parallel are assumed to be side by side
Fan Sizes Minimum fan diameter is 3 ft (915 mm) Maximum fan diameter is 28 ft (8540 mm) Any commercially available fan size (The program determines the horsepower requirements.)
Units of Measure U. S., SI, or Metric
4-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Input The Input Section is divided into five sections: • • • • •
Problem Definition Physical Property Data Exchanger Geometry Design Data Program Options
Problem Definition The Problem Definition Section is subdivided into three sections: • • •
Description Application Options Process Data
Description Headings Headings are optional. You can specify from 1 to 5 lines of up to 75 characters per line. These entries will appear at the top of the API specification sheet.
Fluid names This descriptive data is optional, but we highly recommend always entering meaningful fluid descriptions, because these fluid names will appear with other input items to help you readily identify to which fluid the data applies. These names also appear in the specification sheet output. Each name can be up to 19 characters long and can contain multiple words.
Remarks The remarks are specifically for the bottom of the specification sheet output. They are optional and each line can be up to 75 characters long.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-5
Application Options Equipment type You must select one of the four items for the type of equipment. Air-cooled heat exchangers use air as the outside heat transfer medium. The fluid on the tube side will either be a no phase change fluid that is being cooled or a fluid that is condensing. Hot-gas heat recuperators typically use a hot gas as the outside heat transfer medium. The fluid on the tube side will either be a no phase change fluid that is being heated or a fluid that is vaporizing. Fired heater convection section typically use a hot gas such as steam as the outside heat transfer medium. The fluid on the tube side will either be a no phase change fluid that is being heated or a fluid that is vaporizing. In addition to forced convection heat transfer, the program also considers heat transfer due to radiation for this application. Gas-cooled heat exchangers use gas as the outside heat transfer medium. The fluid on the tube side will either be a no phase change fluid that is being cooled or a fluid that is condensing.
Tube side application Narrow range condensation covers the cases where the condensing side film coefficient does not change significantly over the temperature range. Therefore, the calculations can be based on an assumed linear condensation profile. This class is recommended for cases of isothermal condensation and cases of multiple condensables without noncondensables where the condensing range is less than 6°C (10°F). Multi-component condensation covers the other cases of condensation where the condensing side film coefficient changes significantly over the condensing range. Therefore, the condensing range must be divided into several zones where the properties and conditions must be calculated for each zone. This class is recommended for all cases where noncondensables are present or where there are multiple condensables with a condensing range of more than 6°C (10°F). Narrow range vaporization covers the cases where the vaporizing side film coefficient does not change significantly over the temperature range. Therefore, the calculations can be based on an assumed linear vaporization profile. This class is recommended for cases of single components and cases of multiple components where the vaporizing range is less than 6°C (10°F). Multi-component vaporization: Application covers the other cases of vaporization where the vaporizing side film coefficient changes significantly over the vaporizing range. Therefore, the vaporizing range must be divided into several zones where the properties and conditions must be calculated for each zone. This class is recommended for cases where there are multiple components with a vaporizing range of more than 6°C (10°F).
4-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Condensation curve You can input a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve or have the program calculate the curve using ideal gas laws or several other non-ideal methods.
Vaporization curve You can input a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve or have the program calculate the curve using ideal gas laws or several other non-ideal methods.
Draft type Forced draft has air pushed through the bundle by a fan. This normally provides a higher fan efficiency, and the fan is not subjected to the air outlet temperature. Induced draft pulls the air across the bundle with the fan. This normally provides better air distribution across the bundle, but the fan is subjected to the air outlet temperature.
Program mode You must select the mode in which you want the program to operate. Design mode: In design mode, you specify the performance requirements, and the program searches for a satisfactory heat exchanger configuration. Rating mode: In rating mode, you specify the performance requirements and the heat exchanger configuration, and the program checks to see if that heat exchanger is adequate. Simulation mode: In simulation mode, you specify the heat exchanger configuration and the inlet process conditions, and the program predicts the outlet conditions of the two streams.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-7
Process Data Fluid quantity, total (tube side) Input the total flow rates for the hot and cold sides. For no phase change, the flow rates can be left blank and the program will calculate the required flow rates to meet the specified heat load or the heat load on the opposite side. All temperatures must be specified if the flow rates are omitted. For phase change applications, the total flow rate should be at least approximated. The program will still calculate the total required flow rate to balance the heat loads.
Vapor quantity (tube side) For change in phase applications, input vapor flows rates entering or leaving the exchanger for the applicable hot and/or cold sides. The program requires at least two of the three following flow rates at the inlet and outlet: vapor flow, liquid flow, or total flow. It can then calculate the missing value.
Liquid quantity (tube side) For change in phase applications, input the liquid flows rates entering and /or leaving the exchanger for applicable hot and/or cold sides. The program requires at least two of the three following flow rates at the inlet and outlet: vapor flow, liquid flow, total flow. It can then calculate the missing value.
Temperature (in/out) (tube side) Enter the inlet and outlet temperatures for the hot and cold side applications. For no phase change applications, the program can calculate the outlet temperature based on the specified heat load or the heat load on the opposite side. The flow rate and the inlet temperature must be specified. For narrow condensation and vaporization applications, an outlet temperature and associated vapor and liquid flows is required. This represents the second point on the VLE curve, which we assume to be a straight line. With this information, the program can determine the correct vapor/liquid ratio at various temperatures and correct the outlet temperature or total flow rates to balance heat loads.
4-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Dew point & bubble point temperatures (tube side) For narrow range condensation and narrow range vaporization, enter the dew point and bubble point temperatures for the applicable hot and/or cold side. For condensers, the dew point is required but the bubble point may be omitted if vapor is still present at the outlet temperature. For vaporizers, the bubble point is required but the dew point may be omitted if liquid is still present at the outlet temperature.
Operating pressure (tube side) Specify the pressure in absolute pressure (not gauge pressure). Depending on the application, the program may permit either inlet or outlet pressure to be specified. In most cases, it should be the inlet pressure. For a thermosiphon reboiler, the operating pressure should reflect the pressure at the surface of the liquid in the column. In the case of condensers and vaporizers where you expect the pressure drop to significantly change the condensation or vaporization curves, you should use a pressure drop adjusted vapor-liquid equilibrium data. If you had Aspen Hetran calculate the curve, you can indicate to adjust the curve for pressure drop.
Allowable pressure drop (tube side) Where applicable, the allowable pressure drop is required input. You can specify any value up to the operating pressure, although the allowable pressure drop should usually be less than 40% of the operating pressure.
Fouling resistance (tube side) The fouling resistance will default to zero if left unspecified. You can specify any reasonable value.
Fluid quantity, total (outside tube) Input the total flow rate for no phase fluid. The flow rate can be left blank and the program will calculate the required flow rates to meet the specified heat load or the heat load on the opposite side. All temperatures must be specified if the flow rates are omitted. For phase change applications, the total flow rate should be at least approximated. The program will still calculate the total required flow rate to balance the heat loads.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-9
Temperature (outside tube) Enter the inlet and outlet temperatures for the fluid outside the tubes. For no phase change applications, the program can calculate the required outlet temperature based on the specified heat load or the heat load on the opposite side. The flow rate and the inlet temperature must be specified.
Altitude above sea level (outside tube) The altitude is used to determine the operating pressure outside the tube bundle in order to retrieve properties from the physical property data bank.
Static pressure at inlet (outside tube) The gauge pressure of the flow outside the tube bundle. The gauge pressure is the pressure above or below atmospheric pressure. If below atmospheric, the pressure should be specified as a negative value.
Minimum ambient temperature (outside tube) This temperature is used to determine the possibility of the tube side fluid freeze-up when the air inlet temperature is at its minimum.
Allowable pressure drop (outside tube) Where applicable, the allowable pressure drop across the bundle and fan, if present, is required input. You can specify any value up to the operating pressure, although the allowable pressure drop should usually be less than 40% of the operating pressure. Axial flow fans can develop a maximum static pressure of approximately 1.25 in H2O (32 mm H2O). The allowable pressure drop should not exceed this value when a fan is to be used.
Fouling resistance (outside tube) The fouling resistance will default to zero if left unspecified. You can specify any reasonable value.
4-10
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Heat exchanged You should specify a value for this input field when you want to design to a specific heat duty. If the heat exchanged is specified, the program will compare the hot and cold side calculated heat loads with the specified heat load. If they do not agree within 2%, the program will correct the flow rate, or outlet temperature. If the heat exchanged is not specified, the program will compare the hot and cold side calculated heat loads. If they do not agree within 2%, the program will correct the flow rate, or outlet temperature. To set what the program will balance, click on the Heat Exchange Balance Options tab and select to have the program change flow rate, outlet temperature, or to allow an unbalanced heat load.
Heat load balance options This input allows you to specify whether you want the total flow rate or the outlet temperature to be adjusted to balance the heat load against the specified heat load or the heat load calculated from the opposite side. The program will calculate the required adjustment. There is also an option to not balance the heat loads; in that case the program will design the exchanger with the specified flows and temperature but with the highest of the specified or calculated heat loads.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-11
Physical Property Data This section includes: • • • •
Property Options Hot side Composition Cold Side Composition Cold Side Properties
Property Options Databanks: Tube Side and Outside Tubes Properties from B-JAC Databank / User Specified properties / Interface properties from Aspen Plus: By selecting this option, you can reference the B-JAC Property Databank, specify your own properties for the Tube Side and Outside Tubes property sections, or have properties directly passed into the B-JAC file directly from Aspen Plus simulation program. The B-JAC Property Databank consists of over 1500 compounds and mixtures used in the chemical process, petroleum, and other industries. You can reference the database by entering the components for the Tube Side and/or Outside Tube streams in the Composition sections. Use the Search button to locate the components in the database. If you specify properties in the Tube Side and/or Outside Tubes property sections, do not reference any compounds in the Tube Side and/or Outside Tube Composition sections unless you plan to use both the B-JAC Databank properties and specified properties. Any properties specified in the property sections will override properties coming from a property databank. If properties have been passed into the B-JAC file from the Interface to a Aspen Plus simulation run, these properties will be shown in the Tube Side and/or Outside Tube Property sections. If you have passed in properties from Aspen Plus, do not specify a reference to an *.APPDF file below since properties have already been provided by the Aspen Plus interface in the specified property sections. Aspen Properties Databank: Aspen B-JAC provides access to the Aspen Properties physical property databank of compounds and mixtures. To access the databank, first create an Aspen input file with stream information and physical property models. Run Aspen Plus and create the property file, xxxx.APPDF. Specify the name of the property file here in the Aerotran input file. Specify the composition of the stream in the Aerotran Property Composition section. When the B-JAC program is executed, the Aspen Properties program will be accessed and properties will be passed back into the B-JAC design file. Default: Aspen B-JAC Databank / Specified Properties
4-12
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Flash Option If you are referencing the Aspen Properties databank, and providing the XXXX.APPDF file, specify the flash option you want Aspen Properties program to use with the VLE generation. Reference the Aspen Properties documentation for further detailed information on this subject. Default: Vapor-Liquid
The Aspen Plus run file If you are referencing the Aspen Properties databank, provide the XXXX.APPDF file. If the file is not located in the same directory as your B-JAC input file, use the browse button to set the correct path to the *.APPDF file.
Condensation Curve Calculation Method The calculation method determines which correlations the program will use to determine the vapor-liquid equilibrium. The choice of method is dependent on the degree of nonideality of the vapor and liquid phases and the amount of data available. The methods can be divided into three general groups: Ideal - correlations for ideal mixtures. The ideal method uses ideal gas laws for the vapor phase and ideal solution laws for the liquid phase. You should use this method when you do not have information on the degree of nonideality. This method allows for up to 50 components. Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL - correlations for nonideal mixtures which require interaction parameters. These methods are limited to ten components. The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. The Uniquac method also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter and the NRTL method requires an additional Alpha parameter. The Wilson method is particularly suitable for strongly nonideal binary mixtures, e.g., solutions of alcohols with hydrocarbons. The Uniquac method is applicable for both vapor-liquid equilibrium and liquid-liquid equilibrium (immiscibles). It can be used for solutions containing small or large molecules, including polymers. In addition, Uniquac's interaction parameters are less temperature dependent than those for Van Laar and Wilson. Soave-Redlich-Kwong, Peng-Robinson, and Chao-Seader - correlations for nonideal mixtures which do not require interaction parameters. The Soave-Redlich-Kwong and PengRobinson methods can be used on a number of systems containing hydrocarbons, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, and other weakly polar components. They can also be applied with success to systems which form an azeotrope, and which involve associating substances such as water and alcohols. They can predict vapor phase properties at any given pressure. The Chao-Seader method uses Redlich-Kwong equations for vapor phase nonideality and an empirical correlation for liquid phase nonideality. It is used with success in the petroleum industry.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-13
It is recommended for use at pressures less than 68 bar (1000 psia) and temperatures greater than -18°C (0°F). The program uses the original Chao-Seader correlation with the GraysonStreed modification. There is no strict demarcation between these two methods since they are closely related. These methods allow for up to 50 components.
Condensation Curve Calculation Type For a condensing stream, you should determine if your case is closer to integral or differential condensation. Integral condensation assumes that the vapor and liquid condensate are kept close enough together to maintain equilibrium, and that the condensate formed at the beginning of the condensing range is carried through with the vapor to the outlet. Vertical tube side condensation is the best case of integral condensation. Horizontal tube side condensation is generally considered to integral. In differential condensation the liquid condensate is removed from the vapor, thus changing the equilibrium and lowering the dew point of the remaining vapor. The clearest case of differential condensation is seen in the knockback reflux condenser, where the liquid condensate runs back toward the inlet while the vapor continues toward the outlet. More condensate will be present at any given temperature with integral condensation versus differential condensation. In the heat exchanger design, this results in a higher mean temperature difference for integral condensation compared to differential condensation.
Effect of pressure drop on condensation The program will default to calculating the condensing curve in isobaric conditions (constant operating pressure). If you are having the B-JAC Property program generate the VLE curve, you may specify nonisobaric conditions and the program will allocate the specified pressure drop based on temperature increments along the condensing curve. The vapor/liquid equilibrium at various temperature points will be calculated using an adjusted operating pressure.
Estimated pressure drop for hot side Provide the estimated hot side pressure drop through the exchanger. The program will use this pressure drop to adjust the VLE curve. If actual pressure varies more than 20% from this estimated pressure drop, adjust this value to the actual and rerun Aspen Aerotran.
Vaporization Curve Calculation Method The calculation method determines which correlations the program will use to determine the vapor-liquid equilibrium. The choice of method is dependent on the degree of nonideality of the vapor and liquid phases and the amount of data available.
4-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The methods can be divided into three general groups: Ideal - correlations for ideal mixtures. The ideal method uses ideal gas laws for the vapor phase and ideal solution laws for the liquid phase. You should use this method when you do not have information on the degree of nonideality. This method allows for up to 50 components. Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL - correlations for nonideal mixtures which require interaction parameters. These methods are limited to ten components. The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. The Uniquac method also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter and the NRTL method requires an additional Alpha parameter. The Wilson method is particularly suitable for strongly nonideal binary mixtures, e.g., solutions of alcohols with hydrocarbons. The Uniquac method is applicable for both vapor-liquid equilibrium and liquid-liquid equilibrium (immiscibles). It can be used for solutions containing small or large molecules, including polymers. In addition, Uniquac's interaction parameters are less temperature dependent than those for Van Laar and Wilson. Soave-Redlich-Kwong, Peng-Robinson, and Chao-Seader - correlations for nonideal mixtures which do not require interaction parameters. The Soave-Redlich-Kwong and PengRobinson methods can be used on a number of systems containing hydrocarbons, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, and other weakly polar components. They can also be applied with success to systems which form an azeotrope, and which involve associating substances such as water and alcohols. They can predict vapor phase properties at any given pressure. The Chao-Seader method uses Redlich-Kwong equations for vapor phase nonideality and an empirical correlation for liquid phase nonideality. It is used with success in the petroleum industry. It is recommended for use at pressures less than 68 bar (1000 psia) and temperatures greater than -18°C (0°F). The program uses the original Chao-Seader correlation with the Grayson-Streed modification. There is no strict demarcation between these two methods since they are closely related. These methods allow for up to 50 components.
Effect of pressure drop on vaporization The program will default to calculating the vaporization curve in isobaric conditions (constant operating pressure). If you are having the B-JAC Property program generate the VLE curve, you may specify nonisobaric conditions and the program will allocate the specified pressure drop based on temperature increments along the vaporization curve. The vapor/liquid equilibrium at various temperature points will be calculated using an adjusted operating pressure.
Estimated pressure drop for cold side Provide the estimated cold side pressure drop through the exchanger. The program will use this pressure drop to adjust the VLE curve. If actual pressure varies more than 20% from this estimated pressure drop, adjust this value to the actual and rerun Aspen Aerotran.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-15
Tube Side Composition If the stream physical properties are being accessed from the Aspen B-JAC databank or the program is calculating a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve; the stream composition must be defined in this table.
Composition specification weight flow rate or %, mole flow rate or %, volume flow rate or % The composition specification determines on what basis the mixture physical properties calculations should be made.
Components The components field identifies the components in the stream. Properties for components can be accessed from the databanks by specifying the Aspen B-JAC Compound name. A "Search" facility has been provided to allow you to easily scan and select compounds from the databank. When the program is calculating a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve, you also have the option of specifying individual component physical properties by using the "Source" entry. If this is used, the component field will be used to identify the component in the results.
Vapor In, Liquid In, Vapor Out, Liquid Out These fields identify the composition of the stream in each phase and is dependant on the Composition Specification described above. You must specify the inlet compositions if referencing the databank for physical properties. If outlet compositions are not specified, the program will assume the same composition as the inlet. The data for each column is normalized to calculate the individual components fraction.
Component Type Component type field is available for all complex condensing applications. This field allows you to specify noncondensables and immiscible components. If you are not sure of the component type, the program will attempt to determine if it is a noncondensable but in general it is better to identify the type if known. If a component does not condense any liquid over the temperature range in the exchanger, it is best to identify it as a noncondensable.
Source The Source field is currently only available for components when the program is calculating vapor/liquid equilibrium curves. The Source of the component may be "Databank" or "User". "Databank" indicates that all component properties will be retrieved from one of the Aspen BJAC databanks. "User" indicates that this component's physical properties are to be specified by the user.
4-16
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Properties (tube side) Used only for calculating condensing curves within Aspen Aerotran. Allows the user to override databank properties or input properties not in the databank. The physical properties required for various applications on the tube side are listed below: Reference temperature
Density vapor
Viscosity vapor
Specific heat vapor
Thermal conductivity vapor
Latent heat
Vapor pressure
Density liquid
Viscosity liquid
Specific heat liquid
Thermal conductivity liquid
Surface tension liquid
Molecular volume
Molecular weight
Critical pressure
Critical temperature
Interaction Parameters The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. This data is not available from the databank. An example for the NRTL parameters is shown below. NRTL Method --Example with 3 components (Reference Dechema) NRTL “A” Interactive Parameters –Hetran inputted parameters 1 1 --
2
3
A21 A31
2 A12 --
A32
3 A13 A23 --
NRTL “Alpha” Parameters –Hetran inputted parameters 1
2
3
1 --------
Alpha21
Alpha31
2 Alpha12
--------
Alpha32
3 Alpha13
Alpha23
--------
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-17
NRTL – Conversion from Aspen Properties parameters to Hetran parameters: Aspen Properties NRTL Parameters – The parameters AIJ, AJI, DJI, DIJ, EIJ, EJI, FIJ, FJI, TLOWER, & TUPPER in Aspen Properties, which are not shown below, are not required for the Hetran NRTL method. Aspen Properties NRTL Interactive Parameters Component I
Component 1 Component 1
Component 2
Component J
Component 2 Component 3
Component 3
BIJ
BIJ12
BIJ13
BIJ23
BJI
BJI12
BJI13
BJI23
CIJ
CIJ12
CIJ13
CIJ23
“A” Interactive Parameters – Conversion from Aspen Properties to Hetran 1
2
3
1 --
A21=BJI12*1.98721
A31=BJI13*1.98721
2 A12=BIJ12*1.98721
--
A32-BJI23*1.98721
3 A13=BIJ13*1.98721
A23=BIJ23*1.98721
--
“Alpha” Parameters – Conversion from Aspen Properties to Hetran 1
2
3
1 --
Alpha21=CIJ12
Alpha31=CIJ13
2 Alpha12= CIJ12
--
Alpha32=CIJ23
3 Alpha13=CIJ13
Alpha23=CIJ23
--
NRTL – Alpha parameters The NRTL method requires binary interaction parameters for each pair of components and an additional Alpha parameter. This data is not available from the databank. Reference the section on Interactive Parameters for an example.
Uniquac – Surface & Volume parameters The Uniquac method requires binary interaction parameters for each pair of components and also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter. This data is not available from the databank.
4-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube Side Properties The physical properties required for the tube side fluids.
Temperature If you are entering a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve, you must specify multiple temperature points on the curve encompassing the expected inlet and outlet temperatures of the exchanger. The dew and bubble points of the stream are recommended. Condensation curves must have the dew point and vaporization curves must have the bubble point. The first point on the curve does not have to agree with the inlet temperature although it is recommended. For simulation runs, it is best to specify the curve down to the inlet temperature of the opposite side. You can specify as few as one temperature or as many as 13 temperatures. The temperatures entered for no phase change fluids should at least include both the inlet and outlet temperatures. The inlet temperature of the opposite side fluid should also be included as a 3rd temperature point for viscous fluids. Multiple temperature points, including the inlet and outlet, should be entered when a change of phase is present.
Heat Load For each temperature point you must specify a parameter defining the heat load. For heat load you may specify cumulative heat load, incremental heat load, or enthalpies.
Vapor/Liquid Composition For each temperature point you must also specify a parameter defining the vapor/liquid composition. For the composition, you may specify vapor flowrate, liquid flowrate, vapor mass fraction, or liquid mass fraction. The program will calculate the other parameters based on the entry and the total flow specified under process data. Vapor and liquid mass fractions are recommended because they are independent of flow rates. For complex condensers, the composition should be the total vapor stream including noncondensables.
Liquid and Vapor Properties The necessary physical properties are dependent on the type of application. If you are referencing the databank for a fluid, you do not need to enter any data on the corresponding physical properties input screens. However, it is also possible to specify any property, even if you are referencing the databank. Any specified property will then override the value from the databank. The properties should be self-explanatory. A few clarifications follow.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-19
Specific Heat Provide the specific heat for the component at the referenced temperature.
Thermal Conductivity Provide the thermal conductivity for the component at the referenced temperature.
Viscosity The viscosity requested is the dynamic (absolute) viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s (note that centipoise and mPa*s are equal). To convert kinematic viscosity in centistokes to dynamic viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s, multiply centistokes by the specific gravity. The Hetran program uses a special logarithmic formula to interpolate or extrapolate the viscosity to the calculated tube wall temperature. However when a liquid is relatively viscous, say greater than 5 mPa*s (5 cp), and especially when it is being cooled, the accuracy of the viscosity at the tube wall can be very important to calculating an accurate film coefficient. In these cases, you should specify the viscosity at a third point, which extends the viscosity points to encompass the tube wall temperature. This third temperature point may extend to as low (if being cooled) or as high (if being heated) as the inlet temperature on the other side.
Density Be sure to specify density and not specific gravity. Convert specific gravity to density by using the appropriate formula: density, lb/ft3 = 62.4 * specific gravity density, kg/m3 = 1000 * specific gravity The density can also be derived from the API gravity, using this formula: density, lb/ft3 = 8829.6 / ( API + 131.5 )
Surface Tension Surface tension is needed for vaporizing fluids. If you do not have surface tension information available, the program will estimate a value.
Latent Heat Provide latent heat for change of phase applications.
4-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Molecular Weight Provide the molecular weight of the vapor for change of phase applications.
Diffusivity The diffusivity of the vapor is used in the determination of the condensing coefficient for the mass transfer method. Therefore, provide this property if data is available. If these are not known, the program will estimate.
Noncondensables Noncondensables are those vapor components in a condensing stream, which do not condense in any significant proportions at the expected tube wall temperature. Examples: hydrogen, CO2, Air, CO, etc. The following properties need to be provided for the noncondensables or referenced from the database: Specific Heat, Thermal Conductivity, Viscosity, Density, Molecular Weight, and Molecular Volume of the noncondensable. The noncondensable flow rate is required if it has not been defined in the databank composition input.
Outside Tubes Composition If the stream physical properties are being accessed from the Aspen B-JAC databank or the program is calculating a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve; the stream composition must be defined in this table.
Composition specification weight flow rate or %, mole flow rate or %, volume flow rate or % The composition specification determines on what basis the mixture physical properties calculations should be made.
Components The components field identifies the components in the stream. Properties for components can be accessed from the databanks by specifying the Aspen B-JAC Compound name. A "Search" facility has been provided to allow you to easily scan and select compounds from the databank.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-21
When the program is calculating a vapor/liquid equilibrium curve, you also have the option of specifying individual component physical properties by using the "Source" entry. If this is used, the component field will be used to identify the component in the results.
Vapor In These fields identify the composition of the stream in each phase and is dependant on the Composition Specification described above. You must specify the inlet compositions if referencing the databank for physical properties. If outlet compositions are not specified, the program will assume the same composition as the inlet. The data for each column is normalized to calculate the individual components fraction.
Source The Source field is currently only available for components when the program is calculating vapor/liquid equilibrium curves. The Source of the component may be "Databank" or "User". "Databank" indicates that all component properties will be retrieved from one of the B-JAC databanks. "User" indicates that this component's physical properties are to be specified by the user.
Outside Tubes Properties The necessary physical properties are dependent on the type of application. If you are referencing the databank for a fluid, you do not need to enter any data on the corresponding physical properties input screens. However, it is also possible to specify any property, even if you are referencing the databank. Any specified property will then override the value from the databank. The properties should be self-explanatory. A few clarifications follow.
Liquid and Vapor Properties The necessary physical properties are dependent on the type of application. If you are referencing the databank for a fluid, you do not need to enter any data on the corresponding physical properties input screens. However, it is also possible to specify any property, even if you are referencing the databank. Any specified property will then override the value from the databank. The properties should be self-explanatory. A few clarifications follow.
4-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Temperature If you are entering a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve, you must specify multiple temperature points on the curve encompassing the expected inlet and outlet temperatures of the exchanger. The dew and bubble points of the stream are recommended. Condensation curves must have the dew point and vaporization curves must have the bubble point. The first point on the curve does not have to agree with the inlet temperature although it is recommended. For simulation runs, it is best to specify the curve up to the inlet temperature of the opposite side. You can specify as few as one temperature or as many as 13 temperatures. The temperatures entered for no phase change fluids should at least include both the inlet and outlet temperatures. The inlet temperature of the opposite side fluid should also be included as a 3rd temperature point for viscous fluids. Multiple temperature points, including the inlet and outlet, should be entered when a change of phase is present. The number of temperatures specified depends on how the composition of the fluid changes, and the effect on the changing physical properties from inlet to outlet temperatures.
Specific Heat Provide the specific heat for the component at the referenced temperature.
Thermal Conductivity Provide the thermal conductivity for the component at the referenced temperature.
Viscosity The viscosity requested is the dynamic (absolute) viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s (note that centipoise and mPa*s are equal). To convert kinematic viscosity in centistokes to dynamic viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s, multiply centistokes by the specific gravity. The Hetran program uses a special logarithmic formula to interpolate or extrapolate the viscosity to the calculated tube wall temperature. However when a liquid is relatively viscous, say greater than 5 mPa*s (5 cp), and especially when it is being cooled, the accuracy of the viscosity at the tube wall can be very important to calculating an accurate film coefficient. In these cases, you should specify the viscosity at a third point, which extends the viscosity points to encompass the tube wall temperature. This third temperature point may extend to as low (if being cooled) or as high (if being heated) as the inlet temperature on the other side.
Density Be sure to specify density and not specific gravity. Convert specific gravity to density by using the appropriate formula: density, lb/ft3 = 62.4 * specific gravity density, kg/m3 = 1000 * specific gravity The density can also be derived from the API gravity, using this formula: density, lb/ft3 = 8829.6 / ( API + 131.5 )
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-23
Exchanger Geometry The Exchanger Geometry Section is subdivided into four sections: • • • •
Tubes Rating/Simulation Data Headers & Nozzles Construction Options
Tube outside diameter This is the outside diameter of the bare tube. Default: 20 mm or 0.75 in.
Tube wall thickness You should choose the tube wall thickness based on considerations of corrosion, pressure, and company standards. If you work with ANSI standards, the thicknesses follow the BWG standards. These are listed for your reference in the Appendix of this manual and in the Help facility. Default: 1.6 mm or 0.065 in.
Tube wall roughness The relative roughness of the inside tube surface will affect the calculated tube side pressure drops. The program defaults a relatively smooth tube surface (5.91 x 10-5 inch). A commercial grade pipe has a relative roughness of 1.97 x 10-3 inch. Default:
Smooth tube, 5.91 x 10-5 inch ( .0015 mm)
Tube wall specification In many countries, the tube wall thickness is specified as either average or minimum. Average means the average wall thickness will be at least the specified thickness; typically the thickness may vary up to 12%. With minimum wall, all parts of the tube must be at least the specified thickness. In the U.S., most heat exchanger tubes are specified as average wall thickness. In other countries, for example Germany, the standard requires minimum wall. This item has a small effect on tube side pressure drop and a moderate effect on heat exchanger cost. Default: Average wall
4-24
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube pattern This is the tube pattern in reference to the flow outside the tube bundle. The staggered pattern is used most often and will give you the best heat transfer coefficient. The in-line pattern is normally used when the pressure drop outside the tubes is controlling. Default: Program defaults to staggered pattern
Tube pitch face row Specify the tube center to center spacing between the tubes in the first tube row. The minimum spacing is dependent upon the outside diameter of the tube or fin. Default:
Plain tubes: 1.25 * Tube O.D. Finned tubes: Fin O.D. + 12.7 mm or 0.5 in. Plate fins: 1.5 * Tube O.D.
Tube pitch rows deep Specify the distance between the centerline of adjacent tube rows along the path of gas flow outside the tubes. Default:
Staggard pattern: Tube pitch face row * 0.866 Square pattern: Tube pitch face row
Tube pass arrangement Arrangement of the pass partition plates. Set the plates to be horizontal or vertical. Note that pass arrangement may affect performance if temperature approach is limiting. Default: Program optimized
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-25
Fin type
Extruded fins are an integral part of the tube. There is no fin-to-tube bond resistance. L-type welded fins are welded to the tube as shown. Fin-to-tube bond resistance is minor. Ltype welded fins can be used up to the solder melting temperature. U-type welded fins have a minor fin-to-tube bond resistance. U-type welded fins can be used up to the solder melting temperature. I-type welded fins have a minor fin-to-tube bond resistance. I-type welded fins can be used up to the solder melting temperature. L-type tension wrapped fins have a fin-to-tube bond resistance that increases with temperature and restricts their use to lower temperatures. L-type tension overlapped fins have a fin-to-tube bond resistance that increases with temperature and restricts their use to lower temperatures. Embedded fins are mounted in a groove in the tube and back filled. The fin-to-tube bond resistance is minor. Extruded sleeve fins are extruded from a thick walled aluminum sleeve and fitted onto core tubes. The fin-to-tube bond resistance is minor so that higher operating temperatures are possible than with tension wrapped fins. Metal coated fins are tension wrapped and then metal coated. The fin-to-tube bond resistance is minimal and operating temperatures are possible up to the melting point of the solder.
4-26
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Plate fins are made from multiple tubes pushed through a series of plates. The tube-to-plate joint is pressure fitted. The fin-to-tube contact could represent a significant thermal resistance in some circumstances. Default: None
Fin density This is the number of fins per unit length of tube. Typical fin spacings are between 2 and 12 fins/in or 78 and 473 fins/m. Default: 4 fins/in or 156 fins/m
Fin outside diameter This is the outside diameter of the fin on the finned tube. If plate fins are specified, the program will calculate an equivalent fin outside diameter based on the tube pitch. Default: Tube Outside Diameter + 0.75 in or 19.05 mm
Fin thickness This is the average thickness of each fin. A list of typical fin thicknesses are provided in the appendix. Default:
0.58 mm or 0.23 in (Tube O.D. less than 50.8 mm (2 in.)) 0.91 mm or 0.36 in (Tube O.D. larger than 50.8 mm (2 in) )
Finned tube root diameter The root diameter is the outside diameter of the sleeve or coating.
Fins segment width Segmented fin tubes are finned tubes in which pie-shaped segments have been removed from the fins. Segmented fin tubes are normally used in economizers to augment the heat transfer coefficient and reduce the tendency for fouling.
Fins design temperature This is the maximum design temperature for which the fin material should be used. The program will check the fin temperature at normal operating conditions against this fin design temperature and issue a warning if it is exceeded.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-27
Fins bond resistance This is the thermal resistance due to contact between the fin and the tube. The type of finned tubing will dictate the magnitude of the fin to tube bond resistance. The bond resistance for extruded and welded fins is normally negligible. The bond resistance for wrapped and plate fins can become significant for poorly fabricated fins. Default value: no resistance
Rating/Simulation Data Number of tubes per bundle This is the total number of tubes per bundle. The program will select the maximum number of tubes per bundle if a value is not entered.
Tube passes per bundle This is the number of times the tube side fluid runs the length of the bundle.
Tube rows deep per bundle The number of tube rows deep in the bundle (the number rows crossed by fluid flowing across the outside of the tubes).
Tube length This is the straight length of the tubes from front tubesheet to rear tubesheet or tangent point of the u-bends.
Bundles in series This is the number of tube bundles per bay, or per exchanger, to which the tube side flow is fed in series. The program assumes that the flow outside the tube bundle is also in series (reference the picture on the right).
4-28
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Bundles in parallel This is the number of tube bundles per bay or per exchanger to which the tube side flow is fed in parallel. The program assumes that the flow outside the tubes is also in parallel. (left picture).
Bundles in Parallel
Bundles in Series
Bays in series This is the number of bays fed with the tube side flow in series (right picture). Note that the flow outside the tubes is considered to be in parallel to the bays.
Bays in parallel This is the number of bays fed with the tube side flow in parallel (left picture). The program also sets the flow outside the tubes in parallel to the bays.
Bays in Parallel
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Bays in Series
4-29
Fans per bay Enter 0 if the fan calculations are not required. The program will attempt to determine the power requirements for the fans based on commercial fan manufacturer standards. These standards may not be applicable to an existing fan.
Fan diameter This is the fan blade diameter. Enter 0 if the fan calculations are not required.
Headers & Nozzles Front header type A Plug type header provides a limited access the tubes for cleaning. The removable bonnet type or flanged covers provide full access to the tubes. The type of header will affect the overall dimensions of the exchanger and the price estimate. Default: bonnet
Rear header type A Plug type header provides a limited access the tubes for cleaning. The removable bonnet type or flanged covers provide full access to the tubes. U-tubes, which eliminate the rear header, are a low cost alternate if access to the tubes is not needed. The type of header will affect the overall dimensions of the exchanger and the price estimate. Default: bonnet
Dual front header This indicates if a split front header and a single rear header is required. Split headers are commonly used when there is a large pass to pass temperature difference, which could result in excessive thermal stresses on the tubesheet. Default: single header
Header position This indicates the position of the header with respect to the ground and the tube orientation. Default: horizontal
4-30
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Header slope This is the slope of the header with respect to ground level. Headers are sometimes sloped to insure drainage of the tube side fluid during condensation and for shutdown. Default: none
Header box type Specify if the header has the tubesheet and plug sheet of the same thickness or if the plates are different thicknesses. This item is primarily used for the budget cost estimate of the headers. Default: tubesheet and plug sheet are the same thickness
Header Dimensions You can specify the header size and thicknesses and the program will use these dimensions for the design and costing. Default: none
Nozzle nominal OD The program allows you to specify the size of the nozzles or let the program determine them based on standard pipe sizing formulas. See Nozzle Sizing in the Logic section for more details. Default: program will determine in accordance with TEMA standards
Number of nozzles When in design mode, you should let the program determine the number of nozzles. For most rating cases, the program will also determine the appropriate number of nozzles. Default: program will determine
Nozzle flange rating The specification of the nozzle flange rating does not affect the thermal design calculations or the cost estimate. It is included in the input to make the specification of the heat exchanger more complete. The pressure-temperature charts are built into the program. If you let the program determine the rating, it will choose based on the design pressure, design temperature, and material of construction.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-31
The values are not limited to those shown next to the input field, but you should be sure to choose a rating that is consistent with the desired standard (ANSI, ISO, or DIN). Default: program will determine based on design pressure and temperature
Nozzle flange type This is the type of nozzle flange desired. The nozzle flange type will appear on the specification sheet. Default: unspecified
Nozzle flange facing type This is the type of nozzle flange facing desired. The type of nozzle flange facing will appear on the specification sheet. Default: unspecified
Construction Options Plenum type This is the type of ductwork used to direct air between the fan and the tube bundle. The plenum type affects the cost estimate and has a minor affect on the pressure drop outside the tubes. Default: unspecified
Recirculation type This indicates the type of air recirculation (if any) to be used for the exchanger. The type of recirculation will appear on the specification sheet. However, it does not affect the actual design. Default: unspecified
Louvers control Louvers are used to provide process side temperature control and prevent damage to the bundle due to climatic conditions. Louvers will affect the outside bundle pressure drop and the price estimate. Default: unspecified
4-32
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Control action on air failure – louvers This indicates the desired response of the louvers upon air failure. The louver control will appear on the equipment specification sheet. Default: unspecified
Bundle frame This is the material used in the fabrication of the bundle frame and is used in the cost estimate. Default: unspecified
Structure mounting This indicates where the exchanger will be mounted. Grade indicates the exchanger will require ground structural supports. Piperack indicates the exchanger will be mounted on existing piperacks. This option is used to estimate the price. Default: unspecified
Fan pitch control This is the type of control used for the fan blade pitch. The type of fan pitch will appear on the equipment specification sheet. Default: unspecified
Fan drive type This is the type of driver used for the fans. The driver type will appear on the equipment specification sheet. Default: unspecified
Control action on air failure – fan pitch This indicates the desired response of the fan pitch upon air failure. The air failure control will appear on the equipment specification sheet. Default: unspecified
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-33
Steam coil Steam coils are sometimes used to prevent freeze-up in the tubes during severe climatic conditions. The requirement for steam coils will appear on the equipment specification sheet. Default: unspecified
Soot blowers This is only available for the fired heat convection section. This equipment is used to periodically clean the heat transfer surface of fouling deposits. Use of soot blowers will affect the size and price of the exchanger. Default: unspecified
Design Data The Design Data Section is subdivided into three sections: • • •
Design Constraints Materials Specifications
Design Constraints Tube Length Increment This is the increment that the program uses when it increases or decreases the tube length in design mode. Default: 500 mm or 2 ft.
Tube Length Minimum This is the minimum tube length that the program will consider in design mode. Default: 1000 mm or 4 ft.
4-34
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube Length Maximum This is the maximum tube length that the program will consider in design mode. It must be greater or equal to the minimum. Default: 6000 mm or 20 ft.
Bundle width minimum This is the minimum width of the bundle (hot gas recuperator, fired heater convection section, or a gas cooled exchangers only) that the program will consider in design mode. Default: 915 mm or 36 in
Bundle width maximum This is the maximum bundle width that the program will consider in design mode. The program default maximum bundle width is based on normal shipping and handling limitations. Default: 2440 mm or 96 in
Tube rows deep per bundle - minimum Specify the minimum number of rows deep per bundle (hot gas recuperator, fired heater convection section, or a gas cooled type exchangers only) for the program to hold during design. Default: 3 rows
Tube rows deep per bundle - maximum This will set the maximum number of rows deep in the bundle for the program to hold during design. Default: 20 rows
Tube passes per bundle minimum Specify the minimum number of tube passes per bundle limits for design. Default: 1 pass
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-35
Tube passes per bundle maximum Specify the maximum number of tube passes per bundle limits for design. Default: none
Minimum bundles in series Specify the minimum number of bundles in series (hot gas recuperator, fired heater convection section, or a gas cooled exchangers only). Note that the tube side and outside fluids flow in series through the exchanger bundles.
Minimum bundles in parallel Specify the minimum number of bundles in parallel (hot gas recuperator, fired heater convection section, or a gas cooled exchangers only). Note that the program considers both the tube side and outside fluids flow in parallel.
Minimum bays in series Specify the minimum number of bays in series (air cooler applications only). Note that the tube side flow is considered to be series and outside fluid flow is considered to be in parallel through the exchanger.
Minimum bays in parallel Specify the minimum number of bays in parallel (air cooler applications only). Note that the program considers both the tube side and outside fluids flow to be in parallel.
Bay width minimum This is the minimum width of a bay (air cooler applications only) that the program will consider in design mode. Default: 36 in or 915 mm
Bay width maximum This is the maximum width of a bay (air cooler applications only) that the program will consider in design mode. Default: 192 in or 5238 mm
4-36
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube rows deep per bay minimum This is the minimum number of tube rows per bay (air cooler applications only) that the program will consider in design mode. Typical values: Less than 3 rows not recommended Default: 3
Tube rows deep per bay maximum This is the maximum number of tube rows per bay (air cooler applications only) that the program will consider in design mode. Typical values: More than 20 rows not recommended Default: 20
Tube passes per bay minimum This is the minimum number of tube passes per bay air cooler applications only) that the program will consider in design mode. The program will attempt to maximize the number of tube passes within the limits of maximum velocity and tube side pressure drops. Default: 1
Tube passes per bay maximum This is the maximum number of tube passes per bay (air cooler applications only) that the program will consider in design mode. The program default will restrict the maximum tube passes to 2 passes per tube rows deep. Default: 2 passes per tube rows deep
Minimum fans per bay This design restriction will force the program to design the bay with a width and length that will accommodate the minimum number of fans specified (air cooler applications only). Multiple fans per bay are sometimes desirable so that exchangers can be operated at reduced loads by turning fans off. If a fan fails, the exchanger could also operate with a reduced load. Default: 1
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-37
Minimum fluid velocity - Tube/ Outside The minimum velocities are the lowest velocities the program will accept in design mode. The program may not find a design that satisfies this minimum, but it will issue a warning if the design it chooses does not satisfy the minimum. The program tries to maximize the velocities within the allowable pressure drops and the maximum allowable velocities. Therefore, this constraint does not enter into the design mode logic. For two phase flow it is the vapor velocity at the point where there is the most vapor. Default: none
Maximum fluid velocity - Tube/Outside The maximum velocities are the highest velocities the program will accept in design mode. The optimization logic is controlled by this item. For two phase flow it is the vapor velocity at the point where there is the most vapor. Default: none
Minimum % excess surface area required This is the percent of excess surface that must be in the design in order to satisfy the heat transfer surface area requirements when in design mode. Default: 0
Materials - Vessel Components Tubes Select a generic material, a general material class, for the tubes from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Fins Select a generic material, a general material class, for the fins, if present, from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button. Default: Aluminum
4-38
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Header Select a generic material, a general material class, for the hot side components from the list provided. If you wish to specify a material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Plugs Select a generic material, a general material class, for the plugs, if present, from the list provided. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button. Default: Carbon Steel
Gasket Select a generic material, a general material class, for the plugs, if present, from the list provided. If you do not specify a value, the program will use compressed fiber as the material for the mechanical design and cost estimate. If you wish to specify a specific material grade, select the search button.
Thermal conductivity of tube material and fins If you specify a material designator for the tube material, the program will retrieve the thermal conductivity of the tube from its built-in databank. However, if you have a tube or fin material that is not in the databank, then you can specify the thermal conductivity of the tube or fin at this point. Default: program based upon tube material specified
Specifications Design Code Select one of the following design codes: ASME (American), CODAP (French), or ADMerkblatter (German). The design code has a subtle, but sometimes significant effect on the thermal design. This is because the design code determines the required thicknesses for the shell and heads (therefore affecting the number of tubes), the thickness of the tubesheet (therefore affecting the effective heat transfer area), and the dimensions of the flanges and nozzle reinforcement (therefore affecting the possible nozzle and baffle placements).
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-39
Due to the fact that the mechanical design calculations themselves are very complex, the Aspen Aerotran program only includes some of the basic mechanical design calculations. This input is used to tell the program which basic mechanical design calculations to follow and also to make the heat exchanger specification more complete. The program defaults to the design code specified in the program settings. Default: as defined in the program settings
Service class The program defaults to normal service class. If you select low temperature (design temperature less than -50°F) or lethal service (exchanger contains a lethal substance), the program will select the corresponding Code requirements for that class such as full radiography for butt welds and PWHT for carbon steel construction.
TEMA class If you want the heat exchanger to be built in accordance with the TEMA standards, choose the appropriate TEMA class - B, C, or R. If TEMA is not a design requirement, specify Code only and only the design code will be used in determining the mechanical design. API 661 may also be specified. Default: as defined in the program settings under Tools
Material standard You can select ASTM, AFNOR, or DIN. Your choice of material standard determines the selection of materials you will see in the input for materials of construction. Default: as defined in the Program Settings under Tools
Dimensional standard Dimensional standards to ANSI (American), ISO (International), or DIN (German) The dimensional standards apply to such things as pipe cylinder dimensions, nozzle flange ratings, and bolt sizes. DIN also encompasses other construction standards such as standard tube pitches. The selection for dimensional standards is primarily included to make the heat exchanger specification complete, although it does have some subtle effects on the thermal design through the basic mechanical design. Default: as defined in the Program Settings under Tools
4-40
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Design pressure This is the pressure that is used in the mechanical design calculations. It influences the shell, head, and tubesheet required thicknesses and therefore affects the thermal design. If you do not specify a value, the program will default to the operating pressure plus 10% rounded up to a logical increment. This is in gauge pressure so it is one atmosphere less than the equivalent absolute pressure. Default: operating pressure + 10%
Design temperature This is the temperature that is used in the mechanical design calculations. It influences the shell, head, and tubesheet required thicknesses and therefore affects the thermal design. If you do not specify a value, the program will default to the highest operating temperature plus 33ºC (60ºF) rounded down to a logical increment. Default: highest operating temperature + approx. 33ºC (60ºF)
Vacuum design pressure If the heat exchanger is going to operate under a full or partial vacuum, you should specify a vacuum service design pressure. The basic mechanical design calculations do not consider external pressure therefore this item will have no effect on the thermal design from Aspen Aerotran. Default: not calculated for vacuum service
Test pressure This is the pressure at which the manufacturer will test the heat exchanger. This has no effect on the thermal design, but is included to make the heat exchanger specification more complete. Default: "Code"
Corrosion allowance The corrosion allowance is included in the thickness calculations for cylinders and tubesheets and therefore has a subtle effect on thermal design. Default: 0.125 in. or 3.2 mm for carbon steel, 0 for other materials
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-41
Program Options The Program Options Section is subdivided into two sections: • •
Thermal Analysis Change Codes
Thermal Analysis Heat transfer coefficient Normally, the film coefficients are two of the primary values you want the program to calculate. However, there may be cases where you want to force the program to use a specific coefficient, perhaps to simulate a situation which the Aerotran program does not explicitly cover. You can specify neither, either, or both. Default: program will calculate
Heat transfer coefficient multiplier You can specify a factor that becomes a multiplier on the film coefficient, which is calculated by the program. You may want to use a multiplier greater than 1 if you have a construction enhancement that is not covered by the program, for example tube inserts or internally finned tubes. You can use a multiplier of less than 1 to establish a safety factor on a film coefficient. This would make sense if you were unsure of the composition or properties of a fluid stream. Default: 1.0
Pressure drop multiplier Similar to the multipliers on the film coefficients, you can also specify a factor that becomes a multiplier on the bundle portion of the pressure drop, which is calculated by the program. It does not affect the pressure drop through the inlet or outlet nozzles or heads. These multipliers can be used independently or in conjunction with the multipliers on film coefficients. Default: 1.0
4-42
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Maximum allowable heat flux For vaporizing applications, it is often important to limit the heat flux (heat exchanged per unit area) in order to avoid the generation of too much vapor too quickly so as to blanket the tube surface, resulting in a rapid decline in the film coefficient. The Aspen Aerotran program has built in limits on the heat flux, but you can also establish your own limit by specifying a value for this item. Default: program will calculate
Vaporization curve adjustment for pressure The program will default to calculating the vaporization curve in isobaric conditions (constant operating pressure). You may specify non-isobaric conditions and the program will allocate the specified pressure drop based on heat load increments along the vaporization curve. The vapor/liquid equilibrium at various temperatures will be calculated using an adjusted operating pressure.
Mean temperature difference Usually you rely on the program to determine the MTD, however you can override the program calculated corrected (or weighted) MTD by specifying a value for this item. Default: program will calculate
Minimum allowable temperature approach You can limit the minimum approach temperature. Program will increase the number of shells in series and/or limit the exchanger to a one pass-one pass countercurrent geometry to meet the minimum approach temperature. Default: 3 to 5°F depending on application
Minimum allowable MTD correction factor Most of the correction factor curves become very steep below 0.7, so for this reason the Aerotran program defaults to 0.7 as the minimum F factor before going to multiple shells in series in design mode. The only exception is the X-type shell, where the program allows the F factor to go as low as 0.5 in design mode. In rating mode, the default is 0.5. With this input item, you can specify a lower or higher limit.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-43
Flow direction for single tube pass For special economizer applications, you can indicate counter current or co-current flow which will adjust the temperature driving force.
Desuperheating heat transfer method The program will default to determining the tube wall temperature at the hot side inlet. If the wall temperature is below the dew point the program will assume the tube wall is "wet" with condensation and will use a condensing coefficient for heat transfer. If the tube wall temperature is above the dew point, it will determine at what hot side gas temperature the tube wall temperature fall below the dew point. This hot side gas temperature would represent the low temperature for the desuperheating zone. If this option is turned "on", the program will assume a desuperheating zone exists from the specified inlet temperature down to the dew point. Default: program will determine
Condensation heat transfer model Researchers have developed several different methods of predicting the film coefficient for a condensing vapor. Each has its strengths and weaknesses. If the composition of the vapor is well known, the mass transfer method is the most accurate. The mass transfer film model is based on a Colburn-Hougen correlation for condensable(s) with noncondensable(s) and a Colburn-Drew correlation for multiple condensables. The modified proration model is an equilibrium model based on a modification of the SilverBell correlation. Default: mass transfer film model
Tube side two phase heat transfer condensing correlation The two major two phase condensing correlations to determine tube side film coefficients referenced in the industry are the Taborek and the Chen methods. Default: Taborek method
Liquid subcooling heat transfer method Select the calculation method to determine the liquid subcooling coefficient for a condensing application. For most applications, the larger of the free or forced convection should be considered. Default: larger of free or forced convection coefficient
4-44
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Suppress nucleate boiling coefficient Indicate here to suppress the nucleate boiling coefficient in the determination of the overall film coefficient.
Minimum temperature difference for nucleate boiling You may specify a minimum temperature difference requirement for nucleate boiling to be considered.
Tube side two phase pressure drop correlation You can select which two phase pressure drop correlation will be applied, Lochart-Martinelli, Friedel, Chisholm, McKetta, or Nayyar. If not specified the program will select one based upon the application.
Tube side two phase heat transfer vaporization correlation The two major two-phase vaporization correlations to determine tube side film coefficients referenced in the industry are the Steiner-Taborek, Collier-Polley, Chen, Dengler-Addoms, and the Guerrieri-Talty methods. Default: Steiner-Taborek method
Simulation mode area convergence tolerance Specify the convergence tolerance for the simulation mode of the program. Note that a very low convergence tolerance may result in a longer calculation time.
Maximum number of design mode iterations The Aspen Aerotran program, in the Design Mode, will reiterate through the specified design parameters to converge on the lowest cost solution. You may set the maximum number of iterations for the optimization.
Number of calculation intervals The Aspen Aerotran program does an interval analysis by dividing the heat exchanger into sections. Indicate how many interval sections are to be considered.
Type of interval calculation The Aspen Aerotran program does an interval analysis by dividing the heat exchanger into sections. Indicate if you want the program to use equal heat load or equal temperature increments for the sectional analysis of the exchanger.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-45
Change Codes Some items do not have an input field in the regular input screens and can only be specified with a change code. The format for change code entries is: CODE=value Change codes are processed after all of the other input and override any previously set value. For instance, if you specify the tube outside diameter as 20 mm in the regular input screens, then enter the change code TODX=25, the 25 will override the 20. If you enter the same change code more than once, the last value will prevail. One of the best uses of the change code screen is to provide a visual path of the various changes you make during execution of Aspen Aerotran. For this purpose, we recommend that you place changes for a particular alternative design on a separate line. Another good use of the change code screen is to "chain" to another file containing only change codes. This is especially convenient if you have a line of standard designs, which you want to use after you have found a similar solution in design mode. You can do this by using the FILE= change code, followed by the name of the file containing the other change codes. This can be done by using the FILE= change code, followed by the name of the file containing the other change codes with the file type (example: ABC-1.BJI). The other file must also have a .BJI filetype. You can create this change code file with a standard edit program. For example, the entry FILE=S-610-2 would point to a file named S-610-2.BJI, which might contain the following data: MODE=2,TLNG=3600,TPPB=2,TRBU=6,BUSE=2
The following pages review the change codes, which are available in the Aspen Aerotran program.
Design Mode MODE= program mode: 1=design 2=rating TLMN= tube length, minimum TLMX= tube length, maximum BWMN= minimum bay width BWMX= maximum bay width MBAP= minimum bays in parallel MBAS= minimum bays in series MBUW= maximum bundle width MFBA= minimum fans per bay TRMN= minimum tube rows per bay
4-46
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
TRMX= maximum tube rows per bay TPMN= minimum tube passes TPMX= maximum tube passes
Rating Mode MODE= program mode: 1=design 2=rating BAPA= number bays in parallel BASE= number bays in series BUPA= number bundles in parallel BUSE= number bundles in series TRBU= number tube rows per bundle TLNG= straight tube length TNUM= number of tubes TPPB= tube passes per bundle FAOD= fan outside diameter FAPB= number of fans per bay
Tube & Fin FNMT= fin material FNOD= fin outside diameter FNSP= number of fins per unit length FNSW= fin segment width FNTK= fin thickness FNTY= type of fin: 1 = none
6 = L-tension wrapped
2 = extruded
7 = L-tension overlapped
3 = L-type weld
8 = embedded
4 = U-type weld
9 = extruded sleeve
5 = I-type weld
10= metal coated
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
11= plate
4-47
TODX= tube outside diameter TWTK= tube wall thickness Mechanical Options DTYP= type of draft: 1=forced 2=induced 3=not applicable PARR= pass arrangement: 1=horizontal or mixed 2= vertical RPIT= tube pitch between tube rows deep TPAT= tube pattern: 1=staggered 2=in-line TPIT= tube pitch in the face row
General FILE= specify the name of the file that contains the change codes
4-48
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Results The Results Section is divided into four sections: • • • •
Design Summary Thermal Summary Mechanical Summary Calculation Details
Design Summary The Design Summary Section is subdivided into four sections: • • • •
Input Summary Optimization Path Recap of Designs Warnings & Messages
Input Summary This section provides you with a summary of the information specified in the input file. It is recommended that you request the input data as part of your printed output so that it is easy to reconstruct the input that led to the design.
Optimization Path This part of the output is the window into the logic of the program. It shows some of the heat exchangers the program has evaluated in trying to find one that satisfies your design conditions. These intermediate designs can also point out the constraints that are controlling the design and point out what parameters you could change to further optimize the design. To help you see which constraints are controlling the design, the conditions that do not satisfy your specifications are noted with an asterisk (*) next to the value. The asterisk will appear next to the required tube length if the exchanger is undersurfaced, or next to a pressure drop if it exceeds the maximum allowable. Column headings are described below: In design mode, the Aerotran program will search for a heat exchanger configuration that will satisfy the desired process conditions. It will automatically change a number of the geometric parameters as it searches. However Aerotran will not automatically evaluate all possible configurations, and therefore it may not necessarily find the true optimum by itself. It is up to the user to determine what possible changes to the construction could lead to a better design and then present these changes to the program.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-49
Aerotran searches to find a design that satisfies the following: 1. enough surface area to do the desired heat transfer 2. pressure drops within the allowable 3. physical size within acceptable limits 4. velocities within an acceptable range 5. mechanically sound and practical to construct In addition to these criteria, Aerotran also determines a budget cost estimate for each design. However the cost does not affect the program's logic for optimization. There are several mechanical parameters which directly or indirectly affect the thermal performance of an air cooled type heat exchanger. It is not practical for the program to evaluate all combinations of these parameters. In addition, the acceptable variations are often dependent upon process and cost considerations that are beyond the scope of the program (for example the cost and importance of cleaning). Therefore the program automatically varies only a number of parameters that are reasonably independent of other process, operating, maintenance, or fabrication considerations. The parameters that are automatically optimized are: tubes in face row
number rows deep
tube length
bundles in series
bundles in parallel
number of tubes
tube passes
bays in series
bays in parallel
The design engineer should optimize the other parameters, based on good engineering judgment. Some of the important parameters to consider are: fin density
tube outside diameter
fan size
fin type
tube pitch
tube pattern
nozzle sizes
tube type
exchanger orientation
materials
fluid allocation
tube wall thickenss
Face rows The number of tubes in the first tube row exposed to the outside bundle flow. In the design mode, the program will minimize the number of tubes in the face row to maximize the air side and tube side velocities. For an air cooler application, face rows will be incremented based upon Bay width limits set in design constraints and pressure drop limits that have been set. For other types of equipment (economizers sections), the face rows optimization will be based upon bundle width limits set.
4-50
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Rows deep The number of tube rows passed by the outside flow from entrance to exit. In the design mode, the program will minimize the number of rows deep to meet minimum surface area required and be within allowable pressure drop limits. For an air cooler application, face rows deep will be incremented based upon Bay rows deep limits set in design constraints and pressure drop limits that have been set. For other types of equipment (economizers sections), the rows deep optimization will be based upon the bundle rows deep limits set.
Tube Length The straight length of one tube is from inlet header to outlet header or u-bend. Once the smallest bundle/bay size has been found, the program optimizes the tube length to the shortest standard length, within the allowable range, which will satisfy surface area, pressure drop, and velocity requirements. The length is incremented or decremented based on the tube length increment and is limited by the minimum tube length and maximum tube length. Each of these can be specified in the input. The actual tube length will be shown which is the length of the straight tubes or the straight length to the tangent for U-tubes. This includes the portion of the tube, which is in the tubesheet. This length will include the portion of the tube in the tubesheet, which is ineffective for heat transfer.
Tube Pass The number of tube side passes per bay that the tube side flow makes across the outside flow. The program seeks the maximum reasonable number of tube passes that gives a pressure drop and velocity within the maximums allowed. The program wants to maximize the tube side velocity thereby maximizing the tube side film coefficient and minimizing any velocity dependent fouling.
Bundles in Parallel The number of tube bundles in parallel per bay or per exchanger. The program will automatically increase the number of bundles in parallel when it reaches the maximum allowable bundle width and minimum allowable tube length and still is unable to satisfy the allowable pressure drop. Note that both the outside streams and tube side streams are considered to be flowing in parallel.
Bundles in Series The number of tube bundles in series per bay or per exchanger. The program will automatically increase the number of bundles in series when it reaches the maximum allowable bundle width and tube length and still is unable to find a design with enough heat transfer area. It will also go to exchangers in series when the correction factor on the MTD falls below 0.7 (or the minimum allowable correction factor specified in the input). Note that both the outside stream and the tube side stream are considered to be flowing in series.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-51
Bays in Parallel The number bays with the tube side flow in parallel for air cooled applications only. The program will automatically increase the number of bays in parallel when it reaches the maximum allowable bay width and minimum allowable tube length and still is unable to satisfy the allowable pressure drop. Note that both the shell side streams and tube side streams are considered to be flowing in parallel.
Bays in Series The number bays with the tube side flow in series for air cooled applications only. The program will automatically increase the number of bays in series when it reaches the maximum allowable bay width and tube length and still is unable to find a design with enough heat transfer area. It will also go to exchangers in series when the correction factor on the MTD falls below 0.7 (or the minimum allowable correction factor specified in the input). Note that both the outside stream is considered to be in parallel flow and the tube side stream is considered to be flowing in series.
Area Calculated The calculated required surface area. This area is determined by the calculated heat load, corrected mean temperature difference, and the overall heat transfer coefficient. This area will be denoted with an * if the exchanger is undersurfaced.
Area Actual The actual total outside surface area that is available for heat transfer. This is based upon the effective tube length that does not include the length of the tubes in the tubesheet(s).
Outside Pressure Drop The total outside pressure drop calculated for flow outside the tubes. The pressure drop will be denoted with an * if it exceeds the allowable.
Tube Pressure Drop The total tube side pressure drop calculated for flow through the tubes. The pressure drop will be denoted with an * if it exceeds the allowable.
Total Price This is the estimated budget price for the total number of heat exchangers in series and in parallel.
4-52
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Recap of Designs The recap of design cases summarizes the basic geometry and performance of all designs reviewed up to that point. This side by side comparison allows you to determine the effects of various design changes and to select the best exchanger for the application. As a default, the recap provides you with the same summary information that is shown in the Optimization Path. You can customize what information is shown in the Recap by selecting the Customize button. You can recall an earlier design case by selecting the design case you want from the Recap list and then select the Select Case button. The program will then regenerate the design results for the selected case.
Warnings & Messages If the program has detected any potential problems with your design or needs to note special conditions, these notes, limits, warnings, or error messages are shown in this section of the output.
Warning Messages Conditions which may be problems; however the program will continue
Error Messages Conditions which do not allow the program to continue
Limit Messages Conditions which go beyond the scope of the program
Notes Special conditions which you should be aware of
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-53
Thermal Summary The Thermal Summary section summarizes the heat transfer calculations, pressure drop calculations, and surface area requirements. Sufficient information is provided to allow you to make thermal design decisions. The Thermal Summary Section is subdivided into four headings: • • • •
Performance Coefficients & MTD Pressure Drop API Sheet
Performance This section provides a concise summary of the thermal process requirements, basic heat transfer values, and heat exchanger configuration.
General Performance In the general performance section, flow rates, Gases (in/out) and Liquids (in/out), for the outside and tube sides are shown to summarize any phase change that occurred in the exchanger. The Temperature (in/out) for both side of the exchanger are given along with Dew point and bubble point temperatures for phase change applications. Film coefficients for the shell and tube sides are the weighted coefficients for any gas cooling/heating and phase change that occurred in the heat exchanger. Velocities for single phase applications are based on an average density. For condensers, the velocity is based on the inlet conditions. For vaporizers, it is based on the outlet conditions. Outside velocities are the crossflow velocity through the cross-section. Overall performance parameters are given, such as Heat exchanged, MTD with any applied correction factor and the effective total surface area. For single phase applications on both sides of the shell, a MTD correction factor will be applied in accordance with TEMA standards. For multi-component phase change applications, the MTD is weighted based upon a heat release curve. The effective surface area does not include the U-bend area for U-tubes unless it was specified to do so. The exchanger geometry provided in the summary includes: TEMA type, exchanger position, number of shells in parallel and in series, exchanger size, number of tubes and tube outside diameter, baffle type, baffle cut, baffle orientation, and number of tube passes.
4-54
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Thermal Resistance Analysis This portion gives information to help you evaluate the surface area requirements in the clean, specified fouled (as given in the input), and the maximum fouled conditions. The clean condition assumes that there is no fouling in the exchanger, in the new condition. The overall coefficient shown for this case has no fouling resistance included. Using this clean overall coefficient, the excess surface area is then calculated. The specified foul condition summarizes the performance of the exchanger with the overall coefficient based upon the specified fouling. The maximum fouled condition is derived by taking the specified fouling factors and increasing them (if the exchanger is oversurfaced) or decreasing them (if undersurfaced), proportionately to each other, until there is no over or under surface. The distribution of overall resistance allows you to quickly evaluate the controlling resistance(s). You should look in the "Clean" column to determine which film coefficient is controlling, then look in the "Spec. Foul" column to see the effect of the fouling resistances. The difference between the excess surface in the clean condition and the specified fouled condition is the amount of surface added for fouling. You should evaluate the applicability of the specified fouling resistances when they dictate a large part of the area, say more than 50%. Such fouling resistances often increase the diameter of the heat exchanger and decrease the velocities to the point where the level of fouling is self-fulfilling.
Coefficients & MTD This output section shows the various components of each film coefficient. Depending on the application, one or more of the following coefficients will be shown: desuperheating, condensing, vapor sensible, liquid sensible, boiling and liquid cooling coefficients. The Reynolds number is included so that you can readily evaluate if the flow is laminar (under 2000), transition (2000-10000), or turbulent (over 10000). The fin efficiency factor is used in correcting the tube side film thermal resistance and the tube side fouling factor resistance. The mean metal temperature of the shell is the average of the inlet and outlet temperatures on the shell side. The mean metal temperature of the tube wall is a function of the film coefficients on both sides as well as the temperatures on both sides. These two temperatures are intended for use in the mechanical design in order to determine the expansion joint requirements in a fixed tubesheet heat exchanger.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-55
The calculated corrected MTD (Mean Temperature Difference) for no phase change applications is the product of the LMTD (Log Mean Temperature Difference), and the correction factor (F). For phase change applications, the process is divided into a number of intervals and a MTD is determined for each interval. The overall MTD for the exchanger is then determined by weighting the interval MTD’s based on heat load. If you have specified a value for the Corrected Mean Temperature Difference in the input, it is this value which the program uses in the design instead of the calculated Corrected MTD. The flow direction is displayed when there is a single tube pass, in which case it is either counter-current or co-current. The heat flux is the heat transferred per unit of surface area. This is of importance for boiling applications where a high flux can lead to vapor blanketing. In this condition, the rapid boiling at the tube wall covers the tube surface with a film of vapor, which causes the film coefficient to collapse. The program calculates a maximum flux for nucleate boiling on a single tube and a maximum flux for bundle boiling (nucleate and flow boiling), which can be controlled by other limits (e.g., dryout). If you specify a maximum flux in the input, this overrides the program calculated maximum flux. To analyze this data, you should check to see if the maximum flux is controlling. If it is, consider reducing the temperature of the heating medium.
Pressure Drop Pressure drop distribution The pressure drop distribution is one of the most important parts of the output for analysis. You should observe if significant portions or the pressure drop are expended where there is little or no heat transfer (inlet nozzle, entering bundle, through bundle, exiting bundle, and outlet nozzle). If too much pressure drop occurs in a nozzle, consider increasing the nozzle size. If too much is consumed entering or exiting the bundle, consider increase the face area of the bundle. The program determines the dirty pressure drop in the tubes by estimating a thickness for the fouling, based on the specified tube side fouling resistance, which decreases the crosssectional area for flow.
User specified bundle multiplier The user specified bundle multiplier, which you can specify in the input, is included in the bundle portion of the calculated pressure drop, clean and dirty.
4-56
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Velocity distribution The velocity distribution, between the inlet and outlet nozzle, is shown for reference. In other parts of the output, the velocity which is shown for the shell side is the diametric crossflow velocity. For the tube side it is the velocity through the tubes. For two phase applications, the velocities for crossflow, through baffle windows, and through tubes are the highest velocities based on the maximum vapor flow.
Distribution of Overall Resistance The distribution of overall resistance allows you to quickly evaluate the controlling resistance(s). You should look in the "Clean" column to determine which film coefficient is controlling, then look in the "Spec. Foul" column to see the effect of the fouling resistances. The difference between the excess surface in the clean condition and the specified fouled condition is the amount of surface added for fouling. You should reevaluate the applicability of the specified fouling resistances when they dictate a large part of the area, say more than 50%. Such fouling resistances often increase the diameter of the heat exchanger and decrease the velocities to the point where the level of fouling is self-fulfilling.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-57
API Sheet AIR-COOLED HEAT EXCHANGER SPECIFICATION SHEET 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59
4-58
Company: ACME Chemical Co. Location: Houston, Texas Service of Unit: Product Cooler Our Reference: Item No.: x-123 Your Reference: Date: 23 January 1996 Rev No.: 1 Job No.: S582 Size & Type 5110/3681 Type Forced draft Number of Bays 1 Surface/Unit-Finned Tube 1866 m2 Bare Tube 173 m2 Heat Exchanged 626833 W MTD,Eff. 32 C Transfer Rate-Finned 11 ;Bare ,Service 115 Clean 146 W/(m2*K) PERFORMANCE DATA - TUBE SIDE Fluid Circulated Hydrocarbons In/Out Total Fluid Entering 8.74 kg/s Density,Liq kg/m3 / In/Out Density,Vap 2.9/3.5 Temperature C 114/34 Specific Heat,Liq / Liquid kg/s / Vap kJ/(kg*K) 0.936/0.857 Vapor kg/s 8.74/ Therm Cond,Liq / Noncond kg/s / Vap W/(m*K) 0.024/0.017 Steam kg/s / Freeze Point C Water kg/s / Bubble Point Dew Point Molecular Wt, Vap / Latent Heat kJ/kg Molecular Wt,NC Inlet Pressure 2.1 bar Viscosity,Liq mPa*s / Pres Drop,Allow/Calc 0.1/0.1 Viscosity,Vap 0.019/0.015 Fouling Resist. 0.00018 m2*K/W PERFORMANCE DATA - AIR SIDE Air Quantity,Total 35.874 kg/s Altitude 20 m Air Quantity/Fan 31 m3/s Temperature In 23 C Static Pressure 8.302 mm H2O Temperature Out 40.4 C Face Vel. 2 m/s Bundle Vel. 4.51 kg/s/m2 Design Ambient -15 C DESIGN - MATERIALS - CONSTRUCTION Design Pressure 3 bar Test Pressure Code Design Temperature 140 C TUBE BUNDLE HEADER TUBE Size 5110 Type Plug Material CS Number/Bay 2 Material Welded Tube Rows 8 Passes 2 OD 30 Min Tks 2 mm Arrangement Plug Mat. No./Bun 204 Lng 4500 mm Bundles 2 Par 1 Ser Gasket Mat. Pitch 68.35/59.19 Stgrd Bays 1 Par 1 Ser Corr Allow 3.2 mm FIN Bundle Frame Galv Stl Inlet Nozzl(2) 203 mm Type L-Type tension MISCELLANEOUS Outlet Nozz(2) 203 mm Material Aluminum Struct.Mount. Special Nozzles OD 62 Tks 0.6 mm Surf Prep. Rating/Facing No. 197/m Des Temp C Louvers TI PI CodeVibration Switches Chem Cleaning StampSpecs API661 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT Fan, Mfr. & Model Driver, Type Speed Reducer, Type No./Bay 1 RPM 96 Mfr. Mfr.& Model Dia. 3353 Blades 15 No./Bay kW/Dr No./Bay Pitch 1.68 Angle RPM Rating kW Blade Hub Enclosure Ratio kW/Fan 3.5 Min Amb V/Phase/Hz / / Support Control Action on Air Failure; Louvers Degree Control of Outlet Process Temperature C Recirculation Steam Coil Plot Area m2 Drawing No. Wt.Bundle 4250 Wt.Bay 9351 kg Notes:
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Mechanical Summary The Mechanical Summary Section is subdivided into two sections: • •
Exchanger Dimensions Setting Plan & Tubesheet Layout
Exchanger Dimensions Unit length The total length of the exchanger would include the tube length and the depth of the inlet and outlet headers (if any).
Unit width The unit width is the total width of the entire unit, which includes side frames and/or ducting.
Bays in parallel The total number of bays in parallel with the tube side flow in parallel.
Bays in series The total number of bays in series with the tube side flow in series.
Number of tubes per bundle or tubes per bay The total number of tubes per bundle or bay.
Fan Specifications Fan blade and motor information will be provided if unit was specified as a forced or induced air source. Fan selection is based upon the Moore Fan correlations.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-59
Tube Summary A summary of the tubing is provided: tube material, tube length, tube O.D., tube wall thickness, tube pitch first row, tube pitch first row, tube pattern, pass type, and area ratio. Reference the Geometry Input section for additional information on these items.
Fin Specifications A summary of the tubing is provided: Fin Material, Fin Type, Fin OD, Fin thickness, Fin density, Fin segment width. Reference the Geometry Input section for additional information on these items.
Setting Plan & Tubesheet Layout Setting Plan
A scaled setting plan is provided. Setting plan shows overall dimensions, inlet / outlet nozzle arrangement and fans (if applicable).
4-60
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubesheet Layout
The tubesheet layout drawing is displayed directly after the tube details. The complete tube layout shows all tubes and their arrangement in the tube bank. Each tube row is listed with the number of tubes per row. Three additional graphics show the number of tubes per pass and tube pass arrangement, the tube pattern with tube pitch dimensions, and the finned tube geometry with dimensions.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-61
Calculation Details The Calculation Details Section is subdivided into two headings: • •
Interval Analysis – Tube Side VLE – Tube Side
Interval Analysis – Tube Side The Interval analysis section provides you with table of values for liquid properties, vapor properties, performance, heat transfer coefficients and heat load over the tube side temperature range.
Liquid Properties Summary of liquid properties is given over the temperature in the heat exchanger.
Vapor Properties Summary of liquid properties is given over the temperature in the heat exchanger.
Performance This section gives an incremental summary of the performance. Overall coefficient, surface area, temperature difference, and pressure drop are given for each heat load/temperature increment.
Heat Transfer Coefficient – Single Phase Flow regimes are mapped in this section with the corresponding overall calculated film coefficients. The overall film coefficients are base upon the following: The liquid coefficient is the calculated heat transfer coefficient assuming the total flow is all liquid. The gas coefficient is the calculated heat transfer coefficient assuming the total flow is all vapor.
4-62
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Heat Transfer Coefficient - Condensation Flow regimes are mapped in this section with the corresponding overall calculated film coefficients. The overall film coefficients are base upon the following: "Desuperheating Dry Wall" is for the part of the desuperheating load which is removed where no condensing is occurring. This only happens when the tube wall temperature is above the dew point temperature. In such a case, the film coefficient is based on a dry gas rate and the temperature difference is based on the inlet temperature. "Desuperheating Wet Wall" which shows the part of the desuperheating load which is removed coincident with condensation occurring at the tube wall. This case is more common. The film coefficient and temperature difference are the same as the first condensing zone. Liquid Cooling coefficient is for the cooling of any liquid entering and the condensate after it has formed and flows further through the heat exchanger. The program assumes that all liquid will be cooled down to the same outlet temperature as the vapor. The dry gas coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient when only gas is flowing with no condensation occurring. It is used as the lower limit for the condensing coefficient for pure component condensation and in the mass transfer and proration model for complex condensation applications. The pure condensing coefficients (shear and gravity) are the calculated condensing coefficients for the stream for that regime. The resulting pure condensing coefficient is a pure shear coefficient, pure gravity coefficient or a proration between the two, depending on the condensing regime. The condensing film coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient resulting from the combined effects of the resulting pure condensing coefficient and the dry gas coefficient.
Heat Transfer Coefficient - Vaporization The two phase factor is the correction factor applied to the liquid coefficient to calculate the two phase heat transfer coefficient. The two phase coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient calculated based on the combined liquid and vapor flow. The nucleate coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient due to the nucleation of bubbles on the surface of the heat transfer surface. The vaporization film coefficient is the heat transfer coefficient for the specified side resulting from the vectorial addition of the two-phase and nucleate boiling coefficient. Observe the change in the film coefficient to see if it decreases severely at the end of the vaporizing range. This usually indicates that the tube wall is drying out and the film coefficient is approaching a dry gas rate. If a significant percentage of the area required is at this low coefficient, consider a higher circulation rate (less vaporized each time through) if it is a reboiler.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-63
Heat Load The cumulative heat load is shown as function of temperature increment.
VLE – Tube Side If the Aspen Aerotran program generated the heat release curve, the following VLE information will be provided:
Vapor-Liquid Equilibrium The condensation or vaporization curve will be provided as a function of equal heat load increments or temperature increments. Cumulative heat load and vapor/liquid flow rates as a function of temperature will be shown.
Condensation/Vaporization Details Component flow rates as function of temperature increments will be provided.
Vapor Properties Vapor properties will be provided as a function of temperature increments.
Liquid Properties Liquid properties will be provided as a function of temperature increments.
4-64
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Aerotran Design Methods Optimization Logic In design mode, the Aspen Aerotran program will search for a heat exchanger configuration which will satisfy the desired process conditions. It will automatically change a number of the geometric parameters as it searches. However, Aspen Aerotran will not automatically evaluate all possible configurations, and therefore it may not necessarily find the true optimum by itself. It is up to the user to determine what possible changes to the construction could lead to a better design and then present these changes to the program. Aspen Aerotran searches to find a design, which satisfies the following: • • • • •
enough surface area to do the desired heat transfer pressure drops within the allowable physical size within acceptable limits velocities within an acceptable range mechanically sound and practical to construct
In addition to these criteria, Aspen Aerotran also determines a budget cost estimate for each design. However cost does not affect the program's logic for optimization. There are over thirty mechanical parameters that directly or indirectly affect the thermal performance of a heat exchanger. It is not practical for the program to evaluate all combinations of these parameters. In addition, the acceptable variations are often dependent upon process and cost considerations, which are beyond the scope of the program (for example the cost and importance of cleaning). Therefore the program automatically varies only a number of parameters which are reasonably independent of other process, operating, maintenance, or fabrication considerations. The parameters which are automatically optimized are: bundle/bay width, tube rows, bundles/bays in series, tube length, tube passes, bundles/bays in parallel, number of tubes, and fan number. The design engineer should optimize the other parameters, based on good engineering judgment. Some of the important parameters to consider are: tube outside diameter, fin type, materials, tube pitch, fin dimensions, nozzle sizes, tube type, fin density, fan requirements, tube wall thickness, exchanger orientation, materials, tube pattern, and tubesheet type.
Optimization of Heat Transfer Area The program attempts to optimize on the most effective exchanger geometry that meets all the specified design criteria while requiring the least amount of heat transfer area. The optimization logic changes the bundle/bay length, width, and tube rows as well as the tube number and number of tube passes. Minimum and maximum limits for each of these items can be specified in the input.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-65
Heat Transfer Coefficients The program attempts to maximize the heat transfer coefficients by maximizing velocities within the following limitations: maximum allowable velocity, allowable pressure drop, and physical construction limitations.
Pressure Drop, Outside Tubes The pressure drop inside the tubes includes pressure losses through the bundle and accessory losses due to louvers, fan guards, and steam coils.
Pressure Drop, Inside Tubes The pressure drop inside the tubes includes pressure losses: through the inlet and outlet nozzles, entering and exiting the tubes, and through the tubes.
Pricing The price is based on the cost of materials and labor involved in fabricating a bay. Price includes the following components: Tubes, Bundle Frame, Header, Tube Supports, Fan, Plenum, Nozzles, and Flanges.
MTD Calculation The calculation of the MTD is based on a rigorous iterative procedure in which each tube row is broken into intervals. MTD’s are calculated for each interval, weighted and summed for an overall MTD. This allows the program to calculate an accurate MTD for virtually any number of rows deep and any pass arrangement.
Maximum Velocities Aerotran has the following maximum velocity restrictions built into it: Tube Side Outside Tubes
Vmax = 64.0 /
density
Vmax = 50.0 /
density
Fans Fans are sized based on logic provided by the Moore Fan Company. Fan size should be used for approximation purposes only. The availability of an acceptable fan to perform the required duty does not control the design of the unit.
4-66
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Nozzles The Aerotran program provides at least one nozzle for every five feet or 1.5 meter of header length. This insures that all tubes are supplied adequately. The nozzle size is based on a maximum velocity through the nozzle. Vmax = 38.7 /
density
Vmax = 50.0 /
density (for Phase Change)
Heat Transfer Area The Aspen Aerotran program assumes that the total tube length is available for heat transfer.
Tube Pass Configuration In rating mode, Aspen Aerotran accepts any tube pass configuration. In design mode, Aspen Aerotran tries a maximum of two passes per row and maintains an equal number of tubes per pass. It generates all the valid pass arrangements for a given number of tubes and tube rows. It tries each of these arrangements to arrive at an acceptable geometry.
No Phase Change No Phase Change - Film Coefficient The outside tube film coefficient is based on correlations developed from research conducted by Briggs & Young, Robinson & Briggs, and Weierman, Taborek, & Marner. The tube side film coefficient is based on the Dittus-Boelter correlation.
No Phase Change - MTD The program uses a corrected log mean temperature difference for all geometries.
No Phase Change - Pressure Drop The pressure drop is determined by using a Fanning-type equation on the tube side. The pressure drop correlations used for finned tubes were developed from research conducted by Briggs & Young, Robinson & Briggs, and Weierman, Taborek, & Marner. The Zukauskas and Ulinskas correlations are used for bare tubes. Velocity heads are used to determine pressure losses through the nozzles.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-67
Simple Condensation The program divides the condensing range up into four equal zones based on temperature from the dew point to the bubble point or outlet temperature. For each zone it calculates a film coefficient (made up of a condensing coefficient, gas cooling coefficient, liquid cooling coefficient, and two phase coefficient), MTD, and two phase pressure drop, based on the vapor liquid equilibrium and physical properties for each zone.
Condensing - Film Coefficient - Horizontal Inside Tube The program determines the dominant flow regime in each of the zones. The flow regimes are divided into annular, annular with stratification, wavy/stratified, intermediate wavy, high wavy/slug/plug, and bubble. For each flow regime there is a separate equation which reflects the contribution of shear controlled or gravity controlled flow. The shear controlled equations are derived from a single phase Dittus-Boelter equation with a two phase multiplier as a function of the Martinelli parameter. The gravity controlled equations are modified Nusselt and Dukler equations.
Liquid Cooling and Subcooling - Film Coefficient The cooling of the condensate (and any liquid entering) down to the outlet temperature and any subcooling below the bubble point are calculated using the greater of a forced convection or free convection equation for the full temperature range.
MTD The program assumes that the MTD is linear over the condensing range. Subcooling is also assumed to be linear.
Pressure Drop The program uses a two phase Martinelli equation to calculate pressure drop.
Complex Condensation The program divides the condensing range up into a number of equal zones based on temperature from the dew point to the bubble point or outlet temperature. For each zone it calculates a film coefficient (made up of a condensing coefficient, gas cooling coefficient, liquid cooling coefficient, and two phase coefficient), MTD, and two phase pressure drop, based on the vapor liquid equilibrium and physical properties for each zone.
4-68
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Desuperheating - Film Coefficient The program determines at what temperature point the tube wall will be wet by using a dry gas coefficient on the hot side and the coolant coefficient on the cold side. If the program determines that any part of the desuperheating range will result in a dry wall, it will calculate a separate desuperheating zone using a dry gas coefficient. Once the tube is wet, any remaining superheat is removed coincident with the condensation in the first condensing zone and the first zone film coefficient is used.
Condensing - Film Coefficient A separate condensing coefficient is determined for each zone, based on the flow regime and whether it is shear or gravity controlled.
Gas Cooling - Film Coefficient The cooling of the vapor once condensation has begun (after any desuperheating) and the cooling of any noncondensables is based on a single phase coefficient for each zone using a modified Dittus-Boelter equation.
Liquid Cooling and Subcooling - Film Coefficient The cooling of the condensate and any liquid entering down to the outlet temperature and any subcooling below the bubble point is calculated using a two phase coefficient based on the Martinelli equation. It is calculated for each of the zones, based on the liquid carried over from previous zones.
Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient The overall heat transfer coefficient calculated for each zone is dependent on the condensing correlation chosen. The program defaults to the mass transfer method which is a film model based on a Colburn-Hougen correlation for condensable(s) with noncondensable(s) and a Colburn-Drew correlation for multiple condensables. Our experience and research indicate that if the composition of the vapor is known, the mass transfer method is the most accurate method.
Desuperheating - MTD The program determines at what temperature point the tube wall will be wet by using a dry gas coefficient on the hot side and the coolant coefficient on the cold side. If the program determines that any part of the desuperheating range will result in a dry wall, it will use the inlet temperature and the vapor temperature point which yields the wet tube wall to determine the MTD for the desuperheating zone.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
4-69
Once the tube wall is wet, the rest of the desuperheating occurs using the dew point temperature to calculate the MTD.
Condensing - MTD The program calculates an MTD for each of the zones using the starting and ending temperature for each zone.
Liquid Cooling - MTD The liquid cooling load is divided evenly among the zones. This avoids the common mistake of assuming that the vapor and liquid are kept in equilibrium and are at the same temperature. In fact much of the liquid cooling may actually occur early in the heat exchanger. An MTD for the liquid cooling is calculated for each zone and then weighted.
Desuperheating - Pressure Drop If the program determines that there is a dry wall zone, as described above, then the tube side pressure drop for this zone is calculated using a modified Fanning equation.
Condensing - Pressure Drop The pressure drop for the vapor cooling, condensing, and condensate formed is determined using a two phase Martinelli equation.
Simple Vaporization Liquid Preheating - Film Coefficient The film coefficient for the heating of the liquid from its inlet temperature to the bubble point is the greater of the forced convection coefficient and the free convection coefficient.
Forced Circulation - Film Coefficient The boiling coefficient for forced circulation is also determined by using a vectorial addition of the nucleate boiling coefficient and the flow boiling coefficient.
4-70
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Natural Circulation Vaporizer (Thermosiphon) - Tube Side - Film Coefficient The tube side is divided into a liquid preheating zone and a number of vaporizing zones divided equally by temperature. The boiling coefficient is determined by using a vectorial addition of the nucleate boiling coefficient and the flow boiling coefficient and corrected as described above for pool boiling. The flow regime is determined using a modified Baker flow regime map.
Liquid Preheating - MTD The liquid preheat MTD is calculated as a linear LMTD.
Forced Circulation - MTD The LMTD is assumed to be linear and an F factor is applied to correct for the effect of multiple tube passes.
Forced Circulation - Pressure Drop The liquid pressure drop, determined using a Fanning equation, is multiplied by a two phase Martinelli multiplier. If the exchanger is in a vertical position, a vapor acceleration pressure drop and static head pressure drop are also added.
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
❖
❖
❖
4-71
4-72
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5
Aspen Teams
Introduction Aspen Teams is a comprehensive set of computer programs for the complete mechanical design and rating of shell and tube heat exchangers and basic pressure vessels. In the design mode, the program determines optimum dimensions for all components based on design specifications. In the rating mode, the program checks specified dimensions of each component for compliance with applicable codes and standards under the design conditions. In addition to calculating the mechanical design, Aspen Teams produces a detailed cost estimate, generates a complete bill of materials, and makes detailed drawings on a variety of graphics devices. Aspen Teams covers a wide range of construction alternatives, including all common types for heads, flanges, nozzles, and expansion joints. The program conforms with all provisions of the Standards of the Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association (TEMA), and several mechanical design codes. Versions are available which cover ASME (American code), CODAP (French code), and AD Merkblätter (German code). These programs are regularly updated as revisions and addenda are issued by TEMA and code authorities. You can either design all of the components in one program run, in which case the program will respect the interaction of the various elements, or, if desired, you can design each component separately. Each component can be designed with its own material specification. The program optimizes the design of flanges, nozzle reinforcements, and expansion joints. It automatically tries a number of possibilities and chooses the best design, based on userspecified priorities of labor and/or material costs. Teams provides a high degree of flexibility for placement of nozzles, couplings, shell supports, expansion joints, lifting lugs, and provides extensive checking for conflicts between fittings. Teams performs both internal and external pressure calculations and provides a summary of minimum thicknesses for a given external pressure, maximum external pressure for actual thickness, or the maximum length for the specified external pressure and actual thickness.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-1
Teams automatically accesses a built-in databank of material properties, including density, allowable stress, yield strength, modulus of elasticity, thermal expansion coefficient, thermal conductivity, and maximum thickness for several hundred different materials of construction. Databanks are available for ASTM (American), AFNOR (French), and DIN (German) materials. You can also build your own private databank of materials, which you can use in conjunction with the standard databanks. You can do this by using the Primetals databank program. Many important material and design standards are also built-in, such as standard pipe schedules to ANSI, ISO, and DIN standards and standard flange designs to ANSI, API, and DIN standards. Teams also uses a number of databases, which are automatically accessed during program execution. These include: material prices; material standards (e.g. purchasing practices, rounding factors); fabrication standards (e.g. maximum rolling dimensions, nozzle reinforcement procedures, labor costs); welding methods for each component by material class; labor efficiency factors for each type of operation. You can modify these databases to reflect your company's design and fabrication standards and material prices. You can use the Newcost program to make these changes. Two levels of drawings are available from the Teams program. Design drawings, which include a setting plan, a sectional drawing, a bundle layout, and a tubesheet layout and the fabrication drawings, which include detail drawings for all components. Teams offers many options for producing the drawings. Using the Draw program, it supports a wide variety of displays, plotters, and laser printers and can also interface with many other CAD programs using DXF or IGES interface files.
Organization of Input Information The input information for the Aspen Teams programs is organized into two groups, the design information and the rating information. The required design information, to mechanically design a new exchanger, is generally provided on the first Tab for each input Form. This would include code design specifications, TEMA exchanger type and class, flange and nozzle types, and nozzle locations information. If you are having Teams perform a rating of an existing exchanger, you will need to specify the existing dimensions for the components. This input information is generally located on subsequent Tabs on the applicable component Form.
5-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Teams Run Options Teams provides you with different program calculation Run options. By selecting the Run command in the Menu Bar and then selecting Run Teams, the following Run Teams options will appear: calculations only, calculations plus cost estimate, calculations plus drawings, or calculations plus cost plus drawings. By selecting the appropriate option, you can limit the Teams run calculations only to the sections that you need. As an alternate, the Run icon can be selected in the Tools Bar that will run all the calculations, code calculations plus cost estimate plus drawings.
Navigator Contents The following is a list of input information found under the navigator form title: Problem Description Description Headings Equipment type (heat exchanger or pressure vessel) Application Options Design code TEMA class Service class Material / Dimensional standards Design Specifications Design conditions Corrosion allowance Radiography / Post weld heat treatment Exchanger Geometry Front Head Head & Cover type Cylinder details Cover details Shell Shell type Exchanger position Shell diameter Cylinder & Kettle details
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-3
Rear Head Head & Cover type Cylinder details Cover details Shell Cover Cover type Cylinder details Cover details Body Flanges Flange type Individual standards Flange details Flange design options Tubesheet Tube to Tubesheet joint type Types Design method Details Corrosion allowance Expansion Joints Type Mean metal temperatures Details Corrosion allowance Tubes/Baffles Tube specifications Fin specifications Baffle type Baffle details Baffle cuts Tubesheet Layout Tube pattern, pitch, passes, layout type, imp. Plate, OTL Layout details Pass partition Layout open space Tie rods Nozzles-General Nozzle specifications Nozzle & coupling locations Domes distribution specifications Nozzles-Details Nozzle cylinder, re-pad, flange details Nozzle clearances
5-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Horizontal Supports Locations Details Vertical Supports Locations Details Lift Lugs Lug type Location / Details Materials Main Materials Material selection for major components Nozzle Materials Material selection for nozzles, couplings, and domes/distr. Program Options Loads-Ext./Wind/Seismic Calculation methods Loads Details Change Codes Change code input fields Drawings Drawing selection menu
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-5
Teams Scope Mechanical Front Head Types: TEMA types: A, B, C, N, D Shell Types: TEMA types: E, F, G, H, J, K, X, V Rear Head Types: TEMA types: L, M, N, P, S, T, U, W Special Types: vapor belts, hemispherical heads, annular distributor belts Head Cover Types: ellipsoidal, torispherical, dished, conical, flat, hemispherical, elbows Shell Diameter: no limit - pipe sizes per ANSI, DIN or ISO Baffle Types: segmental baffles - single, double, triple, grid, baffles - rod, strip, no tubes in window including intermediate supports Tube Diameter & Length: no limit Tube Passes: 1 to 16 Pass Layout Types: quadrant, mixed, ribbon Tube Patterns: triangular, rotated triangular, square, rotated square Number of Tubes: maximum of 200 tube rows Tube Types: plain and externally finned Body Flange Types: ring, lap joint, hub integral, loose, optional Tubesheet Types: fixed, floating, gasketed, welded Expansion Joints: flanged & flued, flanged-only, bellows Nozzle Types: slip-on, lap joint, weld neck, long weld neck, self-reinforced 'H' and 'S' type necks, nozzle domes, distributor belts
Codes and Standards Design Codes: ASME Section VIII Division 1, CODAP, AD Merkblätter Standards: TEMA, ANSI, DIN Support Analyses: methods per L.P.ZICK and vertical lug shear External Loads: methods per HEI and WRC 107 Wind and Seismic Loads: ANSI Standards Systems of Measure: U.S., SI, metric
5-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Output Design Summary Design conditions Cylinders and covers Nozzles and reinforcement Flanges Tubesheets Expansion joints Supports Wind and seismic loads Maximum allowable working pressure Minimum design metal temperature Fitting locations Overall dimensions Hydrostatic test pressures
Calculation Documentation Cylinders and covers Flanges Tubesheets and expansion joints Nozzles and reinforcement External loadings on nozzles Supports Wind and seismic loads Lift lugs
Cost Estimate Price Bill of materials Fabrication hours
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-7
Drawings Design Drawings Setting plan Bill of materials Sectional plan Bundle layout Tube layout
Fabrication Drawings Shell Shell cover Front head Rear head Floating head Bundle Baffles Flat covers Front tubesheet Rear tubesheet Expansion joint Gaskets Body flanges Supports Weld details
5-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Input The Input Section is divided into four sections: • • • •
Problem Definition Exchanger Geometry Materials Program Options
Problem Definition The Problem Definition Section is subdivided into three sections: • • •
Description Application Options Design Specifications
Description Headings Headings are comprised of 1-5 lines. They will appear on the summary of input for the file and in the title block of the drawings. Note that only the first 40 characters of each line will appear on the drawings.
Teams exchanger or vessel A selection is made for a complete exchanger design of a shell-and-tube heat exchanger or a pressure vessel.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-9
Application Options Design code Select one of the following design codes: ASME (American), CODAP (French), or ADMerkblatter (German). The Teams program will select applicable mechanical design methods based upon the code selected. Default: as defined in the program settings
Material standard Select ASTM, AFNOR, or DIN for the material standards to be used. Choice of standard determines the materials of construction to be used. Default: material standard per applicable code specified
TEMA class Select the appropriate TEMA class for the service. Class B: chemical service exchanger Class C: general service exchanger Class R: refinery service exchanger Code only: Program will not use TEMA defaults for corrosion allowances, minimum thicknesses, etc. Default: TEMA B
Dimensional standard Set the dimensional standards to ANSI (American), ISO (International), or DIN (German). The dimensional standards apply to such things as pipe cylinder dimensions, nozzle flange ratings, and bolt sizes. DIN also encompasses other construction standards such as standard tube pitches. Default: as defined in the program settings
Service class If you select low temperature (design temperature less than -50°F) or lethal service (exchanger contains a lethal substance), the program will select the corresponding Code requirements for that class such as full radiography for butt welds and PWHT for carbon steel construction. Default: normal service class
5-10
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Design Specifications Design pressure Design pressure should be set higher than the highest normal operating pressure. If static pressure is to be considered, add the static to the normal design pressure. For components subject to two pressures, the program follows standard methods to investigate the effect of simultaneous design pressures (for example, TEMA).
Vacuum design pressure The program will design simultaneously for internal as well as external pressure. The program expects an entry of 15 psia (1 bar) for full vacuum condition.
Test pressure The program will calculate the required hydrotest pressure in accordance with the specified design code. Default: program calculated per applicable code
Design temperature Design temperature at which material properties will be obtained. Reference TEMA recommendations for design temperatures based upon the maximum operating temperature.
Corrosion allowances Corrosion Allowance is obtained from the TEMA standards as follows: For carbon steel TEMA C and B: 0.0625" (1.6 mm). For carbon steel TEMA R: 0.125" (3.2 mm). Enter zero for no corrosion allowance. There is no default corrosion allowance for materials other than carbon steel. The user can specify any reasonable value for corrosion allowance. Default: per TEMA standard
Radiographing The program follows the applicable construction code in the calculation of weld joint efficiencies based on the degree of radiography performed on the subject welds. Typically the joint efficiencies used in the thickness formulas follow these values: Degree of Radiography: None
Spot
Full
Joint Efficiency:
0.85
1
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
0.7
5-11
Non-destructive testing performed on welds (i.e. radiography) can directly affect the joint efficiency used in the thickness calculations. Generally, the higher the efficiency, the thinner the component. Default: per applicable code
Post weld heat treatment The post weld heat treatment requirement is dependent upon the applicable Code requirements. If specified the cost estimate will be adjusted to include the cost of post weld heat treatment of the unit. Default: per applicable code
Exchanger Geometry The Exchanger Geometry Section is subdivided into fourteen sections: • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-12
Front Head Shell Rear Head Shell Cover Flanges Tubesheet Expansion Joints Tubes/Baffles Tube Layout Nozzles – General Nozzles – Details Horizontal Supports Vertical Supports Lift Lugs
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Front Head Front head type Specify the TEMA type front head closure. Program default is B type bonnet. The high pressure D type is a shear key ring type. Default: B type head
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-13
D type front head design The Teams program utilizes one specific design approach for the D type, high pressure closure. The pressure vessel design methods used in the program are not specifically defined in the design codes, ASME or TEMA. Therefore, it is recommended that you carefully review the Teams results for the high pressure closure and modify as necessary to meet you specific design construction needs. The construction details for the Teams D type head are shown in the following figure:.
5-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Front head cover type Select the cover type for the B type front head. Default: ellipsoidal cover (Korbbogen for ADM)
Flat
E llip so idal
T orisp herical
H emi
`
Co ne
E lbo w
K lo pper
Ko rbbo gen
Front head cover welded to a cylinder A cylinder is required if a nozzle has been indicated at Zone 2 in the Nozzle-General input section. Default: front head cylinder provided for all types
Front channel/cover bolted to tubesheet Select to have the channel assembly bolted to the tubesheet. Default: channel bolted to tubesheet for A & B type front heads
Front head cylinder outside diameter If you specify an outside diameter, the program will hold the outside diameter and calculate and inside diameter based upon the calculated required cylinder thickness. If a pipe material is specified, cylinders 24 inches and smaller, it is recommended to input the outside diameter so that a standard pipe wall thickness can be determined.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-15
Front head cylinder inside diameter If you specify and inside diameter, the program will hold the inside diameter and calculate and an outside diameter based upon the calculated required cylinder thickness. If a pipe material is specified, cylinders 24 inches and smaller, it is recommended to input the outside diameter so that a standard pipe wall thickness can be determined.
Front head cylinder/details If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cylinder outside diameter or cylinder inside diameter, cylinder thickness, cylinder length, cylinder length for external pressure, and cylinder joint efficiency.
Front head cover details If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cover outside diameter, inside diameter, cover thickness, and cover joint efficiency.
Front head flat bolted cover If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cover clad thickness, cover clad OD (if cladded), cover 1st recess depth (from center), cover 1st recess diameter, cover 2nd recess depth (from center), cover 2nd recess diameter.
Front head flat bolted cover If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cover clad thickness (if cladded), cover flat head weld attachment type, cover “C” factor in calculation of flat cover.
5-16
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Shell Shell type
Shell type The V type shell, which is not currently part of the TEMA standards, is used for very low shell side pressure drops. It is especially well suited for vacuum condensers and has an advantage over the X shell, in that it can readily have vents at the top of the bundle. The vapor belt is an enlarged shell over part of the bundle length. It is essentially a cross flow exchanger in this section. The remaining portions of the bundle on each side are then baffled and fitted with vents and drains. Default: E type (except pool boilers), K type for pool boilers
Exchanger (vessel) position Specify horizontal or vertical exchanger/vessel. Default: horizontal
Shell outside diameter If you specify an outside diameter, the program will hold the outside diameter and calculate and inside diameter based upon the calculated required cylinder thickness. If a pipe material is specified, shells 24 inches and smaller, it is recommended to input the outside diameter so that a standard pipe wall thickness can be determined.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-17
Shell inside diameter If you specify and inside diameter, the program will hold the inside diameter and calculate and an outside diameter based upon the calculated required cylinder thickness. If a pipe material is specified, shells 24 inches and smaller, it is recommended to input the outside diameter so that a standard pipe wall thickness can be determined.
Shell cylinder details If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cylinder thickness, cylinder length, length for external pressure, and cylinder joint efficiency.
Shell stiffening rings If external pressure is controlling the shell cylinder design, you can specify stiffening rings to reinforce the shell. Program will select a ring size if details are not provided.
Kettle cylinder If the exchanger has a kettle type shell specify the kettle outside or inside diameter. If check rating an existing design, the following information should be provided: cylinder length, length for external pressure, and cylinder joint efficiency.
Kettle reducer details If the exchanger has a kettle type shell and you are check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: reducer thickness, reducer cover joint efficiency, and the reducer conical angle.
5-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Rear Head Rear head type The rear head type selection should be based upon service requirements. A removable tube bundle type (P, S, T, U, or W) provide access to the bundle for cleaning and do not required an expansion joint. The fixed tubesheet types (L, M, or N) do no allow access to the bundle but are lower cost construction. Default: U type for kettle shells, M type for all others
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-19
Rear head cover type Specify cover type for rear head. Default: flat bolted for L, N, P, or W; ellipsoidal for M type; dished for S or T type
Flat Bolted
Hemi
Dished
Flat Welded
Torispherical
Ellipsoidal
Cone
Klopper
Elbow
Korbbogen
Rear head cover connected to a cylinder A cylinder is required if a nozzle has been indicated at Zone 8 in the Nozzle-General input section. Default: rear head cylinder provided for one-pass exchangers
Rear channel/cover bolted to tubesheet Select to have the channel assembly bolted to the tubesheet. Default: channel bolted to tubesheet for L & M type rear heads
Rear head cylinder outside diameter If you specify an outside diameter, the program will hold the outside diameter and calculate and inside diameter based upon the calculated required cylinder thickness. If a pipe material is specified, cylinder 24 inches and smaller, it is recommended to input the outside diameter so that a standard pipe wall thickness can be determined.
5-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Rear head cylinder inside diameter If you specify and inside diameter, the program will hold the inside diameter and calculate and an outside diameter based upon the calculated required cylinder thickness. If a pipe material is specified, cylinders 24 inches and smaller, it is recommended to input the outside diameter so that a standard pipe wall thickness can be determined.
Rear head cylinder details If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cylinder outside diameter or cylinder inside diameter, cylinder thickness, cylinder length, cylinder length for external pressure, and cylinder joint efficiency.
Rear head cover details If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cover outside diameter or cover inside diameter, cover thickness, and cover joint efficiency. Also other parameters may be required depending upon the type of cover.
Rear head flat bolted cover If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cover clad thickness (if cladded), cover clad OD, cover 1st recess depth (from center), cover 1st recess diameter, cover 2nd recess depth (from center), cover 2nd recess diameter.
Rear head flat welded cover If check rating an existing design the following information should be provided: cover clad thickness (if cladded), cover flat head weld attachment type, cover “C” Factor in calculation of flat cover.
S type rear head For S type rear heads, specify the backing ring type and backing ring recess type.
W type rear heads If rear head type is a W type, specify the type lantern ring to be used. To check rate an existing design, provide the lantern ring details.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-21
Shell Cover Shell cover types The shell covers shown below are available for a U-tube or floating head type exchangers. The cover may be welded directly to the shell or to a separate cylinder which can be welded or bolted to the shell. Default: ellipsoidal welded cover for applicable type exchanger
Flat
E llip so idal
T orisp herical
`
Co ne
E lbo w
K lo pper
H em i
K o rbbo gen
Shell cover cylinder details If you are check rating an existing design and have specified that a shell cover cylinder is present, provide the detail dimensions for the cylinder.
Shell cover details If you are check rating an existing design, provide the detail dimensions for the cover and any applicable information if the cover is a flat head type.
5-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Flanges Tube side flange type Select the general form of the flange, which may be a ring flange, lap joint flange, or hub flange. These categories refer to the shape of the flange as found in ASME Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 2 and other applicable construction codes. Default: ring flange according to figure 2-4(8) of ASME, if attached to a carbon steel cylinder or head; lap joint flange when attached to an alloy cylinder or head.
Ring
Ring with Overlay
Lap Joint
Hub
Tube side flange design standard For exchanger applications with shell sizes greater that 24” (610mm) diameter, the body flanges are normally custom designed flanges and the program will optimize to find the best and lowest cost solution for the flange. If you want a pre-designed, standard flange (quite often used for shells 24” and smaller), select the appropriate standard. Note that with a predesigned flange, flange design calculations will not be provided because they are not required per the code. Default: program optimized design according to applicable code
Tube side confined Joints A flange can have different types of faces in relation to the adjoining surface. The simplest form is a flat face on which the gasket seats without being restricted radially. On the other hand, a confined joint forms a containment around the gasket. Default: unconfined (except TEMA R)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-23
Shell side flange type Specify the general form of the flange, which may be a ring flange, lap joint flange, or hub flange. These categories refer to the shape of the flange as found in ASME Section VIII Division 1, Appendix 2 or other applicable construction codes. Default: ring flange according to figure 2-4(8) of ASME, if attached to a carbon steel cylinder or head; lap joint flange when attached to an alloy cylinder or head.
Ring
Ring with Overlay
Lap Joint
Hub
Shell side flange design standard For exchanger applications with shell sizes greater that 24” (610mm) diameter, the body flanges are normally custom designed flanges and the program will optimize to find the best and lowest cost solution for the flange. If you want a pre-designed, standard flange (quite often used for shells 24” and smaller), select the appropriate standard. Note that with a predesigned flange, flange design calculations will not be provided because they are not required per the code. Default: program optimized design according to applicable code
Shell side confined joints A flange can have different types of faces in relation to the adjoining surface. The simplest form is a flat face on which the gasket seats without being restricted radially. On the other hand, a confined joint forms a containment around the gasket. Default: unconfined (except TEMA R)
Individual standards To modify a specific flange provide the following as applicable: design standard, code type, standard type, standard rating, code facing, standard facing, and confined joint.
5-24
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Special flange types per ASME Fig. 2.4
These selections are available under the code type pull-down menu.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-25
Special flange facing types per ASME Table 2.5.2 These selections are available under the code facing pull-down menu.
Flange dimensions This section provides you with access to all the major flange dimensions for all the flanges on the exchanger (outside diameter, bolt circle, bolt diameter and number, etc.). Body flanges can be designed per code rules or selected from standards. You can also enter flange dimensions when executing a rating program run. Designed flanges follow the rules dictated by the specified code. As in the case of nozzle flanges, typical flange types available are ring, lap joint and hub type. The program also automatically investigates the feasibility of optional type flanges calculated as loose or integral.
5-26
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
If check rating an existing flange provide the following information: outside diameter, inside diameter, bolt circle, thickness, gasket O.D., gasket width, gasket thickness, bolt diameter, number of bolts, hub length, hub slope, and weld height (if applicable).
Flange nubbin/recess/gasket
If check rating an existing flange provide the following information: nubbin width, nubbin height, nubbin diameter, recess depth, recess diameter, overlay thickness, gasket m factor, and gasket seating stress when applicable.
Design temperature for flanges You can set specific design temperatures for the body flanges in lieu of the global design temperatures.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-27
Included gasket rib area for gasket seating The program will adjust the flange design to include the rib seating area of the gasket. This assures that the flange will be able to keep the gasket sealed for operating conditions. You may omit the gasket seating area for the pass partition ribs for the flange calculations. Default: include the pass partitions rib area
Type of bolt You can set the bolt type, US or Metric or Din. Default: type applicable to the code and standards specified
Body flange full bolt load Per Note 2 of ASME Section VIII, paragraph 2-5(e), if additional safety is needed against abuse or where is it is necessary to withstand the full available bolt load, AbSa, specify, Yes, for this full bolt load to be considered. Default: Standard bolt load, (Am+Ab) * Sa / 2
Design to satisfy flange rigidity rules Specify, Yes, to have the program adjust the flange design as required to flange rigidity rules. Default: No – flange will not be adjusted for rigidity rules.
Pressure vessel flange locations Indicate the locations where you want to locate body flanges on a pressure vessel tank.
Backing ring details for a S type rear head I you are check rating an existing S type rear head, specify the dimensions for the backing ring. Default: Design a new backing ring if no dimensions are given.
5-28
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubesheet Tube-to-tubesheet joint type – Appendix A
The type of joint used to attach the tubes into the tubesheet holes. The simplest form is by expanding the tube wall into the holes with an expanding tool. One or two grooves inside the tubesheet holes are sometimes used to strengthen the attachment. Depending on the process, users may desire to weld the tubes into the tubesheets with a seal or strength weld in addition to expanding the tube. Reference the applicable construction code for detail requirements for strength joints (such as UW-20 of ASME Section Div.1) A seal or strength weld can also be used without any expansion of the tubes. Default: expanded only (2 grooves)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-29
Tubesheet extension type When applicable, the program will evaluate the tubesheet extension against the adjoining flange moments.
Default: extended edge for bolting depending on the type of geometry
Tubesheet type Double tubesheets are used when it is extremely important to avoid any leakage between the shell and tube side fluids. Double tubesheets are most often used with fixed tubesheet exchangers, although they can also be used with U-tubes and outside packed floating heads. The gap type double tubesheet has a space, usually about 150 mm (6 in.), between the inner (shell side) and outer (tube side) tubesheets. TEAMS will provide a recommended gap. The integral type double tubesheet is made by machining out a honeycomb pattern inside a single thick piece of plate so that any leaking fluid can flow down through the inside of the tubesheet to a drain. This type is rare, since it requires special fabrication tools and experience. Default: normal single tubesheet(s)
5-30
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubesheet attachment type
The tubesheet attachment defaults to land. This is a recess behind the tubesheet on which the shell rests (typically 3/16" - 5 mm). Stub end is an extension parallel to the shell axis to which the shell is attached. This method normally requires machining of the stub end with inner and outer radii. See ASME VIII-1 Fig. UW-13.3(c) for example of stub end. Default: land recess
Tube-to-TubeSheet weld type per UW-20 Specify if the tube to tubesheet welds are to be considered as strength welds per ASME. Also specify the af and ag dimensions.
Fillet weld length, af Fillet weld leg size for the tube to tubesheet welds. Specify if the tube to tubesheet welds are to be considered as strength welds per ASME.
Groove weld length, ag Groove weld leg for the tube to tubesheet welds. Specify if the tube to tubesheet welds are to be considered as strength welds per ASME.
Tubesheet design method You can select TEMA (Eight Edition), Code (Appendix AA - latest addenda), or the thicker/thinner of the two methods for the tube sheet design. The ASME Code accepts both methods for the tubesheet design. If no method is selected, the program will use the thicker tubesheet of the two methods. Depending on the design conditions and materials of construction, either method may result in a thicker tubesheet. Generally the ASME method will result in thicker tubesheets, especially, if the tubesheet is welded to the shell or head cylinder. Note that there is currently no ASME method to calculate a floating head tubesheet. Most users select the thinner tubesheet of the two methods to save cost.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-31
Tubesheet/Cylinder Optimization 0 = program – program will calculate the minimum required tubesheet thickness for bending and shear. Then it will check the stresses on the tubes and cylinders (shell or channel) welded to the tubesheet(s). If the stresses on the tubes are exceeded, the program automatically puts an expansion joint in. If the welded shell (i.e. BEM) or welded channel (i.e. NEN) is overstressed at the junction with the tubesheet, the program will issue a warning. 1 = Increase tubesheet thickness – program will increase the tubesheet thickness until all stresses are satisfied, including adjacent components – tubes, shell, channel. This selection results in the thickest tubesheet(s) and thinnest cylinder thickness at the junction. 2 = Increase adjacent cylinder thickness – the program will increase the shell thickness (only a small portion adjacent to the tubesheet) and/or the channel thickness (depending of which one is controlling) until the cylinder stresses at the junction with the tubesheet(s) are satisfied. This selection results in the thinnest tubesheet(s) and thickest cylinder thickness at the junction. As the cylinder thickness is increased, the tubesheet is reinforced by the thicker cylinder welded to it and consequently the tubesheet thickness is automatically reduced. If the User receives a warning that either the shell cylinder or channel cylinder at the tubesheet junction is overstressed, re-run the program with optimization method 2 (increase adjacent cylinder thickness). This may take a while in some designs. If the resulting cylinder thickness adjacent to the tubesheet is acceptable, the optimization run is finished. If this thickness is not acceptable (too thick), fix this thickness in input (tab Miscellaneous in the tubesheet section) and then run selection 1 = increase tubesheet thickness. This methodology usually results in a tubesheet thickness less than TEMA with a somewhat thicker cylinder welded to the tubesheet. NOTE: The program automatically adjusts all the affected components during these optimizations, i.e adjacent flange geometry.
Tubesheet design temperature If provided here, the program will use these temperatures as the design temperatures for the tube sheets in lieu of the general shell/tube side design temperatures specified in the Design Specification section.
5-32
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubesheet dimensions
If check rating an existing exchanger, enter the following dimensional information, tubesheet OD, tubesheet thickness, width-partition groove, depth-partition groove, and if cladded; the clad diameter, clad thickness, front tubesheet clad material tube side, and rear tubesheet clad material tube side.
Tubesheet cladding material Tubesheet cladding is typically a layer of alloy material applied to a carbon steel base on the tube-side face of the tubesheet.
Tubesheet clad type Specify how the cladding is bonded to the tubesheet base material, explosively bonded or a loose type. Note that the type of bonding does not affect Code calculations.
Corrosion allowance – shell side & tube side You can enter specific corrosion allowance requirements for the shell side and tube side of the tubesheets. The values entered here will override the global corrosion allowance entered for the shell and tube sides in the Design Specification section. Corrosion Allowance is obtained from the TEMA standards as follows: For carbon steel TEMA C and B: 0.0625" (1.6 mm). For carbon steel TEMA R: 0.125" (3.2 mm). Enter zero for no corrosion allowance. There is no default corrosion allowance for materials other than carbon steel. The user can specify any reasonable value for corrosion allowance. Default: TEMA requirements.
Recess dimensions If check rating an existing exchanger, enter the following dimensional information: recess depth at ID gasket surface, recess diameter at ID gasket surface, recess depth at OD gasket surface, and recess diameter at OD gasket surface.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-33
Backing flange behind tubesheet A backing flange behind the tubesheet is used to avoid transferring the flange moment caused by the adjoining flange to the tubesheet. The backing ring flange can also be made of inexpensive steel material when the tubesheet is made of alloy.
Tubesheet tapped – rear ‘T’ type Select here to have bolt holes tapped in rear tubesheet in lieu of bolted through the tubesheet.
Adjacent Tubesheet Data If cylinders attached to the tubesheet are of different materials and design specifications from that of the general cylinders specifications, you can specify this data in this section.
Differential design pressure If specified, the tubesheets will be designed to a differential design pressure condition between the tube side and shell side of the exchanger. The normal default is to design the tubesheet applying the full tube side pressure for the first case and then the full shell side pressure for the second case and use the greater tubesheet thickness for those two conditions. Default: Checks both the tube side and shell side – uses greater thickness of the two conditions.
Tube expansion depth ratio You can specify the ratio of the tube expansion length in the tubesheet to the total length of the tubesheet. This will be used for the tube pull out load analysis. Default: TEMA requirements
Load transferred form flange to tubesheet The program will automatically transfer the calculated load from the body flange to the tubesheet for the flange extension calculations. For special design considerations, you can specify the load to be used in these calculations. Default: The calculated load from the body flange design per the applicable code.
5-34
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubesheet allowable stress at design temperature If you wish to specify a special allowable design stress for the tubesheet calculations, enter that value. If not specified, the program will use an allowable design stress per the applicable code. Default: Allowable design stress per the applicable design code.
Double tubesheet specifications If double tubesheets have been selected, specify any special design requirements. If not provided, the program will select optimum values for design.
Expansion Joints Expansion joint for fixed tubesheet design Specify if you want an expansion joint. The program will always check the design for expansion joint requirements and notify you if an expansion joint is required. Program = program will check and add expansion joint if required. Yes = program will add an expansion even if one is not required. No = unit will be designed without an expansion joint and program will notify you if the unit is overstressed. Default: program will add expansion joint if required per applicable code
Expansion joint type You can select a flanged and flued type, flanged only type, bellows type, or a self reinforcing bellows type. The flanged type is generally the lowest cost expansion joint but is not as flexible as the bellows type. Aspen Teams will default to the flanged and flued type for TEMA exchangers. If a suitable joint cannot be determined, specify the bellows type. The design method for the flanged type is TEMA and for the bellows type is per the specified Code. Aspen Teams will design thick-wall expansion joints per TEMA Section 5. Aspen Teams will design thin -wall expansion joints per ASME-VIII-1 App. 26. The flanged-and-flued type refers to an expansion joint with two radii. The flanged-only type only has a radius at the outer edge. The joint with the shell is a straight angle. The thin-wall expansion joint is also known as a "bellows" type. It also has an "S" shape. Typical thicknesses are less than 1/8" (3.2 mm) and made of alloy materials. Reinforced bellows requires extra material to be placed on the outside of the joint to provide additional rigidity.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-35
Default: flanged and flued type
Flanged and Flued
Bellows
Flanged only
Renforced bellows
Shell mean metal temperature Program will use this temperature to design a fixed tubesheet and expansion joint. If not specified, the program will use the design temperatures. The mean metal temperatures are very important in the correct calculation of the relative expansion of tubes and shell. It is especially important when the program defaults to the design temperatures because these may not be realistic.
Tubes mean metal temperature Program will use this temperature to design a fixed tubesheet and expansion joint. If not specified, the program will use the design temperatures. The mean metal temperatures are very important in the correct calculation of the relative expansion of tubes and shell. It is especially important when the program defaults to the design temperatures because these may not be realistic.
Tubesheets mean metal temperature Provide mean metal temperature to be used in the tubesheet design calculations. Normally the tubesheet metal temperature is very close to the tube metal temperature.
5-36
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Expansion Joint Geometry If an expansion joint is required specify the material. If you are check rating an existing joint provide the following: outside diameter, outer cylinder thickness, annular plate thickness, cylinder length, straight flange length, knuckle radius, spring rate, corrosion allowance, number of joints, location of first joint, location of second joint (if required), spring rate (corroded), spring rate (new), and cycle life as applicable. Reference TEMA 1988 section 5 for additional information.
Expansion joint corrosion allowance Specify a specific corrosion allowance, which will override the global corrosion allowance.
Number of expansion joints Specify up to two expansion joints.
Location of expansion joint one Specify the Zone location for the first expansion joint.
Location of expansion joint two Specify the Zone location for the second expansion joint.
Expansion joint spring rate Specify the bellows type expansion joint spring rate for the corroded and new conditions. Program will calculate the spring rate if not specified.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-37
Expansion joint cycle life Program will calculate the estimated cycle life or you can input a required cycle life.
Bellows type expansion joint details If check rating an existing bellows type expansion joint, specify the details for the joint.
TEMA stress multipliers User may specify stress multipliers to adjust the allowable design stresses used in the TEMA expansion joint calculations. If left blank, the program will use allowable stresses recommended by TEMA.
Tubes/Baffles Number of tubes If the number of tubes is not entered, the program will calculate the maximum number of tubes that will fit in a given exchanger geometry. This number will vary not only with the tube diameter, pitch and layout, but also with the type of exchanger (floating head, etc.). Default: program calculated
Tube length Specify the overall tube length for straight tubes. For U-tubes specify the tangent straight length.
Tube OD Specify the actual dimensional outside diameter.
Tube wall thickness The program will check if the tube wall thickness is adequate to withstand the design pressure, both internal and external. If you enter the average tube wall thickness, determine the minimum tube wall based upon the manufacturing tolerance (generally in the range of 10 to 12%) and verify it is not less that the calculated required thickness for the tubes.
5-38
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube type Plain tubes do not have any enhancing type of surface on them. Fin tubes are classified as integral low-fin types with densities of 16 to 30 fins per inch (630 to 1181 fins per meter). Typical fin heights are 0.015 to 0.040 inches (0.4 to 1 mm). The program requires only the fin density.
Tube wall specification Specify the tube wall specification. This wall specification will appear on the TEMA data sheet. If you have specified average wall thickness, see note above for tube wall thickness. Default: minimum wall.
Tube projection from tubesheet Tube projection from the tubesheet face should be based upon the type of attachment and any customer specification requirements. Default: 1.5 mm or 0.625 in.
Tubes design temperature Specify the tube design temperature, which will determine the physical properties used in the code calculations. Default: higher of shell and tube side design temperatures
Tubes corrosion allowance For most design applications, no corrosion allowance is applied to the tubes even if you have specified a general corrosion allowance for the shell and tube sides of the exchanger. Specify the total corrosion (shell side and tube side) allowance required. Default: zero corrosion allowance
Tubes allowable design stress at design temperature If not provided, program will determine the design stress based upon tube material specified at the design temperature. You may override this calculated design stress by entering it here. Default: allowable design stress at design temperature based upon material specified
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-39
Fin Tube Data Fin density If you specify fin tubes as the tube type, then you must specify the desired fin density (i.e., the number of fins per inch or per meter depending on the system of measure). Since the possible fin densities are very dependent on the tube material, you should be sure that the desired fin density is commercially available. The dimensional standards for finned tubes made by Wolverine, High Performance Tube, and Wieland are built into the program. If you choose one of these, the program will automatically supply the corresponding fin height, fin thickness, and ratio of tube outside to inside surface area. If you do not choose one of the standard fin densities, then you must also supply the other fin data which follows in the input. The standard fin densities, fins/inch, for various materials are: Carbon Steel -19 Stainless Steel-16, 28 Copper-19, 26 Copper-Nickel 90/10-16, 19, 26 Copper-Nickel 70/30-19, 26 Nickel Low Carbon Alloy 201-19 Nickel Alloy 400 (Monel)-28 Nickel Alloy 600 (Inconel)-28 Nickel Alloy 800-28 Hastelloy-30 Titanium-30 Admiralty-19, 26 Aluminum-Brass Alloy 687-19
Fin height The fin height is the height above the root diameter of the tube.
Fin thickness The fin thickness is the average fin thickness.
5-40
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Baffle type
Single Segmental
No Tubes in Window
Double Segmental
Rod
Triple Segmental
Full Support
Strip
Baffle types can be divided up into two general categories: segmental baffles and grid baffles. Segmental baffles are pieces of plate with holes for the tubes and a segment that has been cut away for a baffle window. Single, double, triple, no tubes in window, and disk & donut are examples of segmental baffles. Grid baffles are made from rods or strips of metal which are assembled to provide a grid of openings through which the tubes can pass. The program covers two types of grid baffles - rod baffles and strip baffles. Segmental baffles are the most common type of baffle, with the single segmental baffle being the type used in a majority of shell and tube heat exchangers. The baffles should have at least one row of overlap and therefore become practical for a 20 mm or 0.75 in. tube in shell diameters of 305 mm (12 in.) or greater for double segmental and 610 (24 in.) or greater for triple segmental baffles. (Note: the B-JAC triple segmental baffle is different than the TEMA triple segmental baffle.) Full supports are used in K and X type shells where baffling is not necessary to direct the shell side flow. No tubes in window is a layout using a single segmental baffle with tubes removed in the baffle windows. This type is used to avoid tube vibration and may be further enhanced with intermediate supports to shorten the unsupported tube span. The standard abbreviation for no tubes in the window is NTIW. Rod baffle design is based on the construction and correlations developed by Phillips Petroleum. Rod baffles are limited to a square tube pattern. The rods are usually about 6 mm (0.25 in.) in diameter. The rods are placed between every other tube row and welded to a circular ring. There are four repeating sets where each baffle is rotated 90 degrees from the previous baffle. Strip baffles are normally used with a triangular tube pattern. The strips are usually about 25 mm (1 in.) wide and 3 mm (0.125 in.) thick. The strips are placed between every tube row. Intersecting strips can be notched to fit together or stacked and tack welded. The strips are welded to a circular ring. Strip baffles are also sometimes referred to as nest baffles. Default: single segmental except X shells; full support for X shell
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-41
Baffle orientation
The baffle orientation is with respect to a horizontal exchanger. On vertical units the baffle cut will be typically perpendicular to the shell nozzles axes.
Baffle cut in percent of vessel diameter The baffle cut is based on the percent of shell diameter. Typically 15% to 45%, depending on flow parameters and type of baffle (single vs double vs triple segmental or no-tubes-inwindow). For double-segmental baffles, the baffle cut is the size of the inner window divided by the shell diameter X 100. For triple-segmental baffles, the baffle cut is the size of the innermost window divided by the shell diameter X 100. For nests or rod baffles, there is no baffle cut (leave blank or zero).
Baffle number Number of transverse baffles including full supports when applicable. The number of baffles applies to all transverse baffles and full supports. It should include the full support(s) under the nozzle(s) on a G, H, or J type shell. It should not include the full support at the beginning of the u-bend of a u-tube bundle.
Baffle spacing Specify the center-to-center baffle spacing. This number and the number of baffles are complementary. If not entered, the program will determine the inlet and outlet baffle spacing.
Baffle inlet spacing Specify the baffle spacing at the inlet nozzle. If not entered, the program will set based upon the center to center spacing and outlet spacing if specified. If the outlet spacing is not specified, the program will set the inlet and outlet spacing the same based upon available tube length.
5-42
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Baffle outlet spacing Specify the baffle spacing at the outlet nozzle. If not entered, the program will set based upon the center to center spacing and the inlet spacing if specified. If the inlet spacing is not specified, the program will set the inlet and outlet the spacing the same based upon available remaining tube length.
Baffle thickness Provide the actual thickness of the baffles. Default: TEMA standards
Baffle diameter Provide the actual baffle outside diameter. Default: TEMA standards
Double/Triple baffle cuts Refer to the Appendix section of this guide for information on double and triple segmental baffle cuts.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-43
Tubesheet Layout Tube pattern
The tube pattern is the layout of the tubes in relation to the shell side crossflow direction, which is normal to the baffle cut edge. Default: 30 degree
Tube pitch This is the center-to-center distance between adjacent tubes within the tube pattern. Default: minimum recommended by TEMA.
Tube passes Specify the number of tube passes.
Tube pass layout type
Quadrant
Mixed
Ribbon
There are several possible ways to layout tubes for four or more passes.
5-44
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Quadrant: Quadrant layout has the advantage of usually (but certainly not always) giving the highest tube count. It is the required layout for all U-tube designs of four or more passes. The tube side nozzles must be offset from the centerline when using quadrant layout. The program will automatically avoid quadrant layout for shells with longitudinal baffles and 6, 10, or 14 passes, in order to avoid having the longitudinal baffle bisect a pass.
Mixed: Mixed layout has the advantage of keeping the tube side nozzles on the centerline. It often gives a tube count close to quadrant and sometimes exceeds it. The program will automatically avoid mixed layout for shells with longitudinal baffles and 4, 8, 12, or 16 passes.
Ribbon: Ribbon layout nearly always gives a layout with fewer tubes than quadrant or mixed layout. It is the layout the program always uses for an odd number of tube passes. The primary advantage of ribbon layout is the more gradual change in operating temperature of adjacent tubes from top to bottom of the tubesheet. This can be especially important when there is a large change in temperature on the tube side that might cause significant thermal stresses in mixed and especially quadrant layouts. Default: program will optimize
Impingement protection
O n B u n dle
In D om e
The purpose of impingement protection is to protect the tubes directly under the inlet nozzle by deflecting the bullet shaped flow of high velocity fluids or the force of entrained droplets. TEMA recommends that inlet impingement protection be installed under the following conditions: • • •
when the rho*V² through the inlet nozzle exceeds 2232 kg/(m*s²) or 1500 lb/(ft*s²) for non-corrosive, non-abrasive, single phase fluids when the rho*V² through the inlet nozzle exceeds 744 kg/(m*s²) or 500 lb/(ft*s²) for corrosive or abrasive liquids
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-45
• • •
when there is a nominally saturated vapor when there is a corrosive gas when there is two phase flow at the inlet
If you choose a plate on the bundle the program will automatically remove tubes under the inlet nozzle so that the shell entrance area equals the cross-sectional area of the nozzle. This is approximately equal to removing any tubes within a distance of 1/4 the nozzle diameter under the center of the nozzle. The program uses a circular impingement plate equal in diameter to the inside diameter of the nozzle, and approximately 3mm or 1/8in. thick. An alternative is to put a plate in a nozzle dome, which means suspending the impingement plate in an enlarged nozzle neck, which may be a dome or a cone.
Outer tube limit diameter (OTL) The outer tube limit (OTL) is the diameter of the circle beyond which no portion of a tube will be placed. You can input an OTL and the program will determine the maximum number of tubes, which will fit. If no OTL is specified, the program will calculate the OTL based upon the inputted shell diameter and TEMA standard bundle clearances. Default: program will calculate
Tube Layout Option You can select to have the Teams program generate a new tube layout every time the program runs or you can select to use an existing layout. For the second option, you must first run Teams to establish a layout and then select the option to use the existing layout for all subsequent runs. Default: create a new layout
Max deviation per pass in percent The program defaults to 5% maximum deviation per pass when calculating how many tubes can fit in a given pass.
Degree of symmetry If specified, the program will attempt to put the same number of tubes per pass. If not specified, the program will optimize as many tubes as possible in a given configuration.
Min U-bend Diameter The program default is 3 times the tube OD.
5-46
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Pass Partitions You can specify the following detailed information about the pass partitions: pass partition lane clearance, allowable pressure drop across partition plate, front (top) pass partition plate thickness, front Head Pass Partition rib length, front head pass partition rib width, pass partition dimension ‘a’, and pass partition dimension ‘b’ (Reference TEMA standards).
Open Distance You can specify the amount of open space in the tube pattern by the percent of the shell diameter open down from top, percent open up from bottom, and percent open in from sides or you can specify the dimensional distance down from top, distance up from bottom or distance in from sides.
Impingement plate diameter The program will use this input to determine the position and the dimension of the impingement plate This input is not required if you have already specified the shell inlet nozzle OD. The default is the shell inlet nozzle O.D.
Impingement plate length and width You can specify a rectangular impingement plate size. The default is the shell inlet nozzle O.D. for length and width (square plate).
Impingement plate thickness This input is required if you specify there is an impingement field. You can specify any thickness for the impingement plate. The default is 3 mm or 0.125 inch.
Impingement distance from shell ID You can specify the distance from the shell inside diameter to the impingement plate. The default is the top row of tubes.
Impingement clearance to tube edge You can specify the distance from the impingement plate to the first row of tubes.
Impingement plate perforation area % If you are using a perforated type impingement plate, you can specify the percent of area that the plate is perforated.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-47
Tie Rods You can specify the following tie rod information: tie rod number, tie rod diameter, length of tie rod, and tie rod material.
Spacers You can specify the following for the tie rod spacers: number of spacers, diameter, spacer thickness, and spacer material.
Tube Layout Drawing Once you have run the Teams program and have mechanical design results, you can interactively make modifications to the tube layout. Tubes: Tubes can be removed from the layout by clicking on the tube to be removed (tube will be highlighted in red) and then selecting the red X in the menu. If you want to designate a tube as a plugged tube or as a dummy tube, click on the tube (tube will be highlighted in red) and then select the plugged tube icon or dummy tube icon from the menu. Tie Rods: To remove a tie rod, click on the tie rod (tie rod will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a tie rod, select the add a tie rod icon in the menu and then specify the location for the tie rod. Sealing Strips: To remove a sealing strip, click on the sealing strip (sealing strip will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a sealing strip, select the add a sealing strip icon in the menu and then specify the location for the sealing strip. Once you have completed your changes to the tube layout, you may want to elect to fix the layout for subsequent Teams runs by selecting the "Use existing layout" option located on the Tubsheet Layout tab.
Nozzles General Shell side/Tube side nozzles global settings Flange design standard – ANSI, ISO or DIN standards can be referenced. Also an optimized, program calculated, may be selected. Elevation – Provide nozzle elevation from vessel centerline to face of nozzle. Couplings – Select number of couplings to be provide in each nozzle. Program default is TEMA standards. Flange rating – Select flange rating. Program default is to select a flange rating in accordance with the applicable specified code.
5-48
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Flange type – Select nozzle flange type from list. Default is slip on type. Flange type for code calculated flange – Select a flange type for the optimized nozzle flange. Nozzle flange facing – Select raised or flat face type. Default is flat face. Nozzle flange facing for code calculated flange – select facing type for a calculated nozzle flange. Default is a flat facing.
Nozzles/Couplings Name – Provide identification for each nozzle for the drawings and text output. Program default starts with the letter A through J. Description- You can provide a description for each nozzle that will appear in the text output. Function – Specify function of nozzle, such as inlet, outlet, vent, drain . . . . Note that by identifying the inlet nozzles the program locates impingement plates if one has been specified. Type – For couplings only, provide coupling design rating. Diameter – Provide nominal diameter of nozzle. If actual diameters are specified, the program will select the closest standard nozzle diameter per the applicable code. Program will determine actual diameter from the application pipe standards. Location – Provide a zone location for the nozzle or coupling. This is an approximate location from which the program will calculate the actual dimensional location. Specify a general zone location for the nozzle, zones 1 and 2 for front head nozzles, zones 3 through 7 for shell nozzles, and zones 8 and 9 for rear head nozzles. Nozzles should be located in accordance with the TEMA type of shell that you have selected. Note that the zone locations specified will override standard TEMA locations. Angle – Specify the angle location. Nozzle located at the 45 degree points, i.e. 0, 45, 90, 135 …., will be oriented radially to the cylinder. All other angles will result in the nozzle be located hill side on the cylinder.
Domes/Distributor Belts For the Teams design mode, the program will calculate (or use defaults) for the following dome/distributor information if the input field indicates "program" or a default is shown. If you are running in the check rating mode, specify as applicable the information required. Dome type - Type of dome: ellipsoidal, torispherical, conical, or distributor belt. Default: ellipsoidal Dome diameter - Specify the outside diameter of the dome cylinder. Dome location - Specify the zone location for the dome at the same location as the location for the attaching nozzle.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-49
Dome angle - Specify the angle for the dome as the same for the attaching nozzle. Dome thickness - The thickness for the dome. Default: program calculated Dome cylinder thickness - Specify the thickness for the cylinder attached to the dome. Default: program calculated Dome attachment type – Specify the weld attachment type to vessel. Default: program selected Reinforcing pad – If pad is to be provided, specify the OD and thickness. Default: added by program if required Weld leg – Weld size for the dome to vessel attachment weld. Default: program calculated Distributor belt type – Select type from ASME appendix 9. Knuckle radius – Knuckle radius for flanged and flued type distributor belt. Default: program selected
Nozzle Details For the Teams design mode, the program will calculate (or use defaults) for the following nozzle detail information. If you are running in the check rating mode, specify as applicable the following information. Nozzle cylinders and reinforcing pad details - You can specify the following rating information about the nozzles: nozzle cylinder thickness, nozzle reinforcing pad OD, nozzle reinforcing pad thickness, and nozzle reinforcing pad parallel limit. Nozzle type attachment - Specify the type of nozzle attachment to the vessel. Nozzle weld leg height, external projection - Specify the weld leg height at the nozzle attachment to the cylinder at the outside surface. Nozzle weld leg height, internal projection- Specify the weld leg height of the nozzle attachment to the vessel cylinder at the nozzle projection into the vessel. Nozzle weld leg height re-pad - Specify the weld leg height at the reinforcement pad. Nozzle projection - Specify the projection of the nozzle into the vessel from the inside surface. The program default is having the nozzles flush with the inside vessel surface. Nozzle elevation - Specify the distance the nozzle extends beyond the vessel OD. The elevation above the vessel wall defaults to a minimum of 6" (152 mm). The user can enter values to clear the thickness of insulation, if present. Nozzle distance from nozzle centerline gasket - Specify the distance from nozzle center line to from tubesheet gasket face.
5-50
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Nozzle distance from nozzle centerline head - Specify the distance from nozzle center line to centerline of front head nozzles. Nozzle flange standard - The nozzle flanges can be designed or selected from standards.
Nozzle flange type - The nozzle flange types in ASME follow the ANSI B16.5 standard including long weld neck types (thicker necks). If you do not want separate reinforcing plates, self-reinforced nozzle styles 'H' and 'S' are also available. Style 'S' provides a thicker neck at the junction to the vessel than style 'H' which also provides a thicker neck than a long weld neck. Nozzle flange rating – You may input a flange rating or allow the program will determine the appropriate rating based on materials of construction and the design pressure and temperature of the flanges per applicable standards (ANSI, DIN, or AFNOR). Default: program determines per applicable standards Nozzle face – Select nozzle facing type. Default: flat face Nozzle clearances - Specify minimum clearances for nozzles to flanges and tubesheets. Default: one nozzle diameter
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-51
Horizontal Supports Support type
Saddles
Stacked units on saddles
The program analyzes the shell stresses caused by supports in both the horizontal (saddles). For saddles the program uses the method developed by L.P.Zick. When this method indicates an over-stressed condition, the program will warn the user. Typical locations and angle for saddles are 4 and 6 and 180 degrees. Other angles are only used for stacked exchangers (zero degrees). Calculation methods for supports for stacked exchangers are not yet available. Saddle support A location - Specify general zone (zones 3 or 4) location for the front saddle support. Saddle support B location - Specify general zone (zones 6 or 7) location for the rear saddle support. Saddle support location angle - Specify angle location for the saddle supports (180 degrees for bottom supports or 0 degrees for top support with stacked units). Distance from face of front tubesheet to bolt hole in support A - You can specify the actual dimensional location of the front support from the front tubesheet. Distance from face of front tubesheet to bolt hole in support B - You can specify the actual dimensional location of the rear support from the front tubesheet Load on Saddles - You can specify dead weight loads for the Saddle ‘A’ and Saddle ‘B’ supports. Program will use these values in lieu of the calculated loads based upon the full weight of the vessel.
5-52
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Saddle Details You can input your own design for the saddle supports by inputting the following information:
t
d w dh ce lh cc Saddle to shell angle of contact:
Normally set at 120 degrees
Support elevation: Projection of the saddle support from the vessel centerline Wear plate thickness: Program defaults to no wear plate. Plate thickness varies from 0.25 inches up to the thickness of the shell cylinder Base plate thickness: Normal thickness ranges from 0.5 inches to 2 inches thick. Base plate width: Any width is accepted up to the diameter of the shell. Base plate depth: Normal depth is from 4 inches up to 12 inches. Gusset thickness: Gusset thickness ranges from 0.375 inch to 1 inch. Gusset number per support: Ranges from one to four gussets Gusset direction: Supports opened towards the center of the vessel or outward towards the ends of the vessel. Bolt holes diameter: Size ranges from 0.625 inch to 3 inch allowing for 1/8 inch clearance to bolt diameter. Bolt distance edge to x axis: Allow a minimum of 2 times the bolt hole size. Bolt center to center distance: Any dimension less than the diameter of the vessel. Bolt slot length: Generally the slot is 2 times the bolt hole diameter Bolt quantity: Normal ranges from 2 to 8 bolts
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-53
Stacked Units You can specify the number of stacked exchangers, up to four units. A sketch showing the stacking arrangement for the exchangers will be provided. User will need to evaluate the vessel support design for base and intermediate supports. Note that it is possible to input a total weight for the stacked exchangers and the program will design the base support using this total weight. The program will use the base support design also for the intermediate supports.
Vertical Supports Currently the program provides a design for vertical lug type supports. The program analyzes the shell stresses caused by vertical (lugs) positions. For vertical lug supports the program will calculate the required lug weld height to avoid over-stressing the shell. Calculations methods for (3) vertical ring supports are not yet available.
Lug Type
Ring Type
Vertical Support type - Specify type of vertical vessel support type. From two to four lug type supports can be specified. The vertical ring type is a single continuous ring around the shell. Calculations for the ring type are not yet available. Vertical Support location - Specify general zone location (zones 3 through 7) for the support. Vertical Support angle - Specify angle location for the lug type supports (180 degrees apart for two lugs and ever 45 degrees for 4 lugs).
5-54
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Vertical Support Details
You can input your own design for the saddle supports by inputting the following information: Wear plate thickness: Program defaults to no wear plate. Plate thickness varies from 0.25 inches up to the thickness of the shell cylinder Base plate thickness: Normal thickness ranges from 0.5 inches to 2 inches thick. Base plate width: Any width is accepted up to the diameter of the shell. Base plate depth: Normal depth is from 4 inches up to 12 inches. Gusset thickness: Gusset thickness ranges from 0.375 inch to 1 inch. Gusset number per support: Ranges from one to four gussets Bolt holes diameter: Size ranges from 0.625 inch to 3 inch allowing for 1/8 inch clearance to bolt diameter. Bolt distance edge to x axis: Allow a minimum of 2 times the bolt hole size. Bolt center to center distance: Any dimension less than the diameter of the vessel. Bolt quantity: Normal ranges from 2 to 8 bolts
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-55
Lift Lugs Lifting Lugs type - Lug type is plate type. Number to lift the whole unit - Specify number of unit lifting lugs required. Location and Angle of each Lug - Specify the zone location and angle for each lug. Lifting Lugs Material - Specify material for lug. Lifting Lugs Re-pad material - Specify the reinforcement pad material.
Lug Geometry ‘t’ thickness: The thickness of the lug ‘I’ Weld length: The length of the attachment weld to the vessel ‘h’ Weld size: Weld height of the attachment weld ‘H’ Distance: Height from vessel wall to centerline of hole ‘R’ Radius: Radius of lug at top ‘r’ Radius of hole: Radius of lug hole ‘p’ Re-pad thickness: Thickness of reinforcement pad ‘L’ Re-pad length: Length of reinforcement pad ‘W’ Re-pad length: Width of reinforcement pad
R h
r H
p
l L t
5-56
W
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Materials The Design Data Section is subdivided into two sections: • •
Main Materials Nozzle Materials
Main Materials Material Specifications Specify materials for required components. You can use the generic material types such as "carbon steel" which the program will assign actual default material specifications depending on the product form. For carbon steel plate, a material specification of SA-516-70 will be used for an ASME design. Appropriate specifications will be selected for other design construction codes. The default materials can be changed using the utility DefMats. Reference the Appendix for a complete list of generic materials. Default: carbon steel. To search for a specific material specification, select the Search Databank button. Type the first few characters to search for a material in the databank.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-57
Normalized Materials You can specify all carbon steel materials to be normalized per Fig. UCS-66.
Nozzle Materials Nozzle Materials for global settings Specify nozzle materials for required components. You can use the generic material types such as "carbon steel" which the program will assign an actual default material specifications depending on the product form. For carbon steel pipe material, a material specification of SA106-B will be used for an ASME design. Appropriate specifications will be selected for other design construction codes. The default materials can be changed using the utility DefMats. Reference the Appendix for a complete list of generic materials. Default: carbon steel
Shell Side & Tube Side Specify materials for the following shell side and tube side nozzle components: • • • •
Nozzle cylinder material Nozzle flange material Nozzle flange bolt material Nozzle flange gasket material
Nozzle Material Individual Nozzles You can specify materials for specific nozzles. If not specified, TEAMS will set the materials to the default carbon steel. These will override global settings. You can use the generic material types such as "carbon steel" which the program will assign actual default material specifications depending on the product form. For carbon steel pipe, a material specification of SA-106-B will be used for an ASME design. Appropriate specifications will be selected for other design construction codes. The default materials can be changed using the utility DefMats. Reference the Appendix for a complete list of generic materials. Specify information for the following nozzle components for the specific applicable nozzle. Nominal pipe size for the Diameter, and generic or actual material specification for the Cylinder Material, Nozzle Reinforcing Pad Material, Flange, Gasket, and Bolting.
5-58
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Program Options The Program Options Section is subdivided into three sections: • • •
Loads External- Wind and Seismic Change Codes Drawings.
Wind/Seismic/External Loads External Loads You can specify the external nozzle attachments loads and they will be analyzed per the Welding Research Council Bulletin, WRC-107. If the nozzle loads are not known but you need the allowable loads based upon your final design, select the Heat Exchange Institute, HEI, method for external nozzle loads and the allowable loads will be calculated.
Wind Loads Wind loads analyzed per ANSI/ASCE 7-95 Default: 160 km/hr (100 mph) wind load
Seismic Loads Seismic load evaluated per ANSI/ASCE 7-95. Default: zone 1
Change Codes The last screen of the long form input allows you to specify change codes with the associated values. The format for change code entries is: CODE=value Change codes are processed after all of the other input and override any previously set value. For instance, if you specify the tube outside diameter as 20 mm in the regular input screens, then enter the change code TODX=25, the 25 will override the 20. If you enter the same change code more than once, the last value will prevail. Another good use of the change code screen is to "chain" to another file containing only change codes. This is especially convenient if you have a line of standard designs, which you
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-59
want to use after you have found a similar solution in design mode. This can be done by using the FILE= change code, followed by the name of the file containing the other change codes. The other file must also have a .BJI filetype. You can create this change code file with a standard edit program. For example, the entry FILE=S-610-2 would point to a file named S610-2.BJI, which might contain the following data: SODX=610,TLNG=5000,TNUM=458,TPAS=2,BSPA=690,TODX=20,TPAT=1
The following pages list the change codes that are available in the Aspen TEAMS program.
Change Codes – General bttk= baffle thickness cfac= "C" factor in calculation of flat covers coan= conical head angle (must be less than or equal to 30 degrees) code= code requirement: 1=ASME 2=CODAP 3=AD/DIN elra= radius of turn for 90 degree elbow fcgw= front head cylinder girth butt welds present 0=no 1=yes fhct= front head flat removable cover thickness file= specify the name of a file which contains change codes jess= joint efficiency for shell side cylinders for nozzle repad calcs. jets= joint efficiency for tube side cylinders for nozzle repad calcs. lang= language for input and output 1=English 2=French 3=Spanish 4=German 5=Italian meas= system of measure: 1=U.S. 2=SI 3=metric nodr= no drawings in TEAMS summary output 0,1=yes 2=no otlm= outer tube limit rblf/rblr= total length of pass partition ribs in front/rear head srmt/stf1= stiffening ring material / number of stiffening rings rbwf= effective width of pass partition ribs in front head rbwr= effective width of pass partition ribs in rear head rcgw= rear head cylinder girth butt welds present: 0=no 1=yes rhct= rear head flat removable cover thickness scgw= shell cover cylinder girth butt welds present 0=no 1=yes
5-60
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
scat= CODAP construction category shell side: 1=A 2=B 3=C 4=D shgw= shell girth butt welds present: 0=no 1=yes shje= shell joint efficiency (ASME) sjef= CODAP joint efficiency on shell side (0.85 or 1) sstp= shell side test pressure ssto= shell side tolerance for plate suts= tubesheet considered supported: 0=program 1=yes 2=no tcat= CODAP construction category tube side: 1=A 2=B 3=C 4=D tjef= CODAP joint efficiency on tube side (0.85 or 1) tkmn= determines if input thickness of pipe is: 0=nominal 1=minimum tsto= tube side tolerance for plate tstp= tube side test pressure tupr= distance tubes project from tubesheet weir= option to eliminate weir in kettle (-1=no weir) heat= carbon steel material normalized/tempered 0=no 1=yes
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-61
Change Codes - Cylinders & Covers Front Head
Rear Head
cover
cyl
cover
cyl
thickness
fcot=
fcyt=
rcot=
rcyt=
outside diameter
fcod=
fcyd=
rcyd=
rcod=
length (+)
fcyl=
rcyl=
ext.press.length
eln2=
eln3=
ellip head ratio
fcer=
rcer=
toris head dish r.*
fcdr=
rcdr=
toris head k. rad.*
fckr=
rckr=
over "hub" length
fhlg=
rhlg=
Shell
Shell
Cover
cyl
cyl
cover
thickness
shth=
scyt=
scot=
outside diameter
scyd=
sccd=
scod=
length (+)
scyl=
sccl=
ext.press.length (&)
eln2=
eln4=
ellip head ratio
scer=
toris head dish r.*
scdr=
toris head k. rad.*
sckr=
cover "hub" length
sclg=
(+)=flange/ts face-to-face or weld *=in percent of head diameter. (&)=eln1 and stf1 should be issued together stf1=number of stiff.rings
Eccentric Kettle
5-62
Vapor
Distr Belt A
Distr Belt B
Redcr
Cyl
Belt
Cyl
Ann. Ring
Cyl
Ann. Ring
thickness
erth=
keth=
vbth=
—
—
—
—
outside dia
—
keod=
vbod=
—
—
—
—
material
ermt=
kemt=
—
—
—
—
—
id/length
—
keid/kcyl
—
—
—
—
—
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Change Codes - Nozzles Nozzle
Nozzle Dome
Cyl
Reinf Pad
Redcr
Cyl
thickness
nzta-j
zrta-j
nnta-j
outside dia
—
zrda-j
—
—
nrda-j
parallel limit
—
nzpa-j
—
—
—
ncta-j
Reinf Pad nrta-j
nzxa thru nzxj= distance nozzle extends beyond inner surface of vessel fnfa thru fnfj= BJAC facing type for nozzle flange (ASME 2-5-2) (value=1 to 9) wnfa thru wnfj= width of nubbin for nozzle flange (ASME table 2-5-2) nwld= increase nozzle to vessel weld leg to eliminate pad: 0=yes 1=no nplm= percent parallel limit for shell nozzle adjacent to tubesheet (0=100%) nfct= clearance between tube nozzle flange and back side of flange (0=0.5") nrtp= provide 100% metal replacement in pad: 0=no 1=uncorroded 2=corroded rpmt= minimum reinforcing pad thickness nrcl= clearance between reinf. pad weld and back of flange/tubesheet (0=2") nccl= clearance between nozzle cyl. weld and back of flange/tubesheet (0=2") nfcs= clearance between shell nozzle flange & front side of tubesheet (0=0.5")
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-63
Change Codes – Body Flanges ---Front Head--
----Rear Head----
Cover
at TbSh
at TbSh
thickness
ffct=
fftt=
rftt=
rfct=
min bolt dia
fcmb=
rtmb=
rcmb=
Cover
ftmb= facing type
fbfa=
fbfb=
fbff=
fbfg=
nubbin width
wbfa=
wbfb=
wbff=
wbfg=
confined joint(**)
fccj=
ftcj=
rtcj=
rccj=
gasket width
gawa=
gawf=
gawg=
fwlf=
fwlg=
gawb= weld height
fwla=
fwlb=
Shell
Shell
Shell
Front
Rear
Cover
thickness
fsft=
rsft=
scft=
min bolt dia
—
—
scmb=
facing type
fbfc=
fbfd
fbfe=
nubbin width
wbfc=
wbfd=
wbfe=
confined joint(**)
fscj=
—-
sccj=
gasket width
gawc=
gawd=
gawe=
weld height
fwlc=
fwld=
fwle=
**=(0=no 1=yes) fbft= front backing ring flange thickness rbft= rear backing ring flange thickness bolt= bolt type: 1=u.s. 2=metric shnk= DIN bolt type: 1=waisted-shank 2=rigid sfdt= design temperature for shell side body flanges and bolting tfdt= design temperature for tube side body flanges and bolting
5-64
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Change Codes - Floating Head Flange fhft= floating head - flange thickness (recess not included) fhid= floating head - flange inside diameter fhdi= floating head - dish inside crown radius fhdt= floating head - dish (or head) thickness fhhr= floating head - dish lever arm(+ toward tube side/- toward shell side) fhmb= floating head - minimum bolt outside diameter fhbf= floating head - backing ring flange thickness (recess not included) cifh= floating head - corrosion on the shell side of floating cover fhtd= floating head - design temperature rtcj= confined joint for rear head gasket at tubesheet: 0=no 1=yes fhnu= bjac facing type for inside flt. head flange (ASME 2-5-2) (value=1 to 9) fhwi= width of nubbin for inside float. head flange (ASME table 2-5-2) FHFL or BFLF = floating head - flange rating (FHFL or BFLF=1 for rating) BRRE= IFH "S" type backing ring recess: 0=program 1=none 2=std. 3=angled
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-65
Change Codes - Tubesheets & Expansion Joint conv= number of convolutions cycl= minimum expansion joint cycle life (TEMA default=2000 cycles) diff= differential design pressure (0=no, 1=yes) difp= actual diff. pressure ejbe= bellows 1=unreinforced 2=reinforced ejca= expansion joint corrosion all. ejfa= expansion joint straight flange - inner cylinder (TEMA fig. rcb-8.21) ** ejfb= expansion joint straight flange - outer cylinder (TEMA fig. rcb-8.21) ** ejod= expansion joint outside diameter ejra= expansion joint knuckle radius at inside junction (TEMA fig. rcb-8.21) ejrb= expansion joint knuckle radius at outside junction (TEMA fig. rcb-8.21) ejrm= bellows reinforcement material ejth= expansion joint thickness (TEMA "te" fig. rcb-8.21) ejtp= expansion joint type: 91=f*f 92=flanged only 93=bellows ejwi= expansion joint width (TEMA 2*"lo" fig. rcb-8.21) ** ftsa= fixed tubesheet attachment: 1=backing strip 2=land 3=stub ftsc= front tubesheet clad thickness ** = if -1 is entered, value will be zero in calculations. ftst= front tubesheet thickness octh= expansion joint outer cylinder thickness (TEMA "to" fig. RCB-8.21) rtsc= rear tubesheet clad thickness rtst= rear tubesheet thickness tsco= fixed tubesheet standard selection: 0=program 1=ASME 2=TEMA xjsr= expansion joint spring rate - new xsrc= expansion joint spring rate - corroded ** = if -1 is entered, value will be zero in calculations.
5-66
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Change Codes - Supports angc= saddle-to-shell angle of contact (100 to 170 deg) increasing angc will reduce all stresses except bending at midspan satw= saddle transverse width - reciprocal of angc above stda= distance from face of front tubesheet to first saddle (a) stdb= distance from face of front tubesheet to second saddle (b) placing saddle closer to respective tubesheet will decrease bending stress at saddle but increase both bending at midspan and shell tangential shear (unstiffened by head or flange/tubesheet) salw= saddle longitudinal width wptk= wear plate thickness (saddles and lugs) -1 = no plate increasing both salw or wptk will reduce both circumferential stress at horn of saddle and ring compression over saddle. if the saddle is located further than a/r=0.5 the vessel thk. Will not include the wear plate in the calculation of the circum.stress. lugt= vertical lug thickness (base plate and gussets) lugh= vertical lug height
Change Codes - Dimensions nzel= elevation of nozzles from the centerline of the vessel nzla thru nzlj= nozzle elevation from the centerline of the vessel stla thru stld= support elevation from centerline of vessel nzda thru nzdj= distance of nozzle center from front face of front tubesheet xjda thru xjdc= distance of expansion joint from front face of front tubesheet stda thru stdd= distance of support from front face of front tubesheet cpda thru cpdj= distance of coupling from front face of front tubesheet rfpt = drawing reference point. 0,1=face of front TS 2=centerline front head nozzle.
Drawings User can select which drawing to be generated when the program runs. Drawing numbers can also be specified.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-67
Results The Results Section is divided into six sections: • • • • • •
Input Summary Design Summary Vessel Dimensions Price Drawings Code Calculations
Input Summary The Input Summary Section is subdivided into three sections: • • •
Basic Data/ Fittings/Flanges Cylinders/Covers/TubeSheets Materials/Lift Lugs/Partitions
Basic Data/Fittings/Flanges This part of the input file summary includes information on: • • • • • • • • • •
5-68
Description/Codes and Standards Design Specifications Geometry Tubesheet/Tubes Baffles/Tube Layout Supports -Horizontal/Vertical Nozzles Nozzle Cyl/Re-pads Flanges Flange Misc.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Cylinders/Covers/Tubesheets Details This part of the input file summary provides the detailed input information on: • • • • • • • • • • •
Cylinders Front Head Details Rear Head Details Front Head Cover Front Head Cover Details Rear Head Cover Rear Head Cover Details Shell Cylinder Tubesheets Details Expansion Joint Details Shell Cover
Materials/Lift Lugs/Partitions This part of the input file summary includes information on: • • • • • • • •
Main Materials Nozzle Global Materials Nozzle Specific Materials Domes/Coupling Materials Lift Lug Details Pass Partitions Tie Rods and Spacers Nozzle Clearances
Design Summary The Design Summary Section is subdivided into five sections: • • • • •
Warnings & Messages Design Specifications/Materials MDMT/MAWP/Test Pressure Overall Dimensions/Fitting Locations Wind and Seismic Loads
Warnings & Messages Teams provides an extensive system of warnings and messages to help the designer of heat exchanger design. Messages are divided into five types. There are several hundred messages built into the Aspen Hetran program. Those messages requiring further explanation are described here.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-69
Warning Messages These are conditions which may be problems, however the program will continue.
Error Messages Conditions which do not allow the program to continue.
Limit Messages Conditions which go beyond the scope of the program.
Notes Special conditions which you should be aware of.
Suggestions Recommendations on how to improve the design.
Design Specifications/Materials Design Specifications This is intended to be a concise summary of the design requirements, including calculated design information such as weights and nozzle flange ratings. The codes in effect are clearly shown indicating applicable date of issue.
5-70
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Materials of Construction Provides a summary of materials used in the design for all major components. For example: Component
Material Name
Shell Cylinder
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Front Head Cylinder
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Rear Head Cylinder
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Front Head Cover
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Rear Head Cover
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Front Tubesheet
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Rear Tubesheet
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Front Head Flange At TS
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Rear Head Flange At TS
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Front Head Flange At Cov
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Front Head Gasket At TS
Flt Metal Jkt Asbestos Soft Steel
Rear Head Gasket At TS
Flt Metal Jkt Asbestos Soft Steel
Front Head Gasket At Cov
Flt Metal Jkt Asbestos Soft Steel
Tubes
SA-214 Wld C Steel Tube
Baffles
SA-285 Gr C Steel Plt
Tie Rods
SA-36 Bar
Spacers
SA-214 Wld C Steel Tube
Shell Support A
SA-285 Gr C Steel Plt
Shell Support B
SA-285 Gr C Steel Plt
Nozzle A
SA-106 Gr B Sml Steel Pipe
Nozzle B
SA-106 Gr B Sml Steel Pipe
Nozzle C
SA-106 Gr B Sml Steel Pipe
Nozzle D
SA-106 Gr B Sml Steel Pipe
Nozzle Flange A
SA-105 Carbon Steel Forg
Nozzle Flange B
SA-105 Carbon Steel Forg
Nozzle Flange C
SA-105 Carbon Steel Forg
Nozzle Flange D
SA-105 Carbon Steel Forg
Nozzle Reinforcement A
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Nozzle Reinforcement B
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Nozzle Reinforcement C
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Nozzle Reinforcement D
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Front Hd Bolting At TS
SA-193 B7 Steel Blt
Rear Hd Bolting At TS
SA-193 B7 Steel Blt
Front Hd Bolting At Cov
SA-193 B7 Steel Blt
Expansion Joint
SA-516 Gr 70 Steel Plt
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-71
Nozzle Flange Bolting A
SA-193 B7 Steel Blt
Nozzle Flange Bolting B
SA-193 B7 Steel Blt
Nozzle Flange Bolting C
SA-193 B7 Steel Blt
Nozzle Flange Bolting D
SA-193 B7 Steel Blt
Nozzle Flg Gasket A
Flt Metal Jkt Asbestos Soft Steel
Nozzle Flg Gasket B
Flt Metal Jkt Asbestos Soft Steel
Nozzle Flg Gasket C
Flt Metal Jkt Asbestos Soft Steel
Nozzle Flg Gasket D
Flt Metal Jkt Asbestos Soft Steel
Shell Side Nozzle Cplgs
SA-105 C Steel Coupl
Tube Side Nozzle Cplgs
SA-105 C Steel Coupl
Overall Dimensions/Fitting Locations Overall Dimensions Overall dimensions are calculated as well as intermediate component lengths. These dimensions will also be shown on some of the TEAMS drawings, such as the setting plan and sectional drawing. The dimensions shown are: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
5-72
Overall front head assembly Front Tubesheet Tubesheet thickness Tube side recess Shell side recess Welding stub end(s) Cladding Thickness Shell Rear Tubesheet Tubesheet thickness Tube side recess Shell side recess Welding stub end(s) Cladding Thickness Overall rear head assembly Overall shell cover assembly Unit overall length
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Fitting Locations All fittings are located from two reference points: distance from the front tubesheet and distance from the front head nozzle. These dimensions will also appear on Aspen TEAMS setting plan drawings. If any nozzles are offset from the vessel centerline, the amount of the offset will also be indicated.
Center of Gravity A general center of gravity is calculated based on each component weight. This reference point can be used when preparing for vessel installation and for proper anchoring during movement.
MDMT/MAWP/Test Pressure MDMT Minimum Design Metal Temperatures are set based upon the lowest operating temperature the pressure vessel will encounter. Material specifications, impacting testing, and PWHT should be selected that will meet the MDMT requirements per the applicable design construction code.
Controlling Component The program will examine each component separately and calculate its minimum design metal temperature without having to impact test the material. An "*" indicates the controlling component (the one with the highest temperature). By changing material specifications or testing the component the user can lower the minimum design metal temperature to a desired value. The ASME Code has many rules on this subject (such as those presented in UG-20(f)) so it is recommended to use additional judgement and experience when deciding on the minimum design metal temperature for a vessel.
MAWP The Maximum Allowable Working Pressure is the maximum pressure that the vessel may encounter and not have any component's pressure stress exceed the allowable design stress value per applicable design code.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-73
Controlling Component The program will calculate the maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP) for each component of the vessel. The one with the lowest pressure will be selected as the controlling component and marked with a "*" for the shell side and a "+" for the tube side. Two sets of pressures are selected: • •
One for design conditions (corroded at design temperature) One for "new and cold" conditions (uncorroded at ambient temperature)
If you want to redesign the equipment using the MAWP, you should change the input data to rating mode. In some cases when the tubesheet controls the MAWP, it will not be possible to design the equipment using the MAWP, because the tubesheet calculation may yield a new MAWP. This occurs because the program uses the ASME design method, which is dependent not only on the tubesheet geometry but also on the shell and channel geometries as well as different operating cases, such as thermal stresses only, pressure and thermal stresses concurrently, etc. As the design pressure changes, other parameters may control the overall MAWP resulting in a different number.
Test Pressure Test pressures for the unit will be calculated by the program per the applicable design construction code.
Vessel Dimensions The Vessel Dimensions Section is subdivided into six sections: • • • • • •
5-74
Cylinders & Covers Nozzles/Nozzle Flanges Flanges Tubesheets/Tube Details Expansion Joint Supports & Lift Lugs
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Cylinders & Covers Thickness Cylinders and covers are shown with actual thicknesses selected as well as calculated minimum required thicknesses for both internal as well as external pressure. If a TEMA standard was selected, the program also displays the minimum TEMA thickness based on materials of construction, the TEMA class and the vessel diameter.
Radiography Code rules are followed for the three typical radiography options: no radiography, spot and full. The program displays the value for the joint efficiency used in the design formulas. In many cases, the program automatically increases the radiography required based on the component calculated thickness per applicable code rules.
External Pressure The external pressure summary provides limits of design for pressure, thickness and length. You can clearly identify which standard controls the actual thickness selected. If reinforcement rings are required for the shell cylinder, the maximum length is shown for ring placement.
Kettle Cylinder/Distributor Belt Thickness Cylinders and covers are shown with actual thicknesses selected as well as calculated minimum required thicknesses for both internal as well as external pressure. If a TEMA standard was selected, the program also displays the minimum TEMA thickness based on materials of construction, the TEMA class and the vessel diameter.
Kettle Cylinder/Distributor Belt Radiography Code rules are followed for the three typical radiography options: no radiography, spot and full. The program displays the value for the joint efficiency used in the design formulas. In many cases, the program automatically increases the radiography required based on the component calculated thickness per applicable code rules.
Kettle Cylinder/Distributor Belt External Pressure The external pressure summary provides limits of design for pressure, thickness and length. You can clearly identify which standard controls the actual thickness selected. If reinforcement rings are required for the shell cylinder, the maximum length is shown for ring placement.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-75
Nozzles/Nozzle Flanges Nozzles Cylinder and nozzle reinforcement calculation results are summarized. Nozzles are shown one per column identifying the side where the opening is located (shell or tube side) as well as the outside diameter and corresponding thicknesses.
Reinforcement The neck cylinder wall thickness is determined following the code rules. The reinforcement requirements follow, depending on the availability of metal around the opening including excess vessel and nozzle neck wall thickness and welds. If a reinforcing pad is necessary, the program will select one. The program optimizes the reinforcement calculation by first trying to avoid the use of a pad by increasing the nozzle weld size and then by selecting the thinnest possible pad that complies with the code. You can change all nozzle and reinforcement dimensions. For example, you can eliminate a pad by increasing the nozzle neck thickness.
Nozzle Flanges Nozzle flanges can be calculated or selected from standards (for example ANSI B16.5). The program determines which flange is acceptable based on materials of construction and design pressure and temperature. Typical ANSI classes are 150, 300, 600, 900 and 1500 in a variety of shapes (slip-on, lap joint, weld necks). The program defaults to an ANSI slip-on (SO) flange type.
Domes Cylinder and nozzle reinforcement calculation results are summarized. Nozzle domes are shown one per column identifying the side where the opening is located (shell or tube side) as well as the outside diameter and corresponding thicknesses.
Reinforcement The dome cylinder wall thickness is determined following the code rules. The reinforcement requirements follow, depending on the availability of metal around the opening including excess vessel and dome cylinder wall thickness and welds. If a reinforcing pad is necessary, the program will select one. The program optimizes the reinforcement calculation by first trying to avoid the use of a pad by increasing the dome weld size and then by selecting the thinnest possible pad that complies with the code. You can change all nozzle and reinforcement dimensions. For example, you can eliminate a pad by increasing the dome cylinder thickness.
5-76
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Flanges Body flange design You can easily review all the major flange dimensions for all flanges (outside diameter, bolt circle, bolt diameter and number, etc.). The results will show optimized body flanges designs per the applicable code rules. Designed flanges follow the rules dictated by the specified code. As in the case of nozzle flanges, typical flange types available are ring, lap joint and hub type. Optional type flange calculation method: The program results will identify which optional type flange calculation method was used, loose or integral. Method of calculation will be as follows. Case 1) Flange thickness entered and general ring type flange specified (loose or integral type have not been specified under individual flange details). Integral calculations only will be performed. Case 2) No flange thickness entered and general ring type flange specified (loose or integral type have not been specified under the individual flange details). Integral and loose calculations performed and the thinner thickness of the two methods will be selected. Case 3) Loose ring type or integral ring type is specified in the body flanges individual flange detail section. Only the loose or only the integral calculations are performed depending on which type is selected. If a thickness is entered, the program will compare to calculated method thickness and issue a warning if thickness is not sufficient.
Backing flange design Results for any applicable backing flanges will be provided, such as for S type rear heads and for fixed tubesheets designs with removable heads were tubesheets where not extended for bolting.
Tubesheets/Tube Details Tubesheet Calculation Methods Tubesheets are designed to the applicable design construction code requirements. For example the program uses two major methods to design tubesheets to USA standards: TEMA and ASME Section VIII Division 1 Appendix AA. The program defaults to the thicker tubesheet result from each method. However, you can select to a specific design method. Depending on many factors, such as diameter, materials, pressures, temperatures, geometry, etc., either method could result in the thinner tubesheet.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-77
In the case of fixed tubesheet units, the program will calculate an expansion joint if required or requested in the input.
Tube Details A summary of tube details is provided. The number of tubes and the outer tube limit are either those specified in the input, in which case the program checks their validity, or those calculated by the program if left zero in the input.
Expansion Joint A summary of the results of the TEMA calculations for a flanged and flued type expansion joint or the results of the ASME bellows type joint or other applicable design code will be provided.
Supports / Lift Lugs / Wind & Seismic Loads Horizontal Supports The method used was originally developed by L.P. Zick. The program will alert the user if any of the allowable stresses are exceeded. If that occurs several methods are available to alleviate the overstressed condition. To alleviate an overstressed condition in horizontal units, the user can place the saddles closer to respective tubesheets/flanges (to decrease the bending at the saddle but increase both bending at midspan and shell tangential shear). Increasing the width of the saddle or adding a wear plate will reduce both circumferential stress at the horn of the saddle and ring compression over the saddle. Increasing the saddle-to-shell angle of contact will also reduce all stresses except bending at midspan.
Lift lugs A summary of results for the design of the vessel lifting lugs showing the lift lug calculated dimensions.
Wind & Seismic loads A summary of the wind and seismic overturning moments are given.
5-78
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Price The Price Section is subdivided into three sections: • • •
Cost Estimate Bill of Materials Labor Details
Cost Estimate A summary of the detailed costing showing material cost, total labor, and mark ups on material and labor are provided.
Cost summaries Material, labor, mark up, and total selling cost are provided for the exchanger.
Material and Labor Details Material and labor will be provided for each major component of the heat exchanger.
Final Assembly Final assembly labor and material are summarized.
Bill of Materials A complete bill of materials is provided listing all components. A rough dimensions listing for material purchase is provided as well as a finished dimensions bill of material for manufacturing.
Labor Details A complete labor per component and operation are provided for section and assemblies.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-79
Drawings The Drawings Section is subdivided into three sections: • • •
Setting Plan Tubesheet Layout All Drawings
Setting Plan Drawing A setting plan drawing is provided showing location of nozzle, supports, and overall dimensions.
5-80
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubesheet Layout : Tube Layout Drawing A scale tube layout is provided showing tube, tie rod, and baffle cut locations.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
5-81
All Drawings: Fabrication Drawings
Teams provides a complete set of fabrication drawings showing all components for construction. Drawings are to scale. A typical set is shown below.
Code Calculations Detailed Calculations Teams provides a complete calculation details section showing all Code methods and variables to verify the design to the applicable Code. Calculations are provided for Cylinders/Cover, Body Flanges, Tubesheets/Expansion Joints, Nozzles, Supports, Wind/Seismic Loads, Lifting Lugs, and MAWP/MDMT/Test Pressures.
❖
5-82
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6
Props
Introduction Props is a program which retrieves chemical physical properties from three possible sources: • • •
Aspen B-JAC's databank a user's private databank, built by using the Priprops program Aspen Properties Plus (can only be accessed when a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve is being generated)
You can use the program as a stand-alone program to display or print the properties of a single component or a multi-component mixture. You can request temperature dependent properties at a single temperature point or over a range of temperatures using a specified temperature interval. You may also request that a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve be generated. You can also directly access the same databanks from other Aspen B-JAC programs, including Aspen Hetran and Aspen Aerotran. The same routines used in Props are incorporated into each of these programs. The Aspen B-JAC standard databank contains over 1500 pure chemicals and mixtures used in the chemical process, petroleum, and other industries. You can retrieve each component by using either its full name or its chemical formula. Most components are stored with liquid and gas properties, however some are stored with liquid properties only and others with gas properties only. Each temperature dependent property for each component has a temperature range associated with it. You will see a warning whenever you try to access a property outside the stored temperature range. As an option, you can build a private databank using the Aspen B-JAC program called Priprops. This program allows you to store your own data in the databank under a name specified by you. You can combine any components in your private databank with those in the Aspen B-JAC databank.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-1
Props Scope Physical Properties Components Stored as Liquid & Gas Saturation Temperature
Vapor Pressure
Critical Temperature
Critical Pressure
Normal Melting Point
Molecular Weight
Normal Boiling Point
Molecular Volume
Flash Point
Critical Molar-volume
Autoignition Temperature
Acentric Factor
Latent Heat
Solubility Parameter
Surface Tension
Compressibility Factor
Specific Heat - Liquid & Gas
Thermal Conductivity - Liquid & Gas
Viscosity - Liquid & Gas
Density - Liquid & Gas
Components Stored as Liquid Only Density
Liquid
Specific Heat
Liquid
Thermal Conductivity
Liquid
Viscosity
Liquid
Components Stored as Gas Only Molecular Weight
Density - Gas
Molecular Volume
Specific Heat - Gas
Critical Temperature
Thermal Conductivity - Gas
Critical Pressure
Viscosity - Gas
Critical Molar-volume
6-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
For Mixtures (up to 50 components) Latent Heat
Surface Tension
Molecular Weight
Molecular Volume
Specific Heat
Thermal Conductivity
Viscosity
Density
VLE Two Phase Systems: Condensation Vaporization Calculation Methods: ideal Soave-Redlich-Kwong Peng-Robinson Chao-Seader Uniquac Van Laar Wilson NRTL
Components: immiscible immiscible noncondensable Types of Condensation: integral differential
Systems of Measure U.S., SI, or Metric
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-3
Input Application Options Retrieve Properties You may select if you want to retrieve physical properties at a single temperature point, over a range of temperatures, or to produce a vapor liquid equilibrium curve with liquid and vapor properties and a heat release curve. At one temperature point: If you select the mode that gives the properties at a single temperature, you need to specify only the starting temperature and the pressure. Optionally, you can determine the saturation temperature or saturation pressure for a single component that has properties stored for both liquid and gas phases. To request the saturation temperature, leave the temperature input blank and specify the desired pressure in the field for pressure. The program will return the properties at the saturation temperature for the specified pressure. To request the saturation pressure, specify the desired temperature, and leave the pressure input field blank. The program will return the properties at the specified temperature and the pressure that is equal to the vapor pressure at that temperature. Over a temperature range: If you select this mode, Props will give you the properties over a range of temperatures. You will provide the starting and ending temperatures, the temperature increment, and the pressure. The maximum number of intervals is 100. Therefore, if you specify a temperature interval that is smaller than 0.01 times the difference between the starting and ending temperatures, the program will adjust the temperature increment to accommodate the full temperature range specified. Over a temperature range with VLE calculation: If you select this mode, Props will give you the properties over a range of temperatures. You will provide the starting and ending temperatures, and the pressure. The program will divide the condensing range into 20 equal temperature intervals. A vapor-liquid equilibrium curve will also be provided over the specified range.
Temperature starting Enter the starting reference temperature. This temperature is required if you are referencing the databank at a single temperature or at a range of temperatures.
Temperature ending Enter the ending temperature if you are referencing the databank over a range of temperatures or requesting a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve.
6-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Temperature increment Enter the temperature increment that you want the properties to be provided if you are referencing the databank over a range of temperatures.
Pressure (absolute) The pressure should be specified as absolute pressure, not gauge pressure. The program uses the pressure value in order to adjust the gaseous properties for the effect of pressure.
Flowrate total Specify the total flow rate of the mixture if you have requested vapor-liquid equilibrium information. The flowrate is used in determining a heat release curve.
Property Options This section is only applicable if a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve has been requested.
Condensation Curve Calculation Method The calculation method determines which correlations the program will use to determine the vapor-liquid equilibrium. The choice of method is dependent on the degree of nonideality of the vapor and liquid phases and the amount of data available. The methods can be divided into three general groups: Ideal - correlations for ideal mixtures. The ideal method uses ideal gas laws for the vapor phase and ideal solution laws for the liquid phase. You should use this method when you do not have information on the degree of nonideality. This method allows for up to 50 components. Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL - correlations for nonideal mixtures which require interaction parameters. These methods are limited to ten components. The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. The Uniquac method also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter and the NRTL method requires an additional Alpha parameter. The Wilson method is particularly suitable for strongly nonideal binary mixtures, e.g., solutions of alcohols with hydrocarbons. The Uniquac method is applicable for both vapor-liquid equilibrium and liquid-liquid equilibrium (immiscibles). It can be used for solutions containing small or large molecules, including polymers. In addition, Uniquac's interaction parameters are less temperature dependent than those for Van Laar and Wilson.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-5
Soave-Redlich-Kwong, Peng-Robinson, and Chao-Seader - correlations for nonideal mixtures which do not require interaction parameters. The Soave-Redlich-Kwong and PengRobinson methods can be used on a number of systems containing hydrocarbons, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, and other weakly polar components. They can also be applied with success to systems which form an azeotrope, and which involve associating substances such as water and alcohols. They can predict vapor phase properties at any given pressure. The Chao-Seader method uses Redlich-Kwong equations for vapor phase nonideality and an empirical correlation for liquid phase nonideality. It is used with success in the petroleum industry. It is recommended for use at pressures less than 68 bar (1000 psia) and temperatures greater than -18°C (0°F). The program uses the original Chao-Seader correlation with the Grayson-Streed modification. There is no strict demarcation between these two methods since they are closely related. These methods allow for up to 50 components.
Condensation Curve Calculation Type For a condensing stream, you should determine if your case is closer to integral or differential condensation. Integral condensation assumes that the vapor and liquid condensate are kept close enough together to maintain equilibrium, and that the condensate formed at the beginning of the condensing range is carried through with the vapor to the outlet. Vertical tube side condensation is the best case of integral condensation. Other cases which closely approach integral condensation are: horizontal tube side condensation, vertical shell side condensation, and horizontal shell side crossflow condensation (X-shell). In differential condensation the liquid condensate is removed from the vapor, thus changing the equilibrium and lowering the dew point of the remaining vapor. The clearest case of differential condensation is seen in the knockback reflux condenser, where the liquid condensate runs back toward the inlet while the vapor continues toward the outlet. Shell side condensation in a horizontal E or J shell is somewhere between true integral condensation and differential condensation. If you want to be conservative, treat these cases as differential condensation. However, the industry has traditionally designed them as integral condensation. More condensate will be present at any given temperature with integral condensation versus differential condensation. In the heat exchanger design, this results in a higher mean temperature difference for integral condensation compared to differential condensation.
6-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Effect of pressure drop on condensation The program will default to calculating the condensing curve in isobaric conditions (constant operating pressure). You may specify nonisobaric conditions and the program will allocate the specified pressure drop based on temperature increments along the condensing curve. The vapor/liquid equilibrium at various temperature points will be calculated using an adjusted operating pressure.
Estimated pressure drop for hot side Provide the estimated hot side pressure drop through the exchanger. The program will use this pressure drop to adjust the VLE curve. If actual pressure varies more than 20% from this estimated pressure drop, adjust this value to the actual and rerun Aspen Hetran. The VLE calculation program will not permit the condensate to re-flash. If calculations indicate that this is happening, the program will suggest using a lower estimated pressure drop.
Vaporization Curve Calculation Method The calculation method determines which correlations the program will use to determine the vapor-liquid equilibrium. The choice of method is dependent on the degree of nonideality of the vapor and liquid phases and the amount of data available. The methods can be divided into three general groups: Ideal - correlations for ideal mixtures. The ideal method uses ideal gas laws for the vapor phase and ideal solution laws for the liquid phase. You should use this method when you do not have information on the degree of nonideality. This method allows for up to 50 components. Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL - correlations for nonideal mixtures which require interaction parameters. These methods are limited to ten components. The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. The Uniquac method also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter and the NRTL method requires an additional Alpha parameter. The Wilson method is particularly suitable for strongly nonideal binary mixtures, e.g. solutions of alcohols with hydrocarbons. The Uniquac method is applicable for both vapor-liquid equilibrium and liquid-liquid equilibrium (immiscibles). It can be used for solutions containing small or large molecules, including polymers. In addition, Uniquac's interaction parameters are less temperature dependent than those for Van Laar and Wilson.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-7
Soave-Redlich-Kwong, Peng-Robinson, and Chao-Seader - correlations for nonideal mixtures which do not require interaction parameters. The Soave-Redlich-Kwong and PengRobinson methods can be used on a number of systems containing hydrocarbons, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide, and other weakly polar components. They can also be applied with success to systems which form an azeotrope, and which involve associating substances such as water and alcohols. They can predict vapor phase properties at any given pressure. The Chao-Seader method uses Redlich-Kwong equations for vapor phase nonideality and an empirical correlation for liquid phase nonideality. It is used with success in the petroleum industry. It is recommended for use at pressures less than 68 bar (1000 psia) and temperatures greater than -18°C (0°F). The program uses the original Chao-Seader correlation with the Grayson-Streed modification. There is no strict demarcation between these two methods since they are closely related. These methods allow for up to 50 components.
Effect of pressure drop on vaporization The program will default to calculating the vaporization curve in isobaric conditions (constant operating pressure). You may specify nonisobaric conditions and the program will allocate the specified pressure drop based on temperature increments along the vaporization curve. The vapor/liquid equilibrium at various temperature points will be calculated using an adjusted operating pressure.
Estimated pressure drop for cold side Provide the estimated hot side pressure drop through the exchanger. The program will use this pressure drop to adjust the VLE curve. If actual pressure varies more than 20% from this estimated pressure drop, adjust this value to the actual and rerun Aspen Hetran.
6-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Composition Composition
Enter the composition by weight flow rate or percent (default), mole flow rate or percent, or volume flow rate or percent. For a single component you can leave Composition blank. For a multicomponent mixture you should specify the composition in accordance with the earlier input entry for "Composition Specification". Note that percentages do not have to add up to 100, since the program proportions each to the total.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-9
Component The Aspen B-JAC Property Databank consists of over 1500 compounds and mixtures used in the chemical process, petroleum, and other industries. You can reference the database by entering the components for the stream. For the databank component name, you can specify either the component name or its chemical formula. To search the databank directory, select the search button. You should be careful when using the chemical formula, since several chemicals may have the same chemical formula but due to different bonding, have different properties. You can specify up to 50 components. To enter your own properties for a component, select “user” for the property Source and then provide the properties in the Component Properties section.
Component Type Component type field is available for all VLE applications. This field allows you to specify if the component is a noncondensables or immiscible components for condensing streams or if the component is an inert for vaporizing streams. If you are not sure of the component type, the program will attempt to determine the component type but in general it is better to identify the type if known. If a component does not condense any liquid over the temperature range in the exchanger, it is best to identify it as a noncondensable.
6-10
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Source The Source field is currently only available for components when the program is calculating vapor/liquid equilibrium curves. The Source of the component may be "Databank" or "User". "Databank" indicates that all component properties will be retrieved from one of the Aspen BJAC databanks. "User" indicates that this component's physical properties are to be specified by the user.
Component Type Component type field is available for all VLE applications. This field allows you to specify if the component is a noncondensables or immiscible components for condensing streams or if the component is an inert for vaporizing streams. If you are not sure of the component type, the program will attempt to determine the component type but in general it is better to identify the type if known. If a component does not condense any liquid over the temperature range in the exchanger, it is best to identify it as a noncondensable.
Source The Source field is currently only available for components when the program is calculating vapor/liquid equilibrium curves. The Source of the component may be "Databank" or "User". "Databank" indicates that all component properties will be retrieved from one of the Aspen BJAC databanks. "User" indicates that this component's physical properties are to be specified by the user.
Component Properties Allows the user to override databank properties or input properties not in the databank. This section is only applicable if a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve has been requested. The physical properties required for various applications are listed below: Temperature: It is recommended that you specify property data for multiple temperature points. The dew and bubble points of the stream are recommended. The temperatures entered for no phase change fluids should at least include both the inlet and outlet temperatures. The inlet temperature of the opposite side fluid should also be included as a 3rd temperature point for viscous fluids. Multiple temperature points, including the inlet and outlet, should be entered when a change of phase is present. Liquid and Vapor Properties: The necessary physical properties are dependent on the type of application. If you are referencing the databank for a fluid, you do not need to enter any data on the corresponding physical properties input screens. However, it is also possible to specify any property, even if you are referencing the databank. Any specified property will then override the value from the databank.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-11
The properties should be self-explanatory. A few clarifications follow. Specific Heat: Provide the specific heat for the component at the referenced temperature. Thermal Conductivity: Provide the thermal conductivity for the component at the referenced temperature. Viscosity: The viscosity requested is the dynamic (absolute) viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s (note that centipoise and mPa*s are equal). To convert kinematic viscosity in centistokes to dynamic viscosity in centipoise or mPa*s, multiply centistokes by the specific gravity. The Aspen Hetran program uses a special logarithmic formula to interpolate or extrapolate the viscosity to the calculated tube wall temperature. However when a liquid is relatively viscous, say greater than 5 mPa*s (5 cp), and especially when it is being cooled, the accuracy of the viscosity at the tube wall can be very important to calculating an accurate film coefficient. In these cases, you should specify the viscosity at a third point, which extends the viscosity points to encompass the tube wall temperature. This third temperature point may extend to as low (if being cooled) or as high (if being heated) as the inlet temperature on the other side. Density: Be sure to specify density and not specific gravity. Convert specific gravity to density by using the appropriate formula: density, lb/ft3 = 62.4 * specific gravity; density, kg/m3 = 1000 * specific gravity. The density can also be derived from the API gravity, using this formula: density, lb/ft3 = 8829.6 / ( API + 131.5 ). Latent Heat: Provide latent heat for change of phase applications. Vapor Pressure: Provide the vapor pressure for the component. If you do not enter a value for the vapor pressure, the program will estimate a value. Surface Tension: Surface tension is needed for vaporizing fluids. If you do not have surface tension information available, the program will estimate a value. Molecular /Volume: Provide the molecular volume of the vapor for change of phase applications. Note, the molecular volume can be approximated by molecular weight / specific gravity at the normal boiling point. Molecular Weight: Provide the molecular weight of the vapor for change of phase applications. Critical Pressure: The critical pressure is the pressure above which a liquid cannot be vaporized no matter how high the temperature. For mixtures, the critical pressure should be the sum of the critical pressures of each component weighted by their mole fractions. This input is required to calculate the nucleate boiling coefficient. If you do not enter a value for the critical pressure, the program will estimate a value.
6-12
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Interaction Parameters The Uniquac, Van Laar, Wilson, and NRTL methods need binary interaction parameters for each pair of components. This data is not available from the databank and must be provided by the user. An example for the NRTL parameters is shown below. NRTL Method --Example with 3 components (Reference Dechema) NRTL “A” Interactive Parameters –Hetran inputted parameters 1 1 --
2
3
A21 A31
2 A12 --
A32
3 A13 A23 --
NRTL “Alpha” Parameters –Hetran inputted parameters 1
2
3
1 --------
Alpha21
Alpha31
2 Alpha12
--------
Alpha32
3 Alpha13
Alpha23
--------
NRTL – Conversion from Aspen Properties parameters to Hetran parameters: Aspen Properties NRTL Parameters – The parameters AIJ, AJI, DJI, DIJ, EIJ, EJI, FIJ, FJI, TLOWER, & TUPPER in Aspen Properties, which are not shown below, are not required for the Hetran NRTL method. Aspen Properties NRTL Interactive Parameters Component I
Component 1 Component 1
Component 2
Component J
Component 2 Component 3
Component 3
BIJ
BIJ12
BIJ13
BIJ23
BJI
BJI12
BJI13
BJI23
CIJ
CIJ12
CIJ13
CIJ23
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-13
“A” Interactive Parameters – Conversion from Aspen Properties to Hetran 1
2
3
1 --
A21=BJI12*1.98721
A31=BJI13*1.98721
2 A12=BIJ12*1.98721
--
A32-BJI23*1.98721
3 A13=BIJ13*1.98721
A23=BIJ23*1.98721
--
“Alpha” Parameters – Conversion from Aspen Properties to Hetran 1
2
3
1 --
Alpha21=CIJ12
Alpha31=CIJ13
2 Alpha12= CIJ12
--
Alpha32=CIJ23
3 Alpha13=CIJ13
Alpha23=CIJ23
--
NRTL – Alpha parameters The NRTL method requires binary interaction parameters for each pair of components and an additional Alpha parameter. This data is not available from the databank.
Uniquac – Surface & Volume parameters The Uniquac method requires binary interaction parameters for each pair of components and also needs a surface parameter and volume parameter. This data is not available from the databank.
6-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Results The Props program gives you the option of requesting properties at a single temperature or at up to 100 temperatures. If you request properties at a single temperature you will also retrieve the properties which are not temperature dependent (e.g. molecular weight).
Warnings & Messages Props provides an extensive system of warnings and messages to help the designer of heat exchanger design. Messages are divided into five types. There are several messages built into the Props program.
Warning Messages These are conditions, which may be problems, however the program will continue.
Error Messages Conditions which do not allow the program to continue.
Limit Messages Conditions which go beyond the scope of the program.
Notes Special conditions which you should be aware of.
Suggestions Recommendations on how to improve the design.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-15
All Properties at One Temperature If you select this option, PROPS will display the following properties:
6-16
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Properties Over a Range of Temperatures If you select this option, PROPS will display the following properties: Specific Heat of a Liquid & Gas Viscosity of Liquid & Gas Thermal Conductivity of Liquid & Gas
Latent Heat Vapor Pressure Surface Tension
Density of Liquid & Gas
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-17
VLE If the VLE calculation was selected, Props will generate a vapor-liquid equilibrium curve. Heat load, composition, and physical properties per temperature increment will be provided.
6-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Props Logic Structure of Databank The data in the databank is derived from a wide variety of published sources. For constant properties (e.g. molecular weight), the actual value has been stored in the databank. For temperature dependent properties, various property specific equations are used to determine the property at the desired temperature. In these cases, the coefficients for the equation are stored in the databank. Vapor pressures are stored using two equations - one for temperatures below the normal boiling point and one for temperatures above the normal boiling point.
Temperature Ranges There is a separate temperature range of validity stored in the databank for each property. The temperature range shown in the Databank Directory is the minimum range for all properties of the respective phase. Therefore some properties may have a wider range than shown in the directory.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-19
If you request a property at a temperature outside its valid temperature range, the program will display a warning and then determine that property at the appropriate temperature limit (i.e., it will not extrapolate), except for liquid viscosity and vapor pressure. The program extrapolates above and below the valid temperature range for vapor pressure. It extrapolates above for the liquid viscosity.
Effect of Pressure The program attempts to correct the gaseous properties as a function of pressure (liquid properties are assumed to be independent of pressure). To do this, the program uses a generalized correlation for all components except water/steam. The generalized correlation is reasonably accurate for most cases. However, it tends to deviate from actual measured values when the temperature or pressure approach the critical region. For water (stored under the names WATER and STEAM), the program uses a series of specialized equations which predict the corrected steam properties to within 1% of the values in the ASME Steam Tables.
Mixtures The Props program can calculate the composite properties for multicomponent mixtures for up to 50 components. Some care should be taken in using the databank for mixtures. Some mixtures, such as immiscibles or binary mixtures where water is one of the components, do not conform to the equations. For this reason, some of the more common water solutions have been included in the databank as single components. Mixtures are calculated according to the following techniques: Density of Liquid
ρm =
6-20
1 Σ( wi / ρ i )
Latent Heat
averaged in proportion to the weight percent
Molecular Volume
averaged in proportion to the mole percent
Specific Heat of Gas
averaged in proportion to the weight percent
Specific Heat Liquid
averaged in proportion to the weight percent
Surface Tension
averaged in proportion to the mole percent
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Thermal Conductivity of Gas - Friend & Adler Equation
Σ yi ⋅ k i ⋅ ( M i ) 0.33 km = Σ yi ⋅ ( M i ) 0.33
Thermal Conductivity of Liquid - averaged in proportion to the weight percent Viscosity of Gas - Herning & Zipperer Equation
Σ yi ⋅ µ i ⋅ ( M i ) 0.5 µm = Σ yi ⋅ ( M i ) 0.5 Viscosity of Liquid - Arrhenius Equation
ln µ m = Σ xi ⋅ ln µ i Nomenclature: µ =viscosity
w=weight fraction
k=thermal cond.
X=mole fraction
ρ=density
y=gas phase mole fraction m=mixture
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
M=molecular weight I=i-th component
6-21
References For a further understanding of subjects relating to PROPS, you can refer to the following publications:
Sources The properties in the databank have come from a wide range of published sources. Some have come from product bulletins published by chemical manufacturers. Many others have come from the following references: Physical and Thermodynamic Properties of Pure Chemicals, T. E. Daubert and R. P. Danner, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, New York, 1989. ASME Steam Tables, Meyer et al., Third Edition, The American Society of Mechanical Engineers, New York, 1977. Perry's Chemical Engineering Handbook, Robert H. Perry and Don Green, Sixth Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1984. Physical Properties of Hydrocarbons, R. W. Gallant, Gulf Publishing Company, Houston, 1968. Physical Properties, Carl L. Yaws, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1977. Technical Data Book - Petroleum Refining, Second Edition, American Petroleum Institute, Washington D.C., 1970. Engineering Data Book, Tenth Edition, Gas Processors Suppliers Association, Tulsa, 1987. Lange's Handbook of Chemistry, John A. Dean, Thirteenth Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1985. Handbook of Vapor Pressures and Heats of Vaporization of Hydrocarbons and Related Compounds, B. J. Zwolinski and R. C. Wilhoit, Thermodynamics Research Center, College Station, Texas, 1971.
Mixture Correlations The Properties of Gases and Liquids, Robert C. Reid, John M. Prausnitz, and Bruce E. Poling, Fourth Edition, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1987.
6-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Databank Symbols Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Abietic acid
ABIETIC ACID
302.5
D2256
173 > 342
376 > 726
Acenaphthene
ACENAPHTHENE
154.2
D808
93 > 277
277 > 726
Acetal
ACETAL
118.2
D1432
28 > 103
103 > 726
Acetaldehyde
AALDEHYD
44.05
B74
-80 > 159
-80 > 174
D1002
-123 > 20
0 > 726
Acetamide
ACETAMIDE
59.07
D2853
80 > 221
221 > 726
Acetanilide
ACETANILIDE
135.2
D5870
139 > 303
303 > 726
Acetic acid
ACETACID
60.50
B51
19 > 239
19 > 239
D1252
16 > 117
21 > 413
B77
-40 > 239
-40 > 499
D1291
-23 > 76
139 > 726
Acetic anhydride
ACETANHY
102.1
Acetoacetanilide
ACETOACETANILIDE
177.2
D5868
128 > 318
318 > 726
Acetone
ACETONE
58.08
B58
-80 > 199
-80 > 269
D1051
-83 > 56
56 > 726
Acetone cyanohydrin
ACETONE CYANOHYD
85.11
D1882
189 > 726
Acetonitrile
ACETONIT
41.05
B127
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1772
1 > 81
81 > 726
Acetophenone
ACETOPHENONE
120.2
D1090
19 > 126
201 > 726
Acetovanillone
ACETOVANILLONE
166.2
D4849
114 > 297
297 > 726
Acetylacetone
ACETYLACETONE
100.1
D1076
0 > 84
140 > 726
Acetyl chloride
ACHLORID
78.50
B191
-80 > 199
-80 > 499
D1851
-19 > 50
50 > 726
B85
-73 > 23
-73 > 371
D401
-79 > -23
-73 > 326
B315
-80 > 119
-80 > 499
D1034
-20 > 52
52 > 726
Acetylene Acrolein
ACETYLEN ACROLEIN
26.04 56.06
Acrylamide
ACRYLAMIDE
71.08
D1879
84 > 192
192 > 726
Acrylic acid
ACRYACID
72.03
B70
19 > 199
19 > 214
D1277
12 > 101
140 > 726
B317
-17 > 93
-17 > 259
D1774
-53 > 77
24 > 726
D1285
159 > 192
337 > 726
Acrylonitrile Adipic acid
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
VCYANIDE ADIPIC ACID
53.06 146.1
6-23
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Adiponitrile
ADIPONITRILE
108.1
D1777
117 > 76
294 > 726
Air
AIR
28.96
B3
-191 > -148
-191 >1099
D915
-198 > -158
-193 >1226
Allyl acetate
ALLYL ACETATE
100.1
D1318
16 > 103
103 > 726
Allyl alcohol
ALLYLALC
58.08
B63
-40 > 199
-40 > 219
D1167
7 > 95
97 > 726
Allylamine
ALLYLAMINE
57.10
D1740
26 > 53
53 > 726
Allyl methacrylate
ALLYL METHACRYLA
126.2
D2354
26 > 139
139 > 726
Aluminum
ALUMINUM
26.98
D2925
Aluminum chloride
ALUMINUM CHLORID
133.3
D2926
Aluminum hydroxide
ALUMINUM HYDROXI
78.00
D1915
Aluminum oxide
ALUMINUM OXIDE
102.0
D2927
Aluminum phosphate (ortho)
ALUMINUM PHOSPHA
122.0
D1933
Aluminum sulfate
ALUMINUM SULFATE
342.2
D2968
pAminoazobenzene
P-AMINOAZOBENZEN 197.2
D2786
p-Aminodiphenyl
P-AMINODIPHENYL
169.2
D2787
135 > 301
301 > 726
pAminodiphenylamine
P-AMINODIPHENYLA
184.2
D1747
67 > 353
353 > 726
105.1
B326
0 > 315
D2865
76 > 240
240 > 726
DGAMINE 2Aminoethoxyethano l
6-24
359 > 726
n-Aminoethyl ethanolamine
N-AMINOETHYL ETH
104.2
D2732
75 > 243
243 > 726
n-Aminoethyl piperazine
N-AMINOETHYL PIP
129.2
D1750
80 > 220
220 > 726
6-Aminohexanol
6-AMINOHEXANOL
117.2
D1871
67 > 234
234 > 726
1-Amino-2-propanol 1-AMINO-2-PROPAN
75.11
D5860
29 > 159
159 > 726
3-Amino-1-propanol 3-AMINO-1-PROPAN
75.11
D5859
51 > 187
187 > 726
Ammonia
17.03
B64
-80 > 64
-80 > 426
D1911
-77 > 111
-33 > 726
NH3
Ammonia 26 wt %
AMMON-26
18.00
B199
Ammonium acetate
AMMONIUM ACETATE
77.08
D2929
0 > 121
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Ammonium bisulfate
AMMONIUM BISULFA
115.1
D2949
Ammonium bisulfite
AMMONIUM BISULFI
99.11
D2947
Ammonium chloride AMMONIUM CHLORID 53.49
D2928
Ammonium hydroxide
AMMONIUM HYDROXI 35.05
D1916
Ammonium nitrate
AMMONIUM NITRATE
80.04
D1990
Ammonium oxalate
AMMONIUM OXALATE
124.1
D2948
Ammonium perchlorate
AMMONIUM PERCHLO
117.5
D2944
Ammonium phosphate
AMMONIUM PHOSPHA
115.0
D2943
Ammonium sulfate
AMMONIUM SULFATE 132.1
D2967
Ammonium sulfite
AMMONIUM SULFITE
116.1
D2946
Amyl alcohol
AMYLALC
88.10
B89
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
p-tert-Amylphenol
P-TERT-AMYLPHENO
164.2
D2196
102 > 261
261 > 726
Anethole
ANETHOLE
148.2
D1420
Aniline
ANILINE
93.06
B48
0 > 199
0 > 274
D1792
-6 > 183
183 > 726
235 > 726
Anisole
ANISOLE
108.1
D1461
13 > 153
153 > 723
Anthracene
ANTHRACENE
178.2
D804
215 > 321
342 > 726
Anthraquinone
ANTHRAQUINONE
208.2
D1075
Antimony trichloride ANTIMONY TRICHLO
228.1
D1934
35 API distillate
API35
114.2
B140
-17 > 198
28 API gas oil
API28
114.2
B145
-17 > 198
56 API gasoline
API56
114.2
B143
-17 > 198
42 API kerosene
KEROSENE
72.15
B112
-62 > 201
34 API midcontinental crude
API34
114.2
B153
-17 > 198
76 API natural gasoline
API76
114.2
B142
-17 > 198
10 API petroleum oil (k=11)
API10K11
18.00
B319
65 > 482
30 API petoleum oil
API30
114.2
B292
-17 > 198
40 API petroleum oil
API40
114.2
B291
-17 > 198
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
379 > 626
6-25
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
45 API petroleum oil
API45
114.2
B290
-17 > 198
50 API petroleum oil
API50
114.2
B289
-17 > 198
60 API petroleum oil
API60
114.2
B288
-17 > 198
65 API petroleum oil
API65
114.2
B287
-17 > 198
70 API petroleum oil
API70
114.2
B286
-17 > 198
Argon
ARGON
39.95
B185 D914
-149 >1093 -189 > -138
-149 >1093
Arsenic
ARSENIC
74.92
D1992
821 >1226
Arsine
ARSINE
77.95
D926
-62 > 726
Ascorbic acid
ASCORBIC ACID
176.1
D5877
363 > 726
Azelaic acid
AZELAIC ACID
188.2
D2257
Barium carbonate
BARIUM CARBONATE
197.3
D2985
Benzaldehyde
BENZALDEHYDE
106.1
Benzene
BENZENE
78.10
129 > 329
360 > 726
D1041
6 > 126
178 > 726
B7
9 > 199
9 > 284
D501
5 > 80
65 > 726
1,2-Benzenediol
1,2-BENZENEDIOL
110.1
D1244
108 > 245
245 > 726
1,3-Benzenediol
1,3-BENZENEDIOL
110.1
D1245
131 > 276
276 > 726
1,2,3-Benzenetriol
1,2,3-BENZENETRI
126.1
D1248
141 > 308
308 > 726
Benzoic acid
BENZOICA
122.1
B424
121 > 259
121 > 499
D1281
122 > 176
249 > 726
Benzonitrile
BENZONITRILE
103.1
D1790
Benzophenone
BENZOPHENONE
182.2
D1085
51 > 176
306 > 726
Benzothiophene
BENZOTHIOPHENE
134.2
D1822
31 > 219
219 > 726
Benzotrichloride
BENZOTRICHLORIDE 195.5
D1576
0 > 220
220 > 726
Benzotrifluoride
BTF
B314
0 > 151
146.1
190 > 720
D2634
-29 > 102
103 > 723
Benzoyl chloride
BENZOYL CHLORIDE
140.6
D1856
75 > 189
196 > 716
Benzyl acetate
BENZYL ACETATE
150.2
D1359
-25 > 213
213 > 726
Benzyl alcohol
BENZYL ALCOHOL
108.1
B381
-17 > 204
-17 > 499
D1180
19 > 86
205 > 726
D1733
24 > 184
184 > 726
Benzylamine
6-26
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
BENZYLAMINE
107.2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Benzyl benzoate
BENZYL BENZOATE
212.2
D1364
19 > 323
323 > 726
Benzyl chloride
BENZYL CHLORIDE
126.6
D1562
-38 > 179
179 > 726
Benzyl chloride
BENZYLCL
126.6
B69
-17 > 199
-17 > 234
Benzyl dichloride
BENZYL DICHLORID
161.0
D1599
92 > 272
213 > 726
Benzyl ethyl ether
BENZYL ETHYL ETH
136.2
D1460
2 > 184
184 > 724
Bicyclohexyl
BICYCLOHEXYL
166.3
D155
3 > 86
239 > 719
Biphenyl
BIPHENYL
154.2
D558
69 > 254
99 > 726
Bis(chloromethyl)et her
BIS(CHLOROMETHYL 115.0
D5857
16 > 104
104 > 726
Bis(cyanoethyl)ethe BIS(CYANOETHYL)E r
124.1
D5858
118 > 305
305 > 726
Bisphenol a
BISPHENOL A
228.3
D1198
182 > 360
360 > 726
Black liquor 10 % solids
BLACK10
B373
19 > 159
Black liquor 30% solids
BLACK30
B372
19 > 159
Black liquor 50% solids
BLACK50
B371
37 > 148
Black liquor 65% solids
BLACK65
B370
79 > 148
Borax
BORAX
381.4
D2976
Boric acid
BORIC ACID
61.83
D2901
Boron trichloride
BORON TRICHLORID
117.2
D1961
Boron trifluoride
BORON TRIFLUORID
67.81
D1942
Bromine
BROMINE
159.8
B222
0 > 299
0 > 799
D922
-7 > 32
26 > 226
B124
0 > 199
0 > 269
D1680
19 > 156
156 > 726
Bromobenzene
BROMOBEN
157.0
-107 > 2
12 > 326 -12 > 426
1-Bromobutane
1-BROMOBUTANE
137.0
D1655
-33 > 101
101 > 726
2-Bromobutane
2-BROMOBUTANE
137.0
D2638
10 > 91
91 > 726
Bromochlorodifluor omethane
BROMOCHLORODIFL U
165.4
D2686
-39 > 79
-40 > 726
Bromochlorometha ne
BROMOCHLOROMET HA
129.4
D2639
-87 > 68
68 > 726
Bromoethane
EBROMIDE
109.0
B104
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1645
-73 > 38
38 > 726
D1667
-33 > 178
178 > 726
1-Bromoheptane
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
1-BROMOHEPTANE
179.1
6-27
Molec. Weight
ID No.
1BROMONAPHTHALE
207.1
D1697
1-Bromopropane
1-BROMOPROPANE
123.0
D1650
-33 > 70
70 > 726
2-Bromopropane
2-BROMOPROPANE
123.0
D1651
-23 > 59
59 > 726
p-Bromotoluene
P-BROMOTOLUENE
171.0
D2661
26 > 184
184 > 726
Bromotrichlorometh BROMOTRICHLORO an ME
198.3
D2641
20 > 104
104 > 726
Bromotrifluoroethyl en
BROMOTRIFLUOROE T
160.9
D2690
-57 > -2
26 > 726
Bromotrifluorometh an
BTFM
148.9
B193
-80 > 39
-80 > 499
D2687
-39 > 24
-43 > 226
B220
-120 > 159
-120 > 299
D302
-136 > 10
10 > 726
B97
-62 > 119
-62 > 499
D303
-23 > -4
-4 > 726
B12
-101 > 148
-101 > 593
D5
-113 > 126
0 > 726
Component Name
Synonym
1Bromonaphthalene
1,2-Butadiene 1,3-Butadiene n-Butane
BUTADIEN BUTANE
54.09 54.09 58.12
281 > 726
1,2-Butanediol
1,2-BUTANEDIOL
90.12
D1220
193 > 726
1,3-Butanediol
1,3-BUTANEDIOL
90.12
D1221
206 > 726
1,4-Butanediol
1,4-BUTANEDIOL
90.12
D1241
2,3-Butanediol
2,3-BUTANEDIOL
90.12
D1238
n-Butanol
BUTANOL
74.12
B88
-40 > 199
-40 > 269
D1105
-83 > 117
96 > 526
B162
-30 > 134
-30 > 499
D1107
14 > 99
99 > 726
B186
-50 > 149
-50 > 499
D1108
25 > 178
82 > 326
B147
-100 > 139
-100 > 499
D205
-138 > 3
0 > 726
B159
-100 > 139
-100 > 499
D206
-105 > 0
0 > 726
-153 > -6
-48 > 526
10 > 234
234 > 726
sec-Butanol tert-Butanol cis-2-Butene trans-2-Butene
6-28
METHYL ALLENE
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
BUTANOLS BUTANOLT BUTENEC BUTENET2
74.12 74.12 56.10 56.10
1-Butene
BUTENE
56.11
D204
cis-2-Butene-1,4diol
CIS-2-BUTENE-1,4
88.11
D1239
19 > 99
226 > 726 180 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
trans-2-Butene-1,4diol
TRANS-2-BUTENE-1
88.11
D1240
2-Butoxyethanol
2-BUTOXYETHANOL
118.2
D2862
n-Butyl acetate
BACETATE
116.2
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase 236 > 726 1 > 126
171 > 726
B179
-40 > 279
-40 > 499
D1315
16 > 125
26 > 526
sec-Butyl acetate
SEC-BUTYL ACETAT
116.2
D1320
0 > 111
111 > 726
tert-Butyl acetate
TERT-BUTYL ACETA
116.2
D2321
12 > 95
95 > 726
n-Butyl acrylate
N-BUTYL ACRYLATE
128.2
D1344
24 > 51
147 > 726
n-Butylamine
BAMINE
73.14
B105
-40 > 159
-40 > 499
D1712
-7 > 77
0 > 726
sec-Butylamine
SEC-BUTYLAMINE
73.14
D1726
-23 > 62
62 > 726
tert-Butylamine
TERT-BUTYLAMINE
73.14
D1727
-13 > 44
44 > 726
n-Butylbenzene
BBENZENE
134.2
B294
-51 > 168
-128 > 537
D518
0 > 183
183 > 723
sec-Butylbenzene
SEC-BUTYLBENZENE 134.2
D520
15 > 86
173 > 723
tert-Butylbenzene
TERT-BUTYLBENZEN
134.2
D521
16 > 51
169 > 719
n-Butyl benzoate
N-BUTYL BENZOATE
178.2
D1365
88 > 249
249 > 726
n-Butyl n-butyrate
N-BUTYL N-BUTYRA
144.2
D1385
24 > 164
164 > 726
p-tert-butylcatechol
P-TERT-BUTYLCATE
166.2
D1235
114 > 284
284 > 726
n-Butyl chloride
N-BUTYL CHLORIDE
92.57
D1586
-23 > 78
78 > 726
sec-Butyl chloride
SEC-BUTYL CHLORI
92.57
D1587
-23 > 68
68 > 726
tert-Butyl chloride
TERT-BUTYL CHLOR
92.57
D1535
6 > 50
50 > 726
n-Butylcyclohexane
NBUTYLCYCLOHEXA
140.3
D152
-19 > 180
180 > 726
alpha-Butylene
BUTENE1
56.10
B139
-80 > 119
-80 > 499
1,2-Butylene oxide
BUTYLOX
72.10
B254
-40 > 124
-40 > 499
n-Butyl ethyl ether
N-BUTYL ETHYL ET
102.2
D1448
-13 > 92
92 > 726
tert-Butyl ethyl ether
TERT-BUTYL ETHYL
102.2
D1428
-16 > 72
72 > 726
tert-Butylformamide TERTBUTYLFORMAM
101.1
D6852
72 > 201
201 > 726
n-Butyl formate
N-BUTYL FORMATE
102.1
D1304
16 > 106
106 > 726
T-Butyl hydroperoxide
T-BUTYL HYDROPER
90.12
D1473
132 > 726
n-Butyl isocyanate
N-BUTYL ISOCYANA
99.13
D2722
114 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-29
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
n-Butyl mercaptan
N-BUTYL MERCAPTA
90.19
D1841
-112 > 41
98 > 726
sec-Butyl mercaptan
SEC-BUTYL MERCAP
90.19
D1806
-140 > 84
84 > 726
tert-Butyl mercaptan
BMCAPTAN
90.19
B368
1 > 121
1 > 226
D1804
1 > 64
64 > 726
n-Butyl methacrylate
N-BUTYL METHACRY
142.2
D1389
-50 > 160
160 > 720
1-nButylnaphthalene
1-N-BUTYLNAPHTHA
184.3
D713
1 > 126
289 > 726
n-Butyl nonanoate
N-BUTYL NONANOAT
214.3
D1345
24 > 229
229 > 726
p-tert-Butylphenol
P-TERT-BUTYLPHEN
150.2
D1197
111 > 239
239 > 726
n-Butyl propionate
N-BUTYL PROPIONA
130.2
D1326
-89 > 146
146 > 726
n-Butyl stearate
N-BUTYL STEARATE
340.6
D1383
26 > 89
349 > 726
n-Butyl valerate
N-BUTYL VALERATE
158.2
D1346
19 > 186
186 > 726
Butyl vinyl ether
BUTYL VINYL ETHE
100.2
D1447
-48 > 93
93 > 726
2-Butyne
BUTYNE2
54.09
B190
-80 > 199
-80 > 499
2-Butyne-1,4-diol
2-BUTYNE-1,4-DIO
86.09
D1215
n-Butyraldehyde
BALDEHYD
72.11
B192
-80 > 159
-80 > 499
D1005
-96 > 74
74 > 326
B11
0 > 279
0 > 499
D1256
-5 > 163
163 > 433
n-Butyric acid
BUTYRICA
88.11
237 > 726
Butyric anhydride
BUTYRIC ANHYDRID
158.2
D1293
19 > 197
197 > 726
gammaButyrolactone
BLO
86.09
B452
-1 > 204
-1 > 232
D1092 n-Butyronitrile
6-30
BONITRIL
69.10
203 > 726
B187
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1782
-111 > 117
0 > 726
Caffeine
CAFFEINE
194.2
D6853
Calcium carbonate
CALCIUM CARBONAT 100.1
D2970
Calcium chloride
CALCIUM CHLORIDE
111.0
D1946
Calcium chloride 15 wt %
CACL2-15
18.02
B20
-6 > 93
Calcium chloride 25 CACL2-25 wt%
18.02
B28
-17 > 93
Calcium fluoride
78.07
D2971
CALCIUM FLUORIDE
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Calcium hydroxide
CALCIUM HYDROXID
74.09
D1914
Calcium oxide
CALCIUM OXIDE
56.08
D1995
Calcium sulfate
CALCIUM SULFATE
136.1
D1941
Calflo AF
CALFLO AF
380.0
B466
37 > 315
Calflo HTF
CALFLO HTF
380.0
B465
37 > 315
Camphene
CAMPHENE
136.2
D839
46 > 160
Camphor
CAMPHOR
152.2
D2850
epsilonCaprolactam
EPSILON-CAPTAM
113.2
D1880
69 > 176
269 > 726
epsilonCaprolactone
EPSILON-CAPTONE
114.1
D1093
112 > 240
214 > 726
Carbon
CARBON
12.01
D1991
Carbon dioxide
CO2
44.01
B55
-51 > 29
-18 > 749
D909
-53 > 16
-78 > 1226
B106
-80 > 159
-80 > 499
D1938
-73 > 46
0 > 526
B111
-199 > -149
-199 > 815
D908
-204 > -148
-203 > 976
B37
-10 > 199
-10 > 209
D1501
-22 > 76
-22 > 526
B225
-169 > -43
-169 > 399
D1616
-183 > -128
-128 > 476
Carbon disulfide Carbon monoxide Carbon tetrachloride Carbon tetrafluoride
CS2 CO CARBOTET
R14
76.13 28.01 153.8
88.00
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
160 > 726 207 > 726
Carbonyl fluoride
CARBONYL FLUORID
66.01
D1850
-107 > -85
-84 > 726
Carbonyl sulfide
CARBONYL SULFIDE
60.08
D1893
-138 > -50
-50 > 726
Cetyl methacrylate
CETYL METHACRYLA 310.5
D2353
14 > 354
367 > 726
Chemtherm 550
CHEM550
B461
65 > 259
1-Chloro-1,1difluoroethane
1-CHLORO-1,1-DIF
100.5
D2695
-73 > 86
-10 > 726
2-Chloro-1,1difluoroethylene
2-CHLORO-1,1-DIF
98.48
D1612
-53 > -18
26 > 726
1-Chloro-2,4dinitrobenzene
1-CHLORO-2,4-DIN
202.6
D4870
Chlorine
CHLORINE
70.91
B6
-73 > 115
-73 > 598
D918
-83 > -34
-73 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-31
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Chlorine dioxide
CHLORINE DIOXIDE
67.45
D2977
4-Chloro-34-CHLORO-3-NITRO nitrobenzotrifluoride
225.6
D4859
Chloroacetaldehyd e
CHLOROACETALDEH 78.50 Y
D4867
19 > 84
84 > 726
Chloroacetic acid
CHLOROACETIC ACI
94.50
D1852
69 > 126
189 > 726
Chloroacetyl chloride
CHLOROACETYL CHL
112.9
D1853
17 > 105
105 > 726
m-Chloroaniline
M-CHLOROANILINE
127.6
D4858
21 > 228
228 > 726
o-Chloroaniline
O-CHLOROANILINE
127.6
D1859
-2 > 208
208 > 726
p-Chloroaniline
P-CHLOROANILINE
127.6
D3860
103 > 126
230 > 726
o-Chlorobenzoic acid
O-CHLOROBENZOIC
156.6
D1874
141 > 286
286 > 726
pChlorobenzotrifluoride
P-CHLOROBENZOTRI 180.6
D1857
-19 > 138
138 > 726
m-Chlorobenzoyl chloride
M-CHLOROBENZOYL
175.0
D1596
88 > 224
224 > 724
Chlorodifluoromethan e
CHLORODIFLUOROM 86.47 E
D1604
-103 > 46
-40 > 226
2-Chloroethanol
2-CHLOROETHANOL
80.51
D2898
19 > 128
128 > 726
Chloroform
CHLOROFO
119.4
B60
-40 > 199
-40 > 259
D1521
-63 > 80
0 > 526
1Chloronaphthalene
6-32
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase 10 > 726
1CHLORONAPHTHAL
162.6
D1589
0 > 176
259 > 726
mMChloronitrobenzene CHLORONITROBEN
157.6
D2882
97 > 235
235 > 726
oOChloronitrobenzene CHLORONITROBEN
157.6
D4882
105 > 245
245 > 726
pPChloronitrobenzene CHLORONITROBEN
157.6
D4883
102 > 241
241 > 726
Chloropentafluoroetha ne
CHLOROPENTAFLUO 154.5 R
D2692
-83 > -39
-23 > 226
1-Chloropentane
1-CHLOROPENTANE
106.6
D1588
-98 > 108
108 > 726
m-Chlorophenol
M-CHLOROPHENOL
128.6
D2893
91 > 213
213 > 726
o-Chlorophenol
O-CHLOROPHENOL
128.6
D2892
9 > 174
174 > 726
p-Chlorophenol
P-CHLOROPHENOL
128.6
D2894
95 > 219
219 > 726
Chloroprene
CHLORPRE
88.54
B296
-17 > 259
-17 > 537
D1583
-62 > 59
59 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
2-Chloropropene
2-CHLOROPROPENE
76.53
D1595
-34 > 22
26 > 722
3-Chloropropene
ALLYLCL
76.53
B382
0 > 148
0 > 499
D1544
-16 > 44
44 > 726
Chlorosulfonic acid
CHLOROSULFONIC A 116.5
D2906
153 > 726
o-Chlorotoluene
O-CHLOROTOLUENE
126.6
D1577
54 > 159
159 > 726
p-Chlorotoluene
P-CHLOROTOLUENE
126.6
D1578
56 > 162
162 > 726
Chlorotrifluoroethyl ene
CHLOROTRIFLUORO E
116.5
D2691
-158 > -27
26 > 726
Chlorotrifluorometh ane
R13
104.5
B13
-62 > 219
-62 > 332
D1606
-103 > -29
-43 > 226
Chromium trioxide
CHROMIUM TRIOXID
99.99
D2905
Chrysene
CHRYSENE
228.3
D806
315 > 440
440 > 726
Cinnamic acid
CINNAMIC ACID
148.2
D2271
132 > 299
299 > 726
Citraconic acid
CITRACONIC ACID
130.1
D2277
141 > 333
333 > 726
Citric acid
CITRIC ACID
192.1
D5879
385 > 726
Coal flue gas
CFG
30.00
B204
99 > 899
m-Cresol
M-CRESOL
108.1
B356
19 > 199
0 > 499
D1183
24 > 202
202 > 726
o-Cresol
O-CRESOL
108.1
D1182
31 > 126
190 > 726
p-Cresol
P-CRESOL
108.1
D1184
34 > 201
201 > 726
transCrotonaldehyde
TRANSCROTONALDE
70.09
D1036
12 > 104
104 > 726
cis-Crotonic acid
CIS-CROTONIC ACI
86.09
D1273
15 > 166
171 > 726
trans-Crotonic acid
TRANS-CROTONIC A
86.09
D1274
71 > 184
184 > 726
cis-Crotonitrile
CIS-CROTONITRILE
67.09
D1798
26 > 107
107 > 726
trans-Crotonitrile
TRANS-CROTONITRI
67.09
D1789
19 > 121
121 > 726
Cumene
CUMENE
120.2
B50
-17 > 199
-17 > 262
D510
-96 > 152
152 > 726
Cumene hydroperoxide
CUMENE HYDROPERO
152.2
D1472
p-cumylphenol
P-CUMYLPHENOL
212.3
D2197
Cupric chloride
CUPRIC CHLORIDE
134.5
D2980
Cupric sulfate
CUPRIC SULFATE
159.6
D2978
Cuprous chloride
CUPROUS CHLORIDE
99.00
D2979
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
169 > 726 144 > 334
334 > 726
6-33
6-34
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Cyanogen
CYANOGEN
52.04
D1799
-27 > -21
-21 > 326
Cyanogen chloride
CYANOGEN CHLORID
61.47
D1594
-4 > 12
12 > 726
Cyclobutane
CBUTANE
56.10
B241
-80 > 119
-80 > 499
D102
-83 > 12
12 > 726
Cycloheptane
CYCLOHEPTANE
98.19
D159
-8 > 118
118 > 726
1,3Cyclohexadiene
1,3-CYCLOHEXADIE
80.13
D331
-93 > 80
80 > 726
Cyclohexane
CYCLOHEX
84.16
B57
9 > 204
9 > 294
D137
11 > 80
51 > 626
1,4Cyclohexanedicarbox ylic acid
1,4-CYCLOHEXANED
172.2
D1264
312 > 395
395 > 726
Cyclohexanol
CYCLOHEXANOL
100.2
D1151
23 > 160
160 > 726
Cyclohexanone
CHEXANON
98.15
B338
-17 > 148
-17 > 499
D1080
16 > 155
155 > 726
Cyclohexanone oxime
CYCLOHEXANONE OX
113.2
D4887
207 > 726
Cyclohexene
CHEXENE
82.14
B246
-40 > 239
-40 > 499
D270
0 > 82
82 > 722
Cyclohexylamine
CYCLOHEXYLAMINE
99.18
D1729
34 > 132
134 > 726
Cyclohexylbenzene
CYCLOHEXYLBENZE N
160.3
D557
6 > 240
240 > 726
2-Cyclohexyl cyclohexanone
2-CYCLOHEXYL CYC
180.3
D1097
24 > 263
263 > 726
Cyclohexyl isocyanate
CYCLOHEXYL ISOCY
125.2
D2723
168 > 726
Cyclohexyl peroxide
CYCLOHEXYL PEROX
116.2
D1474
216 > 726
Cyclooctadiene
COCTDIEN
108.2
B236
-40 > 214
-40 > 499
1,5-Cyclooctadiene
1,5-CYCLOOCTADIE
108.2
D333
-69 > 150
150 > 726
Cyclopentadiene
CYCLOPENTADIENE
66.10
D315
-73 > 41
41 > 726
Cyclopentane
CPENTANE
70.13
B242
-80 > 139
-80 > 499
D104
-48 > 49
0 > 326
Cyclopentanone
CYCLOPENTANONE
84.12
D1079
44 > 86
130 > 726
Cyclopentene
CPENTENE
68.11
B256
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D269
-135 > 44
44 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Cyclopropane
CPROPANE
42.08
B255
-80 > 69
-80 > 499
D101
-123 > -33
-32 > 172
m-Cymene
M-CYMENE
134.2
D523
-63 > 175
175 > 725
o-Cymene
O-CYMENE
134.2
D522
-23 > 178
178 > 718
p-Cymene
CYMENE
134.2
B47
19 > 315
19 > 315
D524
-67 > 177
177 > 726
Decafluorobutane
DECAFLUOROBUTAN 238.0 E
D1622
-56 > -2
26 > 726
cisDecahydronaphthalen e
CISDECAHYDRONAP
138.3
D153
19 > 195
195 > 726
transDecahydronaphthalen e
TRANSDECAHYDRON
138.3
D154
19 > 187
187 > 726
1-Decanal
1-DECANAL
156.3
D1020
55 > 214
214 > 726
n-Decane
DECANE
142.3
B257
-17 > 162
-17 > 426
D56
-29 > 56
174 > 726
n-Decanoic acid
N-DECANOIC ACID
172.3
D1254
31 > 191
269 > 726
1-Decanol
1-DECANOL
158.3
D1136
27 > 157
230 > 726
1-Decene
1-DECENE
140.3
D260
0 > 170
170 > 726
n-Decylamine
N-DECYLAMINE
157.3
D2710
58 > 218
220 > 726
n-Decylbenzene
N-DECYLBENZENE
218.4
D554
-14 > 297
297 > 726
nDecylcyclohexane
NDECYLCYCLOHEXA
224.4
D158
-1 > 126
297 > 726
n-Decyl mercaptan
N-DECYL MERCAPTA
174.4
D1826
24 > 239
239 > 726
1-nDecylnaphthalene
1-N-DECYLNAPHTHA
268.4
D712
14 > 226
378 > 726
Dehydroabietylami ne
DEHYDROABIETYLA M
285.5
D1730
158 > 368
386 > 726
Deuterium
DEUTERIUM
4.03
D925
Deuterium oxide
DEUTERIUM OXIDE
20.03
D1997
Dextrose
DEXTROSE
180.2
D4881
Diacetone alcohol
DIACETONE ALCOHO 116.2
Diallyl maleate
DIALLYL MALEATE
Diamylamine
-39 > 206 3 > 99
101 > 726
D2854
-43 > 96
168 > 718
196.2
D2381
73 > 243
246 > 726
DIAMYLAMINE
157.3
D3722
46 > 196
202 > 726
Dibenzofuran
DIBENZOFURAN
168.2
D1480
284 > 726
Dibenzopyrrole
DIBENZOPYRROLE
167.2
D2789
354 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-35
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Dibenzyl ether
DIBENZYL ETHER
198.3
D1463
Diborane
DIBORANE
27.67
D1983
235.9
D1678
35 > 217
217 > 726
m-Dibromobenzene MDIBROMOBENZENE
6-36
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase 3 > 176
288 > 726 -92 > 726
Dibromodifluorometha ne
DIBROMODIFLUORO M
209.8
D2688
-34 > 22
22 > 726
1,1-Dibromoethane
1,1-DIBROMOETHAN
187.9
D1672
-62 > 107
107 > 726
1,2-Dibromoethane
EDB
187.9
B154
19 > 259
19 > 499
D1673
9 > 131
131 > 726
Dibromomethane
DIBROMOMETHANE
173.8
D2637
-33 > 96
96 > 726
1,2Dibromotetrafluoroeth ane
1,2-DIBROMOTETRA
259.8
D1611
-46 > 49
47 > 726
Di-n-butylamine
DBA
129.2
B144
-40 > 234
-40 > 499
D1744
27 > 158
158 > 726
2,6-Di-tert-butyl-pcresol
2,6-DI-TERT-BUTY
220.4
D2113
86 > 264
264 > 726
Di-n-butyl ether
BETHER
130.2
B253
-80 > 249
-80 > 499
D1404
-95 > 140
46 > 726
Di-sec-butyl ether
DI-SEC-BUTYL ETH
130.2
D1406
26 > 121
121 > 726
Di-tert-butyl ether
DI-TERT-BUTYL ET
130.2
D1423
1 > 107
107 > 726
Dibutyl maleate
DIBUTYL MALEATE
228.3
D2382
84 > 254
279 > 726
Di-t-butyl peroxide
DI-T-BUTYL PEROX
146.2
D1482
Dibutyl phthalate
DIBUTYL PHTHALAT
278.3
D2376
20 > 146
339 > 526
Dibutyl sebacate
DIBUTYL SEBACATE
314.5
D1384
0 > 176
348 > 726
Di-n-butyl sulfone
DI-N-BUTYL SULFO
178.3
D1849
110 > 290
290 > 726
1,3-Dichloro-trans2-butene
1,3-DICHLORO-TRA
125.0
D1598
35 > 128
128 > 726
1,4-Dichloro-cis-2butene
1,4-DICHLORO-CIS
125.0
D1593
46 > 152
152 > 726
1,4-Dichloro-trans2-butene
1,4-DICHLORO-TRA
125.0
D1505
0 > 156
156 > 726
3,4-Dichloro-1butene
3,4-DICHLORO-1-B
125.0
D1597
21 > 114
114 > 726
1,2-Dichloro-4nitrobenzene
1,2-DICHLORO-4-N
192.0
D4880
Dichloroacetaldehy de
DICHLOROACETALD E
112.9
D4868
4 > 88
88 > 726
110 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Dichloroacetic acid
DICHLOROACETIC A
128.9
D3853
13 > 106
193 > 726
Dichloroacetyl chloride
DICHLOROACETYL C
147.4
D1854
19 > 107
107 > 726
3,4-Dichloroaniline
3,4-DICHLOROANIL
162.0
D4879
126 > 271
271 > 726
m-Dichlorobenzene
DCB
147.0
B302
-17 > 204
-17 > 272
D1573
-24 > 126
173 > 726
o-Dichlorobenzene
ODICHLOROBENZEN
147.0
D1572
0 > 78
180 > 726
p-Dichlorobenzene
P-DICHLOROBENZEN 147.0
D1574
52 > 174
174 > 726
2,4Dichlorobenzotriflu oride
2,4-DICHLOROBENZ
215.0
D1858
-6 > 177
177 > 717
1,4-Dichlorobutane
1,4-DICHLOROBUTA
127.0
D1508
-37 > 153
153 > 726
Dichlorodifluoromet hane
R12
120.9
B16
-62 > 93
-84 > 399
D1601
-103 > 86
-23 > 301
1,1-Dichloroethane
1,1-DICHLOROETHA
98.96
D1522
-48 > 57
57 > 326
1,2-Dichloroethane
EDC
98.97
B78
-17 > 199
-17 > 292
D1523
-19 > 83
83 > 287
B163
-20 > 174
-20 > 499
D1580
-64 > 60
60 > 426
B155
-20 > 174
-20 > 499
D1581
-49 > 47
47 > 426
cis-1,2Dichloroethylene trans-1,2Dichloroethylene
DCEC
DCET
96.95
96.95
1,1Dichloroethylene
1,1-DICHLOROETHY
96.94
D1591
-122 > 31
31 > 399
Dichlorofluorometh ane
R21
102.9
B227
-80 > 159
-100 > 399
D1696
-63 > 99
6 > 176
B95
-62 > 199
-62 > 499
D1511
-58 > 46
6 > 726
Dichloromethane
MECHLOR
84.90
1,5Dichloropentane
1,5-DICHLOROPENT
141.0
D1509
-72 > 179
179 > 726
3,4-Dichlorophenyl isocyanate
3,4-DICHLOROPHEN
188.0
D4860
93 > 201
227 > 726
1,1Dichloropropane
1,1-DICHLOROPROP
113.0
D2526
6 > 88
88 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-37
6-38
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
1,2Dichloropropane
PROPYLDC
113.0
B117
-73 > 191
-73 > 499
D1526
-48 > 89
96 > 726
1,3Dichloropropane
1,3-DICHLOROPROP
113.0
D2527
28 > 120
120 > 726
2,3Dichloropropene
2,3-DICHLOROPROP
111.0
D2545
26 > 92
92 > 726
Dichlorosilane
DICHLOROSILANE
101.0
D1935
-122 > 128
8 > 326
1,2Dichlorotetrafluoroeth ane
1,2-DICHLOROTETR
170.9
D1609
-39 > 99
3 > 226
2,4-Dichlorotoluene
2,4-DICHLOROTOLU
161.0
D1579
-13 > 201
201 > 721
Dicumyl peroxide
DICUMYL PEROXIDE
270.4
D1475
trans-Dicyano-1butene
TRANS-DICYANO-1-
106.1
D2734
45 > 225
225 > 726
1,4-Dicyano-2butene
1,4-DICYANO-2-BU
106.1
D2735
84 > 273
273 > 726
cis-Dicyano-1butene
CIS-DICYANO-1-BU
106.1
D2733
45 > 227
227 > 726
Dicyclohexylamine
DICYCLOHEXYLAMIN
181.3
D2730
95 > 255
255 > 726
Dicyclopentadiene
DICYCLOPENTADIEN
132.2
D316
31 > 169
169 > 726
Diethanolamine
DEAMINE
105.1
B331
37 > 148
D1724
27 > 176
268 > 726
Diethlene glycol 20 wt %
DEGLY-20
18.00
B244
-1 > 148
Diethlene glycol 80 wt %
DEGLY-80
18.00
B245
-1 > 148
1,2-diethoxyethane
1,2-DIETHOXYETHA
118.2
D2456
7 > 121
121 > 726
Diethylamine
DEA
73.14
B92
-40 > 199
-40 > 249
D1710
-24 > 55
0 > 726
n,n-Diethylaniline
N,N-DIETHYLANILI
149.2
D1753
28 > 216
216 > 726
2,6-Diethylaniline
2,6-DIETHYLANILI
149.2
D2791
65 > 225
235 > 726
m-Diethylbenzene
M-DIETHYLBENZENE
134.2
D526
-83 > 176
181 > 721
o-Diethylbenzene
O-DIETHYLBENZENE
134.2
D525
-31 > 183
183 > 726
p-Diethylbenzene
P-DIETHYLBENZENE
134.2
D527
-42 > 183
183 > 726
Diethyl carbonate
DIETHYL CARBONAT
118.1
D1392
Diethyl disulfide
DIETHYL DISULFID
122.3
D1824
-101 > 26
153 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Diethylene glycol
DEGLY
106.1
B332
9 > 154
9 > 499
D1202
-3 > 126
244 > 726
Diethylene glycol di-n-butyl ether
DIETHYLENE GDBE
218.3
D1459
19 > 151
255 > 726
Diethylene glycol diethyl ether
DIETHYLENE GDEE
162.2
D1458
9 > 188
188 > 726
Diethylene glycol dimethyl ether
DIETHYLENE GDME
134.2
D1456
-69 > 126
159 > 726
Diethylene glycol ethyl ether acetate
DIETHYLENE GEEA
176.2
D5885
56 > 216
217 > 726
Diethylene glycol monobutyl ether
DIETHYLENE GME
162.2
D4857
53 > 213
230 > 726
Diethylene glycol 40 wt %
DEGLY-40
18.00
B249
-1 > 148
Diethylene glycol 60 wt %
DEGLY-60
18.00
B250
-1 > 148
Diethylene triamine
DIETHYLENE TRIAM
103.2
D2717
64 > 207
207 > 726
Diethyl ether
EETHER
74.12
B149
-40 > 159
-40 > 499
D1402
-73 > 99
-73 > 326
Diethyl maleate
DIETHYL MALEATE
172.2
D2386
66 > 224
224 > 726
Diethyl malonate
DIETHYL MALONATE
160.2
D1394
-33 > 126
198 > 726
Diethyl oxalate
DIETHYL OXALATE
146.1
D1393
-13 > 86
185 > 726
3,3-diethylpentane
3,3-DIETHYLPENTA
128.3
D50
-33 > 146
146 > 726
Diethyl phthalate
DIETHYL PHTHALAT
222.2
D2375
-4 > 176
293 > 726
Diethyl succinate
DIETHYL SUCCINAT
174.2
D2378
19 > 216
216 > 726
Diethyl sulfate
DIETHYL SULFATE
154.2
D5875
Diethyl sulfide
DIETHYL SULFIDE
90.19
D1818
-48 > 48
92 > 726
1,1-Difluoroethane
1,1-DIFLUOROETHA
66.05
D1640
-30 > 24
-25 > 726
1,2-Difluoroethane
1,2-DIFLUOROETHA
66.05
D2642
-35 > 30
30 > 726
1,1Difluoroethylene
VIF
64.00
B217
-120 > 0
-120 > 399
D1629
-85 > -85
-85 > 726
Difluoromethane
DIFLUOROMETHANE
52.02
D1614
-72 > -51
-51 > 726
Diglycolic acid
DIGLYCOLIC ACID
134.1
D4851
156 > 336
336 > 726
Dihexyl adipate
DIHEXYL ADIPATE
314.5
D2379
110 > 300
347 > 726
Di-n-hexyl ether
DI-N-HEXYL ETHER
186.3
D1412
-42 > 225
225 > 726
2,5-dihydrofuran
2,5-DIHYDROFURAN
70.09
D1477
0 > 65
65 > 726
Diiodomethane
DIIODOMETHANE
267.8
D1692
24 > 89
181 > 299
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-39
6-40
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Diisobutylamine
DIISOBUTYLAMINE
129.2
D1718
16 > 139
139 > 726
Diisobutyl ketone
DIISOBUTYL KETON
142.2
D1068
34 > 168
168 > 726
Diisobutyl phthalate DIISOBUTYL PHTHA
278.3
D1376
107 > 126
319 > 726
Diisodecyl phthalate
DIISODECYL PHTHA
446.7
D1371
1 > 101
449 > 699
Diisooctyl phthalate
DIISOOCTYL PHTHA
390.6
D1355
24 > 56
420 > 726
Diisopropanolamin e
DIISOPROPANOLAMI
133.2
D6864
62 > 53
248 > 726
Diisopropylamine
DIPA
101.2
B238
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1743
1 > 83
83 > 726
mM-DIISOPROPYLBEN Diisopropylbenzene
162.3
D543
-48 > 203
203 > 726
pP-DIISOPROPYLBEN Diisopropylbenzene
162.3
D544
-17 > 210
210 > 726
Diisopropyl ether
DIISOPROPYL ETHE
102.2
D1403
-85 > 68
54 > 726
Diisopropyl ketone
DIISOPROPYL KETO
114.2
D1069
-68 > 124
124 > 726
Diketene
DIKETENE
84.07
D1099
Dimercaptoethyl ether
DIMERCAPTOETHYL
138.3
D6857
86 > 216
1,2Dimethoxyethane
1,2-DIMETHOXYETH
90.12
D1455
-23 > 84
84 > 726
N,nDimethylacetamide
DMAC
87.12
B252
-20 > 165
-40 > 499
D2856
19 > 126
166 > 726
-32 > 26
26 > 726
126 > 726
Dimethylacetylene
DIMETHYLACETYLEN 54.09
D404
Dimethylaluminum chloride
DIMETHYLALUMINUM 92.50
D2969
Dimethylamine
DMA
B75
-62 > 119
-62 > 229
D1702
-73 > 24
6 > 726
45.09
125 > 726
P-DIMETHYLAMINOB pDimethylaminobenz aldehyde
149.2
D4872
142 > 314
314 > 726
n,n-Dimethylaniline
N,N-DIMETHYLANIL
121.2
D1796
70 > 193
193 > 726
2,3-Dimethyl-1,3butadiene
2,3-DIMETHYL-1,3
82.15
D319
26 > 68
68 > 726
2,2-Dimethylbutane
2,2-DIMETHYLBUTA
86.18
D14
-3 > 49
49 > 585
2,3-Dimethylbutane
DMB
86.18
B299
-45 > 57
-45 > 399
D15
0 > 57
57 > 717
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
3,3-Dimethyl-2butanone
3,3-DIMETHYL-2-B
100.2
D1066
-52 > 106
106 > 726
2,3-Dimethyl-1butene
2,3-DIMETHYL-1-B
84.16
D230
-157 > 55
55 > 726
2,3-Dimethyl-2butene
2,3-DIMETHYL-2-B
84.16
D232
-74 > 73
73 > 726
3,3-Dimethyl-1butene
3,3-DIMETHYL-1-B
84.16
D231
-115 > 41
41 > 726
Dimethylchlorosilan e
DIMETHYLCHLOROSI 94.62
D3987
-29 > 35
35 > 726
cis-1,2Dimethylcyclohexa ne
DMCHEXC2
B263
-45 > 121
-73 > 426
D142
-23 > 129
129 > 726
B270
-67 > 112
-67 > 426
D144
-75 > 120
120 > 726
B269
-59 > 121
-73 > 426
D146
-87 > 124
124 > 726
B261
-45 > 121
-101 > 426
D143
-88 > 123
123 > 726
B260
-84 > 118
-73 > 426
D145
-73 > 124
124 > 726
B274
-28 > 109
-73 > 426
D147
-23 > 119
119 > 726
B258
-28 > 109
-101 > 426
D141
-33 > 119
119 > 726
B273
-73 > 61
-73 > 426
D111
-62 > 90
90 > 726
cis-1,3Dimethylcyclohexa ne cis-1,4Dimethylcyclohexa ne trans-1,2Dimethylcyclohexa ne trans-1,3Dimethylcyclohexa ne trans-1,4Dimethylcyclohexa ne 1,1Dimethylcyclohexa ne Cis 1,3Dimethylcyclopenta ne
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
DMCHEXC3
DMCHEXC4
DMCHEXT2
DMCHEXT3
DMCHEXT4
DMCHEX
DMCPENC3
112.2
112.2
112.2
112.2
112.2
112.2
112.3
98.19
6-41
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
cis-1,2Dimethylcyclopenta ne
DMCPENC2
98.19
B268
-31 > 93
-73 > 426
D109
-53 > 99
99 > 726
B272
-66 > 65
-73 > 426
D112
-133 > 91
91 > 726
B271
-73 > 56
-73 > 426
D110
-117 > 91
91 > 726
B282
-45 > 65
-73 > 426
D108
-59 > 87
87 > 726
Trans 1,3Dimethylcyclopenta ne trans-1,2Dimethylcyclopenta ne 1,1Dimethylcyclopenta ne
6-42
DMCPENT3
DMCPENT2
DMCPEN
98.19
98.19
98.19
Dimethyldichlorosil ane
DIMETHYLDICHLORO 129.1
D3989
-12 > 70
70 > 376
2,3-Dimethyl-2,3diphenylbutane
2,3-DIMETHYL-2,3
238.4
D581
118 > 315
315 > 726
Dimethyl disulfide
DIMETHYL DISULFI
94.20
D1828
-84 > 86
109 > 726
Dimethylethanolami DIMETHYLETHANOL ne A
89.14
D6863
Dimethyl ether
46.07
B136
-80 > 114
-80 > 499
D1401
-141 > -24
-24 > 726
METHER
133 > 726
2,2-Dimethyl-3ethylpentane
2,2-DIMETHYL-3-E
128.3
D190
-99 > 133
133 > 726
2,4-Dimethyl-3ethylpentane
2,4-DIMETHYL-3-E
128.3
D192
-122 > 136
136 > 726
N,nDimethylformamide
DMF
73.09
B175
0 > 149
0 > 499
D1876
0 > 151
151 > 726
2,2Dimethylheptane
2,2-DIMETHYLHEPT
128.3
D96
-71 > 120
132 > 726
2,6Dimethylheptane
2,6-DIMETHYLHEPT
128.3
D176
-70 > 113
135 > 726
2,6-Dimethyl-4heptanol
2,6-DIMETHYL-4-H
144.3
D2117
28 > 126
177 > 726
2,2Dimethylhexane
2,2-DIMETHYLHEXA
114.2
D32
-80 > 95
106 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
2,3Dimethylhexane
2,3-DIMETHYLHEXA
114.2
D33
-1 > 115
115 > 726
2,4Dimethylhexane
2,4-DIMETHYLHEXA
114.2
D34
-1 > 109
109 > 726
2,5Dimethylhexane
2,5-DIMETHYLHEXA
114.2
D35
-23 > 109
109 > 726
3,3Dimethylhexane
3,3-DIMETHYLHEXA
114.2
D36
-33 > 111
111 > 726
3,4Dimethylhexane
3,4-DIMETHYLHEXA
114.2
D37
-1 > 117
117 > 726
Dimethyl isophthalate
DIMETHYL ISOPHTH
194.2
D1377
86 > 249
249 > 726
Dimethylmaleate
DIMETHYL MALEATE
144.1
D2387
24 > 204
204 > 726
2,6Dimethylnaphthale ne
2,6-DIMETHYLNAPH
156.2
D709
110 > 226
261 > 726
2,7Dimethylnaphthale ne
2,7-DIMETHYLNAPH
156.2
D715
95 > 176
262 > 726
2,2-Dimethyloctane
2,2-DIMETHYLOCTA
142.3
D72
-48 > 151
156 > 726
2,2Dimethylpentane
2,2-DIMETHYLPENT
100.2
D21
-123 > 36
79 > 726
2,3Dimethylpentane
2,3-DIMETHYLPENT
100.2
D22
-113 > 89
89 > 719
2,4Dimethylpentane
DMPENT
100.2
B300
-101 > 93
-101 > 468
D23
-103 > 70
80 > 720
-134 > 86
86 > 726
3,3Dimethylpentane
3,3-DIMETHYLPENT
100.2
D24
Dimethyl phthalate
DIMETHYL PHTHALA
194.2
D2377
-1 > 126
283 > 726
2,2-Dimethyl-1propanol
2,2-DIMETHYL-1-P
88.15
D1113
53 > 113
113 > 726
2,6Dimethylpyridine
2,6-DIMETHYLPYRI
107.2
D2796
38 > 144
144 > 726
Dimethyl silane
DIMETHYL SILANE
60.17
D3985
Dimethyl sulfate
DIMETHYL SULFATE
126.1
D5874
Dimethyl sulfide
DMS
62.13
B173
-80 > 159
-80 > 499
D1820
-48 > 37
37 > 726
-19 > 726
Dimethyl sulfoxide
DIMETHYL SULFOXI
78.13
D1844
18 > 148
188 > 726
Dimethyl terephthalate
DIMETHYL TEREPHT
194.2
D1381
150 > 193
287 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-43
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
m-Dinitrobenzene
M-DINITROBENZENE
168.1
D2740
o-Dinitrobenzene
O-DINITROBENZENE
168.1
D2741
116 > 239
p-Dinitrobenzene
P-DINITROBENZENE
168.1
D2742
173 > 209
2,4-Dinitrotoluene
2,4-DINITROTOLUE
182.1
D2743
2,5-Dinitrotoluene
2,5-DINITROTOLUE
182.1
D2748
2,6-Dinitrotoluene
2,6-DINITROTOLUE
182.1
D2744
3,4-Dinitrotoluene
3,4-DINITROTOLUE
182.1
D2745
3,5-Dinitrotoluene
3,5-DINITROTOLUE
182.1
D2749
Dinonyl ether
DINONYL ETHER
270.5
D1418
Dinonylphenol
DINONYLPHENOL
346.6
D2198
169 > 389
448 > 726
Di-n-octyl ether
DI-N-OCTYL ETHER
242.4
D1424
24 > 286
286 > 726
Dioctyl phthalate
DOP
390.6
B412
0 > 99
D1354
24 > 86
383 > 726
B228
0 > 279
0 > 499
D1421
11 > 101
100 > 726
1,4-dioxane
DIOXANE
317 > 726
Di-n-pentyl ether
DI-N-PENTYL ETHE
158.3
D1425
24 > 186
186 > 726
Diphenyl
DIPHENYL
158.0
B354
79 > 232
99 > 499
Diphenylacetylene
DIPHENYLACETYLEN 178.2
D424
62 > 299
299 > 719
Diphenylamine
DIPHENYLAMINE
169.2
D1756
101 > 226
301 > 726
1,1-Diphenylethane
1,1-DIPHENYLETHA
182.3
D562
-8 > 126
272 > 726
1,2-Diphenylethane
1,2-DIPHENYLETHA
182.3
D564
62 > 280
280 > 726
Diphenyl ether
DIPHENYL ETHER
170.2
D1465
26 > 146
258 > 726
Diphenylmethane
DPHENMET
168.2
B355
37 > 226
0 > 499
D563
25 > 146
264 > 726
Diphenylmethane4,4'-diisocyanate
DIPHENYLMETHANE-
250.3
D2736
2,4-Diphenyl-4methylpentene-1
2,4-DIPHENYL-4-M
236.4
D566
26 > 340
340 > 726
n,n'-Diphenyl-pphenylenediamine
N,N'-DIPHENYL-P-
260.3
D2737
179 > 399
414 > 726
1,3diphenyltriazene
1,3-DIPHENYLTRIA
197.2
D1735
Di-n-propylamine
DI-N-PROPYLAMINE
101.2
D1707
4 > 108
26 > 726
150.3
D1829
-85 > 195
195 > 726
Di-n-propyl disulfide DI-N-PROPYL DISU
6-44
88.10
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
335 > 726
336 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Dipropylene glycol
DPGLY-L
134.2
B201
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase 0 > 182
0 > 499
D1213
-40 > 231
231 > 726
Di-n-propyl ether
DI-N-PROPYL ETHE
102.2
D1446
-123 > 90
90 > 726
Dipropyl maleate
DIPROPYL MALEATE
200.2
D2388
72 > 247
247 > 726
Dipropyl phthalate
DIPROPYL PHTHALA
250.3
D1375
-23 > 126
317 > 726
Di-n-propyl sulfone
DI-N-PROPYL SULF
150.2
D1848
108 > 269
269 > 726
Disilane
DISILANE
62.22
D1980
m-Divinylbenzene
M-DIVINYLBENZENE
130.2
D614
38 > 199
199 > 726
Divinyl ether
DIVINYL ETHER
70.09
D1414
-101 > 28
28 > 726
1-Dodecanal
1-DODECANAL
184.3
D1025
69 > 239
249 > 726
n-Dodecane
DODECANE
170.3
B298
-3 > 215
-3 > 509
D64
-9 > 56
216 > 526
-14 > 726
n-Dodecanoic acid
N-DODECANOIC ACI
200.3
D1269
43 > 298
298 > 726
1-Dodecanol
1-DODECANOL
186.3
D1140
57 > 157
261 > 726
1-Dodecene
1-DODECENE
168.3
D262
-35 > 32
213 > 726
n-Dodecylamine
N-DODECYLAMINE
185.4
D2712
74 > 244
259 > 726
n-Dodecylbenzene
NDODECYLBENZENE
246.4
D574
9 > 149
326 > 726
n-Dodecyl mercaptan
N-DODECYL MERCAP
202.4
D1837
88 > 268
274 > 726
Dowtherm A
DOWA
166.0
B42
15 > 398
15 > 398
Dowtherm E
DOWE
147.0
B265
0 > 244
0 > 259
Dowtherm G
DOWG
215.0
B180
26 > 371
Dowtherm J
DOWJ
134.0
B325
-45 > 301
-45 > 301
n-Eicosane
EICOSANE
282.5
B264
37 > 259
-73 > 426
D73
36 > 266
343 > 501
n-Eicosanic acid
N-EICOSANIC ACID
312.5
D2267
75 > 176
396 > 726
1-Eicosanol
1-EICOSANOL
298.6
D1148
122 > 312
355 > 726
1-Eicosene
1-EICOSENE
280.5
D284
28 > 342
342 > 726
alphaEpichlorohydrin
EPICLHYD
92.53
B158
-50 > 149
-50 > 499
D1881
24 > 118
118 > 726
1,2-Epoxybutane
1,2-EPOXYBUTANE
72.11
D1471
-93 > 63
63 > 726
Ethane
ETHANE
30.07
B96
-128 > 29
-128 > 648
D2
-182 > 6
-88 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-45
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
1,2-Ethane diphosphonic acid
1,2-ETHANE DIPHO
190.0
D3885
1,2-Ethanedithiol
1,2-ETHANEDITHIO
94.20
D6860
58 > 146
146 > 726
Ethanol
ETHANOL
46.07
B44
-40 > 199
-40 > 249
D1102
-73 > 79
19 > 726
-3 > 82
Ethanol 50 wt %
ETOH-50
32.04
B374
2-Ethoxyethanol
2-ETHOXYETHANOL
90.12
D2861
2-2-Ethoxyethoxy ethanol
2-2-E ETHANOL
134.2
D2864
24 > 126
201 > 726
2-Ethoxyethyl acetate
2-ETHOXYETHYL AC
132.2
D5884
25 > 156
156 > 726
Ethyl acetate
EACETATE
88.10
B132
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1313
-53 > 77
0 > 726
134 > 726
Ethyl acetoacetate
ETHYL ACETOACETA 130.1
D5887
Ethylacetylene
BUTYNE1
B166
-100 > 179
-100 > 499
D403
-125 > 8
8 > 526
B151
0 > 169
0 > 499
D1342
19 > 140
99 > 726
Ethyl acrylate
6-46
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
EACRYLAT
54.09 100.1
180 > 726
Ethyl aluminum sesquichloride
ETHYL ALUMINUM S
247.5
D5852
Ethylamine
EAMINE
45.08
B49
-62 > 159
-62 > 207
D1704
-45 > 16
16 > 726
o-ethylaniline
O-ETHYLANILINE
121.2
D2724
-46 > 209
209 > 726
Ethylbenzene
EBENZENE
106.2
B90
-40 > 199
-40 > 284
D504
-25 > 136
136 > 726
Ethyl benzoate
ETHYL BENZOATE
150.2
D1391
-23 > 213
213 > 726
2-Ethyl-1-butanol
2-ETHYL-1-BUTANO
102.2
D1147
-36 > 146
146 > 726
2-Ethyl-1-butene
2-ETHYL-1-BUTENE
84.16
D229
-131 > 64
64 > 726
Ethyl n-butyrate
ETHYL N-BUTYRATE
116.2
D1333
-23 > 121
121 > 721
2-ethyl butyric acid
2-ETHYL BUTYRIC
116.2
D2279
-15 > 193
193 > 726
Ethyl chloride
ECHLORID
64.52
B123
-62 > 149
-62 > 499
D1503
-123 > 66
0 > 726
Ethyl chloroformate
ETHYL CHLOROFORM
108.5
D4873
-19 > 92
92 > 726
Ethyl cyanoacetate
ETHYL CYANOACETA 113.1
D5889
66 > 205
205 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Ethylcyclohexane
ECHEX
112.2
B262
-51 > 121
-73 > 426
D140
-73 > 131
131 > 726
B283
-43 > 81
-58 > 426
D107
-19 > 28
103 > 726
B126
-128 > 4
-128 > 537
D201
-169 > -23
-103 > 626
Ethylcyclopentane Ethylene
ECPENT ETHYLENE
98.19 28.05
Ethylene carbonate
ETHYLENE CARBONA
88.06
D1366
Ethylenediamine
EDA
60.10
B233
19 > 214
0 > 499
D1741
29 > 117
117 > 726
B109
0 > 199
0 > 499
D1201
-13 > 176
197 > 726
Ethylene glycol
EGLY-F
62.07
Ethylene glycol diacetate
ETHYLENE G-DIACE
146.1
D1387
-31 > 190
190 > 726
Ethylene glycol diacrylate
ETHYLENE G-DIACR
170.2
D1896
71 > 229
229 > 726
Ethylene glycol monopropyl ether
ETHYLENE G-MONO
104.1
D4855
26 > 151
151 > 726
Ethylene glycol 20 wt %
EGLY-20
18.01
B24
0 > 199
Ethylene glycol 40 wt %
EGLY-40
18.02
B27
-17 > 199
Ethylene glycol 50 wt %
EGLY-50
40.04
B308
-3 > 165
Ethylene glycol 60 wt %
EGLY-60
18.00
B198
10 > 176
Ethyleneimine
AZIRIDIN
43.07
B235
-40 > 219
-40 > 499
D1742
-23 > 55
55 > 726
B157
-50 > 149
-50 > 449
D1441
-112 > 10
0 > 726
Ethylene oxide
EOXIDE
44.05
Ethyl-3ethoxypropionate
ETHYL-3-ETHOXYPR
146.2
D6885
26 > 164
164 > 726
Ethyl fluoride
ETHYL FLUORIDE
48.06
D1617
-143 > -37
-37 > 726
Ethyl formate
EFORMATE
74.09
B131
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1302
-18 > 71
54 > 726
-114 > 143
143 > 726
3-Ethylheptane
3-ETHYLHEPTANE
128.3
D94
2-Ethylhexanal
2-ETHYLHEXANAL
128.2
D1013
30 > 160
160 > 726
3-Ethylhexane
3-ETHYLHEXANE
114.2
D31
-1 > 118
118 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-47
6-48
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
2-Ethyl-1-hexanol
2-ETHYL-1-HEXANO
130.2
D1121
-69 > 101
176 > 726
2-Ethyl-1-hexene
2-ETHYL-1-HEXENE
112.2
D258
-33 > 119
119 > 726
2-Ethylhexyl acetate
2-ETHYLHEXYL ACE
172.3
D1358
-63 > 198
198 > 726
2-Ethylhexyl acrylate
2-ETHYLHEXYL ACR
184.3
D1386
-89 > 215
215 > 725
Ethylidene diacetate
ETHYLIDENE DIACE
146.1
D2380
44 > 168
168 > 726
Ethyl iodide
ETHYL IODIDE
156.0
D1682
0 > 59
26 > 726
Ethyl isobutyrate
ETHYL ISOBUTYRAT
116.2
D2337
24 > 109
109 > 726
Ethyl isopropyl ketone
ETHYL ISOPROPYL
100.2
D1095
24 > 113
113 > 726
Ethyl isovalerate
ETHYL ISOVALERAT
130.2
D1347
-23 > 134
134 > 726
Ethyl lactate
ETHYL LACTATE
118.1
D5883
Ethyl mercaptan
EMERCAPT
62.13
B171
-80 > 119
-80 > 499
D1802
-147 > 34
34 > 726
154 > 726
Ethyl methacrylate
ETHYL METHACRYLA 114.1
D1352
24 > 116
116 > 726
1-Ethylnaphthalene
1-ETHYLNAPHTHALE
156.2
D704
24 > 258
258 > 726
3-Ethylpentane
3-ETHYLPENTANE
100.2
D20
-23 > 26
93 > 726
2-Ethyl-1-pentene
2-ETHYL-1-PENTEN
98.19
D233
24 > 93
93 > 726
3-Ethyl-1-pentene
3-ETHYL-1-PENTEN
98.19
D239
24 > 84
84 > 726
p-Ethylphenol
P-ETHYLPHENOL
122.2
D1187
85 > 217
217 > 726
Ethyl propionate
ETHYL PROPIONATE
102.1
D1323
24 > 99
99 > 726
Ethyl propyl ether
ETHYL PROPYL ETH
88.15
D1415
-73 > 46
63 > 276
Ethylthioethanol
ETHYLTHIOETHANOL 106.2
D6859
m-Ethyltoluene
M-ETHYLTOLUENE
120.2
D512
-95 > 161
161 > 721
o-Ethyltoluene
O-ETHYLTOLUENE
120.2
D511
-80 > 165
165 > 725
p-Ethyltoluene
P-ETHYLTOLUENE
120.2
D513
9 > 126
162 > 722
Ethyl vanillin
ETHYL VANILLIN
166.2
D6872
100 > 293
293 > 726
Ethyl vinyl ether
ETHYL VINYL ETHE
72.11
D1445
-35 > 35
35 > 726
2-Ethyl-m-xylene
2-ETHYL-M-XYLENE
134.2
D576
24 > 190
190 > 726
2-Ethyl-p-xylene
2-ETHYL-P-XYLENE
134.2
D577
24 > 186
186 > 726
3-Ethyl-o-xylene
3-ETHYL-O-XYLENE
134.2
D580
-49 > 193
193 > 726
4-Ethyl-m-xylene
4-ETHYL-M-XYLENE
134.2
D578
24 > 188
188 > 726
4-Ethyl-o-xylene
4-ETHYL-O-XYLENE
134.2
D579
24 > 189
189 > 726
183 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
5-Ethyl-m-xylene
5-ETHYL-M-XYLENE
134.2
D575
Ferric oxide
FERRIC OXIDE
159.7
D2974
Ferrous oxide
FERROUS OXIDE
71.85
D2973
Ferrous sulfate
FERROUS SULFATE
151.9
D2950
Fluoranthene
FLUORANTHENE
202.3
Fluorene
FLUORENE
Fluorine
FLUORINE
Fluorobenzene Formaldehyde
FBENZENE FORMALDE
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase 24 > 183
183 > 726
D717
110 > 176
382 > 726
166.2
D738
114 > 176
297 > 726
38.00
B121
96.10 30.02
-199 >1199
D917
-203 > -153
-173 > 226
B128
-28 > 199
-28 > 499
D1860
-33 > 46
84 > 326
B164
-80 > 119
-80 > 409
D1001
-69 > -39
-19 > 720
Formamide
FORMAMIDE
45.04
D2851
18 > 219
219 > 726
Formanilide
FORMANILIDE
121.1
D1749
54 > 270
270 > 726
Formic acid
FORMACID
46.02
B100
9 > 199
9 > 499
D1251
8 > 100
100 > 726
Fuel oil number 1 (k=11.0)
FUEL1
114.0
B344
-17 > 198
Fuel oil number 2 (k=11.0)
FUEL2
1.00
B345
-17 > 198
Fuel oil number 3 (k=11.0)
FUEL3
114.0
B342
-17 > 198
Fuel oil number 6 (k=11.0)
FUEL6
18.00
B343
65 > 482
Fuel oil number 6 (low range)
FUEL6A
B350
26 > 93
Fumaric acid
FUMARIC ACID
116.1
D2268
286 > 289
289 > 726
Furan
FURFURAN
68.08
B160
0 > 199
0 > 499
D1478
-73 > 31
31 > 726
B87
0 > 199
0 > 254
D1889
19 > 79
161 > 721
-14 > 169
169 > 726
Furfural
FURFURAL
96.08
Furfuryl alcohol
FURFURYL ALCOHOL
98.10
D2855
Gallium trichloride
GALLIUM TRICHLOR
176.1
D1949
Germanium
GERMANIUM
72.61
D1993
Germanium tetrahydride
GERMANIUM TETRAH
76.64
D2966
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
200 > 726 -73 > 726
6-49
6-50
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
l-Glutamic acid
L-GLUTAMIC ACID
147.1
D5876
Glutaric acid
GLUTARIC ACID
132.1
D2281
130 > 322
322 > 726
Glutaric anhydride
GLUTARIC ANHYDRI
114.1
D1296
145 > 289
289 > 726
Glutaronitrile
GLUTARONITRILE
94.12
D1781
-28 > 285
285 > 526
Glycerine 20 wt %
GLYC-20
92.09
B194
-17 > 199
Glycerine 40 wt %
GLYC-40
92.09
B195
-17 > 199
Glycerine 60 wt %
GLYC-60
92.09
B196
-17 > 199
Glycerol
GLYCERIN
92.09
B125
-17 > 315
-17 > 315
D1231
19 > 226
289 > 726
396 > 726
Glyceryl triacetate
GLYCERYL TRIACET
218.2
D2370
24 > 248
258 > 726
Glycolic acid
GLYCOLIC ACID
76.05
D1887
79 > 169
169 > 726
Glyoxal
GLYOXAL
58.04
D1014
14 > 50
50 > 626
Guaiacol
GUAIACOL
124.1
D4854
75 > 204
204 > 726
Halothane
HALOTHANE
197.4
D2640
-12 > 50
50 > 726
Heavy water
HWATER
B456
0 > 99
Helium-3
HELIUM
4.00
B183
-149 > 871
D923
-272 > -270
Helium-4
HELIUM-4
4.00
D913
-270 > -268
n-Heptadecane
N-HEPTADECANE
240.5
D69
21 > 206
302 > 501
n-Heptadecanoic acid
N-HEPTADECANOIC
270.5
D2265
61 > 206
362 > 726
1-Heptadecanol
1-HEPTADECANOL
256.5
D1145
111 > 301
323 > 726
1-Heptadecene
1-HEPTADECENE
238.5
D281
11 > 300
300 > 726
1-Heptanal
1-HEPTANAL
114.2
D1008
-42 > 56
152 > 726
n-Heptane
HEPTANE
100.2
B41
-62 > 239
-62 > 342
D17
-90 > 99
65 > 426
n-Heptanoic acid
N-HEPTANOIC ACID
130.2
D2261
-7 > 76
222 > 726
1-Heptanol
1-HEPTANOL
116.2
D1125
-23 > 96
176 > 726
2-Heptanol
2-HEPTANOL
116.2
D1126
20 > 159
159 > 726
2-Heptanone
2-HEPTANONE
114.2
D1063
32 > 150
150 > 726
3-Heptanone
3-HEPTANONE
114.2
D1057
-38 > 147
147 > 726
4-Heptanone
4-HEPTANONE
114.2
D1058
-32 > 143
143 > 726
cis-2-Heptene
CIS-2-HEPTENE
98.19
D235
-81 > 78
98 > 726
cis-3-Heptene
CIS-3-HEPTENE
98.19
D249
-23 > 95
95 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
trans-2-Heptene
TRANS-2-HEPTENE
98.19
D236
-109 > 97
97 > 726
trans-3-Heptene
TRANS-3-HEPTENE
98.19
D237
-136 > 95
95 > 726
Heptene
HEPTENE
98.18
B202
9 > 184
9 > 499
1-Heptene
1-HEPTENE
98.19
D234
-93 > 56
93 > 726
n-Heptylamine
N-HEPTYLAMINE
115.2
D2707
30 > 156
156 > 726
n-Heptylbenzene
N-HEPTYLBENZENE
176.3
D549
-28 > 246
246 > 726
132.3
D1839
-43 > 176
176 > 726
Hexachlorobenzen e
HEXACHLOROBENZE 284.8 N
D1575
228 > 309
309 > 726
Hexachloro-1,3butadiene
HEXACHLORO-1,3-B
260.8
D1561
97 > 208
214 > 724
Hexachlorocyclopenta diene
HEXACHLOROCYCL OP
272.8
D1582
24 > 99
238 > 718
Hexachloroethane
HEXACHLOROETHA NE
236.7
D1525
186 > 248
186 > 726
n-Hexadecane
N-HEXADECANE
226.4
D68
18 > 61
286 > 499
n-Hexadecanoic acid
N-HEXADECANOIC A
256.4
D1272
70 > 209
350 > 726
1-Hexadecanol
1-HEXADECANOL
242.4
D1144
107 > 176
311 > 726
1-Hexadecene
1-HEXADECENE
224.4
D266
4 > 30
284 > 726
cis,trans-2,4Hexadiene
CIS,TRANS-2,4-HE
82.15
D320
26 > 83
83 > 726
Trans,trans-2,4Hexadiene
TRANS,TRANS-2,4-
82.15
D314
26 > 81
81 > 726
1,5-Hexadiene
1,5-HEXADIENE
82.15
D310
26 > 59
59 > 726
Hexafluoroacetone
HEXAFLUOROACETO 166.0 N
D2651
-125 > -27
-27 > 726
Hexafluorobenzene
HEXAFLUOROBENZE 186.1 N
D1864
5 > 76
80 > 326
Hexafluoroethane
R116
B226
-90 > 0
-100 > 399
D2693
-100 > -78
-78 > 426
n-Heptyl mercaptan N-HEPTYL MERCAPT
138.0
Hexafluoropropylen e
HEXAFLUOROPROP YL
150.0
D1699
-156 > -29
-29 > 726
Hexamethylcyclotri siloxane
HEXAMETHYLCYCLO T
222.5
D1966
63 > 99
135 > 726
Hexamethyldisilaza ne
HEXAMETHYLDISILA
161.4
D1964
24 > 125
125 > 726
Hexamethyldisiloxa ne
HEXAMETHYLDISILO
162.4
D1965
-33 > 100
100 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-51
6-52
Molec. Weight
ID No.
116.2
D1731
56 > 199
199 > 726
Hexamethyleneimin HEXAMETHYLENEIMI e
99.18
D1794
24 > 137
137 > 526
Hexamethyl phosphoramide
HEXAMETHYL PHOSP
179.2
D1885
1-Hexanal
1-HEXANAL
100.2
D1009
16 > 128
128 > 726
n-Hexane
HEXANE
86.18
B13
-62 > 219
-62 > 332
D11
-95 > 69
65 > 726
Component Name
Synonym
Hexamethylenedia mine
HEXAMETHYLENEDI A
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
1,6-Hexanediol
1,6-HEXANEDIOL
118.2
D1243
242 > 722
Hexanenitrile
HEXANENITRILE
97.16
D1786
1 > 163
193 > 703
n-Hexanoic acid
N-HEXANOIC ACID
116.2
D1262
1 > 76
205 > 726
1-Hexanol
1-HEXANOL
102.2
D1114
-23 > 46
157 > 726
2-Hexanol
2-HEXANOL
102.2
D1115
-43 > 56
139 > 726
2-Hexanone
2-HEXANONE
100.2
D1062
-52 > 109
127 > 726
3-Hexanone
3-HEXANONE
100.2
D1059
-55 > 123
123 > 726
cis-2-Hexene
CIS-2-HEXENE
84.16
D217
-93 > 53
68 > 726
cis-3-Hexene
CIS-3-HEXENE
84.16
D219
-137 > 66
66 > 726
trans-2-Hexene
TRANS-2-HEXENE
84.16
D218
-53 > 67
67 > 726
trans-3-Hexene
TRANS-3-HEXENE
84.16
D220
-113 > 67
67 > 726
1-Hexene
HEXENE
84.16
B210
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D216
-113 > 63
63 > 726
n-Hexyl acetate
N-HEXYL ACETATE
144.2
D1363
24 > 171
171 > 726
n-Hexylamine
N-HEXYLAMINE
101.2
D2706
18 > 131
131 > 726
n-Hexylbenzene
N-HEXYLBENZENE
162.3
D568
-19 > 226
226 > 726
Hexylene glycol
HEXYLENE GLYCOL
118.2
D1222
-49 > -33
197 > 726
n-Hexyl mercaptan
N-HEXYL MERCAPTA
118.2
D1807
-80 > 152
152 > 726
1-nHexylnaphthalene
1-N-HEXYLNAPHTHA
212.3
D714
24 > 176
321 > 726
1-n-Hexyl-1,2,3,4tetrahydronaphthal ene
1-N-HEXYL-1,2,3,
216.4
D716
26 > 304
304 > 726
1-Hexyne
1-HEXYNE
82.15
D413
-73 > 71
71 > 726
2-Hexyne
2-HEXYNE
82.15
D407
26 > 84
84 > 726
3-Hexyne
3-HEXYNE
82.15
D406
26 > 81
81 > 726
Humbletherm 500
HBL500
18.01
B81
65 > 343
Hydracrylonitrile
HYDRACRYLONITRIL
71.08
D1764
-46 > 220
220 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Hydrazine
HYDRAZIN
32.05
B102
15 > 239
15 > 239
D1717
6 > 113
113 > 723
Hydrazobenzene
HYDRAZOBENZENE
Hydrochloric acid 30 wt %
HCL-30
Hydrogen
HYDROGEN
Hydrogen bromide Hydrogen chloride Hydrogen cyanide Hydrogen fluoride Hydrogen iodide Hydrogen peroxide
HBR HCL HCN HF HI HYDPEROX
184.2
D2783 B351
2.02 80.92 36.46 27.03 20.00 127.9 34.01
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
299 > 726 0 > 121
B5
-249 > -244
-249 >1199
D902
-259 > -240
-23 > 1226
B214
-75 > 74
-199 > 799
D1906
-87 > -66
-66 > 326
B9
-100 > 49
-80 > 499
D1904
0 > -88
-73 > 726
B68
0 > 139
0 > 149
D1771
-13 > 25
26 > 151
B221
19 > 121
19 > 799
D1905
-78 > 19
76 > 176
B216
34 > 149
34 > 799
D1907
-47 > -35
-23 > 376
B334
0 > 449
0 > 1199
D1996
0 > 150
99 > 326
Hydrogen selenide
HYDROGEN SELENID 80.98
D3951
Hydrogen sulfide
H2S
B83
-73 > 93
-73 > 499
D1922
-79 > -3
-23 > 206
p-Hydroquinone
34.08
-42 > 726
P-HYDROQUINONE
110.1
D1186
171 > 284
284 > 726
PpHydroxybenzaldehy HYDROXYBENZALD de
122.1
D1043
148 > 309
309 > 726
Hydroxycaproic acid
HYDROXYCAPROIC A
132.2
D5882
105 > 285
302 > 726
2-Hydroxyethyl acrylate
2-HYDROXYETHYL A
116.1
D6883
57 > 209
209 > 726
Hydroxylamine
HYDROXYLAMINE
33.03
D4886
109 > 726
8-Hydroxyquinoline
8-HYDROXYQUINOLI
145.2
D5871
266 > 726
Hypophosphorous acid
HYPOPHOSPHOROU S
66.00
D1909
Indane
INDANE
118.2
D820
-23 > 169
177 > 726
Indene
INDENE
116.2
D803
-1 > 126
182 > 722
Indole
INDOLE
117.1
D2784
52 > 226
252 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-53
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Inositol
INOSITOL
180.2
D1249
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Iodine
IODINE
253.8
B224
121 > 499
D1998 Iodobenzene
IODOBENZENE
204.0
D1691
Iron
IRON
55.85
D2923
Isobutane
IBUTANE
58.12
Isobutanol Isobutene
IBUTYLEN
74.12 56.10
113 > 476 -23 > 76
188 > 726
B99
-40 > 99
-40 > 237
D4
-83 > 101
-11 > 426
B62
-40 > 199
-40 > 339
D1106
-62 > 107
107 > 726
B211
-40 > 104
-40 > 499
D207
-140 > -6
-6 > 726
Isobutyl acetate
ISOBUTYL ACETATE
116.2
D1316
16 > 70
116 > 226
Isobutyl acrylate
ISOBUTYL ACRYLAT
128.2
D2384
20 > 131
131 > 726
Isobutylamine
ISOBUTYLAMINE
73.14
D1714
-23 > 67
67 > 726
Isobutylbenzene
ISOBUTYLBENZENE
134.2
D519
-51 > 172
172 > 726
Isobutyl formate
ISOBUTYL FORMATE
102.1
D1305
16 > 98
98 > 726
Isobutyl isobutyrate
ISOBUTYL ISOBUTY
144.2
D1360
-23 > 147
147 > 726
Isobutyl mercaptan
ISOBUTYL MERCAPT
90.19
D1805
-144 > 88
88 > 726
Isobutyric acid
IBUTACID
88.11
B312
-17 > 176
-17 > 499
D1260
-23 > 154
154 > 726
Isobutyronitrile
ISOBUTYRONITRILE
69.11
D1787
-71 > 103
103 > 703
Isopentane
IPENTANE
72.15
B103
-62 > 97
-62 > 499
D8
-123 > 36
0 > 726
Isopentyl acetate
ISOPENTYL ACETAT
130.2
D1317
-3 > 142
142 > 526
Isopentyl isovalerate
ISOPENTYL ISOVAL
172.3
D1361
26 > 193
193 > 726
Isophorone
ISOPHORONE
138.2
D1077
-8 > 146
215 > 726
Isophthalic acid
ISOPHTHALIC ACID
166.1
D1288
345 > 479
479 > 726
Isophthaloyl chloride
ISOPHTHALOYL CHL
203.0
D2899
Isoprene
ISOPRENE
68.11
B212
-40 > 114
-40 > 499
D309
0 > 34
34 > 726
B45
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1104
-85 > 82
82 > 726
Isopropanol
6-54
IBUTANOL
0 > 799
IPOH
60.09
275 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Isopropyl acetate
IPACETAT
102.1
B148
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1319
-57 > 88
88 > 726
B101
-62 > 159
-62 > 499
D1719
0 > 32
32 > 726
Isopropylamine
IPAMINE
59.11
Isopropyl chloride
ISOPROPYL CHLORI
78.54
D1530
-23 > 35
35 > 726
Isopropylcyclohexa ne
ISOPROPYLCYCLOH E
126.2
D150
-89 > 154
154 > 726
Isopropyl iodide
ISOPROPYL IODIDE
170.0
D1684
-48 > 89
89 > 726
Isopropyl mercaptan
ISOPROPYL MERCAP 76.16
D1810
-14 > 52
52 > 726
Isoquinoline
ISOQUINOLINE
129.2
D2785
29 > 243
243 > 726
Isovaleric acid
ISOVALERIC ACID
102.1
D1261
26 > 175
175 > 726
Itaconic acid
ITACONIC ACID
130.1
D2278
165 > 327
327 > 726
Ketene
KETENE
42.04
D1100
-88 > -49
-49 > 726
Krypton
KRYPTON
83.80
B285
-149 > 449
D920 Lactic acid
LACTIC ACID
90.08
D5880
17 > 181
181 > 726
Lactonitrile
LACTONITRILE
71.08
D5872
48 > 183
183 > 726
Levulinic acid
LEVULINIC ACID
116.1
D4852
34 > 245
245 > 726
d-Limonene
D-LIMONENE
136.2
D290
20 > 176
176 > 726
Linoleic acid
LINOLEIC ACID
280.5
D1280
-5 > 354
354 > 726
Linolenic acid
LINOLENIC ACID
278.4
D2255
116 > 176
358 > 726
Lithium
LITHIUM
6.94
D2924
180 >1346
Lysine
LYSINE
146.2
D5873
224 > 337
341 > 726
Magnesium nitrate
MAGNESIUM NITRAT
148.3
D3953
Magnesium oxide
MAGNESIUM OXIDE
40.30
D2951
Magnesium sulfate
MAGNESIUM SULFAT 120.4
D2952
Malathion
MALATHION
330.4
D3887
Maleic acid
MALEIC ACID
116.1
D1286
130 > 291
291 > 726
Maleic anhydride
MALEIC ANHYDRIDE
98.06
D1298
52 > 201
201 > 726
Malic acid
MALIC ACID
134.1
D4853
129 > 307
328 > 726
Malonic acid
MALONIC ACID
104.1
D3268
134 > 306
306 > 726
Malononitrile
MALONONITRILE
66.06
D1785
31 > 218
218 > 726
Marlotherm s
MARLO-S
272.0
B321
19 > 379
L-Menthol
L-MENTHOL
156.3
D1159
42 > 216
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
216 > 726
6-55
Molec. Weight
ID No.
2MERCAPTOETHANO
78.13
D6858
41 > 157
157 > 726
3Mercaptopropionic acid
3MERCAPTOPROPIO
106.1
D1873
17 > 86
227 > 726
Mercury
MERCURY
200.6
D2930
-38 > 356
Mesitylene
MESITYL
120.2
B279
-37 > 159
-128 > 537
D516
15 > 76
164 > 476
Component Name
Synonym
2-Mercaptoethanol
Mesityl oxide
MESITYL OXIDE
98.14
D1065
19 > 129
129 > 719
Methacrolein
METHACROLEIN
70.09
D1037
-8 > 67
67 > 726
2-methacrylamide
2-METHACRYLAMIDE
85.11
D1878
110 > 214
214 > 726
Methacrylic acid
METHACRYLIC ACID
86.09
D1278
14 > 160
160 > 726
Methacrylonitrile
METHACRYLONITRIL
67.09
D1775
24 > 90
90 > 726
Methane
METHANE
16.04
B86
-181 > -90
-128 > 648
D1
-182 > -103
-176 > 576
Methanesulfonic acid
METHANESULFONIC
96.11
D4874
Methanol
METHANOL
32.04
B14
-51 > 204
-51 > 204
D1101
-97 > 64
0 > 726
Methanol 20 wt %
MEOH-20
18.02
B30
-6 > 119
Methanol 40 wt %
MEOH-40
18.02
B31
-28 > 119
Methanol 60 wt %
MEOH-60
16.80
B455
-51 > 9
Methoxyacetic acid
METHOXYACETIC AC 90.08
D4875
72 > 205
2-Methoxyethanol
2METHOXYETHANOL
76.10
D2860
2-2-Methoxyethoxy ethanol
2-(2-METHOXYETHO
120.1
D2863
24 > 126
193 > 726
p-Methoxyphenol
P-METHOXYPHENOL
124.1
D2859
105 > 242
242 > 726
3Methoxypropionitril e
3METHOXYPROPION
85.11
D5890
45 > 165
165 > 726
n-Methylacetamide
N-METHYLACETAMID 73.09
D6854
85 > 204
204 > 726
Methyl acetate
MACETATE
B129
-62 > 159
-62 > 499
D1312
-19 > 100
56 > 526
D5886
0 > 199
171 > 726
Methyl acetoacetate
6-56
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
METHYL ACETOACET
74.08 116.1
205 > 626 124 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Methylacetylene
MACETYL
40.06
B152
-100 > 99
-100 > 499
D402
-73 > -23
-23 > 526
B150
0 > 239
0 > 499
D1341
1 > 80
80 > 726
Methyl acrylate
MACRYLAT
86.09
Methylal
METHYLAL
76.10
D1431
-104 > 36
41 > 701
Methylamine
MAMINE
31.06
B188
-60 > 119
-60 > 499
D1701
-93 > -6
-6 > 376
n-Methylaniline
N-METHYLANILINE
107.2
D1795
-23 > 195
195 > 726
Methyl benzoate
METHYL BENZOATE
136.1
D1390
14 > 199
199 > 726
2-Methylbenzofuran 2METHYLBENZOFUR
132.2
D1485
Methyl bromide
94.95
B134
-80 > 159
-80 > 499
D1641
-88 > 3
0 > 551
MBROMIDE
197 > 726
3-Methyl-1,2butadiene
3-METHYL-1,2-BUT
68.12
D311
-113 > 40
40 > 726
2-Methyl-1-butanol
MBUTANOL
88.15
D1112
0 > 128
128 > 726
2-Methyl-2-butanol
2-METHYL-2-BUTAN
88.15
D1111
-8 > 101
101 > 726
3-Methyl-1-butanol
3-METHYL-1-BUTAN
88.15
D1123
3-Methyl-2-butanol
3-METHYL-2-BUTAN
88.15
D1124
11 > 111
111 > 726
2-Methyl-1-butene
MBUTENE
70.13
D212
-133 > 22
31 > 721
2-Methyl-2-butene
2-METHYL-2-BUTEN
70.13
D214
-133 > 26
38 > 718
3-Methyl-1-butene
3-METHYL-1-BUTEN
70.13
D213
0 > 20
90 > 720
2-Methyl-1-butene3-yne
MBUTENEYNE
66.10
D414
24 > 32
32 > 726
Methyl sec-butyl ether
METHYL SEC-BUTYL
88.15
D1426
-24 > 58
58 > 726
Methyl tert-butyl ether
MTBE
88.15
B463
-73 > 54
-73 > 232
D1405
-93 > 55
0 > 726
131 > 726
Methyl-n-butylether
METHYL-N-BUTYL-E
88.15
D1413
-115 > 70
26 > 726
3-Methyl-1-butyne
3-METHYL-1-BUTYN
68.12
D419
-73 > 26
28 > 726
Methyl n-butyrate
METHYL N-BUTYRAT
102.1
D1332
24 > 102
102 > 726
2-Methylbutyric acid
2-METHYLBUTYRIC
102.1
D1257
83 > 176
176 > 726
Methyl chloride
MCHLORID
50.50
B118
-40 > 99
-60 > 299
D1502
-24 > 76
-43 > 426
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-57
6-58
Molec. Weight
ID No.
METHYL CHLOROACE
108.5
D5866
26 > 129
129 > 726
Methyl chloroformate
METHYL CHLOROFOR
94.50
D4876
-10 > 70
70 > 626
Methyl chlorosilane
METHYL CHLOROSIL
80.59
D3935
-23 > 8
8 > 726
Methyl cyanoacetate
METHYL CYANOACET
99.09
D5888
-13 > 205
205 > 726
Methylcyclohexane
MCHEXANE
98.19
B267
-73 > 96
-73 > 426
D138
0 > 46
100 > 726
Component Name
Synonym
Methyl chloroacetate
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
cis-2Methylcyclohexanol
CIS-2-METHYLCYCL
114.2
D1153
36 > 126
164 > 726
cis-3Methylcyclohexanol
CIS-3-METHYLCYCL
114.2
D1155
15 > 47
167 > 726
cis-4Methylcyclohexanol
CIS-4-METHYLCYCL
114.2
D1157
36 > 170
170 > 726
trans-2Methylcyclohexanol
TRANS-2-METHYLCY
114.2
D1154
6 > 51
166 > 726
trans-3Methylcyclohexanol
TRANS-3-METHYLCY
114.2
D1156
15 > 47
167 > 726
trans-4Methylcyclohexanol
TRANS-4-METHYLCY
114.2
D1158
36 > 170
170 > 726
1Methylcyclohexanol
1METHYLCYCLOHEX
114.2
D1152
25 > 186
156 > 726
nMethylcyclohexyla mine
NMETHYLCYCLOHEX
113.2
D2731
37 > 148
148 > 726
Methylcyclopentadi ene
METHYLCYCLOPENT A
80.13
D312
26 > 72
72 > 726
Methylcyclopentan e
MCPENTAN
84.16
B284
-76 > 58
-73 > 426
D105
-24 > 71
71 > 726
Methyl dichlorosilane
METHYL DICHLOROS 115.0
D3936
1 > 41
41 > 726
Methyl diethanolamine
METHYL DIETHANOL
D1722
65 > 225
246 > 726
Methyldiethanolami ne 50 wt %
MDEA-50
B434
0 > 104
Methyl dodecanoate
METHYL DODECANOA
214.3
D2385
82 > 252
266 > 726
1-Methyl-1,4-ehtyl benzene
MEBENZ4
120.2
B278
-51 > 148
-128 > 537
119.2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Component Name
Synonym
Methylethanolamin e
METHYLETHANOLAM 75.11 I
D6862
41 > 157
157 > 726
1-Methyl-1,2,ethyl benzene
MEBENZ2
120.2
B295
-51 > 159
-128 > 537
1-Methyl-1,3-ethyl benzene
MEBENZ3
120.2
B277
-56 > 138
-128 > 537
1-Methyl-1ethylcyclopentane
1-METHYL-1-ETHYL
112.2
D116
24 > 121
121 > 726
Methyl ethyl ether
METHYL ETHYL ETH
60.10
D1407
-54 > 7
0 > 726
Methyl ethyl ketone
MEK
72.10
B61
-62 > 201
-62 > 304
D1052
-86 > 79
79 > 726
2-Methyl-3ethylpentane
2-METHYL-3-ETHYL
114.2
D38
-114 > 115
115 > 726
3-Methyl-3ethylpentane
3-METHYL-3-ETHYL
114.2
D39
-71 > 108
118 > 726
Methyl ethyl sulfide
METHS
76.16
B327
-17 > 93
-17 > 371
Methyl fluoride
METHYL FLUORIDE
34.03
D1613
-141 > -78
-78 > 726
n-Methylformamide
NMETHYLFORMAMID
59.07
D2852
24 > 199
199 > 726
Methyl formate
MFORMATE
60.05
B358
-20 > 99
0 > 499
D1301
-23 > 31
26 > 726
Methylglutaronitrile
METHYLGLUTARONI T
108.1
D2798
97 > 262
262 > 526
2-Methylheptane
MHEPTANE
114.2
B223
-40 > 148
-40 > 499
D28
-106 > 117
117 > 726
3-Methylheptane
3-METHYLHEPTANE
114.2
D29
-104 > 118
118 > 726
4-Methylheptane
4-METHYLHEPTANE
114.2
D30
-33 > 86
117 > 726
2-Methylhexanal
2-METHYLHEXANAL
114.2
D1016
26 > 142
142 > 726
3-Methylhexanal
3-METHYLHEXANAL
114.2
D1017
26 > 142
142 > 726
2-Methylhexane
IHEPTANE
100.2
B207
-40 > 159
-40 > 499
D18
0 > 90
90 > 720
B266
-73 > 82
-73 > 426
D19
-119 > 91
91 > 721
3-Methylhexane
MHEXANE
100.2
5-Methyl-1-hexanol
5-METHYL-1-HEXAN
116.2
D1129
26 > 171
171 > 726
5-Methyl-2hexanone
5-METHYL-2-HEXAN
114.2
D1064
-73 > 144
144 > 726
2-Methyl-1-hexene
2-METHYL-1-HEXEN
98.19
D238
24 > 91
91 > 726
3-Methyl-1-hexene
3-METHYL-1-HEXEN
98.19
D240
24 > 83
83 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-59
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
4-Methyl-1-hexene
4-METHYL-1-HEXEN
98.19
D226
-141 > 86
1-Methylindene
1-METHYLINDENE
130.2
D723
198 > 726
2-Methylindene
2-METHYLINDENE
130.2
D724
184 > 726
Methyl iodide
METHYL IODIDE
141.9
D1681
-19 > 35
26 > 726
Methyl isobutyl ether
METHYL ISOBUTYL
88.15
D1410
26 > 58
58 > 726
Methyl isobutyl ketone
MIBK
100.2
B169
-80 > 159
0 > 499
D1054
24 > 116
116 > 726
Methyl isocyanate
METHYL ISOCYANAT
57.05
D2793
38 > 726
Methyl isopropenyl ketone
METHYL I-KETONE
84.12
D1096
26 > 97
97 > 726
Methyl isopropyl ether
METHYL IE
74.12
D1411
-145 > 30
30 > 726
Methyl isopropyl ketone
METHYL IK
86.13
D1061
-92 > 94
94 > 726
Methyl mercaptan
MMERCAPT
48.10
B167
-80 > 149
-80 > 499
D1801 Methyl methacrylate
6-60
86 > 726
MMACRYL
100.1
5 > 326
B54
0 > 159
0 > 499
D1351
16 > 90
100 > 726
1Methylnaphthalene
1-METHYLNAPHTHAL 142.2
D702
-30 > 126
244 > 726
2Methylnaphthalene
2-METHYLNAPHTHAL 142.2
D703
34 > 176
241 > 726
2-Methylnonane
2-METHYLNONANE
142.3
D86
-74 > 166
166 > 726
3-Methylnonane
3-METHYLNONANE
142.3
D85
-84 > 167
167 > 726
4-Methylnonane
4-METHYLNONANE
142.3
D87
-98 > 165
165 > 726
5-Methylnonane
5-METHYLNONANE
142.3
D88
-87 > 165
165 > 726
8-Methyl-1-nonanol
8-METHYL-1-NONAN
158.3
D1139
-33 > 219
219 > 726
2-Methyloctane
2-METHYLOCTANE
128.3
D91
-80 > 143
143 > 726
3-Methyloctane
3-METHYLOCTANE
128.3
D92
-66 > 133
144 > 726
4-Methyloctane
4-METHYLOCTANE
128.3
D93
-50 > 142
142 > 726
Methyl oleate
METHYL OLEATE
296.5
D1362
19 > 336
343 > 726
2-Methylpentane
ISOHEXANE
86.17
B215
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D12
-15 > 60
60 > 720
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
3-Methylpentane
MPENTANE
86.18
B281
-59 > 39
-59 > 426
D13
-7 > 63
63 > 723
2-Methyl-1pentanol
2-METHYL-1-PENTA
102.2
D1117
31 > 147
147 > 726
4-Methyl-2pentanol
4-METHYL-2-PENTA
102.2
D1130
30 > 131
131 > 726
3-Methyl-2pentanone
3-METHYL-2-PENTA
100.2
D1055
24 > 117
117 > 726
2-Methyl-1-pentene
2-METHYL-1-PENTE
84.16
D221
-43 > 56
62 > 726
2-Methyl-2-pentene
2-METHYL-2-PENTE
84.16
D224
-135 > 67
67 > 726
3-Methyl-cis-2pentene
3-METHYL-CIS-2-P
84.16
D225
-134 > 67
67 > 726
3-Methyl-1-pentene
3-METHYL-1-PENTE
84.16
D222
-152 > 54
54 > 726
4-Methyl-cis-2pentene
4-METHYL-CIS-2-P
84.16
D227
-134 > 56
56 > 726
4-Methyl-trans-2pentene
4-METHYL-TRANS-2
84.16
D228
-140 > 58
58 > 726
4-Methyl-1-pentene
4-METHYL-1-PENTE
84.16
D223
-153 > 53
53 > 723
Methyl tert-pentyl ether
METHYL TERT-PENT
102.2
D1427
-6 > 86
86 > 726
Methyl-n-pentyl ether
METHYL-N-PENTYL
102.2
D1429
24 > 98
98 > 726
2-Methylpropanal
2METHYLPROPANAL
72.11
D1006
24 > 64
64 > 726
Methyl propionate
METHYL PROPIONAT
88.11
D1322
26 > 79
76 > 726
Methyl-n-propyl ether
METHYL-N-PROPYL
74.12
D1408
-139 > 39
39 > 726
Methyl propyl ketone
MPK
86.13
B353
0 > 93
0 > 499
2-Methylpyridine
2-METHYLPYRIDINE
93.13
D1797
-53 > 129
129 > 726
3-Methylpyridine
3-METHYLPYRIDINE
93.13
D2797
19 > 59
144 > 726
4-Methylpyridine
4-METHYLPYRIDINE
93.13
D2799
3 > 145
145 > 726
n-Methylpyrrole
N-METHYLPYRROLE
81.12
D1754
-56 > 112
112 > 726
n-Methylpyrrolidine
N-METHYLPYRROLID
85.15
D1767
-23 > 79
n-Methyl-2pyrrolidone
N-METHYL-2-PYRRO
99.13
D1071
33 > 203
203 > 726
Methyl salicylate
METHYL SALICYLAT
152.1
D1373
22 > 223
220 > 726
Methyl silane
METHYL SILANE
46.14
D3984
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
-56 > 726
6-61
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
alphaMethylstyrene
MSTYRENE
118.2
B318
-2 > 199
-17 > 499
D613
-23 > 165
165 > 726
m-Methylstyrene
M-METHYLSTYRENE
118.2
D603
-73 > 171
171 > 726
o-Methylstyrene
O-METHYLSTYRENE
118.2
D602
-68 > 169
169 > 726
p-Methylstyrene
P-METHYLSTYRENE
118.2
D612
-20 > 172
172 > 726
3-Methyl sulfolane
3-METHYL SULFOLA
134.2
D1847
16 > 176
275 > 726
Methyl trichlorosilane
METHYL TRICHLORO
149.5
D3937
-48 > 26
66 > 726
Methyl vinyl ether
MVE
58.08
B448
-10 > 82
-10 > 121
D1470
-122 > 5
26 > 726
Mobiltherm light
MBLLIGHT
18.01
B323
9 > 343
Mobiltherm 600
MBL600
18.01
B80
37 > 287
Mobiltherm 603
MBL603
18.01
B324
9 > 287
Mobiltherm 605
MBL605
18.01
B322
37 > 315
Monochlorobenzen e
MCB
112.6
B8
-28 > 199
-28 > 231
D1571
-23 > 86
126 > 726
Monochlorotoluene
MCLTOL
112.5
B310
7 > 159
Monoethanolamine
MEA
61.08
B333
18 > 179
18 > 499
D1723
24 > 169
169 > 726
Monoethanolamine 20 wt %
MEA-20
18.01
B33
9 > 99
Monoethanolamine 40 wt %
MEA-40
18.01
B34
9 > 99
Monoethanolamine 60 wt %
MEA-60
18.01
B35
9 > 99
Morpholine
MORPHOLINE
87.12
D1765
6 > 127
127 > 726
Naphthalene
NAPHTHAL
128.2
B237
99 > 459
0 > 799
D701
80 > 217
217 > 726
Natural gas (sp.gr.=0.71)
NG1
20.46
B303
-17 > 482
Natural gas (sp.gr.=0.80)
NG36
23.71
B304
-17 > 482
Natural gas flue gas
NGFG
27.78
B206
99 > 899
Neon
NEON
20.18
B184
-149 >1093
D919
6-62
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
-248 > -233
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Neopentane
NEOPENT
72.15
B275
-17 > 9
-17 > 279
D9
-16 > 9
9 > 151
Neopentanoic acid
NEOPENTANOIC ACI
102.1
D2258
42 > 163
163 > 726
Neopentyl glycol
NEOPENTYL GLYCOL
104.1
D1214
126 > 209
209 > 726
Nitric acid
NITRIC ACID
63.01
D1903
0 > 29
82 > 726
Nitric acid 20 wt %
HNO3-20
18.00
B230
0 > 93
Nitric acid 40 wt %
HNO3-40
18.00
B231
0 > 93
Nitric acid 60 wt %
HNO3-60
18.00
B98
0 > 93
Nitric oxide
NO
30.01
B120
-183 > 499
D912
-163 > -123
-151 > 476
m-Nitroaniline
M-NITROANILINE
138.1
D2782
113 > 305
o-Nitroaniline
O-NITROANILINE
138.1
D2780
71 > 284
p-Nitroaniline
P-NITROANILINE
138.1
D2781
147 > 335
o-Nitroanisole
O-NITROANISOLE
153.1
D1891
89 > 134
Nitrobenzene
NITROBEN
123.1
B305
-17 > 209
-17 > 599
D1886
5 > 126
210 > 726
3Nitrobenzotrifluorid e
3-NITROBENZOTRIF
191.1
D4863
202 > 726
oNitrodiphenylamine
O-NITRODIPHENYLA
214.2
D2738
342 > 726
Nitroethane
NETHANE
75.07
B239
0 > 279
0 > 499
D1761
-73 > 114
114 > 726
B4
-204 > -151
-204 > 982
D905
-209 > -161
-209 >1226
B341
-9 > 149
-9 > 1399
D900
-3 > 16
26 > 726
Nitrogen Nitrogen dioxide
NITROGEN NO2
28.01 46.01
Nitrogen pentoxide
NITROGEN PENTOXI
108.0
D1944
Nitrogen tetroxide
NITROGEN TETROXI
92.01
D906
Nitrogen trichloride
NITROGEN TRICHLO
120.4
D2921
70 > 726
Nitrogen trifluoride
NITROGEN TRIFLUO
71.00
D1972
-129 > 726
Nitrogen trioxide
NITROGEN TRIOXID
76.01
D904
Nitroglycerine
NITROGLYCERINE
227.1
D2779
Nitromethane
NMETHANE
61.04
B67 D1760
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
0 > 199
0 > 229
-28 > 101
101 > 726
6-63
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
1-Nitropropane
1-NITROPROPANE
89.09
D1762
-33 > 131
131 > 726
2-Nitropropane
2-NITROPROPANE
89.09
D1763
-23 > 120
120 > 726
Nitrosyl chloride
NITROSYL CHLORID
65.46
D1986
m-Nitrotoluene
M-NITROTOLUENE
137.1
D1780
o-Nitrotoluene
O-NITROTOLUENE
137.1
D1778
p-Nitrotoluene
P-NITROTOLUENE
137.1
D1779
Nitrous oxide
N2O
44.01
B122
-5 > 726
-100 > 29
D899
6-64
-100 > 1315 -90 > 726
n-Nonadecane
N-NONADECANE
268.5
D71
32 > 329
329 > 501
Nonadecanoic acid
NONADECANOIC ACI
298.5
D2266
71 > 331
385 > 726
1-Nonadecanol
1-NONADECANOL
284.5
D1149
118 > 344
344 > 726
1-Nonadecene
1-NONADECENE
266.5
D283
24 > 329
329 > 726
1-Nonanal
1-NONANAL
142.2
D1011
46 > 194
194 > 726
n-Nonane
NONANE
128.3
B259
-45 > 232
-128 > 537
D46
-53 > 66
150 > 726
n-Nonanoic acid
N-NONANOIC ACID
158.2
D1259
12 > 126
255 > 726
1-Nonanol
1-NONANOL
144.3
D1134
6 > 146
213 > 726
2-Nonanol
2-NONANOL
144.3
D1135
38 > 188
198 > 726
2-Nonanone
2-NONANONE
142.2
D1074
-7 > 194
194 > 726
5-Nonanone
5-NONANONE
142.2
D1073
-4 > 188
188 > 726
1-Nonene
NONENE
126.2
B425
26 > 204
26 > 204
D259
-53 > 146
146 > 726
n-Nonylamine
N-NONYLAMINE
143.3
D2709
50 > 202
202 > 726
n-Nonylbenzene
N-NONYLBENZENE
204.4
D570
-3 > 282
282 > 726
n-Nonyl mercaptan
N-NONYL MERCAPTA 160.3
D1808
67 > 219
219 > 726
1-nNonylnaphthalene
1-N-NONYLNAPHTHA
254.4
D711
10 > 365
365 > 726
Nonylphenol
NONYLPHENOL
220.4
D1199
105 > 285
307 > 726
2-Norbornene
2-NORBORNENE
94.16
D823
46 > 95
95 > 726
n-Octadecane
N-OCTADECANE
254.5
D70
28 > 166
316 > 501
1-Octadecanol
1-OCTADECANOL
270.5
D1146
115 > 206
334 > 726
1-Octadecene
1-OCTADECENE
252.5
D267
17 > 166
314 > 726
Octafluoro-2butene
OCTAFLUORO-2-BUT
200.0
D2653
-2 > -2
24 > 726
Octafluorocyclobut ane
OCTAFLUOROCYCL OB
200.0
D2654
-28 > -3
-5 > 326
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
188.0
D2652
-147 > -36
0 > 726
Octamethylcyclotetr OCTAMETHYLCYCLO 296.6 asiloxane T
D1988
17 > 174
174 > 726
1-Octanal
1-OCTANAL
128.2
D1010
37 > 173
173 > 726
n-Octane
OCTANE
114.2
B29
-40 > 239
-40 > 344
D27
-56 > 101
76 > 476
Component Name
Synonym
Octafluoropropane
OCTAFLUOROPROP AN
n-Octanoic acid
N-OCTANOIC ACID
144.2
D1265
16 > 146
239 > 726
1-Octanol
1-OCTANOL
130.2
D1132
6 > 151
195 > 726
2-Octanol
2-OCTANOL
130.2
D1133
26 > 179
179 > 726
2-Octanone
2-OCTANONE
128.2
D1083
-20 > 172
172 > 726
trans-2-Octene
TRANS-2-OCTENE
112.2
D251
-71 > 117
124 > 726
trans-3-Octene
TRANS-3-OCTENE
112.2
D277
-33 > 123
123 > 726
trans-4-Octene
TRANS-4-OCTENE
112.2
D279
-23 > 122
122 > 726
Octene
OCTENE
112.2
B208
-40 > 259
-40 > 499
1-Octene
1-OCTENE
112.2
D250
-73 > 41
121 > 526
n-Octylamine
N-OCTYLAMINE
129.2
D2708
40 > 179
179 > 726
n-Octylbenzene
N-OCTYLBENZENE
190.3
D569
-15 > 264
264 > 726
n-Octyl formate
N-OCTYL FORMATE
158.2
D1308
24 > 198
198 > 726
n-Octyl mercaptan
N-OCTYL MERCAPTA
146.3
D1809
58 > 199
199 > 726
tert-Octyl mercaptan
TERT-OCTYL MERCA
146.3
D1838
40 > 155
155 > 726
p-tert-Octylphenol
P-TERT-OCTYLPHEN
206.3
D2195
109 > 290
290 > 726
Oil flue gas
OFG
29.20
B205
Oil SAE 10
LUBSAE10
86.17
B32
4 > 119
Oil SAE 20
LUBSAE20
86.17
B376
9 > 93
Oil SAE 30
LUBSAE30
86.17
B53
4 > 119
Oil SAE 40
LUBSAE40
86.17
B52
4 > 121
Oil SAE 50
LUBSAE50
86.17
B377
9 > 93
Oil - Turbine 150 SSU light
TURBOIL
18.01
B135
4 > 104
Oleic acid
OLEIC ACID
282.5
D1279
24 > 147
Oxalic acid
OXALIC ACID
90.04
D1255
295 > 726
Oxazole
OXAZOLE
69.06
D5869
69 > 726
Oxygen
OXYGEN
32.00
B84
-199 > -125
-199 >1099
D901
-213 > -131
-193 >1226
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
99 > 899
359 > 726
6-65
6-66
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Ozone
OZONE
48.00
D924
-183 > -128
Palm oil
PALMOIL
18.01
B316
9 > 229
Paraldehyde
PARALDEHYDE
132.2
D1050
29 > 71
Patassium caronate 30 wt %
K2CO3-30
B445
9 > 93
Pentachloroethane
PENTACHLOROETHA 202.3 N
D1590
59 > 159
159 > 726
n-Pentadecane
N-PENTADECANE
D67
19 > 51
270 > 499
Pentadecanoic acid PENTADECANOIC AC 242.4
D2259
56 > 299
338 > 726
1-Pentadecanol
1-PENTADECANOL
228.4
D1143
43 > 72
299 > 726
1-Pentadecene
1-PENTADECENE
210.4
D265
14 > 268
268 > 726
cis-1,3-Pentadiene
CIS-1,3-PENTADIE
68.12
D305
-86 > 44
44 > 726
trans-1,3Pentadiene
TRANS-1,3-PENTAD
68.12
D306
-51 > 42
42 > 726
1,2-Pentadiene
1,2-PENTADIENE
68.12
D304
-65 > 44
44 > 726
1,4-Pentadiene
1,4-PENTADIENE
68.12
D307
-145 > 25
25 > 726
2,3-Pentadiene
2,3-PENTADIENE
68.12
D308
-125 > 48
48 > 726
Pentaerythritol
PE
136.1
D1246
260 > 350
357 > 717
Pentaerythritol tetranitrate
PETN
316.1
D2778
Pentafluoroethane
PENTAFLUOROETHA N
120.0
D1646
-102 > -47
-47 > 726
1-Pentanal
1-PENTANAL
86.13
D1007
10 > 102
102 > 726
n-Pentane
PENTANE
72.15
B79
-40 > 159
-40 > 499
D7
-129 > 36
26 > 726
212.4
-111 > 76 124 > 724
1,5-Pentanediol
1,5-PENTANEDIOL
104.1
D1242
-16 > 106
238 > 718
n-Pentanoic acid
N-PENTANOIC ACID
102.1
D1258
-3 > 56
185 > 726
1-Pentanol
1-PENTANOL
88.15
D1109
0 > 79
137 > 717
2-Pentanol
2-PENTANOL
88.15
D1110
2 > 118
118 > 726
3-Pentanol
3-PENTANOL
88.15
D1120
0 > 115
115 > 726
2-Pentanone
2-PENTANONE
86.13
D1060
-23 > 90
102 > 722
3-Pentanone
DEK
86.13
B213
-40 > 119
-40 > 799
D1053
0 > 76
0 > 726
cis-2-Pentene
CIS-2-PENTENE
70.13
D210
-151 > 36
36 > 726
trans-2-Pentene
TRANS-2-PENTENE
70.13
D211
-140 > 36
36 > 726
1-Pentene
1-PENTENE
70.13
D209
-153 > 29
29 > 526
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
1-Pentene-3-yne
1-PENTENE-3-YNE
66.10
D420
24 > 59
59 > 726
1-Pentene-4-yne
1-PENTENE-4-YNE
66.10
D421
24 > 42
42 > 726
n-Pentyl acetate
N-PENTYL ACETATE
130.2
D1357
-23 > 148
148 > 326
n-Pentylamine
N-PENTYLAMINE
87.16
D1713
4 > 104
24 > 726
n-Pentylbenzene
N-PENTYLBENZENE
148.2
D567
-18 > 205
205 > 726
n-Pentyl formate
N-PENTYL FORMATE
116.2
D1306
24 > 133
133 > 726
n-Pentyl mercaptan
N-PENTYL MERCAPT
104.2
D1827
-75 > 126
126 > 726
1-Pentyne
1-PENTYNE
68.12
D405
-73 > 40
40 > 726
Peracetic acid
PERACETIC ACID
76.05
D1290
0 > 109
109 > 726
Perchloric acid
PERCHLORIC ACID
100.5
D2983
-73 > 111
Perchloryl fluoride
PERCHLORYL FLUOR
102.4
D1987
-147 > -46
-46 > 726
alpha-Phellandrene
ALPHA-PHELLANDRE 136.2
D317
26 > 174
174 > 726
Beta-Phellandrene
BETA-PHELLANDREN 136.2
D318
26 > 173
173 > 726
Phenanthrene
PHENANTHRENE
178.2
D805
99 > 226
340 > 726
p-Phenetidine
P-PHENETIDINE
137.2
D2887
103 > 254
254 > 726
Phenetole
PHENETOLE
122.2
D1462
24 > 169
169 > 719
Phenol
PHENOL
94.11
B119
40 > 359
0 > 499
D1181
40 > 151
181 > 726
cis-2Phenylbutene-2
CIS-2-PHENYLBUTE
132.2
D583
26 > 194
194 > 726
trans-2Phenylbutene-2
TRANS-2-PHENYLBU
132.2
D584
26 > 173
173 > 726
mPhenylenediamine
M-PHENYLENEDIAMI
108.1
D2727
138 > 286
286 > 726
oPhenylenediamine
O-PHENYLENEDIAMI
108.1
D2725
117 > 251
251 > 726
pPhenylenediamine
P-PHENYLENEDIAMI
108.1
D2750
139 > 266
266 > 726
2-Phenylethanol
2-PHENYLETHANOL
122.2
D2115
-26 > 218
218 > 726
Phenylhydrazine
PHENYLHYDRAZINE
108.1
D1757
107 > 126
243 > 726
Phenyl isocyanate
PHENYL ISOCYANAT
119.1
D2751
Phenyl mercaptan
PHENYL MERCAPTAN
110.2
D1842
-14 > 169
169 > 726
1Phenylnaphthalene
1-PHENYLNAPHTHAL
204.3
D710
44 > 333
333 > 726
2-Phenyl-2propanol
2-PHENYL-2-PROPA
136.2
D1168
56 > 201
201 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
165 > 726
6-67
6-68
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Phosgene
PHOSGENE
98.92
B43
-73 > 159
-73 > 186
D1894
-19 > 6
7 > 526 -87 > 726
Phosphine
PHOSPHINE
34.00
D1981
-124 > -87
Phosphoric acid
PHOSPHORIC ACID
98.00
D1902
126 > 139
Phosphorous acid
PHOSPHOROUS ACID
82.00
D1908
Phosphorus
PHOSPHORUS
30.97
D1924
Phosphorus oxychloride
PHOSPHORUS OXYCH
153.3
D1929
Phosphorus pentachloride
P PENTACHLORIDE
208.2
D1926
Phosphorus pentasulfide
P PENTASULFIDE
444.6
D1928
Phosphorus pentoxide
PHOSPHORUS PENTO
283.9
D1930
Phosphorus thiochloride
PHOSPHORUS THIOC
169.4
D1927
Phosphorus trichloride
PHOSPHORUS TRICH
137.3
D1925
Phthalic acid
PHTHALIC ACID
166.1
D1287
190 > 324
324 > 726
Phthalic anhydride
PHTHALIC ANHYDRI
148.1
D1297
130 > 284
284 > 726
Pimelic acid
PIMELIC ACID
160.2
D2269
129 > 342
342 > 726
alpha-Pinene
ALPHA-PINENE
136.2
D840
26 > 156
156 > 726
beta-Pinene
BETA-PINENE
136.2
D841
26 > 166
166 > 726
Piperazine
PIPERAZINE
86.14
D2752
105 > 145
145 > 726
Piperidine
PIPERIDINE
85.15
D1745
11 > 106
106 > 726
Potassium
POTASSIUM
39.10
D2945
63 > 763
Potassium bromide
POTASSIUM BROMID
119.0
D1948
Potassium carbonate
POTASSIUM CARBON
138.2
D2942
Potassium carbonate 20 wt %
K2CO3-20
B444
9 > 93
Potassium carbonate 40 wt %
K2CO3-40
B446
9 > 93
Potassium chlorate
POTASSIUM CHLORA 122.5
D1952
Potassium chloride
POTASSIUM CHLORI
74.55
D1947
Potassium hydroxide
POTASSIUM HYDROX
56.11
D1913
-73 > 726
796 > 926
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Potassium hydroxide 20 wt %
KOH-20
Propadiene
ALLENE
Propane
PROPANE
Molec. Weight
40.06 44.09
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
B436
-1 > 104
B189
-100 > 99
-100 > 499
D301
-73 > -34
-34 > 726
B177
-80 > 79
-80 > 499
D3
-187 > 66
-42 > 476
1,2Propanediamine
1,2-PROPANEDIAMI
74.13
D1752
-36 > 46
119 > 726
n-Propanol
PROPANOL
60.09
B59
-62 > 199
-62 > 262
D1103
-73 > 97
98 > 447
Propargyl alcohol
PROPARGYL ALCOHO
56.06
D1179
1 > 113
113 > 726
Propargyl chloride
PROPARGYL CHLORI 74.51
D1531
19 > 57
57 > 726
beta-Propiolactone
BETA-PROPIOLACTO
72.06
D1091
-33 > 161
161 > 726
n-Propionaldehyde
PROPALDE
58.08
B174
-80 > 189
-80 > 499
D1003
-71 > 47
47 > 726
0 > 179
0 > 179
D1253
-20 > 141
285 > 448
B165
-40 > 279
-40 > 499
D1292
-23 > 166
166 > 726
B247
-40 > 224
-40 > 499
D1773
-23 > 97
0 > 726
Propionic acid Propionic anhydride Propionitrile
PROPACID PROPANHY
ECYANIDE
74.08 130.1
55.07
B91
n-Propyl acetate
N-PROPYL ACETATE
102.1
D1314
1 > 131
101 > 726
n-Propyl acrylate
N-PROPYL ACRYLAT
114.1
D1343
11 > 118
118 > 726
n-Propylamine
N-PROPYLAMINE
59.11
D1711
-84 > 47
47 > 726
n-Propylbenzene
PROPYLBE
120.2
B297
0 > 199
0 > 499
D509
0 > 144
159 > 719
0 > 143
143 > 726
n-Propyl n-butyrate
N-PROPYL N-BUTYR
130.2
D1327
n-Propyl chloride
PROPYLCL
78.54
B156
-50 > 149
-50 > 499
D1585
-23 > 46
46 > 726
nPropylcyclohexane
NPROPYLCYCLOHEX
126.2
D149
-24 > 156
156 > 726
nNPropylcyclopentane PROPYLCYCLOPEN
112.2
D114
-73 > 130
130 > 726
Propylene
42.08
B10
-80 > 79
-80 > 499
D202
-185 > 24
-47 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
PROPYLEN
6-69
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
1,2-Propylene glycol
PGLY-F
76.10
B107
9 > 199
0 > 315
D1211
-40 > 146
187 > 726
76.10
D1212
-14 > 116
214 > 726
Propylene glycol 20 PGLY-20 wt %
18.01
B38
0 > 159
Propylene glycol 40 PGLY-40 wt %
18.01
B94
-17 > 99
Propylene glycol 60 PGLY-60 wt %
18.01
B197
-17 > 199
Propyleneimine
PROPYLENEIMINE
57.10
D2726
-8 > 60
60 > 726
Propylene oxid
PROPOXID
58.08
B56
-62 > 159
-62 > 199
1,2-Propylene oxide
1,2-PROPYLENE OX
58.08
D1442
-73 > 34
34 > 726
1,3-Propylene oxide
1,3-PROPYLENE OX
58.08
D1443
-2 > 47
47 > 717
Propyl ether
PETHER
102.2
B248
-40 > 219
-40 > 499
Propyl ethylene
PENTENE
70.13
B209
-40 > 179
-40 > 499
n-Propyl formate
N-PROPYL FORMATE 88.11
D1303
24 > 80
80 > 726
n-Propyl iodide
N-PROPYL IODIDE
170.0
D1683
-33 > 102
102 > 726
n-Propyl mercaptan N-PROPYL MERCAPT 76.16
D1803
-113 > 67
67 > 726
n-Propyl methacrylate
D1353
26 > 140
140 > 720
1,3-Propylene glycol
6-70
1,3-PROPYLENE GL
N-PROPYL METHACR 128.2
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
n-Propyl propionate N-PROPYL PROPION
116.2
D1324
-75 > 122
122 > 726
Pyrene
PYRENE
202.3
D807
150 > 276
394 > 726
Pyridine
PYRIDINE
79.10
B71
-17 > 299
-17 > 494
D1791
-41 > 115
115 > 726
Pyromellitic acid
PYROMELLITIC ACI
254.2
D2282
283 > 393
448 > 726
Pyrrole
PYRROLE
67.09
D1721
-23 > 126
129 > 719
Pyrrolidine
PYRROLIDINE
71.12
D1766
-57 > 86
86 > 726
2-Pyrrolidone
PYRROL
85.10
B451
23 > 246
21 > 259
D1070
24 > 101
244 > 724
Pyruvic acid
PYRUVIC ACID
88.06
D5848
44 > 164
164 > 726
Quinaldine
QUINALDINE
143.2
D1759
113 > 246
246 > 726
Quinoline
QUINOLINE
129.2
D1748
0 > 176
237 > 726
Quinone
QUINONE
108.1
D1098
115 > 180
180 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Refrigerant 11
R11
137.3
B15
-84 > 159
-84 > 159
Refrigerant 12
R12
120.9
B16
-62 > 93
-84 > 399
Refrigerant 13
R13
104.5
B13
-62 > 219
-62 > 332
Refrigerant 14
R14
88.00
B225
-169 > -43
-169 > 399
Refrigerant 21
R21
102.9
B227
-80 > 159
-100 > 399
Refrigerant 22
R22
86.48
B46
-84 > 93
-84 > 399
Refrigerant 23
R23
70.00
B219
-120 > 9
-120 > 399
Refrigerant 113
R113
187.4
B130
-28 > 161
-28 > 209
Refrigerant 114
R114
170.9
B161
-80 > 119
-100 > 399
Refrigerant 115
R115
154.5
B349
-84 > 79
-84 > 148
Refrigerant 116
R116
138.0
B226
-90 > 0
-100 > 399
Refrigerant 123
R123
152.9
B454
-31 > 37
-31 > 37
Refrigerant 134A
R134A
120.9
B311
-40 > 84
-40 > 84
Refrigerant 502
R502
111.6
B348
-101 > 82
-101 > 148
Refrigerant 503
R503
87.28
B464
-101 > -6
-101 > -1
Salicylaldehyde
SALICYLALDEHYDE
122.1
D1042
Salicylic acid
SALICYLIC ACID
138.1
D1284
Seawater
SEAWATER
19.43
B330
Sebacic acid
SEBACIC ACID
202.3
Selexol
17 > 196
196 > 726 255 > 726
0 > 159
0 > 348
D2275
134 > 334
368 > 726
SELEXOL
B301
-17 > 159
-17 > 159
Selexol 95 wt %
SELEX-95
B313
-17 > 159
-17 > 159
Silane
SILANE
32.12
D1982
-140 > -112
27 > 99
Silicon
SILICON
28.09
D2939
Silicon carbide
SILICON CARBIDE
40.10
D2953
Silicon dioxide
SILICON DIOXIDE
60.08
D1962
Silver
SILVER
107.9
D2986
Sodium
SODIUM
22.99
D2954
Sodium acetate
SODIUM ACETATE
82.03
D3956
Sodium amide
SODIUM AMIDE
39.01
D2941
Sodium bicarbonate
SODIUM BICARBONA
84.01
D2936
Sodium bisulfate
SODIUM BISULFATE
120.1
D2955
Sodium bromide
SODIUM BROMIDE
102.9
D2938
Sodium carbonate
SODIUM CARBONATE
106.0
D2935
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
97 > 882
6-71
6-72
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Sodium carbonate 10 wt %
SCARB-10
106.0
B329
Sodium chlorate
SODIUM CHLORATE
106.4
D1953
Sodium chloride
SODIUM CHLORIDE
58.44
D1939
826 > 926
Sodium chloride 10 wt %
NACL-10
18.02
B22
-1 > 119
Sodium chloride 20 wt %
NACL-20
18.02
B23
-12 > 119
Sodium chloride 25 wt %
NACL-25
18.02
B116
-12 > 119
Sodium cyanide
SODIUM CYANIDE
49.01
D5891
Sodium dichromate
SODIUM DICHROMAT 262.0
D2956
Sodium fluoride
SODIUM FLUORIDE
41.99
D2984
Sodium formate
SODIUM FORMATE
68.01
D5853
Sodium hexametaphosphat e
SODIUM HEXAMETAP
611.8
D1956
Sodium hydrosulfite SODIUM HYDROSULF
174.1
D2961
Sodium hydroxide
SODIUM HYDROXIDE
40.00
D1912
Sodium hydroxide 10 wt %
NAOH-10
18.02
B21
0 > 119
Sodium hydroxide 30 wt %
NAOH-30
18.02
B26
0 > 119
Sodium hydroxide 50 wt %
NAOH-50
18.02
B25
0 > 119
Sodium nitrate
SODIUM NITRATE
84.99
D2937
Sodium nitrite
SODIUM NITRITE
69.00
D2962
Sodium peroxide
SODIUM PEROXIDE
77.98
D2964
Sodium silicate
SODIUM SILICATE
122.1
D1945
Sodium sulfate
SODIUM SULFATE
142.0
D1943
Sodium sulfide
SODIUM SULFIDE
78.05
D2958
Sodium thiosulfate
SODIUM THIOSULFA
158.1
D2959
Sorbitol
SORBITOL
182.2
D1250
Soybean oil
SOYBEAN
18.01
B328
9 > 259
Stearic acid
STEARIC ACID
284.5
D1276
73 > 226
375 > 726
Steam
STEAM
18.01
B2
0 > 359
9 > 373
cis-Stilbene
CIS-STILBENE
180.2
D735
0 > 99
995 > 1056
349 > 549
430 > 726
261 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
trans-Stilbene
TRANS-STILBENE
180.2
D736
Styrene
STYRENE
104.1
B72
-17 > 239
-17 > 499
D601
-30 > 145
145 > 726
306 > 726
Suberic acid
SUBERIC ACID
174.2
D2270
142 > 351
351 > 726
Succinic acid
SUCCINIC ACID
118.1
D2280
189 > 317
317 > 726
Succinic anhydride
SUCCINIC ANHYDRI
100.1
D1295
132 > 263
263 > 726
Succinonitrile
SUCCINONITRILE
80.09
D1776
58 > 266
266 > 726
Sucose 20 wt %
SUCRO-20
342.3
B320
-17 > 162
Sulfamic acid
SULFAMIC ACID
97.09
D5855
Sulfolane
SULFOLANE
120.2
D1845
31 > 176
287 > 726
Sulfur
SULFUR
32.07
D1923
119 > 306
444 > 726
Sulfur dichloride
SULFUR DICHLORID
103.0
D3950
Sulfur dioxide
SO2
64.60
B203
-62 > 126
-62 > 399
D910
-48 > 76
-23 > 626
59 > 726
Sulfur hexafluoride
SULFUR HEXAFLUOR
146.1
D1940
Sulfuric acid
SULFURIC ACID
98.08
D1901
24 > 93
Sulfuric acid 20 wt %
H2SO4-20
18.00
B178
-17 > 148
Sulfuric acid 40 wt %
H2SO4-40
18.00
B137
-17 > 148
Sulfuric acid 60 wt %
H2SO4-60
18.00
B39
-17 > 148
Sulfuric acid 98 wt %
H2SO4-98
18.00
B40
4 > 148
Sulfur trioxide
SO3
80.06
B335
23 > 199
336 > 726
0 > 1199
D911
44 > 421
D1950
69 > 726
Sulfuryl chloride
SULFURYL CHLORID
Syltherm xlt
SYL-XLT
Syltherm 800
SYL800
Syntrel 350
SYN350
Tartaric acid
TARTARIC ACID
150.1
D5881
386 > 726
Terephthalic acid
TEREPHTHALIC ACI
166.1
D1289
558 > 726
m-Terphenyl
M-TERPHENYL
230.3
D560
86 > 376
376 > 726
o-Terphenyl
O-TERPHENYL
230.3
D561
99 > 331
335 > 726
p-Terphenyl
P-TERPHENYL
230.3
D559
224 > 349
375 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
135.0
0 > 726
384.9
B453
-17 > 259
B447
37 > 398
B462
65 > 315
6-73
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
alpha-Terpinene
ALPHA-TERPINENE
136.2
D821
24 > 177
177 > 726
gamma-Terpinene
GAMMA-TERPINENE
136.2
D822
24 > 182
182 > 726
Terpinolene
TERPINOLENE
136.2
D291
42 > 184
184 > 726
1,1,2,2Tetrabromoethane
1,1,2,2-TETRABRO
345.7
D1649
10 > 151
243 > 726
1,1,1,2Tetrachlorodifluoroeth ane
1,1,1,2-TETRACHL
203.8
D2658
40 > 91
91 > 726
1,1,2,2Tetrachlorodifluoroeth ane
1,1,2,2-TETRACHL
203.8
D2656
25 > 92
92 > 726
1,1,1,2Tetrachloroethane
R134A
104.0
B311
-40 > 84
-40 > 84
D1528
38 > 130
130 > 726
B251
-20 > 146
-20 > 499
D1529
24 > 99
145 > 726
B76
0 > 199
0 > 264
D1542
-22 > 126
121 > 726
9 > 56
56 > 299
1,1,2,2Tetrachloroethane Tetrachloroethylen e
6-74
TETCE
PERCHLOR
167.9
165.8
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Tetrachlorosilane
TETRACHLOROSILA N
169.9
D1937
Tetrachlorothiophe ne
TETRACHLOROTHIO P
221.9
D4877
n-Tetradecane
N-TETRADECANE
198.4
D66
19 > 36
253 > 499
n-Tetradecanoic acid
N-TETRADECANOIC
228.4
D1271
54 > 209
326 > 726
1-Tetradecanol
1-TETRADECANOL
214.4
D1142
97 > 277
286 > 726
1-Tetradecene
1-TETRADECENE
196.4
D264
-12 > 176
251 > 726
n-Tetradecylamine
N-TETRADECYLAMIN
213.4
D1720
87 > 267
291 > 726
Tetraethylene glycol
TEG
150.2
D1204
0 > 76
329 > 726
Tetraethylene glycol dimethyl ether
TEGLY-DE
222.3
D1457
Tetraethylenepenta mine
TETRAETHYLENEPE N
189.3
D2718
113 > 303
332 > 726
1,1,1,2Tetrafluoroethane
1,1,1,2-TETRAFLU
102.0
D2650
-101 > -26
-26 > 726
Tetrafluoroethylene
TETRAFLUOROETHY L
100.0
D1630
275 > 726
-75 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Molec. Weight
Synonym
Tetrafluorohydrazin e
TETRAFLUOROHYDR 104.0 A
D1989
-74 > 726
Tetrafluorosilane
TETRAFLUOROSILAN 104.1
D1967
60 > 133
Tetrahydrofuran
THF
B172
0 > 199
0 > 499
D1479
-108 > 65
65 > 726
72.10
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Component Name
Tetrahydrofurfuryl alcohol
TETRAHYDROFURFU 102.1 R
D1166
23 > 176
177 > 726
1,2,3,4Tetrahydronaphthal ene
1,2,3,4-TETRAHYD
132.2
D706
-23 > 207
207 > 726
Tetrahydrothiophen e
TETRAHYDROTHIOP H
88.17
D1843
19 > 29
121 > 726
1,2,3,5Tetramethylbenzen e
1,2,3,5-TETRAMET
134.2
D531
-23 > 197
197 > 726
1,2,4,5Tetramethylbenzen e
1,2,4,5-TETRAMET
134.2
D532
79 > 196
196 > 726
2,2,3,3Tetramethylpentan e
2,2,3,3-TETRAMET
128.3
D51
-9 > 126
140 > 726
2,2,3,4Tetramethylpentan e
2,2,3,4-TETRAMET
128.3
D52
-121 > 133
133 > 726
2,2,4,4Tetramethylpentan e
2,2,4,4-TETRAMET
128.3
D53
-66 > 106
122 > 726
Tetramethylsilane
TETRAMETHYLSILAN
88.22
D1984
Tetranitromethane
TETRANITROMETHA N
196.0
D1768
26 > 76
125 > 726
Tetraphenylethylen e
TETRAPHENYLETHY L
332.4
D732
240 > 486
486 > 726
Tetrasodium pyrophosphate
TETRASODIUM PYRO 265.9
D1960
Thermalane 550 (FG-1)
THERM550
B458
65 > 287
Thermalane 600
THERM600
B460
65 > 301
Thermalane 800
THERM800
18.01
B459
65 > 329
Therminol FR-0
THERMFR0
18.00
B240
37 > 315
Therminol FR-1
THERMFR1
170.0
B17
93 > 371
Therminol FR-1o
THERMLO
18.00
B232
-45 > 232
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
18.01
26 > 726
6-75
6-76
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Therminol FR-2
THERMFR2
170.0
B18
93 > 371
Therminol FR-3
THERMFR3
170.0
B19
93 > 371
Therminol VP-1
THERMVP1
166.0
B336
15 > 404
Therminol 44
THERM44
367.0
B181
-45 > 259
Therminol 55
THERM55
18.00
B113
93 > 315
Therminol 66
THERM66
18.00
B114
93 > 371
Therminol 66
THERM60
250.0
B182
-45 > 343
Therminol 77
THERM77
18.00
B115
93 > 426
Therminol 88
THERM88
230.0
B141
148 > 482
Thiodiglycol
THIODIGLYCOL
122.2
D6855
281 > 726
Thionyl chloride
THIONYL CHLORIDE
119.0
D1951
75 > 726
Thiophene
THIOPHENE
84.14
B357
-20 > 98
0 > 499
D1821
-23 > 84
84 > 726
Thiourea
THIOUREA
76.12
D6856
Titanium dioxide
TITANIUM DIOXIDE
79.88
D1963
Titanium tetrachloride
TITANIUM TETRACH
189.7
D2965
Titanium trichloride
TITANIUM TRICHLO
154.2
D1985
p-Tolualdehyde
P-TOLUALDEHYDE
120.2
Toluene
TOLUENE
92.13 122.2
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
262 > 726 -24 > 135
135 > 726
D1040
75 > 203
203 > 723
B36
-40 > 239
-40 > 239
D502
-94 > 110
110 > 726
D1732
128 > 283
283 > 726
Toluenediamine
TOLUENEDIAMINE
m-Toluene diamine
MTDA
B417
76 > 232
76 > 259
o-Toluene diamine
OTDA
B418
76 > 232
76 > 259
p-Toluene diamine
PTDA
B419
76 > 232
76 > 259
Toluene diisocyanate
TOLUENE DIISOCYA
174.2
D1793
o-Toluic acid
O-TOLUIC ACID
136.1
D1282
111 > 226
258 > 726
p-Toluic acid
P-TOLUIC ACID
136.1
D1283
190 > 274
274 > 726
m-Toluidine
M-TOLUIDINE
107.2
B416
37 > 204
37 > 259
D1737
0 > 203
203 > 726
249 > 699
o-Toluidine
O-TOLUIDINE
107.2
D1736
0 > 200
200 > 726
p-Toluidine
P-TOLUIDINE
107.2
D1738
43 > 200
200 > 726
Triamylamine
TRIAMYLAMINE
227.4
D3723
56 > 216
242 > 726
Tribromomethane
TRIBROMOMETHANE 252.7
D1698
24 > 83
149 > 299
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Tri-n-butylamine
TRI-N-BUTYLAMINE
185.4
D2716
Tri-n-butyl borate
TRI-N-BUTYL BORA
230.2
D1883
147.4
Trichloroacetaldehy CHLORAL de
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase 48 > 208
213 > 726
B170
-40 > 279
-40 > 499
D4865
9 > 97
97 > 726
Trichloroacetic acid
TRICHLOROACETIC
163.4
D4866
197 > 626
Trichloroacetyl chloride
TRICHLOROACETYL
181.8
D1855
21 > 117
Trichloro benzene
TCB
181.5
B309
9 > 209
1,2,4Trichlorobenzene
1,2,4-TRICHLOROB
181.4
D1592
16 > 212
212 > 726
1,1,1Trichloroethane
TCETHANE
133.4
B243
23 > 215
0 > 499
D1527
-30 > 74
74 > 726
117 > 726
1,1,2Trichloroethane
1,1,2-TRICHLOROE
133.4
D1524
-36 > 26
113 > 726
Trichloroethylene
TCE
131.4
B82
-40 > 239
-40 > 499
D1541
-48 > 86
24 > 726
B130
-28 > 161
-28 > 209
D2659
-93 > 92
92 > 726
B15
-84 > 159
-84 > 159
D1602
-103 > 86
-23 > 226
1,1,1Trichlorofluoroetha ne Trichlorofluorometh ane
R113
R11
187.4
137.4
1,2,3Trichloropropane
1,2,3-TRICHLOROP
147.4
D1532
-14 > 156
156 > 726
Trichlorosilane
TRICHLOROSILANE
135.5
D1936
-7 > 60
31 > 226
1,1,2-TRICHLOROT 1,1,2trichlorotrifluoroetha ne
187.4
D2655
-30 > 63
-23 > 726
Tri-o-cresyl phosphate
TRI-O-CRESYL PHO
368.4
D5850
1-Tridecanal
1-TRIDECANAL
198.3
D1026
76 > 246
266 > 726
n-Tridecane
N-TRIDECANE
184.4
D65
19 > 51
235 > 499
n-Tridecanoic acid
N-TRIDECANOIC AC
214.3
D1270
41 > 312
312 > 726
1-Tridecanol
1-TRIDECANOL
200.4
D1141
92 > 272
273 > 726
1-Tridecene
1-TRIDECENE
182.3
D263
-23 > 232
232 > 726
n-Tridecylbenzene
N-TRIDECYLBENZEN
260.5
D572
32 > 251
341 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
6-77
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Triethanolamine
TEAMINE
149.2
B375
48 > 176
D1725
21 > 156
335 > 726
Triethyl aluminum
TRIETHYL ALUMINU
114.2
D1867
56 > 184
193 > 726
Triethylamine
TEA
101.2
B234
-40 > 199
-40 > 499
D1706
-23 > 88
0 > 726
161 > 173
173 > 726
Triethylenediamine
TRIETHYLENEDIAMI
112.2
D1734
Triethylene glycol
TEGLY
150.2
B340
0 > 278
0 > 499
D1203
0 > 259
26 > 426 215 > 726
Triethylene glycol dimethyl ether
TRIETHYLENE GLYC
178.2
D1454
-43 > 76
Triethylene glycol 20 wt %
TEGLY-20
18.01
B306
-17 > 148
Triethylene glycol 40 wt %
TEGLY-40
70.88
B337
0 > 179
Triethylene glycol 60 wt %
TEGLY-60
18.01
B307
-17 > 148
Triethylene glycol 80 wt %
TEGLY-80
123.7
B339
19 > 179
Triethylene tetramine
TRIETHYLENE TETR
146.2
D1739
85 > 255
266 > 726
Triethyl phosphate
TRIETHYL PHOSPHA
182.2
D4884
Trifluoroacetic acid
TRIFLUOROACETIC
114.0
D1870
29 > 71
71 > 726
1,1,1Trifluoroethane
1,1,1-TRIFLUOROE
84.04
D1619
-107 > -52
-47 > 726
Trifluoromethane
R23
70.00
B219
-120 > 9
-120 > 399
D1615
-103 > -29
-82 > 426
164 > 389
389 > 726
Trimellitic anhydride
TRIMELLITIC ANHY
192.1
D1299
Trimethylaluminum
TRIMETHYLALUMINU
72.09
D3969
Trimethylamine
TMA
59.11
B229
-80 > 119
-80 > 499
D1703
-73 > 2
0 > 726
B276
-23 > 156
-128 > 537
D514
-5 > 66
176 > 726
B280
-37 > 162
-128 > 537
D515
-22 > 66
169 > 726
D25
-24 > 80
80 > 262
1,2,3Trimethylbenzene 1,2,4Trimethylbenzene 2,2,3Trimethylbutane
6-78
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
HEMIMELL
PSEUDO CUMENE
2,2,3-TRIMETHYLB
120.2
120.2
100.2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
2,3,3-Trimethyl-1butene
2,3,3-TRIMETHYL-
98.19
D248
24 > 77
77 > 726
Trimethylchlorosila ne
TRIMETHYLCHLORO S
108.6
D3988
-13 > 57
57 > 376
Trimethylgallium
TRIMETHYLGALLIUM
114.8
D3970
2,2,5Trimethylhexane
2,2,5-TRIMETHYLH
128.3
D47
26 > 96
124 > 724
1,2,3Trimethylindene
1,2,3-TRIMETHYLI
158.2
D725
71 > 234
235 > 726
Trimethylolpropane
TRIMETHYLOLPROP A
134.2
D1247
2,2,3Trimethylpentane
2,2,3-TRIMETHYLP
114.2
D40
-75 > 100
109 > 719
2,2,4Trimethylpentane
IOCTANE
114.2
B66
-62 > 199
-62 > 309
D41
19 > 89
81 > 306
288 > 708
2,3,3Trimethylpentane
2,3,3-TRIMETHYLP
114.2
D42
6 > 46
114 > 726
2,3,4Trimethylpentane
2,3,4-TRIMETHYLP
114.2
D43
-109 > 46
113 > 726
2,4,4-Trimethyl-1pentene
2,4,4-T-1 PENTEN
112.2
D256
-86 > 24
101 > 726
2,4,4-Trimethyl-2pentene
2,4,4-T-2 PENTEN
112.2
D257
-103 > 25
104 > 726
Trimethyl phosphate
TRIMETHYL PHOSPH
140.1
D4885
2,4,6Trimethylpyridine
2,4,6-TRIMETHYLP
121.2
D2795
170 > 726
Trimethyl silane
TRIMETHYL SILANE
74.20
D3986
24 > 726
1,3,5Trinitrobenzene
1,3,5-TRINITROBE
213.1
D2746
2,4,6Trinitrotoluene
2,4,6-TRINITROTO
227.1
D2747
Trioxane
TRIOXANE
90.08
D1422
61 > 79
114 > 726
Triphenylethylene
TRIPHENYLETHYLEN
256.3
D731
68 > 395
395 > 726
Triphenyl phosphate
TRIPHENYL PHOSPH
326.3
D5851
Triphenylphosphine TRIPHE
262.3
D1884
Triphenylphosphine TRIPHE OXIDE oxide
278.3
D3884
Tripropylamine
143.3
D2719
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
TRIPROPYLAMINE
376 > 726
15 > 155
156 > 726
6-79
6-80
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Trisodium phosphate
TRISODIUM PHOSPH
163.9
D1959
Turpintine
TRPNTINE
1-Undecanal
1-UNDECANAL
n-Undecane
UNDECANE
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
B369
0 > 79
170.3
D1021
62 > 222
232 > 726
156.3
B293
-25 > 239
-128 > 482
D63
-25 > 195
195 > 510
1-Undecanol
1-UNDECANOL
172.3
D1137
19 > 146
244 > 726
1-Undecene
1-UNDECENE
154.3
D261
-49 > 38
192 > 726
Undecylamine
UNDECYLAMINE
171.3
D3724
67 > 237
241 > 726
n-Undecylbenzene
NUNDECYLBENZENE
232.4
D571
16 > 313
313 > 726
Undecyl mercaptan
UNDECYL MERCAPTA
188.4
D1825
24 > 257
257 > 726
Urea
UREA
60.06
D1877
gammavalerolactone
GAMMAVALEROLACT
100.1
D1094
90 > 207
207 > 726
Valeronitrile
VALERONITRILE
83.13
D1783
1 > 141
141 > 726
Vanadium
VANADIUM
50.94
D1994
Vanadium oxytrichloride
VANADIUM OXYTRIC
173.3
D1932
Vanadium tetrachloride
VANADIUM TETRACH 192.8
D1931
Vanillin
VANILLIN
152.1
D4850
115 > 284
284 > 726
Vinyl acetate
VACETATE
86.10
B93
-15 > 199
-15 > 499
D1321
-13 > 72
72 > 726 118 > 526
Vinylacetonitrile
VINYLACETONITRIL
67.09
D2720
18 > 118
Vinylacetylene
VINYLACETYLENE
52.08
D418
-73 > 5
5 > 726
Vinyl bromide
VINYL BROMIDE
106.9
D2694
-92 > 15
15 > 726
Vinyl chloride
VC
62.50
B65
-80 > 139
-80 > 254
D1504
-73 > -13
-13 > 726
Vinylcyclohexene
VINYLCYCLOHEXEN E
108.2
D285
-33 > 127
127 > 726
Vinyl fluoride
VF
46.00
B218
-120 > 39
-120 > 399
D2696
-109 > -72
-72 > 726
Vinyl formate
VINYL FORMATE
72.06
D1311
-24 > 46
46 > 726
Vinylidene chloride
VIC
96.95
B168
-75 > 189
-75 > 499
Vinyl propionate
VINYL PROPIONATE
100.1
D1331
0 > 94
94 > 726
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Water
WATER
18.01
B1
0 > 359
0 > 554
D1921
0 > 259
99 > 373
Xenon
XENON
131.3
D959
m-Xylene
XYLENEM
106.2
B138
0 > 259
0 > 499
D506
-47 > 86
139 > 726
B73
-17 > 239
-17 > 257
D505
-25 > 141
144 > 726
B146
0 > 279
0 > 499
D507
13 > 139
138 > 726
o-Xylene
XYLENEO
p-Xylene
XYLENEP
106.2 106.2
2,3-Xylenol
2,3-XYLENOL
122.2
D1170
88 > 216
216 > 726
2,4-Xylenol
2,4-XYLENOL
122.2
D1172
80 > 210
210 > 726
2,5-Xylenol
2,5-XYLENOL
122.2
D1174
80 > 211
211 > 726
2,6-Xylenol
2,6-XYLENOL
122.2
D1176
77 > 201
201 > 726
3,4-Xylenol
3,4-XYLENOL
122.2
D1177
91 > 226
226 > 726
3,5-Xylenol
3,5-XYLENOL
122.2
D1178
84 > 221
221 > 726
Component Name
Synonym
Molec. Weight
ID No.
Temperature Range ºC Liquid Phase Gas Phase
Zinc
ZINC
65.39
D2940
419 > 907
Zinc oxide
ZINC OXIDE
81.39
D2975
Zinc sulfate
ZINC SULFATE
161.5
D2981
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
❖
❖
❖
6-81
6-82
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
7
Priprops
Introduction The Priprops program allows you to create your own chemical properties databank for those fluids not found in the B-JAC databank. By selecting the User databank when your private component is referenced in the B-JAC programs, the program will automatically access the private databank when the programs need to retrieve properties from the databank. The private databank can accommodate up to 400 different fluids.
Accessing the Priprops databank Accessing an existing component in the databank Access the Priprops program by selecting Data Maintenance / Chemical Databank under the Tools button located in the Menu Bar. The user can view an existing B-JAC or Standard component in the databank by: •
selecting B-JAC or Standard from the databank option menu,
•
then type in the component name, formula, B-JAC ID number, or synonym,
•
if present the component will be shown with the stored properties.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
7-1
Adding a new component to Priprops Access the Priprops program by selecting Data Maintenance / Chemical Databank under the Tools button located in the Menu Bar. To add a new private component to the databank: •
select the “User” databank
•
type the reference name that you wish to call the component
•
enter the required physical properties, constants, and curve fitting data for the component
•
select the add button to add the new component to the database
•
select the Update button to save the new component and to update the databank
Adding a new component using an existing component as a template: •
select the B-JAC or Standard databank
•
search for similar component by typing in the name or reference to locate the component
•
select the copy button to copy all the property information
•
return to the User databank
•
type in the name for the new component
•
select the Add button to add the component
•
select the Paste button to copy the properties from the standard databank
•
modify as necessary the properties that differ from the standard component
•
select the Update button to save the new component and to update the databank
Property Reference Reference the Props section of this user guide for additional information on the components provided in the B-JAC and standard databanks.
7-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Property Estimation Property Curves Key
Equation
0 .... Y = C1 + C2 * T + C3 * T**2 + C4 * T**3 + C5 * T**4 1 .... Y = exp (C1 + C2 / T + C3 * ln(T) + C4 * T ** C5) 2 .... Y = C1 * T ** C2 / (1 + C2 / T + C3 / T ** 2) 3 .... Y = C1 + C2 * exp (-C3 / T ** C4) 4 .... Y = C1 + C2 / T + C3 / T ** 3 + C4 / T ** 8 + C5 / T ** 9 5 .... Y = C1 / C2 ** (1 + (1 - T / C3) ** C4) 6 .... Y = C1 * (1 - T / Tc) ** (C2 + C3 * ( T / Tc) + C4 * (T / Tc) ** 2 + C5 * ( T / Tc) ** 3) 7 .... Y = C1 + C2 * ((C3 / T) / sinh (C3 / T)) ** 2 + C4 * ((C5 / T) / cosh (C5 / T)) ** 2 C1,C2,C3,... Coefficients T Tc Y **
... Input Temperature in K or R ... Critical Temperature in K or R ... Calculated Value ... Power Function
Property estimation based on NBP The physical properties program can estimate physical properties for hydrocarbon components based on their normal boiling point (NBP) and either the molecular weight or the degrees API. The estimated properties will be reasonably accurate for the hydrocarbons which meet the following criteria: 1. the normal boiling point is between 10 and 371 C (50 and 700 F) 2. the molecular weight is between 50 and 300 3. the degrees API is between 5 and 120
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
7-3
To specify the component name, use one of the following formats: NBCxxxMWyyy
where xxx is NBP in C and yyy is the molecular weight
NBFxxxMWyyy
where xxx is NBP in F and yyy is the molecular weight
NBCxxxAPIyyy where xxx is NBP in C and yyy is the degrees API NBFxxxAPIyyy where xxx is NBP in F and yyy is the degrees API
Examples: NBC113MW156 NBC98.4API40 NBF323MW70 NBF215.8API44.2
Components outside the ranges specified above will NOT be accepted.
❖
7-4
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8
Qchex
Introduction The Qchex program calculates a budget price for shell and tube heat exchangers. It is the stand-alone version of the cost estimate routines which are built into the thermal design program Aspen Hetran. These cost estimate routines are a subset of the cost estimate routines which are part of Aspen Teams, the Aspen B-JAC program for mechanical design, detailed cost estimation, and drawings of shell and tube heat exchangers. Whereas Aspen Teams does a complete mechanical design and simulates the manufacture of every component, Qchex does only a partial mechanical design, estimating the thickness of some components. It then simulates the fabrication of some components while using more empirical correlations for other components. The Qchex program uses a database of material prices and fabrications standards. This is the same database which the Teams program uses. The database can be changed by selecting the Cost option under Tools. The accuracy of the estimates derived from Qchex is dependent upon many factors, such as: the detail in which the heat exchanger is specified; the quantity of materials required; the deviation from standard construction; the requirement for extreme design conditions; the use of premium materials (high alloys); the degree of competition; the country or region where the exchanger is purchased or installed. Refer to the "Qchex - Logic" section of this chapter for a more detailed discussion of accuracy.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-1
If you have access to both Qchex and Teams, use the appropriate program based on these criteria: Use Qchex
Use Teams
When you need a budget price.
When you need a precise price.
When you know relatively little about the exact configuration.
When you know the details of the exchanger configuration.
Wwhen a rough mechanical design is sufficient.
When an exact mechanical design is required.
When you do not need material and labor details.
When you need a bill of materials and the labor hour details.
Mechanical Scope Design Code ASME Section VIII Division 1
Front Head Types A, B, C, N
Shell Types E, F, G, H, J, K, X
Rear Head Types L, M, N, P, S, T, U, W
Design Temperatures As limited by ASME Code
Design Pressure Approximately 3000 psi or 200 bar
Shell Diameter No limitation
8-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Head Cover Types Flat (bolted or welded), ellipsoidal, torispherical, conical, 90 degree elbow, hemispherical
Tube Diameter & Tube Length No limitation
Tube Types Plain or integral low fin
Materials Those stored in the Metals databank
Systems of Measure U.S., SI, or metric Units
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-3
Input Problem Definition Before running Qchex, you must create an input file. The input is divided into these basic sections: • • •
Problem Definition Exchanger Geometry Design Data.
Description Headings The headings are optional. You can specify from 1 to 5 lines of up to 75 characters per line. These entries will appear at the top of the input summary page. You can have this input preformatted, by specifying your preferences for headings in the Setup option under Tools.
8-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Exchanger Geometry The Exchanger Geometry section is divided into two sections: • •
Exchanger Type Exchanger Data.
Exchanger Type Front head type
The front head type should be selected based upon the service needs for the exchanger. A full access cover provided in the A, C, and N type heads may be needed if the tube side of the exchanger must be cleaned frequently. The B type is generally the most economical type head. Default: B Type
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-5
Shell type
E type: Generally provides the best heat transfer but also the highest shell side pressure drop. Used for temperature cross applications where pure counter current flow is needed. F type: This two pass shell can enhance shell side heat transfer and also maintain counter current flow if needed for temperature cross applications. G type: Will enhance the shell side film coefficient for a given exchanger size. H type: A good choice for low shell side operating pressure applications. Pressure drop can be minimized. Used for shell side thermosiphons. J type: Used often for shell side condensers. With two inlet vapor nozzles on top and the single condensate nozzle on bottom, vibration problems can be avoided. K type: Used for kettle type shell side reboilers. X type: Good for low shell side pressure applications. Units is provided with support plates which provides pure cross flow through the bundle. Multiple inlet and outlet nozzles or flow distributors are recommended to assure full distribution of the flow along the bundle. V type shell: This type is not currently part of the TEMA standards. It is used for very low shell side pressure drops. It is especially well suited for vacuum condensers. The vapor belt is an enlarged shell over part of the bundle length. Default: E type (except K type shell side pool boilers)
8-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Rear head type
The rear head type affects the thermal design, because it determines the outer tube limits and therefore the number of tubes and the required number of tube passes. Default: U type for kettle shells, M type for all others
Exchanger position Specify that the exchanger is to be installed in the horizontal or vertical position. Default: vertical for tube side thermosiphon; horizontal for all others
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-7
Tubesheet type
The tubesheet type has a very significant effect on both the thermal design and the cost. Double tubesheets are used when it is extremely important to avoid any leakage between the shell and tube side fluids. Double tubesheets are most often used with fixed tubesheet exchangers, although they can also be used with U-tubes and outside packed floating heads. Double tubesheets shorten the length of the tube which is in contact with the shell side fluid and therefore reduce the effective surface area. They also affect the location of the shell side nozzles and the possible baffle spacings. The gap type double tubesheet has a space, usually about 150 mm (6 in.), between the inner (shell side) and outer (tube side) tubesheets. The integral type double tubesheet is made by machining out a honeycomb pattern inside a single thick piece of plate so that any leaking fluid can flow down through the inside of the tubesheet to a drain. This type is rare, since it requires special fabrication tools and experience. Default: normal single tubesheet(s)
8-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube to tubesheet joint
The tube to tubesheet joint does not affect the thermal design, but it does have a small effect on the mechanical design and sometimes a significant effect on the cost. The most common type of tube to tubesheet joint is expanded only with 2 grooves. Although TEMA Class C allows expanded joints without grooves, most fabricators will groove the tube holes whenever the tubes are not welded to the tubesheet. For more rigorous service, the tube to tubesheet joint should be welded. The most common welded joints are expanded and seal welded with 2 grooves and expanded and strength welded with 2 grooves. Default: expanded only with 2 grooves for normal service; expanded and strength welded with 2 grooves for lethal service
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-9
Expansion Joint Select to include an expansion joint for fixed tubesheet exchangers. This item only applies to fixed tubesheet heat exchangers; it is ignored for all other types. The specification of an expansion joint can have a significant effect on the cost. The calculations required to determine the need for an expansion joint are quite complex and are beyond the scope of the Qchex program. These calculations are part of the Teams program. However the Qchex program will estimate the differential expansion and make a simple determination on the need for an expansion joint. Default: program based on estimated differential expansion
Exchanger Data Gross Surface Area If you do not know the exact configuration of the exchanger, you can specify the gross surface area, and the program will determine a reasonable geometry based on the program defaults. If you do not specify the gross surface area, then you must provide values for the number of tubes, tube outside diameter, and tube length.
Shell outside diameter If you do not specify the surface area, you must specify either the shell outside or inside diameter. Provide the actual shell outside diameter. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a shell OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the shell OD or ID may be inputted. For kettles, the shell diameter is for the small cylinder near the front tubesheet, not the large cylinder.
Shell inside diameter Provide the actual shell inside diameter. If the shell OD has been specified, it is recommend to leave the ID blank. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a shell OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the shell OD or ID may be inputted. For kettles, the shell diameter is for the small cylinder near the front tubesheet, not the large cylinder.
8-10
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Baffle spacing center to center Specify the center to center spacing of the baffles in the bundle.
Baffle inlet spacing Specify the inlet baffle spacing at the entrance to the bundle. For G, H, J, and X shell types, this is the spacing from the center of the nozzle to the next baffle. These types should have a full support under the nozzle. If left blank, the program will calculate the space based upon the center to center spacing and the outlet spacing. If the outlet spacing is not provided, the program will determine the remaining tube length not used by the center to center spacing and provide equal inlet and outlet spacings.
Number of baffles The number of baffles is optional input. If you do not know the number of baffles, inlet, or outlet spacing, you can approximate the number of baffles by dividing the tube length by the baffle spacing and subtracting 1. However, if you do not know the number of baffles, it is best to let the program calculate it, because it will also consider the tubesheet thickness and nozzle sizes. The number of baffles for G, H, and J type shells should include the baffle or full support under the nozzle.
Tube length Provide the tube length. The length should include the length of tubes in the tubesheets. For U-tube exchangers, provide the straight length to the U-bend tangent point.
Number of tubes Specify the number of tube holes in the tubesheet. This is the number of straight tubes or the number of straight lengths for a U-tube. If you specify the number, the program will check to make sure that number of tubes can fit into the shell. If you do not specify it, the program will calculate number of tubes using the tubesheet layout subroutine.
Tube passes Provide the number of tube passes in the exchanger.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-11
Kettle outside diameter Provide the actual kettle outside diameter. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a kettle OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the kettle OD or ID may be inputted.
Tube type The program covers plain tubes and external integral circumferentially finned tubes. Externally finned tubes become advantageous when the shell side film coefficient is much less than the tube side film coefficient. However there are some applications where finned tubes are not recommended. They are not usually recommended for cases where there is high fouling on the shell side, or very viscous flow, or for condensation where there is a high liquid surface tension. The dimensional standards for Wolverine's High Performance finned tubes, are built into the program. These standard finned tubes are available in tube diameters of 12.7, 15.9, 19.1, and 25.4 mm or 0.5, 0.625, 0.75, and 1.0 inch. Default: plain tubes
Fin density If you specify fin tubes as the tube type, then you must specify the desired fin density (i.e. the number of fins per inch or per meter depending on the system of measure). Since the possible fin densities are very dependent on the tube material, you should be sure that the desired fin density is commercially available. The dimensional standards for finned tubes made by Wolverine, and High Performance Tube are built into the program. If you choose one of these, the program will automatically supply the corresponding fin height, fin thickness, and ratio of tube outside to inside surface area. If you do not choose one of the standard fin densities, then you must also supply the other fin data, which follows in the input.
8-12
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The standard fin densities for various materials are: Carbon Steel
19
Stainless Steel
16, 28
Copper
19, 26
Copper-Nickel 90/10
16, 19, 26
Copper-Nickel 70/30
19, 26
Nickel Carbon Alloy 201
19
Nickel Alloy 400 (Monel)
28
Nickel Alloy 600 (Inconel) 28 Nickel Alloy 800
28
Hastelloy
0
Titanium
30
Admiralty
19, 26
Aluminum-Brass Alloy 687
9
Tube outside diameter You can specify any size for the tube outside diameter, however the correlations have been developed based on tube sizes from 10 to 50 mm (0.375 to 2.0 inch). The most common sizes in the U.S. are 0.625, 0.75, and 1.0 inch. In many other countries, the most common sizes are 16, 20, and 25 mm. If you do not know what tube diameter to use, start with a 20 mm diameter, if you work with ISO standards, or a 0.75 inch diameter if you work with American standards. This size is readily available in nearly all tube materials. The primary exception is for graphite which is made in 32, 37, and 50 mm or 1.25, 1.5, and 2 inch outside diameters. For integral low fin tubes, the tube outside diameter is the outside diameter of the fin. Default: 19.05 mm or 0.75 inch
Tube wall thickness You should choose the tube wall thickness based on considerations of corrosion, pressure, and company standards. If you work with ANSI standards, the thicknesses follow the BWG standards. These are listed for your reference in the Appendix of this manual and in the Help facility. The program defaults are a function of material per TEMA recommendations and a function of pressure. The Hetran program will check the specified tube wall thickness for internal pressure and issue a warning if it is inadequate.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-13
The selections to the right of the input field are provided for easy selection using the mouse. The values are not limited to those listed. Default:
0.065 in. or 1.6 mm for carbon steel; 0.028 in. or 0.7 mm for titanium; 0.180 in. or 5 mm for graphite; 0.049 in. or 1.2 mm for other materials
Tube pitch The tube pitch is the center to center distance between two adjacent tubes. Generally the tube pitch should be approximately 1.25 times the tube O.D. It some cases, it may be desirable to increase the tube pitch in order to better satisfy the shell side allowable pressure drop. It is not recommended to increase the tube pitch beyond 1.5 times the tube O.D.. Minimum tube pitches are suggested by TEMA as a function of tube O.D., tube pattern, and TEMA class. The program will default to the TEMA minimum tube pitch, if you are designing to TEMA standards. The DIN standards also cover tube pitch. The DIN tube pitches are a function of tube O.D., tube pattern, and tube to tubesheet joint. The program will default to the DIN standard if you are designing to DIN standards. Default: TEMA minimum or DIN standard
Tube Pattern The tube pattern is the layout of the tubes in relation to the direction of the shell side crossflow, which is normal to the baffle cut edge. The one exception to this is pool boiling in a kettle type reboiler where the tube supports are sometimes baffles with a vertical cut. Use triangular when you want to maximize the shell side film coefficient and maximize the number of tubes, and shell side cleaning is not a major concern. If you must be able to mechanically clean the shell side of the bundle, then choose square or rotated square. Rotated square will give the higher film coefficient and higher pressure drop, but it will usually have fewer tubes than a square layout. Rotated triangular is rarely the optimum, because it has a comparatively poor conversion of pressure drop to heat transfer. Square is recommended for pool boilers to provide escape lanes for the vapor generated. Default: triangular - fixed tubesheet exchangers, square - pool boilers
8-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Baffle Type
Single Segmental
No Tubes in Window
Double Segmental
Rod
Triple Segmental
Full Support
Strip
Baffle types can be divided up into two general categories: segmental baffles and grid baffles. Segmental baffles are pieces of plate with holes for the tubes and a segment that has been cut away for a baffle window. Single, double, triple, and no tubes in window are examples of segmental baffles. Grid baffles are made from rods or strips of metal, which are assembled to provide a grid of openings through which the tubes can pass. The program covers two types of grid baffles: rod baffles and strip baffles. Both are used in cases where the allowable pressure drop is low and the tube support is important to avoid tube vibration. Segmental baffles are the most common type of baffle, with the single segmental baffle being the type used in a majority of shell and tube heat exchangers. The single segmental baffle gives the highest shell film coefficient but also the highest pressure drop. A double segmental baffle at the same baffle spacing will reduce the pressure drop dramatically (usually somewhere between 50% - 75%) but at the cost of a lower film coefficient. The baffles should have at least one row of overlap and therefore become practical for a 20 mm or 0.75 in. tube in shell diameters of 305 mm (12 in.) or greater for double segmental and 610 (24 in.) or greater for triple segmental baffles. (Note: the B-JAC triple segmental baffle is different than the TEMA triple segmental baffle.) Full Supports are used in K and X type shells where baffling is not necessary to direct the shell side flow. No Tubes In Window is a layout using a single segmental baffle with tubes removed in the baffle windows. This type is used to avoid tube vibration and may be further enhanced with intermediate supports to shorten the unsupported tube span. The standard abbreviation for no tubes in the window is NTIW. Rod Baffle design is based on the construction and correlations developed by Phillips Petroleum. Rod baffles are limited to a square tube pattern. The rods are usually about 6 mm (0.25 in.) in diameter. The rods are placed between every other tube row and welded to a circular ring. There are four repeating sets where each baffle is rotated 90 degrees from the previous baffle.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-15
Strip Baffles are normally used with a triangular tube pattern. The strips are usually about 25 mm (1 in.) wide and 3 mm (0.125 in.) thick. The strips are placed between every tube row. Intersecting strips can be notched to fit together or stacked and tack welded. The strips are welded to a circular ring. Strip baffles are also sometimes referred to as nest baffles. Default: single segmental except X shells; full support for X shell
Baffle cut (% of diameter) The baffle cut applies to segmental baffles and specifies the size of the baffle window as a percent of the shell I.D. For single segmental baffles, the program allows a cut of 15% to 45%. Greater than 45% is not practical because it does not provide for enough overlap of the baffles. Less than 15% is not practical, because it results in a high pressure drop through the baffle window with relatively little gain in heat transfer (poor pressure drop to heat transfer conversion). Generally, where baffling the flow is necessary, the best baffle cut is around 25%. For double and triple segmental baffles, the baffle cut pertains to the most central baffle window. The program will automatically size the other windows for an equivalent flow area. Refer to the Appendix for a detailed explanation of baffle cuts. Default: single segmental: 45% for simple condensation and pool boiling; 25% for all others; double segmental: 28% (28/23); triple segmental: 14% (14/15/14)
Baffle cut orientation
Horizontal
Vertical
Rotated
The baffle orientation applies to the direction of the baffle cut in segmental baffles. It is very dependent on the shell side application for vertical heat exchangers; the orientation has little meaning or effect. It may affect the number of tubes in a multipass vertical heat exchanger. For horizontal heat exchangers it is far more important. For a single phase fluid in a horizontal shell, the preferable baffle orientation of single segmental baffles is horizontal, although vertical and rotated are usually also acceptable. The choice will not affect the performance, but it will affect the number of tubes in a multipass heat exchanger. The horizontal cut has the advantage of limiting stratification of multicomponent mixtures, which might separate at low velocities.
8-16
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The rotated cut is rarely used. Its only advantage is for a removable bundle with multiple tube passes and rotated square layout. In this case the number of tubes can be increased by using a rotated cut, since the pass partition lane can be smaller and still maintain the cleaning paths all the way across the bundle. (From the tubesheet, the layout appears square instead of rotated square.) For horizontal shell side condensers, the orientation should always be vertical, so that the condensate can freely flow at the bottom of the heat exchanger. These baffles are frequently notched at the bottom to improve drainage. For shell side pool boiling, the cut (if using a segmental baffle) should be vertical. For shell side forced circulation vaporization, the cut should be horizontal in order to minimize the separation of liquid and vapor. For double and triple segmental baffles, the preferred baffle orientation is vertical. This provides better support for the tube bundle than a horizontal cut which would leave the topmost baffle unsupported by the shell. However this can be overcome by leaving a small strip connecting the topmost segment with the bottommost segment around the baffle window between the O.T.L. and the baffle o.d. Default:
vertical for double and triple segmental baffles; vertical for shell side condensers; vertical for F, G, H, and K type shells; horizontal for all other cases
Nozzles You should specify the nozzle diameters if known. Use nominal pipe sizes. If you do not specify a value, the program assumes nozzles with a diameter equal to one-third the shell diameter. The program determines the number of nozzles required based on the specified shell type and automatically determines the nozzle flange rating.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-17
Design Data Materials- Vessel Specify materials for the main components: Shell, Head, Tubes, material, Baffle, Tubesheet, Tubesheet cladding, Double tubesheet (inner). The Qchex program uses the Metals databank to retrieve material properties and prices. You can use the generic material types such as "carbon steel" which the program will assign actual default material specifications depending on the product form. For carbon steel plate, a material specification of SA-516-70 will be used for an ASME design. Appropriate specifications will be selected for other design construction codes. To select a specific material specification, use the Databank Search button to view the databank listing. If you want to exclude the pricing of a particular component, for example the tubes, specify a zero for that material. The default materials can be changed using the utility DefMats. Reference the Appendix for a complete list of generic materials. Default: carbon steel.
Gasket Materials Specify materials for the main components: Gasket for shell side, Gasket for tube side. The Qchex program uses the Metals databank to retrieve material properties and prices. You may specify a generic material number or a code for a specific material specification. To select a specific material specification, use the Databank Search button to view the databank listing. If you want to exclude the pricing of a particular component, for example the tubes, specify a zero for that material.
TEMA class If you want the heat exchanger to be built in accordance with the TEMA standards, choose the appropriate TEMA class - B, C, or R. If TEMA is not a design requirement, then specify Cody only, and only the design code will be used in determining the mechanical design. Default: TEMA B
Design pressure This is the pressure, which is used in the mechanical design calculations. It influences the shell, head, and tubesheet required thicknesses and therefore affects the thermal design. This is in gauge pressure so it is one atmosphere less than the equivalent absolute pressure.
8-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Design temperature This is the temperature, which is used in the mechanical design calculations. It influences the shell, head, and tubesheet required thicknesses and therefore affects the thermal design.
Mean Metal Temperatures These temperatures are used if the program needs to determine if an expansion joint should be included in the cost.
Qchex - Program Operation Running QCHEX To start the Qchex calculation select the Run button on the Tools Bar. If the program has any special messages to display, these will appear at this point.
Displaying Results To display the results of the calculations, select an item on the navigator.
Changing Units of Measure By selecting from the units of measure in the Tools Bar, you change the units of measure displayed.
Choosing Output for Printing You can request the printed output by selecting the File command on the Menu Bar and then the Print command.
Exiting from the Program Once you have completed the Qchex estimate, you may exit Qchex by selecting the File command from the Menu Bar and then selecting Close to close the file.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-19
Qchex - Results The results section consists of three sections: • • • •
Input Summary Warnings & Messages Design Summary Cost Summary.
Input Summary A summary of the inputted parameters for the budget estimate are shown.
Warnings & Messages Aspen Hetran provides an extensive system of warnings and messages to help the designer of heat exchanger design. Messages are divided into five types. There are several hundred messages built into the Aspen Hetran program. Those messages requiring further explanation are described here.
Warning Messages: These are conditions, which may be problems, however the program will continue.
Error Messages: Conditions which do not allow the program to continue.
Limit Messages: Conditions which go beyond the scope of the program.
Notes: Special conditions which you should be aware of.
Suggestions: Recommendations on how to improve the design.
8-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Design Summary The design summary provides the pertinent mechanical parameters shown on the construction portion of the TEMA specification sheet.
Cost Summary The budget pricing for the exchanger is shown. The cost of material, cost of labor, mark up are provided.
Qchex Logic Mechanical Design The Qchex program performs an approximate mechanical design of the heat exchanger components so that the material weight can be determined. Some of the more significant assumptions used in the analysis are summarized below.
Design Pressure Due to limitations of the analytic procedure at high design pressures, thicknesses of flanges, tubesheets and flat covers are limited to 12 in. or 300 mm. The maximum allowable design pressure for a TEMA W-type externally sealed floating tubesheet is as detailed in TEMA.
Design Temperature and Allowable Stresses Design temperatures are limited by the ASME maximum allowable temperature for the material specified. For design temperatures exceeding this maximum, the allowable stress is determined at the maximum allowable temperature and a warning is displayed. Design temperature for a TEMA W-type unit is limited as detailed in TEMA.
Corrosion Allowance Corrosion allowance for cylinders, covers, and tubesheets is determined in accordance with TEMA.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-21
Cylinders and Covers Calculations are to the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1. Thickness calculations are based on internal pressure loadings and assume spot radiography. Flat bolted covers which are not made of carbon steel or low alloy steel are assumed to be lined with an alloy liner.
Cylinders and Covers Minimum TEMA thicknesses are checked. Component weights are calculated from finished dimensions, and rough dimensions are used to determine material costs.
Tubesheets Approximate tubesheet thicknesses are calculated in accordance with TEMA. Tubesheets exceeding 6 in. or 152 mm in thickness and not made of carbon or low alloy steel are assumed to be clad. The number of clad surfaces is dependent upon the shell and tube side materials. Minimum TEMA thicknesses are checked. The tubesheet thickness is limited to a maximum of 12 in. or 300 mm. Rough weights are calculated assuming the tubesheet is fabricated from a square plate. If a double tubesheet is specified, the shell side tubesheet thickness is based on the shell side design pressure.
Flanges Approximate flange thicknesses are determined using a modified bending formula. Ring flanges are assumed for carbon and low alloy construction and for high alloy flanges less than or equal to 1 in. or 25 mm in thickness. All other flanges are assumed to be lap joint with a carbon steel ring. The flange thickness is limited to a maximum of 12 in. or 300 mm. Rough weights are calculated assuming the flanges are fabricated from forged rings.
8-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubes Qchex accesses the same routines which are used in TEAMS to determine tube prices for bare or finned tubes.
Nozzles and Nozzle Flanges Inlet, outlet, and condensate nozzle sizes can be specified. The program automatically determines the number of each type of nozzle based on the shell and head types specified. Finished and rough weights are based on correlations which consider design pressure and nozzle diameter.
Material Prices The Qchex program accesses the same material price database which is used by the cost routines in the Teams program. This database contains several hundred prices and is maintained and updated by B-JAC as the market conditions change. Users can maintain their own material price database by using the COST database. The material designators listed in this section are converted to the appropriate 4 digit material designators used by the Teams and Metals programs. You can change the correspondence between the 1 or 2 digit numbers and the 4 digit numbers by using the Defmats database. Material unit costs are multiplied by the rough weight to determine the component material cost. The material price for the heat exchanger is determined by adding all of the component material costs. If you do not want the price of a particular part of the exchanger to be included in the total price, you should assign a value of zero for that part material. For instance, the program would not include the cost of the tubing in the selling price if you set the tube material to zero.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-23
Labor Hours The labor hours required to fabricate the shell and heads of the heat exchanger are calculated from correlations that were developed by Aspen B-JAC based on several hundred labor estimates for a wide variety of exchanger types and design conditions. These correlations are a function of design pressure, shell diameter, weight, tube length, and material. The labor hours for the bundle are determined more precisely using the same techniques used in the cost estimate portion of the Teams program. This portion of the program accesses the database of fabrication standards (machining and drilling speeds). This database is maintained by Aspen B-JAC or you can modify this database for your own use by running the Cost database. Drilling and machining speeds for the tubesheets and baffles are based on the tubesheet material. Labor hours for loading tubes, tube-to-tubesheet joint procedures, and bending Utubes are the same as those calculated by the Teams cost routines.
Budget Price The budget price for the exchanger is calculated by adding the material costs, labor costs, and markups on material and labor. Labor costs are based on the total shop fabrication hours and the burdened labor rate. This rate and the markups on material and labor are the same as used in the Teams program. The price is for one heat exchanger and does not include any shipping or escalation costs. The Qchex program is intended to be used as a budget estimating tool. The accuracy of the estimate is dependent upon many factors, including: •
Accuracy of the Heat Exchanger Configuration
An estimate where the tube length, tube side, and shell size are known will be much more accurate than an estimate based on surface area alone.
Quantity of Materials The material prices stored in the Aspen B-JAC standard material price file are based on average quantity brackets. Very small or very large quantities will affect the accuracy of the material prices.
8-24
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Non-standard Construction As the construction becomes more non-standard the accuracy of the estimate decreases.
Extreme Design Conditions When the design pressure on one or both sides becomes very high the exact mechanical design becomes more important. In these cases the TEAMS program should be used.
Premium Materials When using premium materials (for example titanium) the material price can be very volatile and highly dependent upon quantity.
Non-competitive or Rush Orders The budget estimate is less accurate for non-competitive situations or when delivery time is a premium.
Regional Differences The actual price is dependent upon the country of manufacture and in the case of the United States and Canada, it is dependent upon the region of manufacture. The Qchex program does not reflect these regional differences.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
8-25
Qchex References There are relatively few published sources of information on heat exchanger cost estimating. Most of the logic and much of the data in the Qchex program have come from the fabrication experience of the engineers at B-JAC who have worked with heat exchanger manufacturers. For a further understanding of some of the underlying concepts in cost estimating, you can refer to the following publications:
Heat Exchanger Cost Estimating Computerized Cost Estimation of Heat Exchangers, Bruce Noe‚ and Gregory Strickler, 21st National Heat Transfer Conference, ASME, 83-HT-62, 1983.
Manufacturing Cost Estimating Manufacturing Cost Estimating, Phillip Ostwald, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, Dearborn, Michigan, 1980. Basic Programming Solutions for Manufacturing, J. E. Nicks, pp. 35-80, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, Dearborn, Michigan, 1982.
Manufacturing Operations and Speeds Tool & Manufacturing Engineers Handbook, Daniel Dallas, Society of Manufacturing Engineers, Dearborn, Michigan, 1976. The Procedure Handbook of Arc Welding, The Lincoln Electric Company, Cleveland, Ohio, 1973. Machining Data Handbook, Metcut Research Associates Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio, 1972.
❖
8-26
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9
Ensea
Introduction Ensea is a program that lays out the tube holes in the tubesheet of a shell and tube heat exchanger. It covers practically all sizes and layout types encountered in industrial heat exchangers. In addition to locating every tube hole, it will also locate the baffle cuts and an appropriate number of tie rods. The program has three modes of optimization. These are: • • •
Maximize the number of tubes for a specified shell diameter Optimize the layout for a specified shell diameter and number of tubes Minimize the shell diameter for a specified number of tubes
The layout can be symmetrical or asymmetrical top to bottom; it is always symmetrical right to left. For multipass layouts, the program has a sophisticated optimization routine which moves the pass partitions to maximize the number of tubes while reasonably balancing the number of tubes per pass. Ensea has additional capabilities for U-tube layouts. It will determine a U-bend schedule showing the number and length of each different U-tube and calculate the total length of all of the tubes. The appropriate sections of the TEMA standards are built into the program to provide default values for the clearances. The defaults can be overridden if desired. As part of the output from Ensea, you can create a drawing of the tubesheet layout which can be exported to various graphics devices and CAD systems. The Ensea program also provides a means of making changes to the number of tube rows and the number of tubes per row, or if you have an existing tubesheet layout, you can reproduce the layout and make a drawing by specifying the tube row data.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-1
The Ensea program contains the same tubesheet layout routines used in the thermal design program, Aspen Hetran, and the mechanical design program, Teams. Therefore the tubesheet layout determined by Ensea matches the tube counts used in the Aspen Hetran program when used in design mode.
Mechanical Scope Tube Diameter no limitation
Tube Pitch No limitation
Tube Patterns Triangular, rotated triangular, square, rotated square
Tube Passes 1 to 16
Tube Rows Maximum of 200
Shell size No limitation if shell i.d. is specified a maximum limit of 120 in. or 3048 mm when program searches for shell i.d.
Impingement Plate None, plate on bundle, plate in nozzle dome
Pass Layouts Quadrant, mixed, ribbon
9-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Baffle Types Segmental - single, double, triple Grid - strip, rod No tubes in window Full supports
Baffle Cuts Horizontal, vertical, rotated Single segmental Double segmental Triple segmental
Tie Rods 4 to 12, in increments of 2 Units of Measure US, SI, Metric
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-3
Input Before running Ensea, you must create an input file. The input is divided into these sections: • • •
Problem Definition Exchanger Geometry Tube Row Details
Problem Definition Headings The headings, 1-5 lines which will appear at the top of the input summary and in the title block of the drawings. Note that only the first 40 characters of each line will appear on the drawings. The headings are optional. You can specify from 1 to 5 lines of up to 75 characters per line. These entries will appear at the top of each page of printed output and at the top of the heat exchanger specification sheet. You can have this input preformatted, by specifying your preferences for headings in the Setup option under Tools.
Application Options Application Type When you request "design a tube layout for specified vessel diameter", the program will hold the specified vessel diameter and determine the number of tube holes that will fit based upon other tube layout information provided. The second option to " design a tube layout for specified number of tubes" allows you specify the number of tubes and the program will determine what shell size is required for that number of tubes based upon tube and baffle information you have provided. The last option " specify the tube layout" allows you to specify the number of tube holes in each row, the location of each row, the tie rods, baffle cuts, and pass partitions. This option is primarily aimed at preparing a drawing of an existing or known tubesheet layout.
9-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube Layout option Once you have run the Ensea program and have generated a tube layout, you can interactively make modifications to the tube layout. Tubes: Tubes can be removed from the layout by clicking on the tube to be removed (tube will be highlighted in red) and then selecting the red X in the menu. If you want to designate a tube as a plugged tube or as a dummy tube, click on the tube (tube will be highlighted in red) and then select the plugged tube icon or dummy tube icon from the menu. Tie Rods: To remove a tie rod, click on the tie rod (tie rod will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a tie rod, select the add a tie rod icon in the menu and then specify the location for the tie rod. Sealing Strips: To remove a sealing strip, click on the sealing strip (sealing strip will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a sealing strip, select the add a sealing strip icon in the menu and then specify the location for the sealing strip. Once you have completed your changes to the tube layout, you may want to elect to fix the layout for subsequent Ensea runs by selecting the "Use existing layout" option located on the Tubsheet Layout tab.
TEMA Class If you want the heat exchanger to be built in accordance with the TEMA standards, choose the appropriate TEMA class - B, C, or R. The TEMA class will affect the clearance lane for pass partitions and the standard minimum tube pitch. If TEMA is not a design requirement, then specify code only. Even if you specify "code only," the program will default to TEMA clearances and diameters, if not specified. The primary difference is that for a removable bundle with a square or rotated square pattern, the program will not force cleaning lanes all the way across the bundle if you specify "code only." Default: TEMA B
Tube Layout Option You can select to have the Ensea program generate a new tube layout every time the program runs or you can select to use an existing layout. For the second option, you must first run Ensea to establish a layout and then select the option to use the existing layout for all subsequent runs. Default: create a new layout
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-5
Drawing Once you have a specified an exchanger geometry, executed Ensea, and then selected to use an existing layout in the Applications Options, you can interactively make modifications to the tube layout. Tubes: Tubes can be removed from the layout by clicking on the tube to be removed (tube will be highlighted in red) and then selecting the red X in the menu. If you want to designate a tube as a plugged tube or as a dummy tube, click on the tube (tube will be highlighted in red) and then select the plugged tube icon or dummy tube icon from the menu. Tie Rods: To remove a tie rod, click on the tie rod (tie rod will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a tie rod, select the add a tie rod icon in the menu and then specify the location for the tie rod. Sealing Strips: To remove a sealing strip, click on the sealing strip (sealing strip will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a sealing strip, select the add a sealing strip icon in the menu and then specify the location for the sealing strip.
9-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Exchanger Geometry Exchanger Front head type
The front head type does not affect the tubesheet layout. It is included in the input for completeness of the TEMA designation (e.g., BEM). Default: B type front head
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-7
Shell type
The shell type does not affect the tubesheet layout, except for those cases where there is a longitudinal baffle (shell types: F, G, and H). For these cases the program avoids a solution where the longitudinal baffle would pass through the middle of a pass, for example a 6 pass quadrant layout. Default: E type shell
Rear head type
9-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The rear head type significantly affects the tubesheet layout, because it determines the outer tube limits and therefore the number of tubes. The L, M, and U type rear heads will all have the same OTL, which the Ensea program will accurately calculate. The P, S, T, and W (and to some extent the N) rear head types each have an OTL which is very dependent upon the mechanical design. The Ensea program will estimate the clearance requirements for these other heads, but the OTL may not be exact. Use the Teams program to determine the exact outer tube limit for floating head heat exchangers. Default: M type rear head (U-tube for K type shells)
Front head inside diameter You should specify the front head inside diameter whenever it is less than the shell inside diameter. If you leave it zero, the program will use the shell ID to determine the OTL.
Shell inside diameter You should always specify the shell ID except when you want to have the program determine the smallest shell size which will contain the given number of tubes (see "Number of Tubes" below). Ensea uses the shell ID. to calculate the outer tube limit (if not specified in input), calculate the baffle OD, locate the tie rods, locate the baffle cut, and as a reference for limiting the layout along the horizontal and vertical axis.
Shell outside diameter The program will determine the smallest shell O.D. based on specified I.D. For shell I.D. within 24-inches, the program defaults tube wall thickness as 0.375-inch. Otherwise, the program determines shell O.D. based on 0.5-inch tube wall thickness. Hetran -- Provide the actual shell outside diameter. For pipe size exchangers, it is recommended to input a shell OD rather than an ID since the program will reference standard pipe schedules. For exchangers made of rolled and welded plate materials, the shell OD or ID may be inputted. For kettles, the shell diameter is for the small cylinder near the front tubesheet, not the large cylinder. Teams --- If you specify an outside diameter, the program will hold the outside diameter and calculate and inside diameter based upon the calculated required cylinder thickness. If a pipe material is specified, shells 24 inches and smaller, it is recommended to input the outside diameter so that a standard pipe wall thickness can be determined.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-9
Outer tube limit diameter The outer tube limit (o.t.l.) is the diameter of the circle beyond which no portion of a tube will be placed. The program will allow the outer edge of a tube to be on the OTL. You can ask the program to calculate the OTL by specifying a zero, in which case the program will choose an OTL. based on the front and rear head types and the front head ID and the shell i.d. The OTL, which the program calculates, should be exact for fixed tubesheet exchangers with rear head types L and M and U-tube exchangers (rear head type U). It may not be exact for exchangers with N type heads, floating head exchangers (rear head types P, S, or T), or floating tubesheet exchangers (rear head type W), since the program makes assumptions on the gasket width, bolt size, and barrel thickness. For an exact OTL, you should use the mechanical design program Teams.
Tubes & Baffles Number of tube holes If you want the program to maximize the number of tubes for a given shell size, you should leave this input field blank. When you have already established an exact number of tubes, you should specify the number of tubes for this entry. The program will then attempt to find a reasonable layout with that tube count. If it cannot find a layout with that many tubes, it will show the layout with the maximum tubes it could find. If the specified tube count is below the program's normal solution, Ensea will remove tubes until it reaches the desired count. If you want to find the smallest shell i.d. to contain a given number of tubes, enter the desired tube count, and enter zeros for the shell i.d. and outer tube limits. This will cause the program to search through several shell sizes until it finds the smallest size, rounded to the nearest 0.25 inch or the nearest 5 mm, depending upon the system of measure. For U-tubes, you should specify the number of tube holes (two times the number of U's). Default: program calculated
Tube outside diameter You can specify any size for the tube outside diameter.
Tube pitch The tube pitch is the distance from tube center to tube center within the tube pattern. Default: per TEMA standards for specified tube diameter
9-10
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube pattern
The tube pattern is the layout of the tubes in relation to the direction of the shell side crossflow, which is normal to the baffle cut edge. The one exception to this is pool boiling in a kettle type reboiler where the tube supports are sometimes baffles with a vertical cut.
Type of Baffles
Single Segmental
No Tubes in Window
Double Segmental
Rod
Triple Segmental
Full Support
Strip
If you specify no tubes in the window (NTIW), the program will not place any tube beyond the baffle cut, minus an edge distance of 0.125 in or 3.2 mm. The program also covers full supports and the two types of grid baffles: rod baffles and strip baffles. Rod baffles are limited to a tube pattern of square or rotated square. Strip baffles are for triangular tube patterns. Default: single segmental ( full support X type shell)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-11
Baffle Cut For single segmental baffles, specify the percentage of the baffle window height compared to the shell i.d. For double and triple segmental baffles, specify the percentage of the innermost baffle window height compared to the shell i.d. The selections to the right of the input field are provided for easy selection using the mouse. The values are not limited to those listed. For single segmental baffles the cut should be between 15 and 45%. For double segmental baffles the cut should be between 30 and 40%. For triple segmental baffles the cut should be between 15 and 20%. For full supports and grid baffles the baffle cut should be zero. Refer to the Appendix for more information on segmental baffle cuts.
Baffle Cut Orientation
The baffle cut can be horizontal, vertical, or rotated 45 degrees. The orientation will affect the appearance of the tube pattern and the location of the tie rods. The rotated cut may be used only with a square or rotated square tube pattern. Default: horizontal cut
Number and Diameter of Tie Rods The program will optimize the location of the tie rods to maximize the number of tube holes in the layout. The number of tie rods should be specified by assigning an even number between 4 and 12. Default: per TEMA Standards
9-12
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tie Rod and Spacer outside diameter You can specify the tie rod and spacer outside diameters or allow the program to use default sizes. Defaults: Tie Rod
Spacer
Tie Rod
Spacer
mm
mm
in
in
6.5
12.7
0.25
0.5
9.5
15.9
0.375
0.625
12.7
19.1
0.5
0.75
15.9
25.4
0.625
1.0
Tube Layout Pass layout type For 1, 2, or 3 pass layouts, the value of this entry is not pertinent. For pass layouts of 4 or more tube passes, it will determine how the tube side inlet and outlet nozzles will enter the heads and the locations of the pass partitions. The difference between ribbon type and mixed type layouts is in how the inner passes (the passes between the first and last passes) are constructed. In the ribbon layout, each pass stretches from one side of the shell to the other, whereas the mixed layout has a vertical pass partition plate dividing the inner passes. A 4 pass layout is shown below in each of the layout types.
Quadrant
Mixed
Ribbon
Mixed and ribbon type layouts have the advantage of easier nozzle installation, especially with relatively large nozzles. Ribbon type is also preferable when there is a large pass to pass temperature change, since ribbon type minimizes the local temperature stresses in the tubesheet. Quadrant type layouts have the advantage of normally (but not always) yielding a greater number of tubes. U-tube layouts of 4 or more passes are restricted to the quadrant type. Default: program will optimize to the greatest number of tubes.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-13
Number of tube passes You can specify any number of passes from 1 to 16.
Maximum % deviation in tubes per pass For thermal performance and pressure drop reasons, it is normally desirable to reasonably balance the number of tubes per pass in multi-pass layouts. This entry will indicate the maximum percentage of deviation from the median number of tubes per pass (average between the lowest and highest number of tubes in a pass). In order to force the same number of tubes in each pass, specify 0.001. The selections to the right of the input field are provided for easy selection using the mouse. The values are not limited to those listed. Default: 5% maximum deviation
Pass partition lane width The clearance lane is the edge to edge distance between the tube rows on each side of a pass partition. If the tubes are welded into the tubesheet, a clearance of at least 0.75 in or 19.1 mm should be used. Default: 15.9 mm or 0.625 in for TEMA B & C exchangers, 19.1 mm or 0.75 in for TEMA R exchangers
Design symmetrical tube layout The program will always make the left half symmetrical to the right half of the layout, but the top half can be nonsymmetrical to the bottom half. If different values are specified for "Tube Limit Along Vertical Centerline" measured in from top and from bottom, the layout will always be nonsymmetrical. In some cases of nonsymmetrical layouts, you may still want to force a pass partition to be on the horizontal centerline or a tube row to be on the centerline. You can do this by specifying "design to be a symmetrical layout". This parameter is also valuable in the case of a single pass layout where the number of tubes and the shell i.d. are specified as input to the program. If a greater number of tubes can fit in the shell, the program will eliminate tubes. For a non-symmetrical layout, the program will eliminate tubes only at the top of the bundle. For a symmetrical layout, the program will eliminate the appropriate tubes from both the top and the bottom of the layout. Default: non-symmetrical
9-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Open space between shell I.D. and tube bundle -- at top; at bottom; at sides You can specify the clearance from the shell inside diameter to the tube bundle at the top, bottom and sides. Default: program will minimize clearance to maximize tube count
Distance from tube center to vertical and horizontal centerlines You can use either or both of these entries when you want to force the program to start the layout in a specific way. To force tubes to be on either or both of the centerlines, specify a value of zero for the respective distance. If field is left blank, the program will optimize. For nonsymmetrical layouts, the program will observe the specified distance from the vertical centerline, but it ignores a specified distance from the horizontal centerline. However, the distance from the horizontal centerline can be controlled by entering a value for the "Tube Limit from Top of Shell I.D. along Vertical C/L" equal to the top edge of the last tube row. Default: program optimized
Location of 1st Tube in 1st Row from the Bottom You can use this entry when you want to force the program to start the layout in a specific way. The location of the first tube in the first row from the bottom is pertinent for triangular, rotated triangular, and rotated square layouts where the rows are staggered. By selecting "off centerline" the program will locate the tubes near the vertical off of the vertical centerline in the first row counting from the bottom. By selecting "on centerline", the program will locate a tube on the vertical centerline for the first row from the bottom. Default: program optimized
Clearance - shell I.D. to baffle O.D. This entry determines the outer limits for spotting tie rods. The program will place the o.d. of the spacer within 0.125 in or 3.2 mm of the baffle edge. Default: per TEMA Standards.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-15
Minimum U-Bend diameter This determines the minimum tube center to center distance of any U-tube. For 2-pass U-tube layouts, it will determine the distance from the pass partition to the first row of tubes on each side of the pass partition. For layouts of 4 or more passes, it determines the distance on each side of the vertical pass partition. The choice of a minimum bend diameter must take into account what the tube material is, what the wall thickness is, how much thinning in the bend is permissible, and what bending dies and procedures are to be used. This entry only applies to U-tube bundles and is ignored otherwise. Default: three times the tube O.D.
Straight length for U-tubes If the layout is for a U-tube bundle, the program will print out a U-bend schedule showing the quantity for each different length U-tube. The program assumes that the bends for all the tubes will start at the same distance from the tubesheet and that they will be in parallel planes.
Shell side inlet nozzle outside diameter The program will use shell inlet nozzle O.D to determine the position of the impingement plate. If you previously have done the thermal design for this heat exchanger, this input field will be filled automatically since the program will pick up the result determined from thermal design program. This is not a required input if you will specify the diameter of the impingement plate.
Shell side inlet nozzle orientation This is a required input if you specify the impingement plate. The program will use shell inlet nozzle orientation to determine the orientation of the impingement plate. If you previously have done the thermal design for this heat exchanger, this input field will be filled automatically since the program will pick up the result determined from thermal design program.
Impingement protection type The purpose of impingement protection is to protect the tubes directly under the inlet nozzle by deflecting the bullet shaped flow of high velocity fluids or the force of entrained droplets. If you previously have done the thermal design for this heat exchanger, this input field will be filled automatically since the program will pick up the result determined from thermal design program.
9-16
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Impingement plate diameter The program will use this input to determine the position and the dimension of the impingement plate This input is not required if you have already specified the shell inlet nozzle O.D. Default: shell inlet nozzle O.D.
Impingement plate length and width You can specify a retangular impingement plate size. Default: shell inlet nozzle O.D. for length and width (square plate)
Impingement plate thickness This input is required if you specify there is an impingement field. You can specify any thickness for the impingement plate. Default: 3 mm or 0.125 inch.
Impingement distance from shell ID You can specify the distance from the shell inside diameter to the impingement plate. Default: top row of tubes
Impingement clearance to tube edge You can specify the distance from the impingement plate to the first row of tubes.
Impingement plate perforation area % If you are using a perforated type impingement plate, you can specify the percent of area that the plate is perforated.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-17
Tube Row Details If you are specifing the details from an existing tube layout to generate a tube layout drawing, provide the row number, number of holes, and location of tube row for each row in the tube layout. You can also specify the tie rod, pass partition, and baffle cut locations.
Tube Layout Drawing Once you have run the Ensea program and have tube layout results, you can interactively make modifications to the tube layout. Tubes: Tubes can be removed from the layout by clicking on the tube to be removed (tube will be highlighted in red) and then selecting the red X in the menu. If you want to designate a tube as a plugged tube or as a dummy tube, click on the tube (tube will be highlighted in red) and then select the plugged tube icon or dummy tube icon from the menu. Tie Rods: To remove a tie rod, click on the tie rod (tie rod will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a tie rod, select the add a tie rod icon in the menu and then specify the location for the tie rod. Sealing Strips: To remove a sealing strip, click on the sealing strip (sealing strip will be highlighted in red) and then select the red X in the menu. To add a sealing strip, select the add a sealing strip icon in the menu and then specify the location for the sealing strip. Once you have completed your changes to the tube layout, you may want to elect to fix the layout for subsequent Ensea runs by selecting the "Use existing layout" option located on the Application Options section.
Program Operation Running ENSEA To start the ENSEA program calculations select the Run button in the Tools Bar or select the Run command in the Menu Bar. If the program has any special messages to display, these will appear at this point.
Displaying Results To display the results of the calculations on the screen, select section to be displayed from the results section of the navigator.
Choosing Output for Printing You can request the printed output by selecting the File command in the Menu Bar and then select Print command. Select which items you want printed from the menu.
9-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Exiting from the Program Exit from the program by selecting File from the Menu Bar and selecting Close.
Results The output from ENSEA is divided into six sections: • • • • • •
Input Data Messages Tubesheet Layout Summary Tube Row Details U-bend Details U-bend Totals.
You can display and/or print any or all parts of this output. The format of the output is consistent between display and printed output, typically with two or three display screens equal to one printed page. Most printed pages will also have a heading with the program name, version, time, date, and filename.
Input Data You can display the input data in a more condensed format than used in the input. It is recommended that you request the input data as part of your printed output so that it is easy to reconstruct the input which led to the design.
Warnings & Messages Warnings & Messages are divided into five types. • • • • •
Warning Messages - conditions which may be problems, however the program will continue. Error Messages - conditions which do not allow the program to continue. Limit Messages - conditions which go beyond the scope of the program. Notes - special conditions which you should be aware of. Suggestions - recommendations on how to improve the design.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-19
Summary & Details The Summary section provides general information about the tubes, the tube layout design parameters, and clearances. The Tube Row Detail section provides a per row tube count and row location. Most of this output is self explanatory. The items needing some additional explanation are:
Summary Outer Tube Circle The outer tube circle is often slightly different than the outer tube limit. Whereas the o.t.l. is the limit beyond which no tube can extend, the outer tube circle is the actual diameter determined by the outer edge of the outermost tube, measured radially.
Equiv. tube perimeter This is the "equivalent diameter of the tube center limit perimeter" as defined in TEMA 7.133 Tubesheet Formula - Shear. It is equal to four times the area enclosed by the tube perimeter divided by the tube perimeter.
Maximum deviation from median This is the maximum deviation from the median number of tubes per pass, shown "Before Balancing" and "After Balancing." "Before Balancing" is before the program removes tubes to satisfy the specified (or defaulted) input for Maximum Deviation. "After Balancing" is the recomputed deviation for the tubesheet layout shown and should always be within the specified maximum.
Tube Row Details Row number and number of holes Row indicates the tube row number. Row number 1 is always at the bottom of the layout. The number of holes is the total number of holes in that row.
9-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Distance Offset From Centerlines The first column is the distance from the vertical centerline (x-axis) to the center of the first tube in that row, counting from the vertical centerline. If a tube is on the vertical centerline, the value will be 0.0. The second column is the distance from the horizontal centerline (yaxis) to the center of each tube in the row. A positive value indicates the row is above the horizontal centerline; a negative value indicates it is below. If a tube is on the horizontal centerline, the value will be 0.0.
U-bend Details This output will only appear when you specify a "Rear Head Type" of U and specify a "Straight Length for U-tubes". The program determines the first (smallest) bend diameter from the "Minimum U-bend Diameter" in the input.
Schedule Number This is merely a sequential number to identify a set of equal length tubes.
Bend Diameter This is the diameter through the center of the tube in the bend. It is equal to the distance between the tube centers of the two straight length portions of the U-tube.
Number of U's This is the number of U-tubes of the corresponding bend diameter and length.
U-tube Length This is the developed length from tube end to tube end through the center of the tube and bend. It is the length of the straight tube before being bent to form the U-tube.
Total length in U-bends & total straight length These are the total length of tubing in the U-bends and the total length of tubing in the straight lengths for the U-tubes.
Total length of all tubes This is the total length of tubing (U-bends plus straight length).
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-21
Tubesheet Layout
9-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Ensea - Logic The right half and left half of layout are always symmetrical for tube hole placement. Top and bottom halves can be nonsymmetrical. The program assumes that tube side nozzles are at the top and bottom of the layout (offset from the vertical centerline for quadrant type layouts). If the number of tubes is not given as input, the program will maximize the number of tubes by trying several solutions, varying one or more of the following: • • •
Location of first tube row in relation to the vertical centerline Location of pass partition plates Pass layout type
If the number of tubes is given as input, the program will choose the layout which requires the fewest tubes to be eliminated to arrive at the desired number or the layout which has the least deviation in number of tubes per pass. If tubes are eliminated in order to balance the number of tubes per pass or to match a given number of tubes, the program follows this procedure: For the passes on the bottom or the top: •
Tubes are eliminated starting from the end of the outermost row and moving toward the vertical centerline in that row, until the number of tubes is met.
For inner passes: •
Tubes are eliminated from each row, one tube per row, from the periphery of the bundle until the number of tubes is met.
U-tube layouts of 4 or more passes are always quadrant type. U-tubes are always bent in parallel planes. Cleaning lanes are always maintained for square and rotated square patterns for removable bundles in TEMA heat exchangers. The baffle cut is cut through the center of a tube row except for baffles with no tubes in the window. Longitudinal baffles are assumed to be of the same thickness as pass partition plates and match the location of a pass partition. Sealing strips are assumed to not affect the placement of tubes. Multi-segmental baffle cuts are chosen so that the total window areas per baffle are approximately equal. Whenever possible there is at least one tube row which is common to each baffle set. Reference the Appendix for more information on baffle cuts.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
9-23
Tie rods are located according to the following logic: • • • •
spacers are at least 0.125 inch or 3.2 mm from the nearest tube and from the baffle edge. Tie rods between the first and last tube rows are at the periphery of the bundle on or between tube rows. Preference is given to locations where tubes are not displaced. Preference is given to locations evenly distributed around the bundle or close to the baffle cut when appropriate.
The tubesheet layout is drawn to scale. The scale is chosen by the program. The program draws all of the pitch lines within the o.t.l. It also draws the tube holes for each tube along the perimeter of each pass.
Ensea References For a further understanding of subjects relating to ENSEA, you can refer to the following publications:
Terminology, Construction Types, and Clearances 1. Standards of Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association, TEMA, Seventh Edition, 1988
Pass Layout Types 2. Heat Exchangers: Design and Theory Sourcebook, Afgan and Schlunder, pp.33-34 (section author, K.A. Gardner), McGraw-Hill, New York, 1974
Numerical Control 3. Programming for Numerical Control Machines, A.D. Roberts and R.C. Prentice, McGraw-Hill, New York, 1968 4. Modern Machine Shop NC/CAM Guidebook, Gardner Publications, Brookfield, Wisconsin
❖
9-24
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10
Metals
Introduction Metals is a program which retrieves the properties of materials used in the construction of pressure vessels. It covers a wide range of pure and alloyed metals in a number of different forms (i.e., pipe, plate, forging, tube). It also includes non-metallic materials in the form of gaskets. Metals accesses a databank of materials. This is the same databank which is accessed from the mechanical design program, Teams, and the thermal design programs Aspen Hetran and Aspen Aerotran. The databank is divided up into sections based on the material standard or country of origin, for example: ASTM for American materials; AFNOR for French materials; DIN for German materials. You can specify which material you want by using a four digit BJAC material designator. There are also two digit generic material designators, which you can use in the Hetran, Aerotran, and Teams programs. These generic material designators identify a general material (e.g. carbon steel), instead of a specific grade of material. The program will decide which specific material to use for the properties, based on the size and type of component. You can establish which specific materials to use for generic material assignments by using the Defmats database. Temperature dependent data (e.g. allowable stress) is stored in the form of data points corresponding to the data points given in the source. For temperatures between stored data points, the program will interpolate. For temperatures outside the stored data points, the program will return a value of zero. The databank also includes cost data, which is stored as price per unit weight (i.e., $/lb or $/kg), except for tubing which is stored as price per unit length (i.e., $/ft or $/m) for a 19.05 mm (3/4") o.d., 1.65 mm (0.065") thick tube. You can change the cost data by using the Cost database.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-1
The Metals program retrieves temperature dependent properties over the temperature range which you specify in the input. You can also use the Metals program to search for a material name or specification number (e.g., SA-240). If you use a material frequently which is not in the standard Aspen B-JAC materials databank, you can build your own private databank with the Primetals program.
Metals Scope Material Groups Bolting Couplings Forgings Gaskets Pipe Plate Sheet Tubes Weld Cap
Properties
10-2
Allowable Stress
Poisson Ratio
Density
Specified Min. Tensile Strength
Gasket Seating Stress
Specified Min. Yield Strength
Gasket m Factor
Stress Intensity
Group No.
Tensile Strength
Modulus of Elasticity
Thermal Conductivity
P No.
Thermal Expansion Coefficient
Price
Yield Strength
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Material Standards ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials DIN - Deutsches Institut für Normung VdTÜV - Verband der Technischen Überwachungs-Vereine AFNOR - Association Française de Normalisation
Systems of Measure U.S., SI, or Metric
Input Preparing Input Data The input data for the Metals program is very short, and therefore it does not require that you create an input file on disk before running.
Aspen B-JAC Material Reference Material Name Specify materials for required components. You can use the generic material types such as "carbon steel" which the program will assign actual default material specifications depending on the product form. For carbon steel plate, a material specification of SA-516-70 will be used for an ASME design. Appropriate specifications will be selected for other design construction codes. The default materials can be changed using the utility DefMats. Reference the Appendix for a complete list of generic materials. To search for a specific material specification, select the Search Databank button. Type the first few characters to search for a material in the databank. Default: carbon steel.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-3
Temperature Range for Temperature Dependent Properties Many of the properties in the metals databank are temperature dependent. The starting and ending temperatures determine the temperature range. Either may be higher or lower. The program will retrieve properties beginning at the starting temperature, then incrementing the temperature by the temperature increment value until it reaches the ending temperature or a maximum of eleven points. The selections to the right of the input field are provided for easy selection using the mouse. The values are not limited to those listed.
Program Operation Options The Metals program gives you the option of retrieving the properties for a specific material or searching the databank for matches of a material name or standard number.
Running the Program To retrieve the properties for a given input, select the Run button from the Tools Bar.
Changing Units You can change the system of measure shown in the display output and the printed output by selecting the Units in the Tools Bar. The units will switch back and forth between U.S., SI, and Metric units.
Printing Output You can request printed output by selecting the File command from the Menu Bar and selecting the Print command.
Multiple Runs To make alternate runs, change the input as necessary and select Run to recalculate with the conditions.
10-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Results The Metals program gives you the option of requesting properties at a single temperature or at up to ten temperatures. If you request properties at a single temperature you will also retrieve the properties which are not temperature dependent.
Warnings & Messages Metals provides an extensive system of warnings and messages to help the designer of heat exchanger design. Messages are divided into five types. There are several messages built into the Metals program.
Warning Messages These are conditions, which may be problems, however the program will continue.
Error Messages Conditions which do not allow the program to continue.
Limit Messages Conditions which go beyond the scope of the program.
Notes Special conditions which you should be aware of.
Suggestions Recommendations on how to improve the design.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-5
Properties Independent of Temperature Material Properties Price Density
31.75 USD/kg 4512 kg/m3
P No.
52
Group No.
—
Specified Min. Yield
379 MPa
Specified Min. Tensile 448 MPa Poisson Ratio Material Class
0.32 Titanium Alloy
Price - The price for all materials except tubing is shown as cost per unit weight. The price for tubing is the cost per unit length for a 19 mm (0.75 in.) o.d. tube with a wall thickness of 1.65 mm (0.065 in.). This is the price which is used in the cost estimate routines. It can be changed by using the Newcost program. P No. - This is a number listed in the ASME Code Section IX. It indicates which welding procedure group a material belongs to. Carbon steel materials have a P number of 1. Group No. - The group specification further divides materials under a certain P number to which special ASME Code rules apply. For example, certain non-destructive examination of P3 group 3 materials are different from other P3 materials. Specified Minimum Yield - This mechanical property shows the stress at which permanent material deformation starts to occur at room temperature. Specified Minimum Tensile - This mechanical property is obtained by dividing the maximum load under certain test conditions by the cross sectional area of the piece being tested at room temperature. Poisson Ratio - This is the ratio of lateral strain to longitudinal strain. Material Class - This is a general classification pertaining to materials sharing similar chemistry. Some ASME Code rules apply to whole material classes. The classes are: carbon steel, low alloy steel, high alloy steel, nickel, nickel alloy, copper, copper alloy, titanium alloy, and zirconium alloy.
10-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Properties Dependent on Temperature Yield Strength
Tensile Stress
Stress
Intensity
Thermal Conductivity Modulus Elasticity Thermal Expansion Coefficient This part of the output is self-explanatory. Where the property is not stored, or the temperature exceeds the acceptable range for the material, the program will show a dash.
Gasket Properties Material Properties Price
44.09 USD/kg
Density
2201 kg/m3
Gasket Factor m
2.75
Min. Design Seating Stress y Gasket Thickness ASME Column
25511 MPa 1.6 mm
2
Gasket Factor m - This factor denotes the compression load necessary to maintain a tight joint expressed as a multiple m of the internal pressure. This value is a function of the gasket material and construction. Min. Design Seating Stress y - This value is the minimum load required to properly seat the gasket. It is a function of the gasket material and construction. Generally, harder gaskets have higher seating stresses. ASME Column - This indicates the column in Table 2-5.2 Appendix 2 of the ASME Code Section VIII Division 1, which shows the appropriate formula for the calculation of the basic gasket seating width.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-7
References For a further understanding of subjects relating to METALS, you can refer to the following publications:
Material Properties ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section II, Materials, Part D Properties, annual American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V. (DIN) AD-Merkblätter - Technical Rules for Pressure Vessels, Carl Heymanns Verlag KG, Berlin, Germany, annual Verband der Technischen Überwachungs-Vereine e.V. (VdTÜV) Association Française de Normalisation (AFNOR) Standards of Tubular Exchangers Manufacturers Association, Seventh Edition, TEMA, New York, USA, 1988
Equivalent Materials Worldwide Guide to Equivalent Irons and Steels, ASM International, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 1987 Worldwide Guide to Equivalent Nonferrous Metals and Alloys, ASM International, Metals Park, Ohio, USA, 1987 Stahlschlüssel, C. W. Wegst, Verlag Stahlschlüssel Wegst GmBH, Marbach, Germany,1992
Material Prices Metal Statistics - The Purchasing Guide of the Metal Industries, Fairchild Publications, New York, USA, annual
10-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals Directory - ASTM - Generic Generic Material Number
Generic Material
1
Carbon Steel
2
Low Alloy Steel C 1/2 Mo
3
Low Alloy Steel 1/2 Cr 1/2 Mo
4
Low Alloy Steel Cr 1/2 Mo
5
Low Alloy Steel 1 1/4 Cr 1/2 Mo
6
High Alloy Steel Grade 304
7
High Alloy Steel Grade 304L
8
High Alloy Steel Grade 316
9
High Alloy Steel Grade 316L
10
High Alloy Steel Grade 347
11
High Alloy Steel Grade 310S
12
High Alloy Steel Grade 310S XM-27 (E-brite)
13
High Alloy Steel Grade 410
14
Nickel Alloy 200
15
Nickel Low Carbon Alloy 201
16
Nickel Alloy 400 (Monel)
17
Nickel Alloy 600 (Inconel)
18
Nickel Alloy 800
19
Nickel Alloy 825 (Inconel 825)
20
Nickel Alloy B (Hastelloy B)
21
Nickel Alloy C (Hastelloy C)
22
Nickel Alloy G (Hastelloy G)
23
Nickel Alloy 20Cb (Carpenter 20)
24
Titanium
25
Copper-Nickel 70/30 Alloy CDA 715
26
Copper-Nickel 90/10 Alloy CDA 706
27
Copper-Nickel Alloy CDA 655
28
Naval Brass Alloy 464
29
Aluminum-Bronze Alloy 630
30
Aluminum Brass Alloy 687
31
Admiralty Alloy 443
33
Zirconium
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-9
Metals Directory - ASTM - Pipe Carbon Steel Pipe and Weld Cap Number
Carbon Steel Pipe
1101
SA-53 Grade B Seamless Steel Pipe
1269
SA-53 Grade B Electric Resistance Welded Steel Pipe
1102
SA-106 Grade B Seamless Steel Pipe
1264
SA-333 Grade 1 Seamless Steel Pipe
1265
SA-333 Grade 6 Seamless Steel Pipe
1479
SA-234 Grade WPB Weld Cap
Low Alloy Pipe and Weld Cap
10-10
Number
Low Alloy Pipe and Weld Cap
1472
SA-333 Grade 3 Seamless Alloy Pipe
1110
SA-335 Grade P1 Seamless Alloy Steel Pipe
1111
SA-335 Grade P2 Seamless Alloy Steel Pipe
1443
SA-335 Grade P5 Seamless Alloy Steel Pipe
1112
SA-335 Grade P12 Seamless Alloy Steel Pipe
1113
SA-335 Grade P11 Seamless Alloy Steel Pipe
1460
SA-335 Grade P22 Seamless Alloy Steel Pipe
1480
SA-234 Grade WP5 Weld Cap
1481
SA-234 Grade WP11 Weld Cap
1482
SA-234 Grade WP12 Weld Cap
1483
SA-234 Grade WP22 Weld Cap
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
High Alloy Pipe Number
High Alloy Pipe
1188
SA-312 TP304 Seamless High Alloy Pipe
1189
SA-312 TP304L Seamless High Alloy Pipe
1181
SA-312 TP304 Welded High Alloy Pipe
1182
SA-312 TP304L Welded High Alloy Pipe
1193
SA-312 TP310 Seamless High Alloy Pipe
1186
SA-312 TP310 Welded High Alloy Pipe
1190
SA-312 TP316 Seamless High Alloy Pipe
1191
SA-312 TP316L Seamless High Alloy Pipe
1183
SA-312 TP316 Welded High Alloy Pipe
1184
SA-312 TP316L Welded High Alloy Pipe
1192
SA-312 TP347 Seamless High Alloy Pipe
1185
SA-312 TP347 Welded High Alloy Pipe
1298
SA-312 TP321 Seamless High Alloy Pipe
High Alloy Pipe and Weld Cap Number
High Alloy Pipe and Weld Cap
1299
SA-312 TP321 Welded High Alloy Pipe
1187
SA-731 XM-27 Welded High Alloy Pipe
1194
SA-731 XM-27 Seamless High Alloy Pipe
1484
SA-403 Grade 304 Weld Cap
1485
SA-403 Grade 304 WPS Weld Cap
1486
SA-403 Grade 316 CR/WPW Weld Cap
1487
SA-403 Grade 304L CR/WP Weld Cap
1488
SA-403 Grade 316 WPS Weld Cap
1489
SA-403 Grade 316L CR/WP-W Weld Cap
1490
SA-403 Grade 304L WPS Weld Cap
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-11
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Pipe Number
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Pipe
1195
SB-161 Alloy 200 Sml Ni Pipe (Annealed) (up to 5" od)
1277
SB-161 Alloy 200 Sml Ni Pipe (Annealed) (larger than 5" od)
1280
SB-161 Alloy 201 Sml Ni Low C Pipe (Annealed) (up to 5" od)
1196
SB-161 Alloy 201 Sml Ni-Low C Pipe (Annealed) (larger than 5" od)
1281
SB-165 Alloy 400 Sml Ni Alloy Pipe (Annealed) (up to 5" od)
1197
SB-165 Alloy 400 Sml Ni Alloy Pipe (Annealed) (larger than 5" od)
1276
SB-167 Alloy 600 Sml Ni Pipe (HF) (up to 5" od)
1198
SB-167 Alloy 600 Sml Ni Alloy Pipe (CD) (larger than 5" od)
1282
SB-167 Alloy 600 Sml Ni Alloy Pipe (CD) (up to 5" od)
1282
SB-167 Alloy 600 Sml Ni Alloy Pipe (HF) (larger than 5" OD)
1199
SB-407 Alloy 800 Sml Ni Alloy Pipe
1473
SB-407 Alloy 800H Seamless Ni Alloy Pipe
1200
SB-423 Alloy 825 Seamless Ni Alloy Pipe
1203
SB-464 Alloy 20CB Seamless Ni Alloy Pipe
1204
SB-464 Alloy 20CB Welded Ni Alloy Pipe
1201
SB-619 Alloy B Welded Ni Alloy Pipe
1202
SB-619 Alloy C-276 Welded Ni Alloy Pipe
1501
SB-673 Alloy 904 Welded Ni Alloy Pipe (Annealed)
Titanium Pipe
10-12
Number
Titanium Pipe
1463
SB-337 Grade 1 Welded Annealed Titanium Pipe
1205
SB-337 Grade 2 Seamless Titanium Pipe
1206
SB-337 Grade 2 Welded Titanium Pipe
1462
SB-337 Grade 3 Welded Annealed Titanium Pipe
1334
SB-337 Grade 7 Seamless Titanium Pipe
1336
SB-337 Grade 7 Welded Titanium Pipe
1335
SB-337 Grade 12 Seamless Titanium Pipe
1337
SB-337 Grade 12 Welded Titanium Pipe
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Copper Alloy Pipe Number
Copper Alloy Pipe
1207
SB-466 Alloy 706 Seamless Cu-Ni 90/10 Pipe
1209
SB-466 Alloy 715 Seamless Cu-Ni 70/30 Pipe
1278
SB-467 Alloy 706 Welded Cu-Ni 90/10 Pipe (Annealed)
1279
SB-467 Alloy 715 Welded Cu-Ni 70/30 Pipe
Zirconium Pipe Number
Zirconium Pipe
1454
SB-658 Grade R60702 Zirconium Seamless Pipe
1456
SB-658 Grade R60702 Zirconium Welded Pipe
Metals Directory - ASTM - Plate Carbon Steel Plate Number
Carbon Steel Plate
1267
SA-36 Steel Plate
1103
SA-285 Grade C Steel Plate
1286
SA-414 Grade C Steel Plate
1104
SA-515 Grade 55 Steel Plate
1105
SA-515 Grade 60 Steel Plate
1106
SA-515 Grade 70 Steel Plate
1107
SA-516 Grade 55 Steel Plate
1108
SA-516 Grade 60 Steel Plate
1109
SA-516 Grade 70 Steel Plate
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-13
Low Alloy Steel Plate
10-14
Number
Low Alloy Steel Plate
1474
SA-203 Grade E Alloy Plate
1114
SA-204 Grade A Alloy Steel Plate
1115
SA-204 Grade B Alloy Steel Plate
1116
SA-204 Grade C Alloy Steel Plate
1117
SA-387 Grade 2 Cl.1 Alloy Steel Plate
1118
SA-387 Grade 2 Cl.2 Alloy Steel Plate
1291
SA-387 Grade 5 Cl.1 Alloy Steel Plate
1121
SA-387 Grade 11 Cl.1 Alloy Steel Plate
1122
SA-387 Grade 11 Cl.2 Alloy Steel Plate
1119
SA-387 Grade 12 Cl.1 Alloy Steel Plate
1120
SA-387 Grade 12 Cl.2 Alloy Steel Plate
1466
SA-387 Grade 22 Cl.1 Alloy Steel Plate
1272
SA-455 Steel Plate (up to 0.375")
1289
SA-537 Cl.1 Alloy Steel Plate (up to 2.5")
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
High Alloy Steel Plate Number
High Alloy Steel Plate
1123
SA-240 Grade 304 High Alloy Steel Plate
1124
SA-240 Grade 304 High Alloy Steel Plate (gasketed)
1125
SA-240 Grade 304L High Alloy Steel Plate
1126
SA-240 Grade 304L High Alloy Steel Plate (gasketed)
1133
SA-240 Grade 310S High Alloy Steel Plate
1134
SA-240 Grade 310S High Alloy Steel Plate (gasketed)
1127
SA-240 Grade 316 High Alloy Steel Plate
1128
SA-240 Grade 316 High Alloy Steel Plate (gasketed)
1129
SA-240 Grade 316L High Alloy Steel Plate
1130
SA-240 Grade 316L High Alloy Steel Plate (gasketed)
1292
SA-240 Grade 317L High Alloy Steel Plate
1293
SA-240 Grade 317L High Alloy Steel Plate (gasketed)
1294
SA-240 Grade 321 High Alloy Steel Plate
1295
SA-240 Grade 321 High Alloy Steel Plate (gasketed jnt)
1131
SA-240 Grade 347 High Alloy Steel Plate
1132
SA-240 Grade 347 High Alloy Steel Plate (gasketed jnt)
1136
SA-240 Grade 410 High Alloy Steel Plate
1445
SA-240 Grade S31803 High Alloy Steel Plate
1135
SA-240 Grade XM-27 High Alloy Steel Plate
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-15
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Plate Number
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Plate
1140
SB-127 Alloy 400 Ni-Cu Alloy Plate (Annealed)
1141
SB-127 Alloy 400 Ni-Cu Alloy Plate (Hot Rolled)
1137
SB-162 Alloy 200 Ni Plate (Annealed)
1138
SB-162 Alloy 200 Ni Plate (Hot Rolled)
1139
SB-162 Alloy 201 Ni-Lo C Plate
1249
SB-168 Alloy 600 Ni-Cr-Fe Alloy Plate (Annealed)
1142
SB-168 Alloy 600 Ni-Cr-Fe Alloy Plate (Ann.) (gasketed)
1143
SB-168 Alloy 600 Ni-Cr-Fe Alloy Plate (Hot Rolled)
1146
SB-333 Alloy B Ni Alloy Plate
1247
SB-333 Alloy B-2 Ni Alloy Plate
1248
SB-333 Alloy B-2 Ni Alloy Plate (gasketed joint)
1250
SB-409 Alloy 800 Ni-Fe-Cr Alloy Plate
1144
SB-409 Alloy 800 Ni-Fe-Cr Alloy Plate (gasketed joint)
1251
SB-424 Alloy 825 Ni Alloy Plate
1145
SB-424 Alloy 825 Ni Alloy Plate (gasketed joint)
1255
SB-463 Alloy 20 Cb Ni Alloy Plate
1152
SB-463 Alloy 20 Cb Ni Alloy Plate (gasketed joint)
1252
SB-575 Alloy C-276 Ni Alloy Plate
1149
SB-575 Alloy C-276 Ni Alloy Plate (gasketed joint)
1253
SB-582 Alloy G Ni Alloy Plate
1150
SB-582 Alloy G Ni Alloy Plate (if at gasketed joint)
1500
SB-625 Alloy 904L Ni Alloy Plate (Annealed)
Titanium Plate
10-16
Number
Titanium Plate
1464
SB-265 Grade 1 Titanium Plate
1153
SB-265 Grade 2 Titanium Plate
1154
SB-265 Grade 3 Titanium Plate
1333
SB-265 Grade 7 Titanium Plate
1332
SB-265 Grade 12 Titanium Plate
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Copper Alloy Plate Number
Copper Alloy Plate
1157
SB-96 Alloy Cda 655 Copper Alloy Plate
1256
SB-171 Alloy 464 Naval Brass Plate
1261
SB-171 Alloy 630 Al-Bronze Plate
1258
SB-171 Alloy 706 Cu-Ni 90/10 Plate
1259
SB-171 Alloy 715 Cu-Ni 70/30 Plate
1155
SB-402 Alloy Cda 715 Cu-ni 70/30 Alloy Plate
1156
SB-402 Alloy Cda 706 Cu-Ni 90/10 Alloy Plate
Aluminum Plate Number
Aluminum Plate
1361
SB-209 Alloy 6061 Temper T651 Aluminum Plate
Zirconium Plate Number
Zirconium Plate
1453
SB-551 Grade R60702 Zirconium Plate
Metals Directory - ASTM - Bolting Carbon Steel Bolting Number
Carbon Steel Bolting
1158
SA-307 Grade B Carbon Steel Bolting
1287
SA-325 Grade Types 1 & 2 Steel Bolting
1270
SA-354 Grade BD Carbon Steel Bolting (<2.5" diam)
1344
SA-354 Grade BD Carbon Steel Bolding (2.5" to 4" diam)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-17
Low Alloy Steel Bolting Number
Low Alloy Steel Bolting
1159
SA-193 B7 Alloy Steel Bolting
1246
SA-193 B7 CC 1510 Alloy Steel Bolting
1161
SA-193 B7M Alloy Steel Bolting
1162
SA-193 B16 Alloy Steel Bolting
1164
SA-193 B6 (410) High Alloy Steel Bolting
High Alloy Steel Bolting Number
High Alloy Steel Bolting
1165
SA-193 B8 Cl.1 (304) High Alloy Steel Bolting
1166
SA-193 B8M Cl.1 (316) High Alloy Steel Bolting
1167
SA-193 B8T Cl.1 (321) High Alloy Steel Bolting
1168
SA-193 B8C Cl.1 (347) High Alloy Steel Bolting
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Bolting
10-18
Number
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Bolting
1169
SB-160 Alloy 200 Ni Bolting (Cold Drawn)
1170
SB-164 Alloy 400 Ni Alloy Bolting (CD & Stress Relieved)
1171
SB-166 Alloy 600 Ni Alloy Bolting (Cold Drawn)
1172
SB-335 Alloy B Ni Alloy Bolting (Annealed)
1173
SB-574 Alloy C-276 Ni Alloy Bolting (Annealed)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals Directory - ASTM - Forging Carbon Steel Forging Number
Carbon Steel Forging
1176
SA-105 Carbon Steel Forging
1174
SA-181 Class 60 Carbon Steel Forging
1175
SA-181 Class 70 Carbon Steel Forging
1266
SA-350 Grade LF2 Carbon Steel Forging
Low Alloy Steel Forging Number
Low Alloy Steel Forging
1177
SA-182 Grade F1 Alloy Steel Forging
1178
SA-182 Grade F2 Alloy Steel Forging
1180
SA-182 Grade F11 Alloy Steel Forging
1179
SA-182 Grade F12 Alloy Steel Forging
1461
SA-182 Grade F22 Alloy Forging
1288
SA-266 Grade 2 Alloy Steel Forging
1467
SA-350 Grade LF3 Alloy Steel Forging
High Alloy Steel Forging Number
High Alloy Steel Forging
1223
SA-182 F6A Cl.1 High Alloy Steel Forging
1234
SA-182 F304 High Alloy Steel Forging
1235
SA-182 F304L High Alloy Steel Forging
1239
SA-182 F310 High Alloy Steel Forging
1236
SA-182 F316 High Alloy Steel Forging
1237
SA-182 F316L High Alloy Steel Forging
1300
SA-182 F321 High Alloy Forging
1238
SA-182 F347 High Alloy Steel Forging
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-19
Number
High Alloy Steel Forging
1240
SB-160 Alloy 200 Ni Forging (Annealed)
1241
SB-160 Alloy 201 Ni-Lo C Forging
1242
SB-164 Alloy 400 Ni Alloy Forging (Annealed)
1471
SB-425 Alloy 825 Ni Alloy Forging (Annealed)
1468
SB-564 Alloy 400 Ni Alloy Forging (Annealed)
1469
SB-564 Alloy 600 Ni Alloy Forging (Annealed)
1470
SB-564 Alloy 800 Ni Alloy Forging (Annealed)
1475
SB-564 Alloy 800H Ni Alloy Forging (Annealed)
1243
SB-166 Alloy 600 Ni Alloy Forging (Annealed)
Titanium Alloy Forging Number
Titanium Alloy Forging
1465
SB-381 Grade F1 Titanium Forging
1244
SB-381 Grade F2 Titanium Forging (Annealed)
1245
SB-381 Grade F3 Titanium Forging (Annealed)
Zirconium Alloy Forging Number
Zirconium Alloy Forging
1455
SB-493 Grade R60702 Zirconium Forging
Metals Directory - ASTM - Coupling Carbon Steel Coupling
10-20
Number
Carbon Steel Coupling
1211
SA-105 Carbon Steel Coupling
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Low Alloy Steel Coupling Number
Low Alloy Steel Coupling
1212
SA-182 F1 Alloy Steel Coupling
1213
SA-182 F2 Alloy Steel Coupling
1215
SA-182 F11 Alloy Steel Coupling
1214
SA-182 F12 Alloy Steel Coupling
High Alloy Steel Coupling Number
High Alloy Steel Coupling
1216
SA-182 F304 High Alloy Steel Coupling
1217
SA-182 F304L High Alloy Steel Coupling
1221
SA-182 F310 High Alloy Steel Coupling
1218
SA-182 F316 High Alloy Steel Coupling
1219
SA-182 F316L High Alloy Steel Coupling
1220
SA-182 F347 High Alloy Steel Coupling
1222
SA-479 XM-27 High Alloy Steel Coupling
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Coupling Number
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Coupling
1224
SB-160 Alloy 200 Ni Coupling (Annealed)
1225
SB-160 Alloy 201 Ni-Lo C Coupling
1226
SB-164 Alloy 400 Ni-Cu Alloy Coupling (Annealed)
1227
SB-166 Alloy 600 Ni-Cr-Fe Alloy Coupling (Annealed)
1228
SB-408 Alloy 800 Ni Alloy Coupling
1229
SB-425 Alloy 825 Ni Alloy Coupling
1230
SB-462 Alloy 20CB Ni Alloy Coupling
1232
SB-574 Alloy C-276 Ni Alloy Coupling
Titanium Alloy Coupling Number
Titanium Alloy Coupling
1233
SB-381 Grade F1 Titanium Coupling
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-21
Metals Directory - ASTM - Gasket Gaskets
10-22
Number
Gasket Material
1324
Compressed Asbestos 1/32" Thick (0.8 mm)
1301
Compressed Asbestos 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1302
Compressed Asbestos 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1330
Compressed Fiber 1/16" Tk (1.6 mm)
1331
Compressed Fiber 1/8" Tk (3.2 mm)
1306
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Iron
1320
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Soft Steel
1309
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Stainless Steel
1305
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Soft Copper
1307
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Monel
1308
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos 4-6% Chrome
1319
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Brass
1311
Solid Flat Metal Iron
1322
Solid Flat Metal Soft Steel
1313
Solid Flat Metal Stainless Steel
1310
Solid Flat Metal Soft Copper
1312
Solid Flat Metal Monel
1323
Solid Flat Metal 4-6% Chrome
1321
Solid Flat Metal Brass
1326
Self-Energizing Types
1314
Solid Teflon 1/32" Thick (0.8 mm)
1315
Solid Teflon 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1316
Solid Teflon 3/32" Thick (2.4 mm)
1317
Solid Teflon 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1303
Spiral-Wound Metal Asbestos Carbon Steel
1304
Spiral-Wound Metal Asbestos Stainless
1318
Spiral-Wound Metal Asbestos Monel
1327
Ring Joint Iron or Soft Steel
1328
Ring Joint Monel or 4-6% Cr
1329
Ring Joint Stainless Steel
1325
Elastomers 75A or Higher Shore Durometer
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Number
Gasket Material
1345
Garloc Blue-Gard 3000 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1366
Garloc Blue-Gard 3000 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1346
Garloc Blue-Gard 3100 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1347
Garloc Blue-Gard 3200 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1367
Garloc Blue-Gard 3200 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1349
Garloc Blue-Gard 3300 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1369
Garloc Blue-Gard 3300 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1348
Garloc Blue-Gard 3400 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1368
Garloc Blue-Gard 3400 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1350
Garloc Blue-Gard 3700 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1370
Garloc Blue-Gard 3700 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1351
Garloc Enhanced HTC 9800 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1352
Garloc Enhanced HTC 9850 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1353
Garloc Gylon 3500 Fawn 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1371
Garloc Gylon 3500 Fawn 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1353
Garloc Gylon 3504 Blue 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1372
Garloc Gylon 3504 Blue 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1355
Garloc Gylon 3510 Off-White 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1373
Garloc Gylon 3510 Off-White 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1356
Garloc Gylon 3530 Black 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1357
Garloc Gylon 3565 Envelon 1/16" Thick (1.6 mm)
1358
Garloc Guardian Plus 1/32" Thick (0.8 mm)
1374
Garloc Graph-lock 3123 (Homogeneous) 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1375
Garloc Graph-lock 3124 (Wire Inserted) 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
1376
Klinger 5401 1/8" Thick (3.2 mm)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-23
Metals Directory - ASTM - Tube Carbon Steel Tube Number
Carbon Steel Tube
1401
SA-179 Seamless Carbon Steel Tube
1402
SA-178 Grade A Welded Carbon Steel Tube
1450
SA-210 Grade A-1 Seamless Carbon Steel Tube
1403
SA-214 Welded Carbon Steel Tube
Low Alloy Steel Tube
10-24
Number
Low Alloy Steel Tube
1442
SA-199 Grade T5 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
1271
SA-199 Grade T11 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
1404
SA-209 Grade T1B Seamless Low Alloy Tube
1405
SA-213 Grade T2 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
1407
SA-213 Grade T11 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
1406
SA-213 Grade T12 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
1457
SA-213 Grade T22 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
1441
SA-334 Grade 1 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
1459
SA-334 Grade 3 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
High Alloy Steel Tube Number
High Alloy Steel Tube
1408
SA-213 TP304 Seamless High Alloy Tube
1409
SA-213 TP304L Seamless High Alloy Tube
1413
SA-213 TP310 Seamless High Alloy Tube
1410
SA-213 TP316 Seamless High Alloy Tube
1411
SA-213 TP316L Seamless High Alloy Tube
1296
SA-213 TP321 Seamless High Alloy Tube
1412
SA-213 TP347 Seamless High Alloy Tube
1297
SA-249 TP321 Welded High Alloy Tube
1415
SA-268 TP410 Seamless High Alloy Tube
1414
SA-268 XM-27 Seamless High Alloy Tube
1416
SA-249 TP304 Welded High Alloy Tube
1417
SA-249 TP304L Welded High Alloy Tube
1421
SA-249 TP310 Welded High Alloy Tube
1418
SA-249 TP316 Welded High Alloy Tube
1419
SA-249 TP316L Welded High Alloy Tube
1420
SA-249 TP347 Welded High Alloy Tube
1422
SA-268 XM-27 Welded High Alloy Tube
1423
SA-268 TP410 Welded High Alloy Tube
Copper or Copper Alloy Tube Number
Copper or Copper Alloy Tube
1436
SB-111 Alloy 122 Seamless Copper Tube (Light Drawn)
1437
SB-111 Alloy 443 Seamless Admiralty Brass Tube
1438
SB-111 Alloy 687 Seamless Aluminum-Brass Tube
1439
SB-111 Alloy 706 Seamless Cu-Ni 90/10 Tube
1440
SB-111 Alloy 715 Seamless Cu-Ni 70/30 Tube (Annealed)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-25
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Tube Number
Nickel or Nickel Alloy Tube
1424
SB-163 Alloy 200 Seamless Ni Tube (Annealed)
1425
SB-163 Alloy 201 Seamless Ni-Lo C Tube (Annealed)
1426
SB-163 Alloy 400 Seamless Ni-Cu Alloy Tube (Annealed)
1427
SB-163 Alloy 600 Seamless Ni Alloy Tube
1428
SB-163 Alloy 800 Seamless Ni-Cr-Fe Alloy Tube
1429
SB-163 Alloy 825 Seamless Ni Alloy Tube
1476
SB-163 Alloy 800H Seamless Alloy Tube
1430
SB-468 Alloy 20CB Seamless Ni Alloy Tube (Annealed)
1431
SB-468 Alloy 20CB Welded Ni Alloy Tube (Annealed)
1477
SB-622 Alloy G-3 Seamless Ni Alloy Tube (Annealed)
1478
SB-622 Alloy G-30 Seamless Ni Alloy Tube
1432
SB-626 Alloy B Welded Ni Alloy Tube
1433
SB-626 Alloy C-276 Welded Ni Alloy Tube
1502
SB-674 Alloy 904 Welded Ni Alloy Tube (Annealed)
Titanium Alloy Tube Number
Titanium Alloy Tube
1458
SB-338 Grade 1 Seamless Titanium Tube (Annealed)
1434
SB-338 Grade 2 Seamless Titanium Tube
1435
SB-338 Grade 2 Welded Titanium Tube
1338
SB-338 Grade 7 Seamless Titanium Tube
1340
SB-338 Grade 7 Welded Titanium Tube
Zirconium Alloy Tube
10-26
Number
Zirconium Alloy Tube
1451
SB-523 R60702 Seamless Zirconium Tube
1452
SB-523 R60702 Welded Zirconium Tube
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals Directory - AFNOR - Genenic Number
Generic Material
1
Carbon Steel
2
Low Alloy Steel C 1/2 Mo
3
Low Alloy Steel 1/2 Cr 1/2 Mo
4
Low Alloy Steel Cr 1/2 Mo
5
Low Alloy Steel 1 1/4 Cr 1/2 Mo
6
High Alloy Steel Grade 304
7
High Alloy Steel Grade 304L
8
High Alloy Steel Grade 316
9
High Alloy Steel Grade 316L
10
High Alloy Steel Grade 347
11
High Alloy Steel Grade 310S
12
High Alloy Steel Grade 310S XM-27 (E-brite)
13
High Alloy Steel Grade 410
14
Nickel Alloy 200
15
Nickel Low Carbon Alloy 201
16
Nickel Alloy 400 (Monel)
17
Nickel Alloy 600 (Inconel)
18
Nickel Alloy 800
19
Nickel Alloy 825 (Inconel 825)
20
Nickel Alloy B (Hastelloy B)
21
Nickel Alloy C (Hastelloy C)
22
Nickel Alloy G (Hastelloy G)
23
Nickel Alloy 20Cb (Carpenter 20)
24
Titanium
25
Copper-Nickel 70/30 Alloy CDA 715
26
Copper-Nickel 90/10 Alloy CDA 706
27
Copper-Nickel Alloy CDA 655
28
Naval Brass Alloy 464
29
Aluminum-Bronze Alloy 630
30
Aluminum Brass Alloy 687
31
Admiralty Alloy 443
33
Zirconium
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-27
Metals Directory - AFNOR - Pipe Carbon Steel Pipe Number
Carbon Steel Pipe
2100
NFA-49.112 TUE220A Seamless Steel Pipe
2101
NFA-49.112 TUE235A Seamless Steel Pipe
2103
NFA-49.142 TS37e Welded Steel Pipe
2104
NFA-49.142 TS34b Welded Steel Pipe
2105
NFA-49.142 TS37b Welded Steel Pipe
2106
NFA-49.142 TS42b Welded Steel Pipe
2107
NFA-49.142 TS47b Welded Steel Pipe
2108
NFA-49.211 TUE220 Seamless Steel Pipe
2109
NFA-49.211 TUE250 Seamless Steel Pipe
2110
NFA-49.211 TUE275 Seamless Steel Pipe
2111
NFA-49.212 TU37c Seamless Steel Pipe
2112
NFA-49.212 TU42c Seamless Steel Pipe
2113
NFA-49.213 TU37c Seamless Steel Pipe
2114
NFA-49.213 TU42c Seamless Steel Pipe
2115
NFA-49.213 TU48c Seamless Steel Pipe
2116
NFA-49.213 TU52c Seamless Steel Pipe
High Alloy Steel Pipe
10-28
Number
High Alloy Steel Pipe
2117
NFA-49.214 TUZ6CN19.10 Seamless High Alloy Pipe
2118
NFA-49.214 TUZ6CND17.12B Seamless High Alloy Pipe
2119
NFA-49.214 TUZ6CNT18.12B Seamless High Alloy Pipe
2119
NFA-49.214 TUZ6CNNb18.12B Seamless High Alloy Pipe
2120
NFA-49.214 TUZ8CNDT17.13B Seamless High Alloy Pipe
2121
NFA-49.214 TUZ10CNWT17.13B Seamless High Alloy Pipe
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals Directory - AFNOR - Plate Carbon Steel Plate Number
Carbon Steel Plate
2212
NFA-35.501 E24-2 Steel Plate
2213
NFA-35.501 E24-3 Steel Plate
2214
NFA-35.501 E24-4 Steel Plate
2200
NFA-36.205 A37-CP Steel Plate
2201
NFA-36.205 A37-AP Steel Plate
2202
NFA-36.205 A37-FP Steel Plate
2203
NFA-36.205 A42-CP Steel Plate
2204
NFA-36.205 A42-AP Steel Plate
2205
NFA-36.205 A42-FP Steel Plate
2206
NFA-36.205 A48-CP Steel Plate
2207
NFA-36.205 A48-AP Steel Plate
2208
NFA-36.205 A48-FP Steel Plate
2209
NFA-36.205 A52-CP Steel Plate
2210
NFA-36.205 A52-AP Steel Plate
2211
NFA-36.205 A52-FP Steel Plate
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-29
High Alloy Steel Plate Number
High Alloy Steel Plate
2233
NFA-36.209 Z1CN18.12 High Alloy Steel Plate
2234
NFA-36.209 Z1CNS17.15 High Alloy Steel Plate
2215
NFA-36.209 Z3CN18.10 High Alloy Steel Plate
2235
NFA-36.209 Z4CN19.10 High Alloy Steel Plate
2216
NFA-36.209 Z6CN18.09 High Alloy Steel Plate
2217
NFA-36.209 Z7CN18.09 High Alloy Steel Plate
2220
NFA-36.209 Z6CNNb18.10 High Alloy Steel Plate
2218
NFA-36.209 Z6CNT18.10HT High Alloy Steel Plate
2219
NFA-36.209 Z6CNT18.10BT High Alloy Steel Plate
2229
NFA-36.209 Z3CN18.10Az High Alloy Steel Plate
2230
NFA-36.209 Z6CN19.09Az High Alloy Steel Plate
2221
NFA-36.209 Z3CND17.11.02 High Alloy Steel Plate
2227
NFA-36.209 Z3CND17.12.03 High Alloy Steel Plate
2224
NFA-36.209 Z3CND18.12.03 High Alloy Steel Plate
2228
NFA-36.209 Z3CND19.15.04 High Alloy Steel Plate
2236
NFA-36.209 Z4CND18.12.03 High Alloy Steel Plate
2225
NFA-36.209 Z6CND18.12.03 High Alloy Steel Plate
2222
NFA-36.209 Z7CND17.11.02 High Alloy Steel Plate
2226
NFA-36.209 Z6CNDNb18.12 High Alloy Steel Plate
2223
NFA-36.209 Z6CNDT17.12 High Alloy Steel Plate
2237
NFA-36.209 Z3CND17.11Az High Alloy Steel Plate
2231
NFA-36.209 Z3CND17.12Az High Alloy Steel Plate
2238
NFA-36.209 Z3CND18.14.05Az High Alloy Steel Plate
2239
NFA-36.209 Z3CND19.14Az High Alloy Steel Plate
2232
NFA-36.209 Z4CMN18.08.07Az High Alloy Steel Plate
2233
10-30
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals Directory - AFNOR - Bolting Low Alloy Steel Bolting Number
Low Alloy Steel Bolting
2600
NFA-35.558 25CD4 Alloy Steel Bolting
2601
NFA-35.558 42CDV4 Alloy Steel Bolting
Metals - Directory - AFNOR - Forging Carbon Steel Forging Number
Carbon Steel Forging
2400
NFA-36.601 A37-CP Steel Forging
2401
NFA-36.601 A37-AP Steel Forging
2402
NFA-36.601 A37-FP Steel Forging
2403
NFA-36.601 A42-CP Steel Forging
2404
NFA-36.601 A42-AP Steel Forging
2405
NFA-36.601 A42-FP Steel Forging
2406
NFA-36.601 A48-CP Steel Forging
2407
NFA-36.601 A48-AP Steel Forging
2408
NFA-36.601 A48-FP Steel Forging
2409
NFA-36.601 A52-CP Steel Forging
2410
NFA-36.601 A52-AP Steel Forging
2411
NFA-36.601 A52-FP Steel Forging
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-31
High Alloy Steel Forging
10-32
Number
High Alloy Steel Forging
2412
NFA-36.607 Z2CN18.10 High Alloy Steel Forging
2413
NFA-36.607 Z5CN18.09 High Alloy Steel Forging
2414
NFA-36.607 Z6CN18.09 High Alloy Steel Forging
2416
NFA-36.607 Z6CNT18.10 High Alloy Steel Forging
2417
NFA-36.607 Z6CNNb18.10 High Alloy Steel Forging
2418
NFA-36.607 Z2CND17.12 High Alloy Steel Forging
2419
NFA-36.607 Z6CND17.11 High Alloy Steel Forging
2420
NFA-36.607 Z6CNDT17.12 High Alloy Steel Forging
2422
NFA-36.607 Z2CND18.13 High Alloy Steel Forging
2423
NFA-36.607 Z6CND18.13 High Alloy Steel Forging
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals Directory - AFNOR - Gasket Gaskets Number
Gasket Material
2324
Compressed Asbestos 1 mm Thk.
2301
Compresses Asbestos 2 mm Thk.
2302
Compressed Asbestos 3 mm Thk.
2314
Solid Teflon 1 mm Thk.
2316
Solid Teflon 2 mm Thk.
2317
Solid Teflon 3 mm Thk.
2318
Spiral-Wound Metal Asbestos Monel
2303
Spiral-Wound Metal Asbestos Carbon Steel
2304
Spiral-Wound Metal Asbestos Stainless Steel
2305
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Soft Copper
2319
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Brass
2320
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Soft Steel
2306
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Iron
2307
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Monel
2308
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos 4-6% Chrome
2309
Flat Metal Jacket Asbestos Stainless Steel
2310
Solid Flat Metal Soft Copper
2311
Solid Flat Metal Iron
2312
Solid Flat Metal Monel
2313
Solid Flat Metal Stainless Steel
2321
Solid Flat Metal Soft Brass
2322
Solid Flat Metal Soft Steel
2323
Solid Flat Metal 4-6% Chrome
2325
Elastomers 75A or Higher Shore Durometer
2326
Self-Energizing Types
2327
Ring Joint Iron or Soft Steel
2328
Ring Joint Monel or 4-6% Chrome
2329
Ring Joint Stainless Steel
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-33
Metals Directory - AFNOR - Tube Carbon Steel Tube Number
Carbon Steel Tube
2700
NFA-49.215 TU37c Seamless Steel Tube
2701
NFA-49.215 TU42c Seamless Steel Tube
2702
NFA-49.215 TU48c Seamless Steel Tube
Low Alloy Steel Tube Number
Low Alloy Steel Tube
2703
NFA-49.215 TU15D3 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
2704
NFA-49.215 TU15CD2.05 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
2705
NFA-49.215 TU10CD5.05 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
2706
NFA-49.215 TU10CD9.10 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
2707
NFA-49.215 TUZ10CD5.05 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
2708
NFA-49.215 TUZ10CD9 Seamless Low Alloy Tube
High Alloy Steel Tube
10-34
Number
High Alloy Steel Tube
2715
NFA-49.217 TUZ12C13 Seamless High Alloy Tube
2716
NFA-49.217 TUZ10C17 Seamless High Alloy Tube
2710
NFA-49.217 TUZ2CN18.10 Seamless High Alloy Tube
2711
NFA-49.217 TUZ6CN18.09 Seamless High Alloy Tube
2712
NFA-49.217 TUZ6CNT18.10 Seamless High Alloy Tube
2713
NFA-49.217 TUZ2CND17.12 Seamless High Alloy Tube
2714
NFA-49.217 TUZ6CND17.11 Seamless High Alloy Tube
2717
NFA-49.247 TSZ2CN18.10 Welded High Alloy Tube
2718
NFA-49.247 TSZ6CN18.09 Welded High Alloy Tube
2719
NFA-49.247 TSZ6CNT18.10 Welded High Alloy Tube
2720
NFA-49.247 TSZ2CND17.12 Welded High Alloy Tube
2721
NFA-49.247 TSZ6CND17.11 Welded High Alloy Tube
2722
NFA-49.247 TSZ2CND19.15 Welded High Alloy Tube
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals Directory - DIN - Generic Generic Material Number
Generic Material
1
Carbon Steel
2
Low Alloy Steel C 1/2 Mo
3
Low Alloy Steel 1/2 Cr 1/2 Mo
4
Low Alloy Steel Cr 1/2 Mo
5
Low Alloy Steel 1 1/4 Cr 1/2 Mo
6
High Alloy Steel Grade 304
7
High Alloy Steel Grade 304L
8
High Alloy Steel Grade 316
9
High Alloy Steel Grade 316L
13
High Alloy Steel Grade 410
15
Nickel Low Carbon Alloy 201
16
Nickel Alloy 400 (Monel)
17
Nickel Alloy 600 (Inconel)
19
Nickel Alloy 825 (Incoloy)
25
Copper-Nickel 70/30 Alloy CDA 715
26
Copper-Nickel 90/10 Alloy CDA 706
33
Zirconium
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-35
Metals Directory - DIN - Pipe Pipe - Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel - Seamless - AD W4
10-36
Number
Pipe Alloyed and NonAlloyed Steel Seamless AD W4
3202
1.0254 - St 37.0 - DIN 1629
3208
1.0255 - St 37.4 - DIN 1630
3204
1.0256 - St 44.0 - DIN 1629
3210
1.0257 - St 44.4 - DIN 1630
3230
1.0305 - St 35.8 - DIN 17175
3214
1.0356 - TTSt 35 N - DIN 17173
3216
1.0356 - TTSt 35 V - DIN 17173
3232
1.0405 - St 45.8 - DIN 17175
3206
1.0421 - St 52.0 - DIN 1629
3248
1.0462 - WStE 255 - DIN 17179
3234
1.0481 - 17 Mn 4 - DIN 17175
3236
1.0482 - 19 Mn 5 - DIN 17175
3250
1.0487 - WStE 285 - DIN 17179
3252
1.0565 - WStE 355 - DIN 17179
3212
1.0581 - St 52.4 - DIN 1630
3246
1.4922 - X 20 CrMoV 12 1 - DIN 17175
3238
1.5415 - 15 Mo 3 - DIN 17175
3224
1.5637 - 10 Ni 14 - DIN 17173
3228
1.5662 - X 8 Ni 9 - DIN 17173
3226
1.5680 - 12 Ni 19 - DIN 17173
3220
1.6212 - 11 MnNi 5 3 - DIN 17173
3222
1.6217 - 13 MnNi 6 3 - DIN 17173
3218
1.7219 - 26 CrMo 4 - DIN 17173
3240
1.7335 - 13 CrMo 4 4 - DIN 17175
3242
1.7380 - 10 CrMo 9 10 - DIN 17175
3244
1.7715 - 14 MoV 6 3 - DIN 17175
3254
1.8932 - WStE 420 - DIN 17179
3256
1.8935 - WStE 460 - DIN 17179
3287
1.0315 - St 37.8 - DIN 17177
3289
1.0498 - St 42.8 - DIN 17177
3291
1.5415 - 15 MoV 3 - DIN 17177
3257
1.8935 - WStE 460 - DIN 17178
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Pipe - Stainless Steel - Welded - AD W2 - DIN 17457 Number
Pipe - Stainless Steel - Welded - AD W2 - DIN 17457
3261
1.4301 - X 5 CrNi 18 10 - DIN 17457
3263
1.4306 - X 2 CrNi 19 11 - DIN 17457
3265
1.4331 - X 2 CrNiN 18 10 - DIN 17457
3271
1.4401 - X 5 CrNiMo 17 12 2 - DIN 17457
3273
1.4404 - X 2 CrNiMo 17 13 2 - DIN 17457
3279
1.4429 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 3 - DIN 17457
3281
1.4435 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 3 - DIN 17457
3283
1.4436 - X 5 CrNiMo 17 13 3 - DIN 17457
3285
1.4439 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 5 - DIN 17457
3267
1.4541 - X 6 CrNiTi 18 10 - DIN 17457
3269
1.4550 - X 6 CrNiNb 18 10 - DIN 17457
3275
1.4571 - X 6 CrNiMoTi 17 12 2 - DIN 17457
Pipe - Nickel and Nickel Alloy - VdTÜV Number
Pipe - Nickel and Nickel Alloy - VdTÜV
3292
2.4068 - Nickel 201 - VdTÜV 345
3288
2.4360 - Monel 400 - VdTÜV 263
3290
2.4816 - Inconel 600 - VdTÜV 305
3294
2.4856 - VdTÜV 499
3286
2.4858 - Incoloy 825 - VdTÜV 432
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-37
Metals Directory - DIN - Plate Plates - Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel - AD W1
10-38
Number
Plates - Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel - AD W1
3000
1.0035 - St 33 - DIN 17100
3001
1.0036 - USt 37-2 - DIN 17100
3002
1.0037 - St 37-2 - DIN 17100
3003
1.0038 - RSt 37-2 - DIN 17100
3005
1.0044 - St 44-2 - DIN 17100
3008
1.0050 - St 50-2 - DIN 17100
3009
1.0060 - St 60-2 - DIN 17100
3010
1.0070 - St 70-2 - DIN 17100
3004
1.0116 - St 37-3 - DIN 17100
3006
1.0144 - St 44-3 - DIN 17100
3020
1.0345 - H I - DIN 17155
3021
1.0425 - H II - DIN 17155
3011
1.0462 - WStE 255 - DIN 17102
3024
1.0473 - 19 Mn 6 - DIN 17155
3023
1.0481 - 17 Mn 4 - DIN 17155
3012
1.0487 - WStE 285 - DIN 17102
3013
1.0506 - WStE 315 - DIN 17102
3014
1.0565 - WStE 355 - DIN 17102
3007
1.0570 - St 52-3 - DIN 17100
3025
1.5415 - 15 Mo 3 - DIN 17155
3032
1.5637 - 10 Ni 14 - DIN 17280
3035
1.5662 - X 8 Ni 9 - DIN 17280
3033
1.5680 - 12 Ni 19 - DIN 17280
3029
1.6212 - 11 MnNi 5 3 - DIN 17280
3030
1.6217 - 13 MnNi 6 3 - DIN 17280
3031
1.6228 - 14 NiMn 6 - DIN 17280
3034
1.6349 - X 7 NiMo 6 - DIN 17280
3028
1.7219 - 26 CrMo 4 - DIN 17280
3026
1.7335 - 13 CrMo 4 4 - DIN 17155
3015
1.8930 - WStE 380 - DIN 17102
3016
1.8932 - WStE 420 - DIN 17102
3017
1.8935 - WStE 460 - DIN 17102
3018
1.8937 - WStE 500 - DIN 17102
3019
1.8937 - WStE 500 - DIN 17102
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Plates - Stainless Steel - AD W2 - DIN 17440 Number
Plates - Stainless Steel - AD W2 - DIN 17440
3036
1.4000 - X 6 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3037
1.4002 - X 6 CrAl 13 - DIN 17440
3038
1.4006 - X 10 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3062
1.4016 - X 6 Cr 17 - DIN 17440
3040
1.4021 - X 20 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3039
1.4024 - X 15 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3041
1.4028 - X 30 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3042
1.4031 - X 38 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3043
1.4034 - X 48 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3066
1.4057 - X CrNi 17 2 - DIN 17440
3065
1.4104 - X 12 CrMoS 17 - DIN 17440
3064
1.4105 - X 4 CrMoS 18 - DIN 17440
3044
1.4116 - X 45 CrMoV 15 - DIN 17440
3045
1.4301 - X 5 CrNi 8 10 - DIN 17440
3046
1.4303 - X 5 CrNi 18 12 - DIN 17440
3047
1.4305 - X 10 CrNiS 18 9 - DIN 17440
3048
1.4306 - X 2 CrNi 19 11 - DIN 17440
3049
1.4311 - X 2 CrNiN 18 10 - DIN 17440
3052
1.4401 - X 5 CrNiMo 17 12 2 - DIN 17440
3053
1.4404 - X 2 CrNiMo 17 13 2 - DIN 17440
3054
1.4406 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 12 2 - DIN 17440
3057
1.4429 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 3 - DIN 17440
3058
1.4435 - X 2 CrNiMo 18 14 3 - DIN 17440
3059
1.4436 - X 5 CrNiMo 17 13 3 - DIN 17440
3060
1.4438 - X 2 CrNiMo 18 16 4 - DIN 17440
3061
1.4439 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 5 - DIN 17440
3063
1.4510 - X 6 CrTi 17 - DIN 17440
3050
1.4541 - X 6 CrNiTi 18 10 - DIN 17440
3051
1.4550 - X 6 CrNiNb 18 10 - DIN 17440
3055
1.4571 - X 6 CrNiMoTi 17 12 2 - DIN 17440
3056
1.4580 - X 6 CrNiMoNb 17 12 2 - DIN 17440
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-39
Plates - Copper and Copper Alloy - AD W6/2 Number
Plates - Copper and Copper Alloy - AD W6/2
3070
2.0090.10 - SF-Cu F20 - AD W6/2
3071
2.0872.19 - CuNi10Fe1Mn F30 - AD W6/2
3072
2.0882.19 - CuNi30Fe1Mn F35 - AD W6/2
Plates - Nickel and Nickel Alloy - VdTÜV Number
Plates - Nickel and Nickel Alloy - VdTšV
3076
2.4068 - Nickel 201 - VdTÜV 345
3074
2.4360 - Monel 400 - VdTÜV 263
3075
2.4816 - Inconel 600 - VdTÜV 305
3077
2.4856 - VdTÜV 499
Metals Directory - DIN - Bolting Bolts - DIN 17240
10-40
Number
Bolts - DIN 17240
3701
1.1181 - Ck 35
3707
1.4913 - X 19 CrMoVNbN 11 1
3706
1.4923 - X 22 CrMoV 12 1
3708
1.4986 - X 8 CrNiMoBNb 16 16
3702
1.7258 - 24 CrMo 5
3704
1.7709 - 21 CrMoV 5 7
3705
1.7711 - 40 CrMoV 4 7
3709
2.4952 - NiCr20TiAl
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals Directory - DIN - Forging Forging - Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel - AD W13 Number
Forging - Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel - AD W13
3600
1.0035 - US 33 - DIN 17100
3601
1.0036 - USt 37-2 - DIN 17100
3602
1.0037 - St 37-2 - DIN 17100
3603
1.0038 - RSt 37-2 - DIN 17100
3605
1.0044 - St 44-2 - DIN 17100
3608
1.0050 - St 50-2 - DIN 17100
3609
1.0060 - St 60-2 - DIN 17100
3610
1.0070 - St 70-2 - DIN 17100
3604
1.0116 - St 37-3 - DIN 17100
3606
1.0144 - St 44-3 - DIN 17100
3670
1.0460 - C 22.8 - DIN 17243
3611
1.0462 - WStE 255 - DIN 17102
3672
1.0481 - 17 Mn 4 - DIN 17243
3612
1.0487 - WStE 285 - DIN 17102
3613
1.0506 - WStE 315 - DIN 17102
3614
1.0565 - WStE 355 - DIN 17102
3607
1.0570 - St 52-3 - DIN 17100
3674
1.1133 - 20 Mn 5 N - DIN 17243
3676
1.1133 - 20 Mn 5 V - DIN 17243
3686
1.4922 - X 20 CrMoV 12 1 - DIN 17243
3678
1.5415 - 15 Mo 3 - DIN 17243
3632
1.5637 - 10 Ni 14 - DIN 17280
3635
1.5662 - X 8 Ni 9 - DIN 17280
3633
1.5680 - 12 Ni 19 - DIN 17280
3629
1.6212 - 11 MnNi 5 3 - DIN 17280
3630
1.6217 - 13 MnNi 6 3 - DIN 17280
3631
1.6228 - 14 NiMn 6 - DIN 17280
3634
1.6349 - X 7 NiMo 6 - DIN 17280
3628
1.7219 - 26 CrMo 4 - DIN 17280
3680
1.7335 - 13 CrMo 4 4 - DIN 17243
3682
1.7380 - 10 CrMo 9 10 - DIN 17243
3684
1.7715 - 14 MoV 6 3 - DIN 17243
3615
1.8930 - WStE 380 - DIN 17102
3616
1.8932 - WStE 420 - DIN 17102
3617
1.8935 - WStE 460 - DIN 17102
3618
1.8937 - WStE 500 - DIN 17102
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-41
Forging - Stainless Steel - AD W2 - DIN 17440
10-42
Number
Forging - Stainless Steel - AD W2 - DIN 17440
3636
1.4000 - X 6 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3637
1.4002 - X 6 CrAl 13 - DIN 17440
3638
1.4006 - X 10 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3662
1.4016 - X 6 Cr 17 - DIN 17440
3640
1.4021 - X 20 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3639
1.4024 - X 15 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3641
1.4028 - X 30 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3642
1.4031 - X 38 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3643
1.4034 - X 48 Cr 13 - DIN 17440
3666
1.4057 - X CrNi 17 2 - DIN 17440
3665
1.4104 - X 12 CrMoS 17 - DIN 17440
3664
1.4105 - X 4 CrMoS 18 - DIN 17440
3644
1.4116 - X 45 CrMoV 15 - DIN 17440
3645
1.4301 - X 5 CrNi 8 10 - DIN 17440
3646
1.4303 - X 5 CrNi 18 12 - DIN 17440
3647
1.4305 - X 10 CrNiS 18 9 - DIN 17440
3648
1.4306 - X 2 CrNi 19 11 - DIN 17440
3649
1.4311 - X 2 CrNiN 18 10 - DIN 17440
3652
1.4401 - X 5 CrNiMo 17 12 2 - DIN 17440
3653
1.4404 - X 2 CrNiMo 17 13 2 - DIN 17440
3654
1.4406 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 12 2 - DIN 17440
3657
1.4429 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 3 - DIN 17440
3658
1.4435 - X 2 CrNiMo 18 14 3 - DIN 17440
3659
1.4436 - X 5 CrNiMo 17 13 3 - DIN 17440
3660
1.4438 - X 2 CrNiMo 18 16 4 - DIN 17440
3661
1.4439 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 5 - DIN 17440
3663
1.4510 - X 6 CrTi 17 - DIN 17440
3650
1.4541 - X 6 CrNiTi 18 10 - DIN 17440
3651
1.4550 - X 6 CrNiNb 18 10 - DIN 17440
3655
1.4571 - X 6 CrNiMoTi 17 12 2 - DIN 17440
3656
1.4580 - X 6 CrNiMoNb 17 12 2 - DIN 17440
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Metals - Directory - DIN - Gasket Gaskets Number
Gaskets
3312
Blechummantelte Dichtung - Al
3313
Blechummantelte Dichtung - Cu-Ms
3314
Blechummantelte Dichtung - weicher Stahl
3300
Flachdichtung - PTFE
3301
Flachdichtung - It - DIN 2505 (4/90)
3307
Flachdichtung - It - DIN 2505 (1/86)
3302
Flachdichtung - It PTFE-ummantelt
3303
Graphit mit Verstürkung - DIN 2505
3306
Linsendichtung - DIN 2696
3305
Metall-Flachdichtung - Stahl - St 35
3308
Spiral-Asbestdichtung - unlegierter Stahl
3309
Welldichtring - Al
3310
Welldichtring - Cu-Ms
3311
Welldichtring - weicher Stahl
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-43
Metals Directory - DIN - Tube Tubes - Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel - Seamless - AD W4
10-44
Number
TubesAlloyed and NonAlloyed Steel Seamless AD W4
3401
1.0253 - USt 37.0 - DIN 1626
3402
1.0254 - St 37.0 - DIN 1629
3408
1.0255 - St 37.4 - DIN 1630
3404
1.0256 - St 44.0 - DIN 1629
3410
1.0257 - St 44.4 - DIN 1630
3430
1.0305 - St 35.8 - DIN 17175
3414
1.0356 - TTSt 35 N - DIN 17173
3416
1.0356 - TTSt 35 V - DIN 17173
3432
1.0405 - St 45.8 - DIN 17175
3406
1.0421 - St 52.0 - DIN 1629
3448
1.0462 - WStE 255 - DIN 17179
3434
1.0481 - 17 Mn 4 - DIN 17175
3436
1.0482 - 19 Mn 5 - DIN 17175
3450
1.0487 - WStE 285 - DIN 17179
3452
1.0565 - WStE 355 - DIN 17179
3412
1.0581 - St 52.4 - DIN 1630
3446
1.4922 - X 20 CrMoV 12 1 - DIN 17175
3438
1.5415 - 15 Mo 3 - DIN 17175
3424
1.5637 - 10 Ni 14 - DIN 17173
3428
1.5662 - X 8 Ni 9 - DIN 17173
3426
1.5680 - 12 Ni 19 - DIN 17173
3420
1.6212 - 11 MnNi 5 3 - DIN 17173
3422
1.6217 - 13 MnNi 6 3 - DIN 17173
3418
1.7219 - 26 CrMo 4 - DIN 17173
3440
1.7335 - 13 CrMo 4 4 - DIN 17175
3442
1.7380 - 10 CrMo 9 10 - DIN 17175
3444
1.7715 - 14 MoV 6 3 - DIN 17175
3454
1.8932 - WStE 420 - DIN 17179
3456
1.8935 - WStE 460 - DIN 17179
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubes - Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel - Welded - AD W4 Number
Tubes-Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel Welded AD W4
3403
1.0254 - St 37.0 - DIN 1626
3409
1.0255 - St 37.4 - DIN 1628
3405
1.0256 - St 44.0 - DIN 1626
3411
1.0257 - St 44.4 - DIN 1628
3415
1.0356 - TTSt 35 N - DIN 17174
3417
1.0356 - TTSt 35 V - DIN 17174
3407
1.0421 - St 52.0 - DIN 1626
3449
1.0462 - WStE 255 - DIN 17178
3451
1.0487 - WStE 285 - DIN 17178
3453
1.0565 - WStE 355 - DIN 17178
3413
1.0581 - St 52.4 - DIN 1628
3425
1.5637 - 10 Ni 14 - DIN 17174
3429
1.5662 - X 8 Ni 9 - DIN 17174
3427
1.5680 - 12 Ni 19 - DIN 17174
3421
1.6212 - 11 MnNi 5 3 - DIN 17174
3423
1.6217 - 13 MnNi 6 3 - DIN 17174
3455
1.8932 - WStE 420 - DIN 17178
Tubes - Stainless Steel - Seamless - DIN 17458 Number
Tubes - Stainless Steel - Seamless - DIN 17458
3460
1.4301 - X 5 CrNi 18 10 - DIN 17458
3462
1.4306 - X 2 CrNi 19 11 - DIN 17458
3464
1.4331 - X 2 CrNiN 18 10 - DIN 17458
3470
1.4401 - X 5 CrNiMo 17 12 2 - DIN 17458
3472
1.4404 - X 2 CrNiMo 17 13 2 - DIN 17458
3478
1.4429 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 3 - DIN 17458
3480
1.4435 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 3 - DIN 17458
3482
1.4436 - X 5 CrNiMo 17 13 3 - DIN 17458
3484
1.4439 - X 2 CrNiMoN 17 13 5 - DIN 17458
3466
1.4541 - X 6 CrNiTi 18 10 - DIN 17458
3468
1.4550 - X 6 CrNiNb 18 10 - DIN 17458
3474
1.4571 - X 6 CrNiMoTi 17 12 2 - DIN 17458
3476
1.4580 - X 6 CrNiMoNb 17 12 2 - DIN 17458
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
10-45
Tubes - Copper and Copper Alloy - Seamless - AD W6/2 Number
Tubes - Copper and Copper Allo Seamless - AD W6/2
3492
2.0090.10 - SF-Cu F22 - AD W6/2
3494
2.0872.19 - CuNi10Fe1Mn F29 - AD W6/2
3496
2.0882.19 - CuNi30Fe1Mn F37 - AD W6/2
Tubes - Nickel and Nickel Alloy - VdTÜV Number
Tubes - Nickel and Nickel Alloy - VdTÜV
3504
2.4068 - Nickel 201 - VdTÜV 345
3500
2.4360 - Monel 400 - VdTÜV 263
3502
2.4816 - Inconel 600 - VdTÜV 305
3506
2.4856 - VdTÜV 499
3498
2.4858 - Incoloy 825 - VdTÜV 432
Tubes-Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel-Welded-AD W4 Number
Tubes-Alloyed and Non-Alloyed Steel-Welded-AD W4
3487
1.0315-St37.8-DIN 17177
3489
1.0498-St42.8-DIN 17177
3491
1.5415-15MoV3-DIN 17177
3457
1.8935-WStE460-DIN 17178
❖
10-46
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
11
Primetals
Introduction Primetal is a program that allows you to build and maintain your own databank of materials which supplements the materials in the Metals databank. The material can be in the form of plate, pipe, tube, forging, coupling, bolt, or gasket. Once you assign a material name and store the material properties, you can then use the new material name in any of the Aspen B-JAC programs which allow specific material names (Hetran, Teams, Metals). The Primetal program provides the following functions: • • • • •
Add a material Modify the properties of a material Delete a material Display or print a list of materials Display or print the properties of a material
This program does not require an input data file, since all of the data is stored in the databank itself. You specify the input data directly into the Primetal program when you run it. The input data can be specified in either U.S., SI, or Metric units and is divided into three sections: • • •
Names Constant properties Temperature dependent properties
The names are: • • •
Full name (up to 78 characters) Short name (up to 39 characters) for the mechanical design output Very short name (up to 24 characters) for the bill of materials
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
11-1
The constant properties include: • • • • • • • • • • •
Material type and class Price and currency Equivalent material numbers for pipe, plate, forging, coupling Density Minimum thickness P number and group number External pressure chart Minimum tensile and yield strengths Maximum thickness for x-ray exemption Poisson ratio Minimum and maximum diameter for validity
The temperature dependent properties include: • • • • • • •
Thermal conductivity Allowable stress Yield strength Coefficient of thermal expansion Modulus of elasticity Stress intensity Tensile strength
For each of the temperature dependent properties, you can specify from 2 to 21 points, starting from a specified starting temperature, then according to a specified temperature increment. Each property should also have minimum and maximum temperatures. If a value is not available for one or more of the temperature points, you can specify a zero (or leave it blank) and the databank routine will automatically interpolate using the closest specified values.
Currency This item refers to the currency of the values in the cost files. The original selections are: 1= $US
2= $Canadian
5= Belgium Franc 6= Deutch Mark
3= French Franc
4= British Pound
7= Italian Lire
8= Yen
The default values are already in US dollars. Dollar).
I recommend to always us
1
(US
The user can enter the Korean Won in the UOM Control (Unit of Measure control - the user can enter any currency here). Go to Tools > Data Maintenance > Units of Measure > Units Maintenance. Fill out the new currency information. Save the changes. From this point forward, the user can convert to the new currency. Also, using one of three customizable unit-sets, the user can default to a currency and other special units.
11-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Material Type The number designator used by the program for the material type are: 1= seamless pipe
101= forging
2= seamless tube
102= coupling
25= welded pipe
151= gasket
26= welded tube
165= bolt
(SP = Seamless pipe, ST = Seamless tube, etc.)
51= plate
Material Class The number designator used by the program for the material class are:
1= Carbon Steel
2= Low Alloy Steel
3= High Alloy Steel
4= Ni or Ni Alloy
5= Titanium Alloy
6= Cu Alloy HT (HT=High Tensile)
7= Nickel Alloy B,C, or G
8= Zirconium
9= Nickel Alloy HT
10= Cu or Cu Alloy
0=Gasket
The material type and class is important when the user enters his/her own materials.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
11-3
External Pressure Chart Reference An external pressure chart reference, ASME Section II, Part D, must be provided for external pressure calculations. The correlation is determine the number to be entered is as follows: Material database external pressure chart reference number = X*100 + Y Where X represents the material type: X=1 for CS X=2 for HA X=3 for NF X=4 for HT `
X=5 for CI X=6 for CD
Where Y = chart number Examples: Chart CS-3 = 103 ( X=1, Y=3 ) Chart NFN-16 (old reference was UNF-28.40) = 340 ( X=3, Y=40 )
11-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Example Input to Primetals
Steps to create a private material 1. Open Materials Database by selecting Tools / Data Maintenance / Material Database form the B-JAC User Interface. 2. Open one of the existing Code material databases, such as ASME, from the Database Menu option. 3. Select a similar material in the Code database to the private material you wish to create. This will act as a template for the new material. 4. Select Property / Copy to copy the contents into the buffer. 5. Select Database / User.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
11-5
6. If no user materials exist in the database, you will be asked if you wish to create a new material. Answer Yes and set the user database number for the new material. Your new material in the database will be displayed with the existing properties being used as a template. Proceed to step 8. 7. If user materials already exist, your existing database items will be displayed. To copy the template properties, select Property and Paste and then select a number new material reference number. 8. Now modify the template properties to generate your new material. If you have selected a very similar material, you may only need to modify the material names and the allowable design stresses. 9. Once all changes have been made, select Save to update the database. Now this new user material may be referenced from any of the B-JAC programs.
❖
11-6
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
12
Newcost Database
Introduction Newcost is a database maintenance program, designed to modify and/or print the contents of the labor and material cost files associated with the Aspen B-JAC programs which address cost estimation (Teams, Qchex, and Hetran). B-JAC supplies a standard database with each version of the program. When you make any changes to the database, your changes will always override any values in the standard database. To start the Newcost database, first change your working directory to where you want the modified database to reside. This can be the same directory as the Aspen B-JAC programs or other user sub-directories. When you make changes using Newcost the changes are stored in your current directory. In this way you can build separate databases on different directories, which can reflect different costing requirements for different projects or bids. Access the Newcost program by selecting Tools from the Menu Bar and then selecting Data Maintenance and then selecting Costing. The Newcost gives you access to six different databases. These are: 1. General cost and labor adjustment 2. Fabrication and operation standards 3. Material dependent fabrication standards 4. Welding standards 5. Labor efficiency factors 6. Material prices 7. Part numbers for bill of materials and drawings 8. Horizontal support standards
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
12-1
Labor & Cost Standards General Cost and Labor Adjustment This database contains the burdened labor rate (total cost per hour of labor), the markups on labor and material, and the overall efficiency factors for welding, machining, drilling, grinding, and assembly.
Fabrication and Operation Standards This section allows you to specify over 100 specific fabrication options which affect the mechanical design and/or the cost. In many cases these options will establish the defaults for the Teams program where "0 = program." Included are such things as minimum and maximum material dimensions (e.g. minimum thickness for nozzle reinforcement pads, minimum and maximum bolt diameter, and maximum length of pipe) and cost factors (e.g., cost of x-ray, stress relieving, skidding, and sandblasting). Also included are the system of measure and the money currency, which apply to all of the Newcost databases.
Material Dependent Fabrication Standards This file contains the fabrication variables which are dependent upon the type of material. The materials are divided into ten classes. It includes such items as machining and drilling speeds, weld deposition rates, maximum dimensions for various operations, and dimensional rounding factors.
Welding Standards Here you can specify the type of welding to be used for each type of vessel component made from each of ten different material classes. You can choose from stick electrode, self shielded flux core, gas metal arc, submerged arc, tungsten inert gas, and plasma welding.
Labor Efficiency Factors The cost estimate routines use the data in this file to correct the number of hours for each labor operation for each type of component. The raw hours determined by the program are divided by the appropriate efficiency factor. For example, if the program calculates 20 hours to drill a tubesheet, and the efficiency factor is 0.5, the estimated number of hours will be 40 hours. The operations covered are layout, saw, shear, burn, bevel, drill, machine, mill, form, roll, weld, grind, and assemble.
12-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Material Prices This is the database which contains the prices for each material. Prices for most materials are price per unit weight (e.g. $/lb), except tubing which is price per unit length for a 19.05 mm (3/4") tube with a 1.65 mm (0.065") wall thickness. The standard Aspen B-JAC price is displayed. You can specify a price for any material, which will then override the standard Aspen B-JAC price.
Part numbers for bill of materials and drawings Default part numbers for every component are provided in this database. You can modify the default numbers as necessary.
Horizontal support standard dimensions You can customize the standard support dimensions used by the programs or use the default dimensions shown in the database.
Newcost Database
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
12-3
❖
12-4
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13
B-JAC Example Run
Aspen B-JAC Example
This is the Aspen B-JAC program window. Select File from the menu bar to open a new or existing file. For this example you will open an existing file to first perform a thermal design using Aspen Hetran and then transferring the information in the Aspen Teams program for a mechanical design. Operation of the Aspen Aerotran program is very similar to the Aspen Hetran program.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-1
On the left hand side of the window is the data browser to help you navigate through the program. The input and results sections are organized in a series of forms or folders. Each folder may contain multiple tabs to assist you through the program. For this Aspen Hetran file, select the Description section under Problem Definition. The units of measure are set at US. You can access the specific input folders by selecting a item on the navigator. As an alternate you can select the N (Next) button to help you navigate to the next required input item. Note that with the use of the Next button, the program will use default values for some design parameters.
13-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
In this section provide the general equipment description and fluid titles that will appear on the heat exchanger data sheet and printed documentation.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-3
Applications for the hot side and cold side of the exchanger are then selected. This exchanger has a multi-component mixture condensing on the shell side and coolant on the tube side. The condensation curve will be specified by you from a process simulation run. The program will run in the Design Mode to optimize a size for the exchanger.
13-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Now specify the process flow conditions for the hot and cold sides for the exchanger. At any point in the program you can obtain context sensitive Help by selecting the ? button and then selecting the input field that you need help on. You can also access the reference help for the subject by selecting the input field and then pressing F1. Input sections that are not complete will be identified by a red X on the navigator. Required input fields will be highlighted by a green background. Inputted valued which exceeds a normal range for that field will be highlighted in red. Note that if you still proceed with a value outside the normal range, the program will still use the inputted value.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-5
Physical property data for the streams may be supplied by the Aspen B-JAC Databank, the Aspen Properties Plus Databank, or you can input the properties. If you select the Aspen Plus Databank you must supply a APPDF interface file. For this example, you will be specifying the Aspen B-JAC Databank.
13-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
To reference the Aspen B-JAC Databank, specify each component of the stream in the Hot Side Composition section. Vapor in, liquid in, and liquid out flows are provided for each component. If a component is known to be a noncondensable or immiscible, it should be specified. You can access the Aspen B-JAC Databank listing by selecting the Search button.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-7
To search the Aspen B-JAC Databank for a compound, type in the component name or formula and the program will search the databank. Once located, you can select the Add key to add that component to the stream list to be referenced. Select OK to return to the composition form and the items selected will be added to the list.
13-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The VLE curve is specified in the Hot Side Properties section. Heat load may be provided as cumulative, incremental, or as enthalpy. Flowrate per increment may be specified by vapor/liquid flow rate or vapor/liquid mass fraction.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-9
Since you are referencing the Aspen B-JAC Databank, the liquid, vapor, and noncondensable properties will be retrieved from the databank.
13-10
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The properties for the cooling water on the cold side will be retrieved from the Aspen B-JAC Property Databank. This completes the process data section of the Aspen Hetran input file. At this point you could proceed with the calculations allowing the program to set defaults for the mechanical design constraints. We will proceed through the mechanical section to review what has been specified for this exchanger.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-11
Aspen Hetran supports all the TEMA type heads and shell configurations. For this item, a BEM type is selected. Each input field is select by clicking on the arrow in the appropriate box to see the drop down menu selections. You then select which option you want.
13-12
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
You then provide the tubing requirements: type, diameter, and thickness. Many of the drop down menus are supported with diagrams which will assist you in you selection process, such as the tube pattern shown above. Note also the Prompt Area located at the bottom of the form which will provide additional information for many of the input fields.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-13
For most applications, the Aspen Hetran program will default to single segmental baffles. The program will also select a baffle cut and baffle orientation based upon the application. If the shell pressure drop is controlling the design, you may want to change to a double or triple segmental type.
13-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The Design Constraints section controls the optimization limits for the Design Mode of the program. Minimum and maximum limits for shell diameter and tube length should only be set as necessary to meet the exchanger size limits in the plant.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-15
The B-JAC Metals Databank provides a generic material list which allows to specify general classes of materials, such as carbon steel or 304 stainless steel. The program will then reference an appropriate material class for a specific pressure vessel component. You can search the Metals Databank by selecting the Search button.
13-16
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
By typing the material to be referenced, the program will search to find the material in the Databank. Once located, you can select the component and then the Set Key to select that material for that component. After all materials have been selected, click OK to return to the Material form and your selections will be inserted.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-17
Specify the applicable design code and standards for the unit. The Aspen Hetran program will estimate the design pressure and temperature for you based upon the operating conditions but it is recommended to provide these if known. You have completed the input for the design. Select the Run command from the Menu Bar and then select to Run Hetran. As an alternate you can select the Run icon button located in the Tool Bar.
13-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The optimization path screen will appear. Hetran will first select an exchanger size which is close to compiling to the specification requirements. The program will then provide incremental results allowing you to see
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-19
Once the optimization is complete, you can display the final resulting design. First to be displayed are any warnings or notes. Note the heat load adjustment made by the program.
13-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
You can review the Performance Summary section. Process conditions, calculated film coefficients, pressure drops, and mechanical summary are provided.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-21
Thermal Resistance Analysis includes three cases: • • •
Clean Spec. Foul Max. Foul
The clean condition is expected performance assuming no fouling exists in the exchanger. For this case the exchanger is 87.7% oversurfaced in the clean condition. The Spec. Foul case shows a 7.71% excess surface area based upon the designed conditions. The last case, Max. Foul, uses all the excess surface area, the 7.71%, and translates this to additional fouling available. Fouling factors are increased to .0012 and .0024.
13-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Hetran, for a multiphase application, will calculate separate film coefficients for the vapor, liquid, and condensing present. For this condenser, a condensing film of 313.25 is weighted with the liquid cooling film for an overall film coefficient of 310.38.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-23
The pressure drop distribution summary will help you determine if adjustments need to be made in nozzle sizes and/or baffling to re-distribute pressure loss and enhance heat transfer in the tube bundle.
13-24
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A shell side stream analysis and mass velocity summaries are provided.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-25
To view the exchanger data sheet, select the TEMA Sheet in the navigator. Use the slide bars to view the balance of the data sheet.
13-26
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A scaled outline drawing is provided so you can view the nozzle and baffle arrangements for the exchanger design.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-27
Also provided is a scaled tube layout drawing showing the location of the tubes, baffle cuts, tie rods, and nozzles.
13-28
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
To view the detail calculations, select the Interval Analysis sections. This section provide a results for each thermal interval analyzed by the program. Viewed above is the Performance section heat loads, overall coefficients, areas, and pressure drops for each increment.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-29
This section provides the incremental film coefficients.
13-30
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The heat load incremental analysis is also provided.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-31
Now let us consider that the controlling design optimization parameter was the tube length. Select Design Constraints in the Navigator and change the maximum tube length to 288 inches from the original 240 inches. Select the Run button and have Aspen Hetran re-optimize the design with the longer allowable tube length.
13-32
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The optimization summary shows that the exchanger size and cost was reduced.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-33
In the results section, select the Recap of Designs in the Navigator to view the comparison summary of the original design and the new design. By following these steps, you can possibly make further improvements to the design by making adjustments and having Aspen Hetran re-optimize. We have complete the thermal design so now we will interface to the Teams program to complete the mechanical design.
13-34
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
First we need to transfer the necessary thermal design results from Aspen Hetran into the Teams section. Select the Run command in the Menu Bar and then select the Transfer command. Select the Teams program and select OK.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-35
Specify the applicable code: ASME, Codap, or ADM. By selecting the TEMA class, default settings for flange design, corrosion allowance, and clearance will be set in accordance to the respective TEMA class.
13-36
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Appropriate design conditions have been entered. Note that each input field has it own unique units control. You can enter any set of units by selecting the unit set required beside the input field. If you wish to convert to a different set of units, select the desired units and the value in the field will be converted.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-37
Teams has specific defaults set for each TEMA head type. For example the selected B type head will default to the ellipsoidal cover shown unless a different cover is specified. Defaults follow typical TEMA conventions. If you are rating an existing exchanger for a new set of design conditions, select the Detail Cylinder and Detail Cover tabs and enter the dimensions of the existing equipment. You can enter details for other components in a similar way.
13-38
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Shell type should be selected to correspond the nozzle and baffle location requirements. If pipe material is being used for the cylinders, it is best to enter an outside diameter for the vessel diameter so that standard pipe schedules may be referenced. If the cylinders are fabricated from plate material, either inside or outside diameters by being entered.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-39
In a similar way as the front head, select the type for the head and cover for the rear head. Program will default to a ellipsoidal cover unless you specify one of the alternate types. If the exchanger is a one pass unit with a nozzle located in the rear head, specify that a rear head cylinder is to be provided.
13-40
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Teams will default to a hub type body flanges for a TEMA Class R exchanger. NO flanges will be specified for the shell side since this example has the tube sheet extended for bolting to the head flanges. If you need to control individual flange specifications go to the Individual Standards tab in this form. For check rating existing flange designs, enter the actual flange size by selecting the Dimensions tab.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-41
Due to the relative high design pressure on the shell side, an expanded and seal weld tube joint has been specified. The program default is to extend the tubesheet for bolting to the heads for our BEM example.
13-42
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Teams will check to see if an expansion joint is required and will provide one, if necessary, if you specify by program. In this example, an expansion joint has been specified. Accurate mean metal temperatures are required to properly analyze the expansion joint/tubesheet design.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-43
The tubing requirements are inputted. If low fin tubes are required, provide the fin density, height, and thickness.
13-44
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Baffle type and baffle cut orientation are specified. Enter baffle cut, number of baffles, and baffle spacings in the Baffle Details tab form.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-45
Tubesheet layout information is provided. Teams will default to TEMA requirements if you allow the program to select. Tube pass layout type was passed into TEAMS from the Aspen Hetran results. If not specified, the program will select the layout type to provide the maximum number of tubes possible.
13-46
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
You can set the global information for the shell side and tube side nozzles. To set specific information for each nozzle, select the Nozzles-Details section in the Navigator.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-47
Select the Nozzles Tab to provide nominal nozzle diameters and approximate nozzle zone locations. For nozzles located in the front/rear head covers, specify zones 1 or 9 and an angle of 360 degrees. For hill side nozzles, specify any angle other than multiples of 45 degrees.
13-48
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Saddle support zone locations are set.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-49
For this design, Hetran passed into Teams the generic material for all the components. Teams will then use the material properties for an appropriate material specification for each component. For example, the program will use SA-516-70 for the carbon steel tubesheet since ASTM standards were referenced. If you wish to specify actual material specifications, select the Search Databank button.
13-50
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The Metals search window will then be shown. Enter the material name in the top input field and the program will search for a match. Select the desired material in the list. The next step is to select the component in the component list and then select the Set button to set the material to that component. Continue this process until the materials are selected for all the components. Nozzle materials are set in a similar method located under Nozzle Materials in the Navigator. The Teams input file is now complete and the next step is to run the program.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-51
Select the Run command in the Menu Bar, then select Run Teams. The Run Teams options are: calculations only, calculations plus cost estimate, calculations plus drawings, or calculations plus cost plus drawings. As an alternative, the Run icon can be selected in the Tools Bar which will run calculations plus cost estimate and plus drawings. The Program Status window will appear to provide you with a run status.
13-52
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The warnings and notes will be displayed first. Note that the flanged and flued type expansion joint selected does not meet the design requirements. The Teams results will first be reviewed then a bellows type expansion joint will be selected as a possible solution.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-53
The Teams results are organized in two five major sections: • • • • •
Design Summary Vessel Dimensions Price Drawings Code Calculations
The Design Specification sections is shown here.
13-54
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The limiting MAWP components are shown in the above summary. The MAWP for the tubesheets are limited to the specified design conditions. To review the MDMT results, select the MDMT tab.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-55
Select the Cylinders/Covers/Belts to review the cylinder results summary.
13-56
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Calculation results for the body flanges are shown above.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-57
Teams provides results per the TEMA method and per the applicable selected code method. The program will use the thicker of the two methods.
13-58
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The cost estimate is based upon the Teams design code calculation results and the manufacture settings. The manufacturing standards are accessed by selecting Tools from the Menu Bar, selecting Data Maintenance, and then selecting Costing.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-59
The scaled outline drawing can be viewed by selecting Setting Plan in the navigator. To view a specific area of the drawing, window the section of the drawing to be viewed. Select View command in the Menu Bar and then select Zoom In. As an alternative, use the magnifying glass icon in the Tools Bar. Use Zoom Out to restore the drawing to full view. The standard setting plan drawing can be accessed by selecting All Drawings in the navigator.
13-60
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
To review the detail calculation documentation, select the component from the Code Calculation area of the navigator. Shown above is the tubesheet calculations. Let us now address the warning message concerning the overstress condition of the vessel supports. Generally if the supports are moved closer to the tubesheets, the shell stresses can be reduced.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-61
Change the flanged and flued expansion joint type to bellow type.
13-62
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Re-run the Teams calculations.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
13-63
Review of the warnings/notes shows that the expansion joint problem has been resolved by using the bellows type. Other adjustments to the design may done in a similar sequence by making changes and re-running Teams. This completes our mechanical design for the heat exchanger.
❖
13-64
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
14
Exporting Results from B-JAC to Excel
Introduction The Aspen B-JAC Windows user interface is designed to allow you to export input and results information into an Excel spread sheet. This chapter describes how to use these export features. Topics include: •
Export features
•
Exporting results to an existing spread sheet template
•
Creating your own customized template
•
Copying and pasting input and results from a B-JAC application to Excel
•
Copying and pasting drawings to Excel
•
Launching a B-JAC application from Excel
Export features -- B-JAC Templates You can export the program results to an Excel spreadsheet. Several Excel spreadsheet templates have been provided for your use. You can select one of the pre-formatted output summaries such as TeamsSummary.xlt or you can select one of the blank templates such as HetranBlank.xlt and customize your output in Excel.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
14-1
Exporting results to a B-JAC standard summary template or your customized template File / Export function - spread sheet created without Excel being open: First open the B-JAC program window and open an exchanger design file, *.BJT. If no results are present, run B-JAC to obtain results. Select the “File / Export to” functions from the Menu Bar. Select to open the default template or you can specify which template to open. You can set the default template from the “Tools / Program Settings / Template” window. If you are selecting which template to open, select from the template list, HetranSummary, TeamsSummary, AerotranSummary or your customized template, located in the BJAC10\DAT\Template sub-directory. Select to open the template. Then provide a file name to save the results as a spread sheet *.xls data file. Results for the B-JAC design file will be now be saved in the created Excel spreadsheet.
Spread sheet created with Excel open First open the B-JAC program window and open an exchanger design file, *.BJT. If no results are present, run B-JAC to obtain results. Open Excel and then open the desired Excel template, HetranSummary, TeamsSummary, AerotranSummary, or your own customized template, located in the BJAC10\DAT\Template sub-directory. For information on how to create your own customized template, see the next section. Enable the macros. Results for the B-JAC design file will be shown in the Excel spreadsheet. If you wish to save these results as *.xls file, use the File / Save function in Excel.
Creating your own customized Template To create you own customized Excel spreadsheet for the results from B-JAC, first make a copy of the *Blank.xlt template located in the BJAC10\DAT\Template sub-directory and rename it to use as your template for the customized results form. Open this new template in Excel. Enable the macros. Now by selecting various sections of the output results in B-JAC you can drag and drop into your template. You can change what information is moved from B-JAC by clicking on the right hand mouse button and selecting Drag-Drop format. You can select to drag-drop the value or units of measure only or to drag-drop the Caption, value, and units. For more information on customizing the spreadsheet in Excel, access Help provided in Excel. Once your customized template is complete and saved, every time B-JAC is run you can open your customized template to review the results from the run.
14-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Copying Data from a B-JAC application to Excel Copy Format: First you need to set the format for the copy. By default, the Drag-Drop function copies only the value (or values) of information. To reset the format, select Tools/Program Settings/Advanced and set the copy format. •
Value only
•
Value and units of measure
•
Caption, value ands units of measure
•
Units of measure only
Copying Individual fields: Select (or highlight) the information you wish to copy by clicking and holding down the left mouse button on the value and then dragging the mouse cursor to the desired location in the spread sheet. This ‘drag & drop” method will move the value as was as any caption and units you have set in the format described above.
Copying Columns of information: Select (or highlight) the column of information you wish to copy by clicking and holding down the left mouse button on any value in the column and then dragging the mouse cursor to the desired location in the spread sheet. This ‘drag & drop” method will move the entire column of information as was as any caption and units that you have set to be copied in the format settings.
Copying Tables of information: Select (or highlight) the table you wish to copy. Select the Edit / Copy function in the Menu Bar. Select the location for the table in the spread sheet. Select the Edit / Paste function from the Menu Bar in Excel to paste the table into the spread sheet. This copy & paste method will move the entire table of information as was as any caption and units that you have set to be copied in the format settings.
Copying drawings: Select the drawing you wish to copy by clicking and holding down the left mouse button on the drawing then dragging the mouse cursor to the desired location in the spread sheet. This ‘drag & drop” method will move the drawing with border into the spread sheet.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
14-3
Example of Pasting Aspen B-JAC results into Excel. This example shows the steps necessary to paste a column of information from the Interval Analysis Performance in the Aspen Hetran results into an Excel spreadsheet.
14-4
•
Open the B-JAC program window and select a Hetran file. If results are not present, run the file.
•
Open Excel and open the HetranBlank.xlt template. Save as a different template name.
•
Locate the Overall Coefficient column in the Interval Analysis / Performance section of Hetran.
•
Set the format for the copy to caption, values, and units under Tools/Program settings/Advanced as described above in the Copy Format instructions.
•
Using the mouse click on the Overall coefficient column with the left mouse button an hold the button down. Now drag the mouse cursor to the desired location in your Excel spread sheet and release the mouse button.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Launching B-JAC programs from Excel Once you have created you own Excel spread sheet, it is possible to launch the B-JAC programs from within the spread sheet. To run a B-JAC program from within Excel, select Aspen B-JAC / Run from the Excel menu bar. Input design parameters may be changed within Excel and the results in the B-JAC program and in the spread sheet will reflect these changes.
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
❖
❖
❖
14-5
14-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15
Using the ASPEN B-JAC ActiveX Automation Server
Introduction This chapter describes how to use the ASPEN B-JAC ActiveX Automation Server. The topics include: •
About the Automation Server
•
Viewing the ASPEN B-JAC objects.
•
Overview of the ASPEN B-JAC objects
•
Programming with the ASPEN B-JAC objects
•
Reference information
This chapter assumes that you are familiar with Microsoft Visual Basic and understand the concepts of object-orientated programming. The examples in this chapter use Visual Basic 5.0 and Visual Basic for Application (VBA) as the Automation Client. Much of the code examples in this chapter are taken from the example files, which are distributed with the standard ASPEN B-JAC installation. If you installed ASPEN B-JAC in the default location, the code examples are located in the Program Files\AspenTech\BJAC101\xmp\VB. The examples use the example problem file LiquidLiquid.BJT, which is provided with the standard ASPEN B-JAC installation. You will find this file in Program Files\AspenTech\BJAC101\xmp if you installed ASPEN B-JAC in the default location.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-1
About the Automation Server The ASPEN B-JAC Windows user interface is an ActiveX Automation Server. The ActiveX technology (formally called OLE Automation) enables an external Windows application to interact with ASPEN B-JAC through a programming interface using a language such Microsoft’s Visual Basic. The server exposes objects through the Common Object Model (COM). With the Automation Server, you can: •
connect both the inputs and the results of the ASPEN B-JAC program to other applications such as design programs of databases.
•
write your own user interface to control the ASPEN B-JAC program from creating a new application to printing results of the calculation. With your own interfaces you can use the ASPEN B-JAC program as a model for your design plan or use the ASPEN B-JAC program as a part of your design system.
Using the Automation Server In order to use the ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server, you must: •
Have ASPEN B-JAC installed on your PC.
•
Be licensed to use ASPEN B-JAC.
The ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server consists of its principal component BJACWIN.EXE, the core component AtvCoreComponents.DLL and other supporting components. The principal component, BJACWIN.EXE, is an out-of-process component, or ActiveX EXE. You will use this component to deal with ASPEN B-JAC documents and applications such as Hetran. The core component, ATVDataServer.DLL, is an inprocess component, or ActiveX DLL. You will use this component to access application objects and data objects. The supporting components consist of several DLLs and OCXs and are intended to be for internal use only. If you installed the program in the default location, you will find those files in the Program File\AspenTech\BJAC101\xeq. If you access ASPEN B-JAC objects using strongly typed declaration, you must reference the ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server in your project before you access the objects in your program.
15-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
To reference the ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server from Visual Basic, or Excel, open the References dialog box, and check the ASPEN B-JAC Design System box and ATV core component box as shown here:
If ASPEN B-JAC Design System or ATV core component does not exist in the list, click Browse and find the ASPEN B-JAC executable directory. Select BJACWIN.EXE or ATVDataServer.DLL. If you opened a project used earlier version of the ASPEN B-JAC or the Excel example file for the ASPEN Hetran, HETRANAUTO.XLS, you might find missing components in your project. In order to use the ASPEN B-JAC objects you should open the Reference dialog box and check the ASPEN B-JAC Design System box or the ATV core component box as mentioned earlier.
Error Handling Errors may occur in calling methods or accessing properties of the ASPEN B-JAC objects. It is important to create an error handler for all code, which accesses an automation interface. An automation interface may return a dispatch error for many reasons, most of which do not indicate fatal or even serious errors. Although any error will normally causes a dialog box to be displayed on the user’s screen, it is strongly recommended that you write your own error handler to trap the error in order to exit the application cleanly or proceed with the next step.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-3
Releasing Objects One object can not be destroyed unless all of the references to the object are released. Therefore, it is a good practice that you always release the objects you have referenced when the objects are no longer needed. Releasing an object is a simple task. This can be done by setting the object to Nothing. As a general rule, you should release the objects in the opposite sequence as the objects are referenced. For example: Dim objBjac As Object Dim objApp As Object ‘ References objects Set objBjac = CreateObject(“BJACWIN.BJACApp”) Set objApp = objBjac.LoadApp(“Hetran”) . . . ‘ Release objects Set objApp = Nothing Set objBjac = Nothing
Viewing the ASPEN B-JAC Objects The detailed description of the ASPEN B-JAC objects, including properties, methods and named constants, may be viewed in the Automation Client Object Browser. To use the browser, in Visual Basic and Excel, from the View menu, click Object Browser, the Object Browser will be displayed as shown here:
15-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Overview of the ASPEN B-JAC Objects The object exposed by ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server is the BJACApp object. Through this object other objects and their properties and methods may be accessed.
Object Model Diagram The following diagram provides a graphical overview of the ASPEN B-JAC object model:
Exposed by BJACWIN.EXE BJACApp ( The ASPEN B-JAC client object) Exposed by AtvDataServer.DLL ATVApps ( Application object collection ) ATVApp ( Application object )
ATVArrays ( Array data objects collection ) ATVArray ( Array data object ) ATVScalars ( Scalar data objects collection ) ATVScalar ( Scalar data object )
The BJACApp Object The BJACApp object is the principal object exposed by ASPEN B-JAC. This object provides methods and properties such as: •
Creating a new or opening an existing ASPEN B-JAC file
•
Creating a new or getting an existing ATVApp object
•
Controlling the default settings of the ASPEN B-JAC Window
•
Enumerating ATVApp objects
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-5
•
Printing results
•
Saving a file
For more information about the BJACApp object refer to the “Reference Information” section.
Example of Opening an Existing File The following Visual Basic example creates the ASPEN B-JAC object for an existing ASPEN B-JAC document, and shows the ASPEN B-JAC Window by setting the Visible property to True. Function OpenFile(ByVal FileName As String) As BJACApp Dim objBjac As BJACApp ' Declare the BJAC object Set OpenFile = Nothing On Error GoTo ErrorHandler ' Error trap Set objBjac = New BJACApp ' Create the BJAC object If Not objBjac.FileOpen(FileName) Then MsgBox "Can't open file " & FileName Exit Function End If objBjac.Visible = True ' Show BJAC Window Set OpenFile = objBjac Set objBjac = Nothing Exit Function ErrorHandler: MsgBox "Can't create BJAC object" End ' End the program End Function The above code uses Set objBjac = New BJACApp to create an ASPEN B-JAC object. You can use Set objBjac = CreateObject(“BJACWIN.BJACApp”) to get the same result. Note If there is a running ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server on your PC, the effect of using Set objBjac = New BJACApp or Set objBjac =CreateObject(“BJACWIN.BJACApp”) only gets a reference to the same instance of the server.
15-6
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The ATVApp object The ATVApp object exposes the ASPEN B-JAC application, such as Hetran. Through properties and methods of the ATVApp object you can: •
Change the units of measure set
•
Execute the calculation engine
•
Check application status
•
Enumerate inputs and results through data objects collections
Of the many properties and methods in the ATVApp object, there are four collections for representing data: •
Scalars – a collection of ATVScalar objects for representing scalar variables of input
•
Arrays – a collection of ATVArray objects for representing array variables of input
•
ResultScalars – a collection of ATVScalar objects for representing scalar variables of results
•
ResutlArrays – a collection of ATVArray objects for representing array variables of results
Those data collections provide a bridge to allow you to manipulate data in the application including changing the units of measure, modifying the value and so on. For more information about the ATVApp object refer to the “Reference Information” section.
Example of using an ATVApp object The following Visual Basic example shows how to get the ASPEN B-JAC Hetran object from the BJACApp object by opening an existing file, checking the input status and launching the calculation engine. Sub AccessHetran() Dim objBjac As BJACApp ' Declare a BJAC object Dim objHetran As ATVApp ' Declare a ATVApp object Dim nRetCode As Integer On Error Resume Next ' Error trap ' We try to get a BJACApp object Set objBjac = New BJACApp If Err.Number <> 0 Then MsgBox "Can't create BJACApp object!" End End If
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-7
' First, we check to see if Hetran object is alreay there ' in case there is a BJACApp object running and ' Hetran object is created. If objBjac.Hetran Is Nothing Then ' '
If no Hetran object in the current BJACApp object then we open the sample file to get a Hetran object If Not objBjac.FileOpen( _ "C:\Program Files\AspenTech\BJAC10\xmp\LiquidLiquid.BJT") Then MsgBox "Can't open the file." GoTo ExitThisSub End If End If ' Get the reference to Heatran Set objHetran = objBjac.GetApp("Hetran") ' Notice that this time we use method GetApp ' to get Hetran object. You can use ' Set objHetran = objBjac.Hetran ' or ' Set objHetran = objBjac.ATVApps("Hetran") ' Check to see if Hetran object is loaded ' this time. If objHetran Is Nothing Then MsgBox "Hetran is not created." GoTo ExitThisSub End If ' We change the units of measure to SI objHetran.UomSet = ATV_UOMSET_SI ' Check to see if you can run Hetran If objHetran.CanRun() Then '
'
If yes, run Hetran and get the return code nRetCode = objHetran.Run() if we got any error If nRetCode <> 0 Then MsgBox "Error in Hetran calculation. Code=" & nRetCode End If End If
' Release objects ExitThisSub: Set objHetran = Nothing Set objBjac = Nothing End Sub
15-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
ATVScalar Object and ATVArray Object The ATVScalar object and the ATVArray object are used to represent data in the ASPEN BJAC objects. As mentioned earlier, the ATVScalar object is used for scalar data and the ATVArray is used for array data. The ATVApp uses two pairs of collections containing ATVScalar objets and ATVArray objects to represent inputs and results, respectively. By accessing the properties and methods of the data objects, you can: • • •
Return or set a value Change the units of measure if the data is a physical quantity Check the status of the variable
For more information about programming with the ATVScalar object and ATVArray object is provided in the “Programming with the ASPEN B-JAC Objects” section. Detailed reference information about the ATVScalar object and ATVArray object is provided in the "Reference Information” section.
Example of accessing data objects The following Visual Basic example shows how to access a scalar input variable, change its units of measure and value, and how to retrieve an array data from results. Note that the example code is stored in the prjAccessData.VBP VB project in the xmp\VB subdirectory. Sub Main() ' Variale declarations Dim objBjac As BJACApp Dim objHetran As ATVApp Dim objScalar As ATVScalar Dim objArray As ATVArray ' We try to get a BJACApp object Set objBjac = New BJACApp ' We use FileClose to make sure there is no ATVApp object ' loaded since we are going to open the existing sample file objBjac.FileClose ' Open a BJAC document file to create a Hetran object objBjac.FileOpen ' Get the Hetran object reference Set objHetran = objBjac.Hetran If objHetran Is Nothing Then MsgBox "Cann't create Hetran object." & vbCrLf & _ "Please try a different file." End End
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-9
' Get the data object for hot side flow rate ' Notice that "FlRaHS" is the variable name for ' hot side flow rate in Hetran object. Set objScalar = objHetran.Scalars("FlRaHS") ' We declare a buffer to retrieve current value ' in units "kg/s" no matter what units are actually ' used in the data Dim xBuf As Single xBuf = objScalar.Value("kg/s") ' now xBuf is in kg/s ' Let's increase the flow rate by 0.5 kg/s objScalar.Value("kg/s") = xBuf + 0.5 ' Let's try to access Tube OD data object With objHetran.Scalars("TubeOD") .Uom = "in" ' Change the units string to "in" .Value = 0.75 ' Now the tube OD has value of 0.75 in End With ' Run the Hetran appliation If objHetran.CanRun Then objHetran.Run ' For example, let's retrieve the shell side pressure drop shown in the ' optimization path. ' Notice that because variable arPresDropShell is an array ' you will need to access the array collection. Set objArray = objHetran.ResultArrays("arPresDropShell") ' Loop through the array to view every element in the array Dim I As Integer For I = 1 To objArray.GetSize() Debug.Print objArray.Values(I) Next I ' release objects Set objScalar = Nothing Set objArray = Nothing Set objHetran = Nothing Set objBjac = Nothing End Sub
15-10
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Programming with ASPEN B-JAC Objects In this section we will discuss the programming with the APSEN B-JAC object in depth. The topics include: •
Creating application and file operations
•
Enumerating objects
•
Checking status
•
Controlling the units of measure
•
Accessing data
•
Exploring variables
•
Limitations and restrictions
Creating Application and File Operations To create or get a BJACApp object, you can either use Set objBJAC = new BJACApp
or Set objBJAC = CreateObject(“BJACWIN.BJACApp”)
Once you have a connection to the BJACApp object, the next step is to create a new file or open an existing file. The BJACApp object exposes several methods allowing you to deal with the ASPEN B-JAC document file including creating a new file, opening an existing file, printing a file or saving a file. Using FileNew One way to create an ASPEN B-JAC application is to use the FileNew method in the BJACApp object. The code segment below describes how to create a new file for the ASPEN Teams: Dim objBjac As Object Dim objTeams As Object Set objBjac = CreateObject("BJACWIN.BJACApp") objBjac.FileNew "Teams"
By executing above code a new Teams application is created. The document containing the new application is named as UNTITLE.BJT. Notice that the actual document is not created on the disk until the FileSave or FileSaveAs method is called.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-11
The FileNew method takes the argument AppName as optional. If you just call the method using the default, in which the argument AppName is an empty string, then you will see the File New dialog box will appear:
You can check the box next the application to create one or more applications. Note Because the BJACApp object can only contain one document at a time, the FileNew method will unload the current document before creating a new one. In other words, you can not call the FileNew twice to create two different applications in the same BJACApp object. Using LoadApp The BJACApp object can contain one or more applications. If you want to add a new application to your existing document, use the LoadApp method. For example if you want to add a Hetran application in the above example code, you use Dim objHetran as ATVApp Set objHetran = objBjac.LoadApp(“Hetran”)
By executing the above code, a Hetran application object will be added to the document. Using FileOpen The Method FileOpen, in the BJACApp object, is the only way you can open an existing ASPEN B-JAC document file. The method uses one string argument to represent the name of the document file to be opened. The argument is optional. If the default is used or an empty string is assigned, a standard Windows File Open dialog box will appear, in which the user can browse the system to select a demand file.
Note The FileOpen method also unloads the current document before loading the document supplied. You should save the document if you have made changes to the document before calling the FileOpen method.
15-12
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Using FilePrint Once the calculation is executed successfully, the results will be generated. And then you can use the FilePrint method to print the results in the format created by the ASPEN B-JAC program. The following code segment shows how to use the FilePrint method to print the Teams results after the calculation succeeded: If objTeams.Run() = 0 Then objBjac.FilePrint End If
By default the FilePrint method will print every result form for every application in the object. If you want to just print one application, you can supply the application name in the first argument. For example, to print Teams only: objBjac.FilePrint “Teams”
Or if you only want to print a portion of the results, you can set the second argument to False. For example: objBjac.FilePrint , False
In this case, the ASPEN B-JAC Print Dialog box will appear as shown here:
This dialog box is the same as you select the Print menu in the ASPEN B-JAC user interface. You can select any result by checking box next the list item and change other settings as well.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-13
Using FileSave and FileSaveAs As mentioned earlier if you use FileNew to create a new file the actual file is not created in the disk until the file is saved. To save an ASPEN B-JAC document file to the disk you use the FileSave or FileSaveAs method. Use the FileSaveAs method or to save a copy of an existing document under a different name or an existing document to a different drive or path. For example, supply an existing filename, path to save, and name a new document: objBjac.SaveAs “C:\Program File\MyBJACFile\Exchan ger.BJT”
Use the FileSave method to save the document in the same filename, or in the default name defined by the program. For example:
objBjac.Save
It is strongly recommended that you use the FileSaveAs method to save the document in a desire filename if the document was newly created using the FileNew method. Because the default filename defined by the program is UNTITLE.BJT. The argument of the FileSaveAs method can be omitted. If do so, a standard “Save As” Windows dialog box will appear and you will be able to specify any filename or file path.
Enumerating Objects The ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server provides following collections to keep track of the objects: •
Application collection: BJACApp.ATVApps
•
Scalar data collection for input: ATVApp.Scalars
•
Array data collection for input: ATVApp.Arrays
•
Scalar data collection for results: ATVApp.ResultScalars
•
Array data collection for results: ATVApp.ResultArrays
You can use For Each …Next to enumerate the objects in the collections, without losing any part of the information for the BJACApp object. This is particularly important if you want to generate your own database to store input and results information rather than using the ASPEN B-JAC document, or create your own graphic user interface to access the ASPEN BJAC objects.
15-14
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The following example code prints names and values for all scalar variables in the input: Dim objApp as ATVApp Dim objScalar as ATVScalar … For Each objScalar In objApp.Scalars Debug.Print objScalar.Name, objScalar.Value Next
Checking Status Checking Status for an application or for a data object is important when you want to know whether you have made changes to the application, whether you can run the program, or whether the results are present. Using IsSaved The IsSaved property is provided in the BJACApp object and the ATVApp object. You can use this property to check to see if any change in the input of the document has been made and the changes have not been saved. This is particularly useful when changes have been made and you need to save these changes. The following code gives an example that shows how to use the property: Private Sub SaveFile(ByVal objBjac as BJACApp ) If Not objBjac.IsSaved Then objBjac.FileSave End If End Sub
If you just want to check to see if a particular application has been modified or not, you can query the ATVApp.IsSaved property. For example: Dim objHetran as ATVApp … If Not objHetran.IsSaved Then objBjac.FileSave End If
Notice that once the document is saved the IsSaved property will return a value of True to reflect the change of the status. Using IsComplete The IsComplete property is used to check the completion status for an application or check for required input data. The ASPEN B-JAC object provides a variety of comprehensive algorithms checking the completion status for applications based on various input conditions. The IsComplete property returns a value of True to indicate the status is complete.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-15
Use the IsComplete property in an ATVApp object to check the completion status for the application. For example: Dim objHetran as ATVApp … If objHetran.IsComplete then ‘ the input is complete, … End if
Use the IsComplete property in a data object to check to see if the input data is complete. For an input data, if the data is not required then the property always returns True. If the data is required and the value is missing then the IsComplete property returns False. The following example shows how to find an incomplete data in the input scalar objects: Function FindIncompleteData(ByVal objApp As ATVApp) As ATVScalar Dim objScalar As ATVScalar ' Loops through the scalar objects For Each objScalar In objApp.Scalars ' Checks to see if the data is complete If Not objScalar.IsComplete Then ' Found the first incomplete data, return the data and exit Set FindIncompleteData = objScalar Exit Function End If Next End Function
Controlling the Units of Measure The ASPEN B-JAC user interface has provided a solution to handle the complexity of different units of measure. Through the ASPEN B-JAC user interface, you can add your own units, or change any existing units in the units table, and then use these new or modified units for input field, calculation or printed results without even closing the application window. The ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server provides you three different levels to control the units of measure in your program:
15-16
•
The UomSet property in the BACApp object
•
The UomSet property in the ATVApp object
•
The Uom property in the data objects
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
UomSet in BJACApp Object Use the UomSet property in the BJACApp object to view or change the units of measure set for the BJACApp object. For example: Dim objBjac as BJACApp Dim nSet as Integer … ‘ Gets the current units set nSet = objBjac.UomSet ‘ Checks to see if it’s SI, if not then change it to SI if nSet <> ATV_UOMSET_SI then objBjac.UomSet = ATV_UOMSET_SI
Note: The UomSet property is the default units set for application objects. Changing UomSet in the BJACApp object will not have any effect on the applications that are already created. UomSet in ATVApp Object Use the UomSet property in an ATVApp object to return or change the units of measure set for the application. For example: Dim objApp as ATVApp . . . ‘ Sets the units set to user defined SET1 objApp.UomSet = ATV_UOMSET_SET1
Note: By changing the UomSet in the ATVApp object, the units of physical quantity data objects in the application will be changed to the units defined in the units set table. Consequently the values of these data will be converted appropriately to the new units if the current units set is different. Also, you will notice that the units controls in the ASPEN B-JAC user interface will prompt in accordance with the changes. Uom in ATVScalar Object and ATVArray Object Use the Uom property in the ATVScalar and ATVArray objects to view or change the units of measure for the data. For example: Dim objHetan as ATVApp … ‘ Changes the units of hot side flowrate to “lb/s” objHetran.Scalars(“FlRaHS”).Uom = “lb/s”
Notes: •
The Uom property only applies to the physical quantity data, for example, temperature and pressure.
•
The Uom property is a string. You must assign an existing unit string to the data. The unit string remains unchanged if an invalid unit string is supplied.
•
Changing the unit string will not result in the value being converted.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-17
Accessing Data The data in the ASPEN B-JAC applications can be accessed through the two data objects: ATVScalar and the ATVArray. You can not create a new data object, but you can access all the attributes including changing the value or unit string for all the data objects. To access a data of interest, one possible method is as follows: •
Locate the variable of interest.
•
Find out the attributes for the variable. Especially, you need to know the variable is a scalar or an array, and input or result.
•
Get the reference to the data object using the appropriate data object collection.
•
View or change the value or unit string if necessary.
Detailed information about the data objects is given in the “Reference Information” section.
Exploring Variables In order to access the data of interest in an ASPEN B-JAC design, you need to locate the variables of interest in the system. To do this, you can use the Application Browser together with the Variable List Window in the ASPEN B-JAC User Interface to navigate the data. In the ASPEN B-JAC user interface, every application, for example, Hetran, is represented in an Application Browser. The Application Browser has a tree structure and contains the visual representation for inputs and results in a series of forms. On each form, for input and results, each data control is connected a data object, and each data has a variable associated with it. The Variable List window will list all the variables behind the form. To open the Variable List Window, from the View menu, click Variable List.
15-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
The Variable List Window displays the attributes including names, variable type, current values, and descriptions for all the variables used on the form. Notice that the
indicates an input variable, and the
indicate a result variable.
Another way to locate a variable is to view the variable attributes in the description pane on the Application Browser by clicking a control. To show the variable attributes on the description pane: •
From the Tool menu, click the Program Setting to display the program setting dialog box.
•
Click the Advanced tab, and check the option Show Variable Attributes on the Description Pane. Click OK to close the dialog box.
•
On the Application Browser, display any input or results form.
•
Click a control on the form to see the attributes of the variable associated with the control, which are isplayed on the description pane.
For example:
Click data control here
The attributes associated with the data control are displayed here.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-19
Limitations and Restrictions The ASPEN B-JAC Automation Server is a single threaded object and only one copy of its instance can be created at a time. In other words, if the server is running before you create a BJACApp object, using following code: Set objBJAC = New BJACWIN.BJACApp
or Set objBJAC = CreateObject(“BJACWIN.BJACApp”)
will share with the existing thread. The BJACApp object can only deal with one document at a time. If you try to create another new document or open another existing document, the consequence is that the program will unload the current document first. Although multiple ATVApp objects can co-exist in the BJACApp object, you can only create one kind of the application object at a time. For example, the Hetran object, is not allowed having more than one copy. In other words, you can not create two Hetran applications in the same BJACApp object. Only the BJACApp object can be created in your code. Other objects can only be referenced. The object collections can only be referenced. You can not add any item to the collections. If you try to do so, it may cause unpredictable results.
15-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Reference Information The topics in this section includes: •
Lists of the members for each exposed ASPEN B-JAC classes
•
Member descriptions
•
Error descriptions
Members of Class BJACApp Name
Member Type
Data Type
Aerotran ATVApps ExecutionControlEnabled
Function Property (Set) Property (Get/Let)
FileClose FileExit FileNew FileOpen FilePrint FileSave FileSaveAs GetApp GetFileName GetFilePath GetList GetListCollection GetUomString GetVersion Hetran Hide IsSaved
Sub Sub Function Function Sub Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Sub Property (Get)
Language
Property (Get/Let)
Long
Returns/sets the language for the UI Windows
LoadApp Minimize Show Teams UomSet
Function Sub Sub Function Property (Get/Let)
Object
Creates or gets an ATVApp object Minimize the UI Windows Show the UI Windows Returns the ATVApp object for Teams Returns/sets the default units of measure set
Visible
Property (Get/Let)
Boolean
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Object Collection Boolean
Description
Boolean Boolean Boolean Boolean Object String String Long Long String String Object Boolean
Object Long
Returns the ATVApp object for Aerotran Returns the ATVApp objects collection Returns/sets a value that determines execution control Closes the current document Terminates the program Creates a new document Opens an existing document Prints the results Saves the document Saves the document to a different file Returns an ATVApp object Returns the current document filename Returns path name Retrieves static list information Retrieves static list information Returns a valid units string Returns the version information Returns the ATVApp object for Hetran Hides the UI Windows Returns a Boolean value determining whether the document is saved
Returns/sets a value that controls the visibilty of the UI Windows
15-21
Members of Class ATVApp Name
Member Type
Data Type
Description
Arrays
Property (Get)
Collection
Returns the collection of array data objects for input
CanRun
Property (Get)
Boolean
Returns a value determining whether the calculation can be executed
DisplayDrawing ExportToDXF
Sub Function
Boolean
HasResults
Property (Get)
Boolean
Returns a value indicating whether the results are present
IsComplete
Property (Get)
Boolean
Returns a value indicating whether the required data are inputted
Name Parent ResultArrays
Property (Get) Property (Get) Property (Get)
String Object Collection
Returns the name of the object Returns the parent object Returns the collection of array data objects for results
ResultScalars
Property (Get)
Collection
Returns the collection of scalar data objects for results
Run
Function
Long
Runs the calculation engine and returns the status
Run2
Function
Long
RunFinished Scalar
Event Property (Get)
Collection
Runs the calculation engine with the given run type, and returns the status Gets fired when the calculation is done Returns the collection of scalar data objects for input
UomSet
Property (Get/Let)
Collection
15-22
Displays the given drawing Exports drawings to AutoCAD DXF format file and returns True if successful
Returns or sets the units of measure set for the application
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Members of Class ATVScalar Name
Member Type
Data Type
Description
Category
Property (Get)
Long
Returns a value that indicates the data category
IsComplete
Property (Get)
Boolean
Returns a value that indicates whether the required data is inputted
IsEmpty Name Parent PQOrListType
Function Property (Get) Function (Get) Property (Get)
Boolean String Object String
Text Uom
Property (Get) Property (Get/Let)
String String
Value
Property (Get/Let)
Variant
Check to see if the data is empty Returns the name of the data object Returns the parent object Returns the physical quantity name if the data is a physical quantity, or the name of the list if the data is a static list. Returns a supplemental information Returns a string that represents the unit for a physical quantity data. Returns/sets a value for the data
Members of Class ATVArray Name
Member Type
Data Type
Description
Category
Property (Get)
Long
Returns a value that indicates the data category
Insert IsComplete
Sub Property (Get)
Boolean
IsElementEmpty IsEmpty Name Parent PQOrListType
Function Function Property (Get) Property (Get) Property (Get)
Boolean Boolean String Object String
Remove Text Uom
Sub Property (Get) Property (Get/Let)
String String
Values
Property (Get/Let)
Variant
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Insets an element in the array Returns a value that indicates whether the required data are inputted Check to see if the given element is empty Check to see if the whole array is empty Returns the name Returns the parent object Returns the physical quantity name if the data is a physical quantity, or the name of the list if the data is a static list. Removes an element from the array Returns a supplemental information Returns a string that represents the unit for a physical quantity data. Returns/sets a value for the given element
15-23
Member Descriptions Aerotran Method Gets a reference to an ATVApp object that represents the Aerotran application.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.Aerotran
Data Type
Object
Remarks:
This method is the same as the statement:
Set objAerotran = object.GetApp(“Aerotran”).
Arrays Property (Read-only) Gets a reference to the collection containing array data objects for input in an ATVApp object. Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.Arrays
Data Type
Collection
ATVApps Property (Read-only) Gets a reference to the collection containing the ATVApp objects in the BJACApp object.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.ATVApps
Data Type
Collection
In the ASPEN B-JAC object, an application object named “UTILITIES” is always loaded for the internal service purpose. This internal application object has no visual representation and will stay the BJACApp object as long as a document is loaded. Remarks:
15-24
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
CanRun Property (Read-only) Returns a Boolean value that determines whether or not the calculation engine can be executed. Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.CanRun
Data Type
Boolean
If the property ExecutionControlEnabled in the BJACApp object is True, the CanRun method will be controlled by the completion of the input. In this case, if the IsComplete method in the application object returns True, then the CanRun also is True. However, if the BJACApp.ExecutionControlEnabled is False, the CanRum always returns True. Remarks
Category Property (Read-only) Returns a long integer that determines the category for the data object. Applies To
ATVScalar Object, ATVArray Object
Syntax
object.Category
Data Type
Long
Remarks
The ASPEN B-JAC object has defined following seven constants for the data
category: Constant ATV_DATACATEGORY_PQ
Valu VB Data Description e Type 0 Single Physical quantities, such as temperature and pressure.
ATV_DATACATEGORY_LIST
1
Long
StaticList, such as TEAM Class. A StaticList data has a list of items from which the use can select one and the index of the item selected will be returned as the value of the data.
ATV_DATACATEGORY_NUM ATV_DATACATEGORY_STR ATV_DATACATEGORY_BOOL ATV_DATACATEGORY_VOC ATV_DATACATEGORY_MSG
2 3 4 5 6
Single String Boolean String String
Numeric number Character string Boolean data Vocabulary (internal use only) Message (internal use only)
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-25
DisplayDrawing Method Displays the given drawing.
Applies To Syntax
ATVApp Object
object.DisplayDrawing (hWndClient, DrawingID)
Parameters hWndClient
Long
DrawingID
Long
Required. A long value representing the handle of client window, on which the drawing will be displayed. Required. A long value representing the drawing to be displayed. See Drawing ID Definitions below for details.
Drawing ID Definitions ID 10 11 20 30 40 50 60 61 62 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 171 172 173 181 182 183 184 185 186 190 191 192 193 194 200
15-26
Description Hetran Outline ü Setting plan ü Material specifications Sectional Bundle layout Tubesheet layout ü Shell Shell A Shell B Shell cover Front head Rear head Floating head Bundle Baffles Flat covers Front tubesheet Rear tubesheet Expansion joint Gaskets A Gaskets B Gaskets C Body flanges A Body flanges B Body flanges C Body flanges D Body flanges E Body flanges F Vertical supports Bottom front supports Top front Supports Bottom rear Supports Top rear supports Weld details
Teams
Aerotran
ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü ü
ü
ü
Ensea
ü
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Example The following code shows how to display the Setting Plan drawing on a VB PictureBox control. To try this example, paste the code into the Declarations section of a form with a PictureBox control, Picture1, and two command bottoms, Command1 and Command2: Dim objBjac As Object Dim objApp As Object Private Sub Command1_Click() ' Displays a FileOpen dialog box and let ' user to select a BJAC document file ' Note: the BJAC document must contain Teams ' in order to test the drawing objBjac.FileOpen ' Releases the object first Set objApp = Nothing ' Gets a Teams reference If objApp Is Nothing Then Set objApp = Nothing Set objApp = objBjac.GetApp("Teams") If objApp is Nothing Then Beep MsgBox "The document doesn't contain Teams." & vbCrLf & _ "Please try a differnet file." Else ' Displays the setting plan ' Note: 11 is the drawing ID for setting plan objApp.DisplayDrawing Picture1.hWnd, 11 End If ' Displays the setting plan ' Note: 11 is the drawing ID for setting plan If Not objApp Is Nothing Then objApp.DisplayDrawing Picture1.hWnd, 11 End If End Sub Private Sub Command2_Click() Unload Me End Sub Private Sub Form_Load() ' Creates a BJAC object Set objBjac = CreateObject("BJACWIN.BJACApp") ' Checks the error If objBjac Is Nothing Then Beep MsgBox "Can't create BJAC object" Unload Me End If End Sub
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-27
Private Sub Form_Unload(Cancel As Integer) Set objApp = Nothing Set objBjac = Nothing End Sub Private Sub Picture1_Paint() ' Since the drawing doesn't get repainted automatically, ' we need to repaint. If Not objApp Is Nothing Then objApp.DisplayDrawing Picture1.hWnd, 11 End Sub
ExecutionControlEnabled Property Returns or sets a Boolean value that determines whether or not the program can take control of the calculation execution. When set to True, the input must be complete in order to execute the calculation engine. When set to False, the calculation engine can be launched at any time. Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.ExecutionControlEnabled [ = Boolean ]
Data Type
Boolean
ExportToDXF Method Exports the drawings to AutoCAD DXF format file and returns True if the function succeeds.
Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.ExportToDXF( [DrawingID][,DXFFileName])
Data Type
Boolean
Parameters DrawingID
DXFFileName
15-28
Long
String
Optional. A long value representing the drawing to be exported. If omitted, all the drawings in the object will be exported. For detailed definitions for DrawingID, see the DisplayDrawing method. Optional. A string value representing the filename drawing to be exported. If omitted, the current document file will be used. Note: If DrawingID is omitted, each drawing will be saved to a file with corresponding DrawingID appended to the DXFFileName.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
FileClose Method Closes the current open document.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.FileClose
Remarks
The FileClose method will close all of the application user interface windows associated with the open document and destroy all the objects associated with the document as well. Note: Prior to calling this method, you should release all the objects you have referenced in the code except the BJACApp object.
Example Dim objBjac As Object Dim obhApp As Object Dim objDat As Object . . . ‘ Gets a reference to the App object Set objApp = objBjac.ATVApps(“Aerotran”) ‘ Gets a reference to a data Set objDat = objApp.Arrays(“BJACDBSymbHS”) . . . ‘ Release the references prior to calling FileClose Set objApp = Nothing Set objDat = Nothing ‘ Call FileClose to destroy the document objBjac.Close . . .
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-29
FileExit Method Destroys all the objects in the BJACApp object.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.FileExit
Remarks
The FileExit method will perform following steps:
•
Close all of the application user interface windows associated with the open document if the necessary.
•
If there is no running BJACWIN.EXE prior to the BJAC object is created in your code, the FileExit method will also destroy the ASPEN B-JAC user interface main window.
Note 1) Prior to calling this method, you should release all the objects referenced in your code in the opposite sequence of referencing. 2) Instead of calling this method, you could simple use Set objBjac = Nothing in your code.
FileNew Method Creates a document and returns a Boolean value indicating whether or not the process succeeded.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.FileNew( [AppName])
Data Type
Boolean
Parameters AppName String
15-30
Optional. A string value representing the name of an application to be created. If omitted, the File New Dialog box appears and user can select one or more applications to create.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
FileOpen Method Opens an existing document from the disk and returns a Boolean value indicating whether or not the process succeeded.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.FileOpen( [Filename])
Data Type
Boolean
Parameters Filename String
Optional. A string value representing the name of an existing document file to be opened. If omitted, the standard Windows FileOpen Dialog box will be displayed to allow user to open any existing document.
FilePrint Method Prints the results for the document if results are present.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.FilePrint( [AppName], [PrintAll])
Parameters AppName String PrintAll
Boolean
Optional. A string value representing the name of an application to be printed. If omitted, every application will be printed. Optional. A Boolean value that determines whether or not to print all of the results. If False, then the Print Selection Dialog box appears and user can select the results to print.
FileSave Method Saves the current document file to a disk without changing the name and returns a Boolean value indicating whether or not the process succeeded.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.FileSave
Data Type
Boolean
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-31
FileSaveAs Method Saves a copy of the document to the disk using a different name or path and returns a Boolean value indicating whether or not the process succeeded.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.FileSaveAs( [Filename])
Data Type
Boolean
Parameters Filename String
Optional. A string value representing the full path name of the document to be saved. If omitted, the standard Windows FileSaveAs Dialog box appears and user will be able to specify the name through the dialog.
GetApp Method Returns a reference to the specified ATVApp object if succeeded or Nothing if failed.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.GetApp( Appname )
Data Type
Object
Parameters Appname String
Required. A string value representing the name of the application.
GetFileName Method Returns a string value representing the full path name of the open document.
Applies To Syntax
BJACApp Object
object.GetFileName
Data TypeString
15-32
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
GetFilePath Method Returns a string value representing the file path information.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.GetFilePath(Type )
Data Type
String
Parameters Type Long
Required. A Long value indicating the type of information to be retrieved. Accepted values are: 0 - The program installation folder name. 1 - Executable files folder name 2 - Help files folder name 5 - Current open document name 10 - Full path name for the static list database 11 - Full path name for the units of measurement database
GetListCollection Method Retrieves information from a static list and returns the number of items in the list if succeeded or 0 if failed.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.GetListCollection(ListName, ListItems, ListIndices )
Data Type
Long
Parameters ListName String ListItems
Collectio n ListIndices Collectio n
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Required. A string value representing the name of the static list to be retrieved Required. A collection to be used to store the items in the list. Required. A collection to be used to store the corresponding indices for the list
15-33
Example The following code shows how to retrieve the shell type list in the ASPEN B-JAC static list database: Dim Dim Dim Dim Dim . .
objBjac As Object ListItems As Collection ListInices As Collection nItems As Long I as Long .
nItems = objBjac.GetListCollection(“ShellType”,ListItems,ListIndices) For I = 1 to nItmes Debug.Print ListIndices(I),”,” ListItems(I) Next I . . . The code will print following results on the debug window: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9,
Program E – one pass shell F - two pass shell with long. baffle G - split flow H - double split flow J - divided flow (nozzles: 1 in, 2 out) K – kettle X – crossflow V - vapor belt J - divided flow (nozzles: 2 in, 1 out)
GetSize Method Returns the number of elements in the array data object.
Applies To
ATVArray Object
Syntax
object.GetSize
Data Type
Long
GetVersion Method Returns a string value representing the current version information of the program.
15-34
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.GetVersion
Data Type
String
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
HasResults Property (Read-only) Returns a Boolean value that indicates whether or not the results are present.
Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.HasResults
Data Type
Boolean
Hetran Method Gets a reference to an ATVApp object that represents the Hetran application.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.Hetran
Data Type
Object
Remarks
The following statements will have the same results:
Set objApp = objBjac.Hetran Set objApp = objBjac.GetApp(“Hetran”) Set objApp = objBjac.ATVApps(“Hetran”)
Hide Method Hides the ASPEN B-JAC user interface.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.Hide
Remarks
This is the same as if you use the statement: object.Visible = False
Insert Method Inserts an element into the array data object.
Applies To
ATVArray Object
Syntax
object.Insert(Data [,Index] )
Parameters Data Variant Index Long
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Required. A variant value to be assigned Optional. A Long value indicating where the new element should be inserted after. If omitted, the new element will be added to the last.
15-35
IsComplete Property (Read-only) Returns a Boolean value that indicates whether or not the required data are inputted.
Applies To
ATVApp Object, ATVArray Object, ATVScalar Object
Syntax
object.IsComplete
Data Type
Boolean
IsElementEmpty Method Returns a Boolean value that indicates whether or not an element in the array data is empty.
Applies To
ATVArray Object
Syntax
object.IsElementEmpty(Index )
Data Type
Boolean
Parameters Index Long
Required. A Long value indicating the element to be checked.
Remarks
Use this method to check an individual element in the array. Use the IsEmpty method to check the entire array.
IsEmpty Method Returns a Boolean value that indicates whether or not the data is empty.
Applies To
ATVArray, ATVSalar Object
Syntax
object.IsEmpty
Data Type
Boolean
Remarks
Use this method to check to see if the data is empty or not. For ATVArray objects, the return is True only if all of the elements in the array are empty.
IsSaved Property (Read-only) Returns a Boolean value that indicates whether or not the new changes made to the input of the open document have been saved.
15-36
Applies To
BJACApp, ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.IsSaved
Data Type
Boolean
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Language Property Returns or sets a Long value that determines the language used in the program.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.Language [ = Setting% ]
Data Type
Long
Remarks Currently, the APSEN B-JAC program has assigned following constants for language: Constant
Value
ATV_LANGUAGE_ENGLISH ATV_LANGUAGE_GERMAN ATV_LANGUAGE_SPANISH ATV_LANGUAGE_FRENCH ATV_LANGUAGE_ITALIAN ATV_LANGUAGE_CHINESE ATV_LANGUAGE_JAPANESE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Descriptio n English German Spanish French Italian Chinese Japanese
15-37
LoadApp Method Gets or creates an ATVApp object the specified application. It returns the reference to the object if the method succeeded or Nothing if failed.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.LoadApp( Appname )
Data Type
Object
Parameters Appname String
Required. A string value representing the name of the application.
Remarks The LoadApp method will create the object if the specified ATVApp object is available in the BJACApp object. If the object already exists, the method will act like the GetApp method. Minimize Method Minimize the ASPEN B-JAC user interface Windows
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.Minimize
Name Property (Read-only) Returns a string value representing the name of the object.
Applies To
ATVApp Object, ATVArray Object, ATVScalar Object
Syntax
object.Name
Data Type
String
Remarks
When used for an ATVApp object, it returns the name for the application, for example, Hetran. When used for an ATVArray object or ATVScalar object it returns the variable name associated with data.
15-38
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Parent Property (Read-only) Returns a reference to the parent object.
Applies To
ATVApp Object, ATVArray Object, ATVScalar Object
Syntax
object.Parent
Data Type
Object
Remarks
It returns a BJACApp object the ATVApp object, and returns an ATVApp object for the data objects.
PQOrListType Property (Read-only) Returns a string value that represents the name of the physical quantity or static list assigned to the data.
Applies To
ATVScalar Object, ATVArray Object
Syntax
object.PQOrListType
Data Type
String
Remarks
The PQOrListType property is used only for data that are physical quantities or lists. The property returns the name of the physical quantity or the list.
Example The following example shows how to access the PQOrListType property: Dim objHetran As ATVApp . . . ‘ For a PQ data Debug.Print objHetran.Scalars(“FlRaHS”).PQOrListType ‘ For a List data Debug.Print objHetran.Scalars(“ApplTypeHS”).PQOrListType . . . The result of these statements prints following string on the Debug Window: MassFlowrate ApplicationTypeHS
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-39
Remove Method Removes an element from an array data object.
Applies To
ATVArray Object
Syntax
object.Remove([Index] )
Parameters Index Long
Optional. A Long value indicating the element to be removed in the array. If omitted, the last element will be removed.
ResultArrays Property (Read-only) Gets a reference to the collection containing array data objects for results in an ATVApp object.
Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.ResultArrays
Data Type
Collection
ResultScalars Property (Read-only) Gets a reference to the collection containing scalar data objects for results in an ATVApp object.
Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.ResultScalars
Data Type
Collection
Run Method Launches the calculation engine to perform the calculation and returns a status. It returns 0 if the calculation succeeded and a none-zero error code to indicate an error if the calculation failed.
15-40
Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.Run
Data Type
Long
Remarks
See the error descriptions for error code.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Run2 Method Launches the calculation engine to perform the calculation and returns a status. It returns 0 if the calculation succeeded and a none-zero error code to indicate an error if the calculation failed.
Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.Run2([RunType] )
Data Type
Long
Parameters RunType Long
Optional. A Long value indicating the type of calculation to be performed. If omitted, the method will act as same as the Run method. Note: Currently only the Teams application has different run types as shown below: 1- Calculations + Cost + Drawings 2- Calculations only 3- Calculations + Cost 4- Calculations + Drawings
RunFinished Event Gets fired when the calculation finished successfully.
Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
Private Sub object_RunFinished
Example The following example shows how to implement the RunFinished method to catch the event when the calculation is done. ‘ Declarations Private objBjac as BJACApp Private WithEvents objAerotran as ATVApp ‘ you must use WithEvents . . . Private Sub MyMain( ) ‘ Create a BJACApp object, and open an Aerotran problem file . . . ‘ Get the Aerotran object, and run Aerotran Set objAerotran = objBjac.Aerotran objAerotran.Run End Sub Private Sub objAerotran_RunFinished() ‘ Add your code below. For example, retrieve some results . . . End Sub
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-41
Scalars Property (Read-only) Gets a reference to the collection containing scalar data objects for input in an ATVApp object.
Applies To
ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.Scalars
Data Type
Collection
Show Method Shows the ASPEN B-JAC user interface.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.Show
Remarks
This statement is equivalent to object.Visible = False
Text Property (Read-only) Returns supplemental information to the Value property of the data object.
Applies To
ATVArray Object, ATVScalar Object
Syntax
object.Text([Index] )
for ATVArray object
object.Text
for ATVScalar object
Parameters Index Long
Data Type
Optional. A Long value representing the element number in the array. If omitted, the first element is assigned.
String
Remarks
The Text property has no effect on the calculation, and is only used to store extra information to help understanding of the Value property. For example, for a data object representing a material, the Value property of the data object will be the material number assigned by the ASPEN B-JAC, and the Text property will contains the description for the material.
15-42
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Example The example below prints the value and its text of an ATVScalar object on the Debug Window: Private Sub ShowApplicationType( Byval objHetran As ATVApp ) Dim objAppType As ATVScalar ‘ Get a reference to application type in hot side Set objAppType = objHetran.Scalar(“ApplTypeHS”) ‘ Display the Value and Text in the Debug Window Debug.Print objAppType.Value, objAppType.Text End Sub
On the Debug Window, the results are: 1 Liquid, no phase change
Uom Property Returns or sets a String that represents the unit for a physical quantity data object.
Applies To
ATVArrayApp Object, ATVScalar Object
Syntax
object.Uom [=NewUnitString] )
Data Type
String
Remarks
If an invalid unit string is supplied, the unit string remains unchanged. Changing the unit string will not cause the value conversion.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-43
UomSet Property Returns or sets a units of measure used in the object.
Applies To
BJACApp Object, ATVApp Object
Syntax
object.UomSet [=NewSetting%] )
Data Type
Long
Remarks
The UomSet property accepts the following constants:
Constant ATV_UOMSET_US ATV_UOMSET_SI ATV_UOMSET_METRIC ATV_UOMSET_SET1 ATV_UOMSET_SET2 ATV_UOMSET_SET3
Value 1 2 3 4 5 6
Description US units set. Predefined in the program. SI units set. Predefined in the program METRIC units set. Predefined in the program. User units set. Customizable through the UI User units set. Customizable through the UI User units set. Customizable through the UI
When a new setting is assigned to a BJACApp object, the new setting makes no effect on the ATVApp objects that are created already. However, if a new setting is assigned to an ATVApp object, the entire object, including the contained data objects, or even the user interface window that represents the object, will be changed accordingly.
Value Property, Values Property Returns or sets a value to the data object.
Applies To
ATVArray Object, ATVScalar Object
Syntax
object.Values([Index],[Uom] ) for ATVArray object object.Value([Uom])
Parameters Index Long Uom
Data Type
15-44
String
for ATVScalar object
Optional. A Long value representing the element number in the array. If omitted, the first element is assigned. Optional. A String value representing the units of measure to be based or assigned if the data is a physical quantity. If omitted the current units of measure will be used. Note When the Uom parameter is used to returns a value, the data will be converted according to the Uom. However, if the Uom parameter is assigned the data object, the value of the data object will not be converted.
Variant
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Remarks
The Value or Values property is a variant type variable. Depending on the Category property, it uses different VB data types to represent the data, and assigns different undefined constants when the data is Empty, as shown in the following table:
Data Category ATV_DATACATEGORY_PQ ATV_DATACATEGORY_LIST
ATV_DATACATEGORY_NUM
VB Data Type Undefined Note Value Single 0 Used for physical quantities. It returns 0 if the data is empty. You should use the IsEmpty method to check to see if the data is empty. Long -30000 Used for StaticList. The Value property represents the index of an item in the list. The Text property stores the item. You must use a valid index number when you assign a value to the property. Single
ATV_DATACATEGORY_STR String ATV_DATACATEGORY_BOOL Boolean
0
User for numeric data except physical quantities. You should use the IsEmpty method to check the empty status.
“” False
The optional parameter Index is used only for an ATVArray object. It represents the element number in the array object. The optional parameter Uom is a string description for the units of measure, for example, kg/s for mass flow rate. You can use the Uom parameter to assign a new units of measure to the data, or returns a value based the specified Uom parameter. Example Dim objHetran As ATVApp Dim objArray As ATVArray Dim objScalar As ATVScalar Dim Buf As Single . . . ‘ Get the reference to the hot side flow rate Set objScalar = objHetran.Scalars(“FlRaHS”) ‘ Get the current value in kg/h no matter what units the data is ‘ actually using Buf = objScalar.Value(“kg/h”) ‘ Assign the 10000 lb/h to the data objScalar.Value(“lb/h”) = 10000.0 ‘ Now the data’s units is lb/h ‘ Get the reference to the specific heat for liquid cold side Set objArray = objHetran.Arrays(“SpHtLiqCS“) ‘ Gets the value of the element #1 in the current units Buf = objArray.Values(1) ‘ Assign a value to the element and change the units objArray.Values(1,”kJ/(kg*K)”) = 0.2 . . .
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
15-45
Visible Property Returns or set a Boolean value that determines the ASPEN B-JAC user interface is visible or hidden.
Applies To
BJACApp Object
Syntax
object.Visible [=NewSetting]
Data Type
Boolean
Error Descriptions Number -1 1000 1001 1002 1003 1004 1005 1006 1007 1008 1009 1010 1011 1012 1013 1014 1101 1102 1103 1104 1105 1106 1107 1108 1109 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116
15-46
Descriptions Input is incomplete An unknown error has occurred. Unknown security error occurred. Couldn't detect security key on your system. Couldn't detect HASP single-user security key on your system. Couldn't detect NetHASP key on your system or no active NetHASP server was found. License to run the program has expired. The program doesn't have enough BRUs to run. Couldn't read security key. Couldn't write to security key. The security key date or time has been changed. Failed to access NetHASP key. General security key error. Failed to access Aspen License Manager(ASPLM) or no active ASPLM was found. Number of stations that may run the application at the same time has been exceeded. No license was found to run the program. EXCEPTION_ACCESS_VIOLATION has occurred. EXCEPTION_BREAKPOINT has occurred. EXCEPTION_DATATYPE_MISALIGNMENT has occurred. EXCEPTION_SINGLE_STEP has occurred. EXCEPTION_ARRAY_BOUNDS_EXCEEDED has occurred. EXCEPTION_FLT_DENORMAL_OPERAND has occurred. EXCEPTION_FLT_DIVIDE_BY_ZERO has occurred. EXCEPTION_FLT_INEXACT_RESULT has occurred. EXCEPTION_FLT_INVALID_OPERATION has occurred. EXCEPTION_FLT_OVERFLOW has occurred. EXCEPTION_FLT_STACK_CHECK has occurred. EXCEPTION_FLT_UNDERFLOW has occurred. EXCEPTION_INT_DIVIDE_BY_ZERO has occurred. EXCEPTION_INT_OVERFLOW has occurred. EXCEPTION_PRIV_INSTRUCTION has occurred. EXCEPTION_NONCONTINUABLE_EXCEPTION has occurred.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Number 1200 1201 1300 1301 1400
Descriptions The file <$> contains an unrecognized format. Error occurred while accessing a file. Failed to load Aspen Properties Plus DLL. Error occurred while executing Aspen Properties Plus. Fatal error in Aspen Plus / BJAC interface
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
❖
❖
❖
15-47
15-48
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A
Appendix
A Appendix................................................................................................................................................................................................................1 Tubing ...........................................................................................................................................................................................3 Tube Wall Thickness..............................................................................................................................................................3 Tube Low Fin Information .....................................................................................................................................................4 Enhanced Surfaces Standard Sizes .........................................................................................................................................5 Pipe Properties...............................................................................................................................................................................7 ANSI Pipe Dimensions...........................................................................................................................................................7 DIN / ISO 4200 Pipe Dimensions ..........................................................................................................................................9 Standard Nozzle Flange Ratings...........................................................................................................................................10 Material Selection........................................................................................................................................................................11 Generic Materials List ..........................................................................................................................................................11 Gaskets – hot side.................................................................................................................................................................12 Gaskets – cold side...............................................................................................................................................................13 Corrosion Table....................................................................................................................................................................14 Baffle Cuts...................................................................................................................................................................................18 Single Segmental ..................................................................................................................................................................18 Double Segmental ................................................................................................................................................................18 Triple Segmental ..................................................................................................................................................................19 Asme Code Cases ........................................................................................................................................................................20 ASME Code Case 2278........................................................................................................................................................20 ASME Code Case 2290........................................................................................................................................................20 Technical References...................................................................................................................................................................22 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................................................................22 General .................................................................................................................................................................................23 Shell Side Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop ........................................................................................................................25 Tube Side Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop ........................................................................................................................31
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-1
A-2
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tubing Tube Wall Thickness B.W.G. Gauge
in
mm
28
0.014
0.36
27
0.016
0.41
26
0.018
0.46
25
0.20
0.51
24
0.22
0.56
23
0.25
0.64
22
0.028
0.71
21
0.032
0.81
20
0.035
0.89
19
0.042
1.07
18
0.049
1.24
17
0.058
1.47
16
0.065
1.65
15
0.072
1.83
14
0.083
2.11
13
j0.095
2.41
12
0.109
2.77
11
0.120
3.05
10
0.134
3.40
9
0.148
3.76
8
0.165
4.19
7
0.180
4.57
6
0.203
5.16
5
0.220
5.59
4
0.238
6.05
3
0.259
6.58
2
0.284
7.21
1
0.300
7.62
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-3
Tube Low Fin Information Standard fin outside diameters in.:
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
mm:
38
50
63
76
89
Program Default: Tube Outside Diameter + 0.75 in or 19.05 mm
Standard fin thickness integral or extruded: 0.012-0.025 in or 0.3-0.7 mm welded or wrapped: 0.025-0.165 in or 0.6-4 mm in:
0.031
0.036
0.049
0.059
mm:
0.8
0.9
1.2
1.5
Program Default: 0.23 in or 0.58 mm for tube O.D. less than 2 in or 50.8 0.36 in or 0.91 mm for tube O.D. greater than 2 in or 50.8 mm
A-4
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Enhanced Surfaces Standard Sizes The following are the standard available tube sizes that are available for indicated enhance surfaces. Manufacture-Type Tube OD, in Wolverine TURBO B MHT 1 3/4" OD 2 3/4" OD 3 3/4" OD 4 3/4" OD 7 1" OD Wolverine TURBO B LPD 5 3/4" OD 6 3/4" OD Wolverine TURBO C MHT 1 1" OD 2 3/4" OD 3 3/4" OD 4 3/4" OD Wolverine TURBO C LPD 5 3/4" OD Wolverine TURBO BII 1 3/4" OD 2 3/4" OD 3 3/4" OD Wolverine TURBO CII 1 3/4" OD 2 3/4" OD 3 3/4" OD Wolverine KORODENSE MHT Wolverine KORODENSE LPD 1 5/8" OD 2 5/8" OD 3 5/8" OD 4 5/8" OD 5 5/8" OD 6 5/8" OD 7 5/8" OD 8 3/4" OD 9 3/4" OD 10 3/4" OD 11 3/4" OD 12 3/4" OD 13 3/4" OD 14 3/4" OD 15 7/8" OD 16 7/8" OD 17 7/8" OD 18 7/8" OD 19 7/8" OD 20 7/8" OD 21 7/8" OD 22 1" OD 23 1" OD 24 1" OD 25 1" OD 26 1" OD
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
the
Wall Thk, in .051" .054" .059" .065" .053"
WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL
.051" WALL .057" WALL .052" .051" .054" .058"
WALL WALL WALL WALL
.051" WALL .049" WALL .051" WALL .058" WALL .047" WALL .050" WALL .056" WALL .020" .025" .032" .035" .042" .049" .065" .020" .025" .032" .035" .042" .049" .065" .020" .025" .032" .035" .042" .049" .065" .020" .025" .032" .035" .042"
WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL
A-5
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40
A-6
1" OD 1" OD 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/8" 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-1/4" 1-1/4"
OD OD OD OD OD OD OD OD OD OD OD OD
.049" .065" .025" .032" .035" .042" .049" .065" .025" .032" .035" .042" .049" .065"
WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL WALL
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Pipe Properties ANSI Pipe Dimensions ANSI Pipe Dimensions
Dimensions: in
Nom OD 0.75 1.0 1.25 1.5 2.0 2.5 3.0 3.5 4.0 5.0 Actual OD 1.050 1.315 1.660 1.900 2.375 2.875 3.500 4.000 4.500 5.563 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sch 5S | 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.065 0.083 0.083 0.083 0.083 0.109 Sch 10S |0.083 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.109 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.120 0.134 Sch 10 | Sch 20 | Sch 30 | Std | 0.113 0.133 0.140 0.145 0.154 0.203 0.216 0.226 0.237 0.258 Sch 40 | 0.113 0.133 0.140 0.145 0.154 0.203 0.216 0.226 0.237 0.258 Sch 60 | Ext Str | 0.154 0.179 0.191 0.200 0.218 0.276 0.300 0.318 0.337 0.375 Sch 80 | 0.154 0.179 0.191 0.200 0.218 0.276 0.300 0.318 0.337 0.375 Sch 100 | Sch 120 | 0.438 0.500 Sch 140 | Sch 160 | 0.219 0.250 0.250 0.281 0.344 0.375 0.438 0.531 0.625 XX Str | 0.308 0.358 0.382 0.400 0.436 0.552 0.600 0.750 0.864
ANSI Pipe Dimensions
Dimensions: in
Nom OD 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 Actual OD 6.625 8.625 10.75 12.75 14.0 16.0 18.0 20.0 22.0 24.0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sch 5S | 0.109 0.109 0.134 0.156 0.156 0.165 0.165 0.188 0.188 0.218 Sch 10S | 0.134 0.148 0.165 0.180 0.188 0.188 0.188 0.218 0.218 0.250 Sch 10 | 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.250 Sch 20 | 0.250 0.250 0.250 0.312 0.312 0.312 0.375 0.375 0.375 Sch 30 | 0.277 0.307 0.330 0.375 0.375 0.438 0.500 0.500 0.562 Std | 0.280 0.322 0.365 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 0.375 Sch 40 | 0.280 0.322 0.365 0.406 0.438 0.500 0.562 0.594 0.688 Sch 60 | 0.406 0.500 0.562 0.594 0.656 0.750 0.812 0.875 0.969 Ext Str | 0.432 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 0.500 Sch 80 | 0.432 0.500 0.594 0.688 0.750 0.844 0.938 1.031 1.125 1.218 Sch 100 | 0.594 0.719 0.844 0.938 1.031 1.156 1.281 1.375 1.531 Sch 120 | 0.562 0.719 0.844 1.000 1.094 1.219 1.375 1.500 1.625 1.812 Sch 140 | 0.812 1.000 1.125 1.250 1.438 1.562 1.750 1.875 2.062 Sch 160 | 0.719 0.906 1.125 1.312 1.406 1.594 1.781 1.969 2.125 2.344 XX Str | 0.864 0.875 1.000 1.000 -
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-7
ANSI Pipe Dimensions
Dimensions: mm
Nom OD 19 25 32 38 51 64 76 89 102 127 Actual OD 26.6 33.4 42.2 48.3 60.3 73.0 88.9 101.6 114.3 141.3 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sch 5S | 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.7 Sch 10S | 2.1 2.7 2.7 2.7 2.7 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.0 3.4 Sch 10 | Sch 20 | Sch 30 | Std | 3.4 3.6 3.7 3.9 5.2 5.5 5.7 6.0 6.6 Sch 40 | 2.8 3.4 3.6 3.7 3.9 5.2 5.5 5.7 6.0 6.6 Sch 60 | Ext Str | 3.9 4.5 4.9 5.1 5.5 7.0 7.6 8.1 8.6 9.5 Sch 80 | 3.9 4.5 4.9 5.1 5.5 7.0 7.6 8.1 8.6 9.5 Sch 100 | Sch 120 | 11.1 12.7 Sch 140 | Sch 160 | 5.5 6.4 6.4 7.1 8.7 9.5 11.1 13.5 15.9 XX Str | 7.8 9.1 9.7 10.2 11.1 14.0 15.2 16.2 17.1 19.1
ANSI Pipe Dimensions
Dimensions: mm
Nom OD 152 203 254 305 356 406 457 508 559 610 Actual OD 168.3 219.1 273.1 323.9 355.6 406.4 457.2 508.0 558.8 609.6 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Sch 5S | 2.7 2.7 3.4 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.8 4.8 5.5 Sch 10S | 3.4 3.7 4.1 4.5 4.8 4.8 4.8 5.5 5.5 6.3 Sch 10 | 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 6.3 Sch 20 | 7.9 7.9 7.9 9.5 9.5 9.5 Sch 30 | 7.0 7.8 8.4 9.5 9.5 11.1 12.7 12.7 14.3 Std | 7.1 8.2 9.3 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 9.5 Sch 40 | 7.1 8.2 9.3 10.3 11.1 12.7 14.3 15.1 17.5 Sch 60 | 10.3 12.7 14.3 15.1 16.7 19.1 20.6 22.2 24.6 Ext Str | 11.0 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 12.7 Sch 80 | 11.0 12.7 15.1 17.5 19.1 21.4 23.8 26.2 28.6 30.9 Sch 100 | 15.1 18.3 21.4 23.8 26.2 29.4 32.5 34.9 38.9 Sch 120 | 13.5 18.3 21.4 25.4 27.8 31.0 34.9 38.1 46.0 Sch 140 | 20.6 25.4 28.6 31.8 36.5 39.7 44.5 52.4 Sch 160 | 18.3 23.0 28.6 33.3 35.7 40.5 45.2 50.0 59.5 XX Str | 21.9 22.2 25.4 25.4 -
A-8
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
DIN / ISO 4200 Pipe Dimensions DIN / ISO 4200 Pipe Dimensions Nom OD Actual OD
Dimensions: mm
20
25
32
40
50
65
80
100
125
150
26.9
33.7
42.4
48.3
60.3
76.1
88.9
114.3
139.7
168.3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------Row A
|
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
Row B
|
-
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.3
Row C
|
-
-
-
-
2.3
2.6
2.9
2.9
3.2
3.2
Row D
|
1.8
2.0
2.3
2.3
2.3
2.6
2.9
3.2
3.6
4.0
Row E
|
2.0
2.3
2.6
2.9
2.9
2.9
3.2
3.6
4.0
4.5
Row F
|
3.2
3.2
3.6
3.6
4.0
5.0
5.6
6.3
6.3
7.1
Row G
|
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.0
5.6
7.1
8.0
8.8
10
11
DIN / ISO 4200 Pipe Dimensions
Dimensions: mm
Nom OD 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 600 700 800 Actual OD 219.1 273 323.9 355.6 406.4 457 508 610 711 813 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------Row A
|
2.0
2.0
2.6
2.6
2.6
3.2
3.2
3.2
4.0
4.0
Row B
|
2.6
3.6
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
5.0
5.6
6.3
7.1
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-9
Row C
|
3.6
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.0
5.0
5.6
6.3
7.1
8.0
Row D
|
4.5
5.0
5.6
5.6
6.3
6.3
6.3
6.3
7.1
8.0
Row E
|
6.3
6.3
7.1
8.0
8.8
10
11
12.5
14.2
16
Row F
|
8.0
10
10
11
12.5
14.2
16
17.5
20
22.2
Row G
| 12.5
14.2
16
17.5
20
22.2
25
30
32
36
Standard Nozzle Flange Ratings
A-10
ANSI: 50
300
400
600
900
1500
2500
ISO:
10
16
20
25
40
50
100
DIN:
10
16
25
40
63
100
160
250
320
400
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Material Selection Generic Materials List Abbrev
Material
CS
Carbon Steel
C½Mo
Low Alloy Steel C½Mo
½Cr½Mo
Low Alloy Steel ½Cr½Mo
Cr½Mo
Low Alloy Steel Cr½Mo
1¼Cr½Mo
Low Alloy Steel 1¼Cr½Mo
SS 304
High Alloy Steel Grade 304
SS 304L
High Alloy Steel Grade 304L
SS 316L
High Alloy Steel Grade 316L
SS 310S
High Alloy Steel Grade 310S
SS 347
High Alloy Steel Grade 347
SS 310S
High Alloy Steel Grade 310S
SS XM-27
High Alloy Steel Grade XM-27
SS 410
High Alloy Steel Grade 410
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-11
Abbrev
Material
NI 200
Nickel Alloy 200
NI 201
Nickel Low Carbon Alloy 201
Monel
Nickel Alloy 400 (Monel)
Inconel
Nickel Alloy 600 (Inconel)
NI 800
Nickel Alloy 800
NI 825
Nickel Alloy 825 (Incoloy 825)
Hast. B
Nickel Alloy B (Hastelloy B)
Hast. C
Nickel Alloy C (Hastelloy C)
Hast. G
Nickel Alloy G (Hastelloy G)
NI 20
Nickel Alloy 20 Cb (Carpenter 20)
Titanium
Titanium
Cu-Ni 70/30
Copper-Nickel 70/30 Alloy CDA 715
Cu-Ni 90/10
Copper-Nickel 90/10 Alloy CDA 706
Cu-Si
Copper-Silicon Alloy CDA 655
NavBrass
Naval Brass Alloy 464
AlBronze
Aluminum-Bronze Alloy 630
AlBrass
Aluminum-Brass Alloy 687
Admiralty
Admiralty Alloy 443
Tantalum
Tantalum
Zirconium
Zirconium
Gaskets – hot side Specify one of the following generic materials for the gaskets: • • • • • • • • •
A-12
compressed fiber flat metal jacketed fiber solid flat metal solid teflon graphite spiral wound ring joint self-energized elastomers
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Gaskets – cold side Specify one on the following generic gasket materials: • • • • • • • •
compressed fiber flat metal jacketed fiber solid flat metal solid teflon graphite spiral wound ring joint self-energized elastomers
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-13
Corrosion Table The following table is provided as a quick reference for acceptable materials of construction. The corrosion ratings are at a single temperature (usually 20 C) and a single concentration. A final decision on material selection should be based on operating temperature, actual concentration and galvanic action. A B C D
= = = =
Excellent Good Fair Not suitable
E = Explosive I = Ignites - = Information not available
The material abbreviations used in the table are as follows: CS Carbon steel Cu Copper Admi Admiralty CuSi Copper silicon CN90 Cupro-nickel 90-10 CN70 Cupro-nickel 70-30 SS304 Stainless steel 304 SS316 Stainless steel 316 Ni Nickel Monel Monel Inco Inconel Hast Hastelloy Ti Titanium Zr Zirconium Ta Tantalum Corrosion Table
CS
Cu
A D D A A D B A D C D
E D B A E D B A D C B
Corrosion Table
CS
Cu
Amyl acetate Aniline Aroclor Barium chloride Benzaldehyde Benzene Benzoic acid Boric acid Butadiene
B A B B B A D D A
A D A B B A B B A
Acetaldehyde Acetic acid Acetic anhydride Acetone Acetylene Aluminum chloride Aluminum hydroxide Ammonia (anhydrous) Ammonium chloride Ammonium sulfate Ammonium sulfite
A-14
Ad mi E D C A E D B A D C B
Cu Si E D B A E D B A D C B
CN 90 E C B A E D B A D C B
CN 70 E C B A E D B A D C B
SS SS Ni 304 316 A A A A A D B B B A A B A A A D D C B B B A A B B B B C C B C C D
Mo nel A A B A A B B A B A D
In co A B B A A D B B B B D
Ha st A A A B A A B B B B -
Ti
Zr
Ta
B A A A A A A A A A
A A A A A -
A A B A A A B A A A A
Ad mi A D A C B A B B A
Cu Si B D A B B A B B A
CN 90 A D A B B A B B A
CN 70 A D A B B A B B A
SS SS Ni 304 316 A A A A A B B B A B B B B B B B B B B B B A A B A A A
Mo nel A B A B B B B B A
In co A B A B B B B B A
Ha st B B A B A B B A A
Ti
Zr
Ta
A A A A A A A A A
A -
A A A A A A A A A
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Butane Butanol Butyl acetate Corrosion Table Butyl chloride Calcium chloride Calcium hydroxide Carbon dioxide(wet) Carb. tetrachloride Carbonic acid Chlorine gas (dry) Chloroform (dry) Chromic acid Citric acid Creosote Dibutylphthalate Corrosion Table Dichlorobenzene Dichlorofluorometh. Diethanolamine Diethyl etheride Diethylene glycol Diphenyl Diphenyl oxide Ethane Ethanolamine Ether Ethyl acetate (dry) Ethyl alcohol
A A A
A A B
A A B
A A B
A A B
A A B
CS
Cu
A B B C B C B B D D B A
A B B C B C B B D C B A
Ad mi A C B C B C B B D C B A
Cu Si A B B C B C B B D C B A
CN 90 A B B C B C B B D C B A
CN 70 A B B C B C B B D C B A
SS SS Ni 304 316 A A A C B A B B B A A A B B A B B B B B B B B A C B D C B B B B B B B B
CS
Cu
B A A B A B B A B B B B
B A B B B B B A B B B B
Ad mi B A B B B B B A B B B B
Cu Si B A B B B B B A B B B B
CN 90 B A B B B B B A B B B B
CN 70 B A B B B B B A B B B B
SS SS Ni 304 316 B B B A B B A A A B B B A A B B B B B B B A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A A B
A A B
A A A
A A B
A A A
A A B
A A A
-
A A A
Mo nel A A B A A C B A D B B B
In co A A B A A A A B B A B B
Ha st A B B A B A B B B C B B
Ti
Zr
Ta
A A A A A A I A B A A A
A A A A A A -
A A A A A A A A A A A A
Mo nel B B A B B B B A B B B B
In co B B A B B B B A B B B B
Ha st B A A B B B B A B B B A
Ti
Zr
Ta
B A A A A A A A B A A A
A
A A A A A A A A A A A A
A-15
Corrosion Table Ethyl ether Ethylene Ethylene glycol Fatty acids Ferric chloride Ferric sulfate Ferrous sulfate Formaldehyde Furfural Glycerine Hexane Hydrochloric acid Corrosion Table Hydrofluoric acid Iodine Isopropanol Lactic acid Linseed oil Lithium chloride Lithium hydroxide Magnesium chloride Magnesium hydroxide Magnesium sulfate Methane Methallyamine Corrosion Table Methyl alcohol Methyl chloride-dry Methylene chloride Monochlorobenzene M.dichl.difl.mehane Monoethanolamine Naptha Napthalene Nickel chloride Nickel sulfate Nitric acid Nitrous acid
A-16
CS
Cu
B A B D D D D D B A A D
B A B D D D B B B A A D
CS
Cu
D D A D A B B B B B A C
C D B B B B B B B B A B
CS
Cu
B A B B A B A A D D D D
B A B B A B B B B B D D
Ad mi B A B D D D B B B A A D
Cu Si B A B D D D B B B A A D
CN 90 B A B D D D B B B A A D
CN 70 B A B D D D B B B A A D
SS SS Ni 304 316 B B B A A A B B B D A B D D D B B D B B D B B B B B B A A A A A A D D D
Mo nel B A B C D D D B B A A D
In co B A B B D D D B B A A D
Ha st B A B A B A B B B A A B
Ti
Zr
Ta
A A A B A A A B A A A D
D D
A A A A A A A A A A A A
Ad mi D D B C B B B C B B A B
Cu Si D D B B B B B B B B A B
CN 90 D D B B B B B B B B A B
CN 70 C D B B B B B B B B A B
SS SS Ni 304 316 D D D D D D B B B B A B A A B B A A B B B B B A B B B A A B A A A B B B
Mo nel C D B C B A B B B B A C
In co D D B A B A B A B B A B
Ha st A B B A B A B A B A A B
Ti
Zr
Ta
D D A A A A A A A B
D A A A A -
D A A A A A A A B A A A
Ad mi B A B B A B B B B B D D
Cu Si B A B B A B B B B B D D
CN 90 B A B B A B B B B B D D
CN 70 B A B B A B B B B B D D
SS SS Ni 304 316 B B B A A B B B B B B A A A A B B B B B B A A A B B D B B B B B D B B D
Mo nel A B B A A B B A B B D D
In co B B B A A B B A D B D D
Ha st A B B B A B B A B D -
Ti
Zr
Ta
A A B B A B B A B A -
A A A B -
A A A A A A A A A A A A
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Corrosion Table Oleic acid Oxalic acid Perchloric acid-dry Perchloroethylene Phenoldehyde Phosphoric acid Phthalic anhydride Potassium bicarbon. Potassium carbonate Propylene glycol Pyridine Refrigerant 12 Corrosion Table Refrigerant 22 Seawater Silver chloride Silver nitrate Sodium acetate Sodium hydroxide Sodium nitrate Sodium sulfate Sulfur dioxide(dry) Sulfuric acid Toluene Trichlorethylene Corrosion Table Turpentine Vinyl chloride(dry) Water (fresh) Water (sea) Xylene Zinc chloride Zinc sulfate
CS
Cu
B D D A B D B B B B A A
B B D B B D B B B B B A
CS
Cu
A C D D D D B B B D A B
A B D D B D B B B D A B
CS
Cu
B A C C B D D
B B A B A D B
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Ad mi B B D B B D B B B B B A
Cu Si B B D B B D B B B B B A
CN 90 B B D B B D B B B B B A
CN 70 B B D B B D B A B B B A
SS SS Ni 304 316 B B A B B C B B D B B A B B B B B D B B B B B B B B B B B B B B B A B B
Mo nel A B D A A D B B B B B B
In co A B D A B B B B B B B B
Ha st B B A A B B B B B A
Ti
Zr
Ta
B D A A C A A A B A
B B D -
B A A A A B A A A A A A
Ad mi A A D D B D B B B D A B
Cu Si A B D D B D B B B D A B
CN 90 A A D D B D B B B D A B
CN 70 A A D D B D B B B D A B
SS SS Ni 304 316 A A A A A B D D D B B D B B B D D A A A B B A B B B B D D D A A A B B A
Mo nel A A D D B B B B B D A A
In co A B C B B B A B B D A B
Ha st A B B B B B B B B B A A
Ti
Zr
Ta
A A B A B B A A A D A A
A A B A A A
A A A A A D A A A A A A
Ad mi B C A A A D B
Cu Si B B A B A D B
CN 90 B B A A A D B
CN 70 B B A A A D B
SS SS Ni 304 316 B B B B A A A A A A A B A A A B B B B A B
Mo nel B A A A A A B
In co B A A B A D A
Ha st B A A B A B B
Ti
Zr
Ta
B A A A A A A
A A A A -
A A A A A A A
A-17
Baffle Cuts Single Segmental In all Aspen B-JAC programs, the single segmental baffle cut is always defined as the segment opening height expressed as a percentage of the shell inside diameter.
Typical baffle cut: 15% to 45%
Double Segmental In all Aspen B-JAC programs, the double segmental cut is always defined as the segment height of the innermost baffle window expressed as a percentage of the shell inside diameter. In the output, the baffle cut will be printed with the percent of the inner window / percent of one of the outer windows. The area cut away is approximately equal for each baffle.
Typical baffle cut: 20% to 42%
A-18
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Triple Segmental In all Aspen B-JAC programs, the triple segmental cut is always defined as the segment height of the innermost baffle window expressed as a percentage of the shell tube inside diameter. In the output, the baffle cut will be printed with the percent of the innermost window / percent of one intermediate window / percent of one outermost window. The area cut away is approximately equal for each baffle.
Typical baffle cut: 22% to 32%
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-19
Asme Code Cases ASME Code Case 2278 Alternative Method for Calculating Maximum Allowable Stresses Based on a Factor of 3.5 on Tensile Strength Section II and Section VIII Div. 1. Important items are:
•
These materials are the same as previously used. No chemical specifications have been changed.
•
Materials are limited to those listed in the tables in ASME-VIII Div.1 (for example, UCS-23).
•
The maximum permitted temperature for these materials are less than the original listings.
•
Only materials with both tensile strength and yield strength tables can be used (ASME Section II, Part D - if the materials are not listed on tables U and Y-1, they can not be used per code case 2278).
•
New figure provided for the calculation of the reduction in minimum design metal temperature without impact testing.
•
The allowable stress values are calculated from the tensile strength and the yield strength.
•
The application of this case is not recommended for gasketed joints or other applications where slight distortion can cause leakage or malfunction.
•
The hydrostatic test factor is reduced from 1.5 to 1.3.
•
All other code requirements apply (external pressure charts, etc.). When using code case 2278, no reference is made to this case when the program lists materials. It is recommended that you note the use of code case in you file headings description. You select the usage of code case 2278 as an input in the program options section.
ASME Code Case 2290 Alternative Maximum Allowable Stresses Based on a Factor of 3.5 on Tensile Strength Section I. Part D and Section VIII Division 1. Important items are:
A-20
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
•
These materials are the same as previously used. No chemical specifications have been changed.
•
The alternative maximum allowable stresses are listed in Table 1 of code case 2290 (same format as Section II, Part D materials).
•
New figure provided for the calculation of the reduction in minimum design metal temperature without impact testing.
•
The application of this case is not recommended for gasketed joints or other applications where slight distortion can cause leakage or malfunction.
•
The hydrostatic test factor is reduced from 1.5 to 1.3.
•
All other code requirements appl (external pressure charts, etc.). When using code case 2290, the program will access a new database in which all materials end with the characters '2290'. Therefore, the user and inspector will know what materials fall within this code case. This new database will be listed in the user's interface as 'ASME-2290'. All materials in the new database start from the B-JAC number 5000 (5000-5999). The new database filenames for the engine are AS2290P.PDA and NAS2290I.PDA. The user selects the usage of code case 2290 by selecting any available material in the 5000 series.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-21
Technical References Introduction Aspen B-JAC updates its programs with the best of the most recent correlations for heat transfer and pressure drop available from research and published literature sources. The references have been categorized into their applicable areas as follows: General Shell Side Heat Transfer & Pressure Drop • • •
No Phase Change Vaporization Condensation
Tube Side Heat Transfer & Pressure Drop • • •
No Phase Change Vaporization Condensation
Although AspenTech does not publish the exact formulas used in the program, we will gladly direct you to the correct source in the published literature pertaining to your question. AspenTech continually examines new correlations as they become available and incorporates them into the Aspen B-JAC program only after extensive evaluation. This evaluation includes comparisons of results between new and old correlations, field data from a multitude of units currently in service, and many years of design experience. Please do not request copies of references from AspenTech. Request for copies of articles should be made to : Engineering Societies Library 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 U. S. A.
A-22
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
General Perry's Chemical Engineers' Handbook, Sixth Edition, McGraw-Hill, 1984 General Discussion on Heat Transfer, Institution of Mechanical Engineers London, 1951 Practical Aspects of Heat Transfer, AIChE Technical Manual, 1976 Gas Engineers Handbook, C. George Segeler, Industrial Press, 1974 Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow Data Books, General Electric, 1984 Engineering Data Book, Gas Processors Suppliers Association, 1979 Standard Handbook of Engineering Calculations, Second Edition, Tyler G. Hicks, McGrawHill, 1985 Heat Exchanger Design Handbooks, Volumes 1-5, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1984 International Heat Transfer Conference Proceedings, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, Heat Transfer 1978, Toronto Heat Transfer 1982, Munich Heat Transfer 1986, San Francisco Heat Transfer 1990, Jerusalem AIChE Symposium Heat Transfer Series Seattle 82 Volume 64, 1968 Philadelphia 92 Volume 65, 1969 Minneapolis 102 Volume 66, 1970 Tulsa 118 Volume 68, 1972 Fundamentals 131 Volume 69, 1973 Research & Design 138 Volume 70, 1974 St. Louis 164 Volume 73, 1977 Research & Application 174 Volume 74, 1978 Seattle 225 Volume 79, 1983 Niagara Falls 236 Volume 80, 1984 Denver 245 Volume 81, 1985 Process Heat Transfer, Donald Q. Kern, McGraw-Hill, 1950 Compact Heat Exchangers, Third Edition, Kays & London, McGraw-Hill, 1984 Process Design for Reliable Operations, Norman P. Lieberman, Gulf Publishing Company, 1983 Heat Exchangers: Design and Theory Sourcebook, Afgan & Schlunder, McGraw Hill, 1974 Heat Exchangers Thermal-Hydraulic Fundamentals and Design, Kakac, Bergles & Mayinger, McGraw-Hill, 1981 Convective Boiling and Condensation, John G. Collier, McGraw-Hill, 1972 Industrial Heat Exchangers, A Basic Guide, G. Walker, McGraw-Hill, 1982
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-23
Heat Transfer, J.P. Holman, McGraw-Hill, 1981 Heat Transfer in Counterflow, Parallel Flow and Cross Flow, Helmuth Hausen, McGraw-Hill, 1983 Extended Surface Heat Transfer, D.O. Kern & A.D. Kraus, McGraw-Hill, 1972 Heat Exchangers, Theory and Practice, Taborek, Hewitt & Afgan, McGraw-Hill, 1983 Two-Phase Flow and Heat Transfer in the Power and Process Industries, Bergles, Collier, Delhaye, Hewitt & Mayinger, McGraw-Hill, 1981 Standards of Tubular Exchangers Manufacturers Association, Seventh Edition, TEMA, 1988 Wolverine Trufin Engineering Data Book, Wolverine Tube Division, 1967 Heat Transfer Pocket Handbook, Nicholas P. Cheremisinoff, Gulf Publishing Company, 1984 Fluid Flow Pocket Handbook, Nicholas P. Cheremisinoff, Gulf Publishing Company, 1984 Handbook of Chemical Engineering Calculations, Chopey & Hicks, McGraw-Hill, 1984 Heat Exchangers for Two-Phase Applications, ASME, HTD-Vol. 27, 1983 Reprints of AIChE Papers, 17th National Heat Transfer Conference, Salt Lake City, 1977 Standards for Power Plant Heat Exchangers, Heat Exchange Institute Inc., 1980 A Reappraisal of Shellside Flow in Heat Exchangers, ASME HTD-36, 1984 Shellside Waterflow Pressure Drop and Distribution in Industrial Size Test Heat Exchanger, Halle & Wambsganss, Argonne National Laboratory, 1983 Basic Aspects of Two Phase Flow and Heat Transfer, ASME, HTD-Vol. 34, 1984 ASME Heat Transfer Publications, 1979, 18th National Heat Transfer Conference, Condensation Heat Transfer, & Advances in Enhanced Heat Transfer Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers, Second Symposium, American Society for Metals, Houston, Texas, September, 1981 Two-Phase Heat Exchanger Symposium 23rd National Heat Transfer Conference, Denver, Colorado, HTD-Vol.44 August, 1985 Advances in Enhanced Heat Transfer 23rd National Heat Transfer Conference, Denver, Colorado, HTD-Vol.43 August, 1985 Heat Tranfer Equipment Design, R.K. Shah, Subbarao, and R.A. Mashelkar, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1988 Heat Transfer Design Methods, Edited by John J. McKetta, Marcel Dekker Inc., 1992 Boilers Evaporators & Condesers, Sadik Kakac, John Wiley & Sons Inc., 1991 Enhanced Boiling Heat Transfer, John R. Thome, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1990
A-24
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Handbook of Heat Transfer Applications Second Edition Editors W.M. Rohsenow, J.P. Hartnett and Ejup N. Ganic, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1985 Piping Handbook, Sixth Edition, Mobinder L. Nayyar, McGraw-Hill Inc., 1992 Practical Aspects of Heat Transfer, Proceedings of 1976 Fall Lecture Series of New Jersey-North Jersey Sections of AICHE, 1976. Air Cooled Heat Exchangers For General Refinery Services, API Standard 661 Second Edition, January 1978. ESCOA Fintube Manual, Chris W. Weierman, ESCOA Fintube Corporation Moore Fan Company Manual, Moore Fan Company, 1982. Heat Transfer: Research and Application, ed. John Chen, AIChE Symposium Series, No. 174, Vol. 74, 1978 Heat Transfer— Seattle 1983, Nayeem M. Farukhi, AIChE Symposium Series, No. 225, Vol. 79, 1983. Principles of Heat Transfer, Frank Kreith, International Textbook Company, 1958. Fundamentals of Heat Transfer, S. S. Kutateladze, Academic Press, 1963. NGPSA Engineering Data Book, Natural Gas Processors Suppliers Association, 1979. “Design of Air-Cooled Exchangers,” Robert Brown, Chemical Engineering, March 27, 1978. “Process Design Criteria,” V. Ganapathy, Chemical Engineering, March 27, 1978.
Shell Side Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop No Phase Change Stream Analysis Type Correlations Shell Side Characteristics of Shell and Tube Heat Exchangers, Townsend Tinker, ASME Paper No. 56-A-123. Exchanger Design Based on the Delaware Research Program, Kenneth J. Bell, PETRO/CHEM, October, 1960 Heat Exchanger Vibration Analysis, A. Devore, A. Brothman, and A. Horowitz, Practical Aspects of Heat Transfer, (Proceedings of 1976 Fall Lecture Series of New Jersey), AIChE
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-25
The Effect of Leakage Through the Longitudinal Baffle on the Performance of Two-Pass Shell Exchangers, T. Rozenman and J. Taborek AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer Tulsa 118, Volume 68, 1972 Patterns of Fluid Flow in a Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchanger, J.A. Perez and E.M. Sparrow, Heat Transfer Engineering, Volume 5 Numbers 3-4, 1984, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation Solution of Shell Side Flow Pressure Drop and Heat Transfer, Stream Analysis Method, J.W. Palen and Jerry Taborek, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer-Philadelphia 92, Volume 65, 1969 Shellside Waterflow Pressure Drop and Distribution in Industrial Size Test Heat Exchanger, H. Halle and M.W. Wambsganss, ANL-83-9 Argonne National Laboratory, 1983 A Reappraisal of Shellside Flow in Heat Exchangers, HTD-Vol. 36, ASME, 1984 Delaware Method for Shell Side Design, Kenneth J. Bell, Heat Exchangers ThermalHydraulic Fundamentals and Design, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1981
Low Fin Tube Correlations Handbook of Chemical Engineering Calculations, Nicholas P. Chopey and Tyler G. Hicks, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1984 Wolverine Trufin Engineering Data Book, Wolverine Division, UOP Inc. Fine-Fin Tubing Specifications, High Performance Tube Inc., 2MI/78
Transfer Rates at the Caloric Temperature Improved Exchanger Design, Riad G. Malek, Hydrocarbon Processing, May 1973 Process Heat Transfer, Donald Q. Kern, McGraw Hill Book Co., 1950 The Caloric Temperature Factor for a 1-2 Heat Exchanger with An Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient Varying Linearly with Tube Side Temperature, R.B. Bannerot and K.K. Mahajan, AIChE Symposium Series 174, Volume 74, Heat Transfer - Research and Applications, 1978
Grid Baffle Correlations The Energy-Saving NESTS Concept, Robert C. Boyer and Glennwood K. Pase, Heat Transfer Engineering, Vol. 2, Number 1, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, July-Sept. 1980 Thermal Design Method for Single-Phase RODBaffle Heat Exchangers, C.C. Gentry and W.M. Small, Phillips Petroleum Company, 1981
A-26
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
RODbaffle Exchanger Thermal-Hydraulic Predictive Models Over Expanded Baffle-Spacing and Reynolds Number Ranges, C. C. Gentry and W. M. Small, AIChE Symposium Series 245, Vol 81 Heat Transfer-Denver, 1985 RODbaffle Heat Exchanger Thermal-Hydraulic Predictive Methods for Bare and Low-Finned Tubes, C. C. Gentry, R. K. Young, W. M. Small, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer Niagara Falls 236, Volume 80, 1984
Phase Change - Natural and Forced Circulation Boiling Thermal Design of Horizontal Reboilers, James R. Fair and Abraham Klip, Chemical Engineering Progress, March 1983 Two-Phase Flow and Heat Transfer in the Power and Process Industries, A. E. Bergles, J. G. Collier, J. M. Delhaye, G. F. Hewitt, and F. Mayinger, McGraw-Hill, 1981 Circulation Boiling, Model for Analysis of Kettle and Internal Reboiler Performance, J. W. Palen and C. C. Yang, Heat Exchangers for Two-Phase Applications, ASME HTD-Vol 27, July 1983. A Prediction Method for Kettle Reboilers Performance, T. Brisbane, I. Grant and P. Whalley, ASME 80-HT-42 Nucleate Boiling: A Maximum Heat Flow Correlation for Corresponding States Liquids, C. B. Cobb and E. L. Par, Jr., AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer Philadelphia 92, Volume 65, 1969 Boiling Coefficients Outside Horizontal Plain and Finned Tubes, John E. Myers and Donald L. Katz, Refrigerating Engineering, January, 1952 Forced Crossflow Boiling in an Ideal In-Line Tube Bundle, G. T. Pooley, T. Ralston, and I. D. R. Grant, ASME 80-HT-40 Characteristics of Boiling Outside Large-Scale Horizontal Multitube Bundles, J. W. Palen, A. Yarden, and J. Taborek, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer - Tulsa 118, Volume 68, 1972 A Simple Method for Calculating the Recirculating Flow in Vertical Thermosyphon and Kettle Reboilers", P.B. Whalley and D. Butterworth, Heat Exchangers for Two-Phase Applications, ASME HTD-Vol.27, July 1983 Analysis of Performance of Full Bundle Submerged Boilers, By P. Payvar, Two-Phase Heat Exchanger Symposium, ASME HTD-Vol.44, August 1985 Enhanced Boiling Heat Transfer, Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1990
Phase Change - Condensation Handbook of Chemical Engineering Calculations, Nicholas P. Chopey and Tyler G. Hicks, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1984
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-27
Heat Transfer and Two-Phase Flow During Shell-Side Condensation, P. J. Marto, Heat Transfer Engineering, Vol. 5, Number 1-2, 1984 Process Heat Transfer, Donald Q. Kern, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1950 Design Parameters for Condensers and Reboilers, P. C. Lord, R. E. Minton and R. P. Slusser, Chemical Engineering, March 23, 1970 Condensation of Immiscible Mixtures, S. H. Bernhardt, J.J. Sheridan, and J. W. Westwater, AIChE Symposium Heat Transfer-Tulsa No. 118, Vol. 68, 1972 Design of Cooler Condensers for Mixtures of Vapor with Noncondensing Gases, A. P. Colburn and O. A. Hougen, Industrial and Engineering Chemistry, November 1939 Simplify Design of Partial Condensers, J. Starzewski, Hydrocarbon Processing, March 1981 Calculate Condenser Pressure Drop, John E. Diehl, Petroleum Refiner, October 1957 Two-Phase Pressure Drop for Horizontal Crossflow Through Tube Banks, J. E. Diehl and C. H. Unruh, Petroleum Refiner, October 1958 Mean Temperature Difference for Shell-And-Tube Heat Exchangers with Condensing on the Shell Side, Robert S. Burligame, Heat Transfer Engineering, Volume 5, Numbers 3-4, 1984 An Assessment of Design Methods for Condensation of Vapors from a Noncondensing Gas, J. M. McNaught, Heat Exchanger Theory and Practice, McGraw-Hill Book Co., 1983 A Multicomponent Film Model Incorporating a General Matrix Method of Solution to the Maxwell-Stefan Equations, AIChE Journal, Vol 22, March 1976 Modified Resistance Proration Method for Condensation of Vapor Mixtures, R. G. Sardesai, J. W. Palen, and J. Taborek, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer - Seattle 225, Volume 79, 1983 An Approximate Generalized Design Method for Multicomponent Partial Condensers, K. J. Bell and M. A. Ghaly, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer No. 131, Vol 69, 1973 Rating Shell-and-Tube Condensers by Stepwise Calculations, R. S. Kistler, A. E. Kassem, and J. M. Chenoweth, ASME 76-WA/HT-5, 1976 Two-Phase Flow on the Shell-Side of a Segmentally Baffled Shell-and-Tube Heat Exchanger, I. D. R. Grant and D. Chismolm, ASME 77-WA/HT-22, 1977 Shellside Flow in Horizontal Condensers, I. D. R. Grant, D. Chisholm, and C. D. Cotchin, ASME 80-HT-56, 1980 Critical Review of Correlations for Predicting Two-Phase Flow Pressure Drop Across Tube Banks, K. Ishihara, J. W. Palen, and J. Taborek, ASME 77-WA/HT-23 Design of Binary Vapor Condensers Using the Colburn-Drew Equations, B C. Price and K. J. Bell, AIChE Symposium Series No. 138, Volume 74, 1974 Theoretical Model for Condensation on Horizontal Integral-Fin Tubes, T.M. Rudy and R. L. Webb, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer Seattle 225, Volume 79, 1983
A-28
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Condensers: Basic Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, D. Butterworth, Heat Exchangers ThermalHydraulic Fundamentals and Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1981 Condensers: Thermohydraulic Design, D. Butterworth, Heat Exchangers Thermal-Hydraulic Fundamentals and Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1981
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-29
High Fin Heat Transfer & Pressure Drop “Fired Heaters,” Herbert L. Berman, Chemical Engineering, June 19, 1978. “Bond Resistance of Bimetalic Finned Tubes,” E.H. Young and D. E. Briggs, Chemical Engineering Progress, Vol. 61, No. 7, July 1965. “Efficiency of Extended Surface,” Karl A. Gardner, Transactions of the ASME, November, 1945. Heat Transfer 1978: Sixth International Heat Transfer Conference, Vol. 1-6 Washington, D. C., Hemisphere Publishing Corporation, 1978 “Pressure Drop of Air Flowing Across Triangular Pitch Banks of Finned Tubes,” K. Robinson and D. E. Briggs, Eighth National Heat Transfer Conference, Los Angeles, California, August, 1965. “Convective Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop of Air Flowing Across Triangular Pitch Banks of Finned Tubes,” D. E. Briggs and E. Young, Chemical Engineering Progress Symposium Series, No. 64, Vol. 62, 1966. “Tube Spacing in Finned-Tube Banks,” S. L. Jameson, Transactions of the ASME, Vol. 67, November 1945. “Pressure Drop of Air Flowing Across Triangular Pitch Banks of Finned Tubes,” K. Robinson and D. E. Briggs, Chemical Engineering Progress Symposium Series, No. 64, Vol. 62, 1966. ”Comparison of Performance of Inline and Staggered Banks of Tubes with Segmented Fins,” AIChE-ASME 15th National Heat Transfer Conference, San Francisco, 1975. “Efficiency of Extended Surfaces,“ Karl Gardner, Transactions of ASME, November 1945. “Thermal Contact Resistance in Finned Tubing,” Karl Gardner and T. C. Carnavos, Journal of Heat Transfer, November 1960. ESCOA Fintube Manual, Chris W. Weierman ESCOA Fintube Corporation.
A-30
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Tube Side Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop No Phase Change Process Heat Transfer, Donald Q. Kern, McGraw-Hill Book Co. 1950 Improved Exchanger Design, Transfer Rates at the Caloric Temperature, Riad G. Malek, Hydrocarbon Processing, May 1973 Heat Transfer Colburn-Factor Equation Spans All Fluid Flow Regimes, Bill L. Pierce, Chemical Engineering, December 17, 1979 An Improved Heat Transfer Correlation for Laminar Flow of High Prandtl Number Liquids in Horizontal Tubes, By J. W. Palen, and J. Taborek, AIChE Symposium Series Heat TransferDenver 245, Volume 81, 1985 The Caloric Temperature Factor for a 1-2 Heat Exchanger with an Overall Heat Transfer Coefficient Varying Linearly with Tube Side Temperature, P. B. Bannerot and K. K. Mahajan, AIChE Symposium Series 174, Volume 74, 1978 Turbulent Heat Transfer and Pressure Drop in Internally Finned Tubes, A. P. Watkinson, D. L. Miletti and P. Tarassoff, AIChE Symposium Series 131, Volume 69, 1973 The Computation of Flow in a Spirally Fluted Tube, A. Barba, G. Bergles, I. Demirdzic, A. D. Godman, and B. E. Lauder, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer-Seattle 225, Volume 79, 1983 Investigation of Heat Transer Inside Horizontal Tubes in the Laminar Flow Region, P. Buthod, University of Tulsa Report, 1959 Design Method for Tube-Side Laminar and Transition Flow Regime Heat Transfer With Effects of Natural Convection, 9th International Heat Transfer Conference, Open Forum Session, Jerusalem, Israel, 1990
Phase Change - Natural and Forced Circulation Boiling Simulated Performance of Refrigerant-22 Boiling Inside Tubes in a Four Tube Pass Shell and Tube Heat Exchanger, By John F. Pearson and Edwin H. Young, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer-Minneapolis 102, Volume 66, 1970 Heat Transfer to Boiling Refrigerants Flowing Inside a Plain Copper Tube, B. W. Rhee and E. H. Young, AIChE Symposium Series 138, Volume 70, 1974 An Improved Correlation for Predicting Two-Phase Flow Boiling Heat Transfer Coefficient in Horizontal and Vertical Tubes, S. G. Kandliker, Heat Exchanger for Two-Phase Applications, ASME HTD-Vol. 27, July 1983
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-31
A Simple Method for Calculating the Recirculating Flow in Vertical Thermosyphon and Kettle Reboilers, P. B. Whalley and D. Butterworth, Heat Exchangers for Two-Phase Applications, ASME HTD-Vol. 27, July 1983 Performance Prediction of Falling Film Evaporators, K.R. Chun and R. A. Seban, ASME 72 HT-48 Thermal Design of Horizontal Reboilers, James R. Fair and Abraham Klip, Chemical Engineering Progress, March 1983 What You Need To Design Thermosiphon Reboilers, J. R. Fair, Petroleum Refiner, February 1960 Vaporizer and Reboiler Design Part 1, James R. Fair, Chemical Engineering, July 8, 1963 Vaporizer and Reboiler Design Part 2, James R. Fair, Chemical Engineering, August 5, 1963 Mist Flow in Thermosiphon Reboilers, J. W. Palen, C.C. Shih and J. Taborek, Chemical Engineering Progress, July 1982 A Computer Design Method for Vertical Thermosyphon, N. V. L. S. Sarma, P. J. Reddy, and P.S. Murti, Industrial Engineering Chemistry Process Design Development, Vol. 12, No. 3, 1973 Designing Thermosiphon Reboilers, G. A. Hughmark, Chemical Engineering Progress, Vol. 65, No. 7, July 1969 Design of Falling Film Absorbers, G. Guerrell and C. J. King, Hydrocarbon Processing, January 1974 Heat Transfer to Evaporating Liquid Films, K. R. Chun and R. A. Seban ASME 71-HT-H Performance of Falling Film Evaporators, F. R. Whitt, British Chemical Engineering, December 1966, Vol. 11, No. 12 Selecting Evaporators, D. K. Mehra, Chemical Engineering, February 1986 Heat Transfer in Condensation Boiling, Karl Stephan, Springer-Verlag, 1988 Flow Boiling Heat Transfer in Vertical Tubes Correlated by Asympotic Model, Dieter Steiner and Jerry Taborek, Heat Transfer Engineering Vol. No. 2, 1992
A-32
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
Phase Change - Condensation Flooding Velocity Correlation for Gas-Liquid Counterflow in Vertical Tubes, J. E. Diehl and C. R. Koppany, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer-Philadelphia 92, Volume 65, 1969 Interpretation of Horizontal In-Tube Condensation Heat Transfer Correlations with a TwoPhase Flow Regime Map, K. J. Bell, J. Taborek, and F. Fenoglio, AIChE Symposium Series Heat Transfer-Minneapolis 102, Volume 66, 1970 Filmwise Condensation of Light Hydrocarbons and Their Mixtures in a Vertical Reflux Condenser, L. D. Clements and C. P. Colver, AIChE Symposium Series 131, Volume 69, 1973 Prediction of Horizontal Tubeside Condensation of Pure Components Using Flow Regime Criteria, G. Breber, J. Palen & J. Taborek, ASME Condensation Heat Transfer, August 1979 Prediction of Flow Regimes in Horizontal Tubeside Condensation, J. Palen, G. Breber, and J. Taborek, AIChE 17th National Heat Transfer Conference Salt Lake City, Utah, August 1977 Condensers: Basic Heat Transfer and Fluid Flow, D. Butterworth, Heat Exchangers ThermalHydraulic Fundamentals and Design, McGraw-Hill Book Company, 1981 Prediction of Horizontal Tubeside Condensation Using Flow Regime Criteria, Condensation Heat Transfer, National Heat Transfer Conference, San Diego, 1979, ASME 1979
Vibration Analysis Natural Frequencies and Damping of Tubes on Multiple Supports, R. L. Lowery and P.M. Moretti, AIChE Symposium Series 174, Volume 74, 1978 Tube Vibrations in Shell-And-Tube Heat Exchangers, J. M. Chenoweth and R. S. Kistler, AIChE Symposium Series 174, Volume 74, 1978 Critical Review of the Literature and Research on Flow-Induced Vibrations in Heat Exchangers, P.M. Moretti, AIChE Symposium Series 138, Volume 70, 1974 Vibration in Heat Exchangers, Franz Mayinger and H. G. Gross, Heat Exchangers ThermalHydraulic Fundamentals and Design, McGraw Hill Book Company, 1981 Predict Exchanger Tube Damage, J. T. Thorngren, Hydrocarbon Processing, April 1970 Flow-Induced Tube Vibration Tests of Typical Indstrial Heat Exchanger Configurations, H. Halle, J. M. Chenoweth and M. W. Wambsganss, ASME 81-DET-37
Fans Moore Fan Company Manual, Moore Fan Company, 1982. “Specifying and Rating Fans,” John Glass, Chemical Engineering, March 27, 1978.
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide
A-33
❖
A-34
❖
❖
❖
Aspen B-JAC 11.1 User Guide